Last updated on November 13th, 2024 at 04:09 pm
Title 40—Protection of Environment–Volume 22
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (CONTINUED)
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS (CONTINUED)
PART 85—CONTROL OF AIR POLLUTION FROM MOBILE SOURCES
Subparts A-E [Reserved]
Subpart F—Exemption of Clean Alternative Fuel Conversions From Tampering Prohibition
§ 85.501 General applicability.
(a) This subpart describes the provisions related to an exemption from the tampering prohibition in Clean Air Act section 203(a) (42 U.S.C. 7522(a)) for light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, medium-duty passenger vehicles, heavy-duty vehicles, and heavy-duty engines. This subpart F does not apply for highway motorcycles or for nonroad or stationary engines or equipment.
(b) For purposes of this subpart, the term “you” generally means a clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturer, which may also be called “conversion manufacturer” or “converter”.
§ 85.502 Definitions.
The definitions in this section apply to this subpart. All terms that are not defined in this subpart have the meaning given in 40 CFR part 86. All terms that are not defined in this subpart or in 40 CFR part 86 have the meaning given in the Clean Air Act. The definitions follow:
Clean alternative fuel conversion (or “fuel conversion” or “conversion system”) means any alteration of a motor vehicle/engine, its fueling system, or the integration of these systems, that allows the vehicle/engine to operate on a fuel or power source different from the fuel or power source for which the vehicle/engine was originally certified; and that is designed, constructed, and applied consistent with good engineering judgment and in accordance with all applicable regulations. A clean alternative fuel conversion also means the components, design, and instructions to perform this alteration.
Clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturer (or “conversion manufacturer” or “converter”) means any person that manufactures, assembles, sells, imports, or installs a motor vehicle/engine fuel conversion for the purpose of use of a clean alternative fuel.
Conversion model year means the clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturer’s annual production period which includes January 1 of such calendar year. A specific model year may not include January 1 from the previous year or the following year. This is based on the expectation that production periods generally run on consistent schedules from year to year. Conversion model years may not circumvent or skip an annual production period. The term conversion model year means the calendar year if the converter does not have a different annual production period.
Date of conversion means the date on which the clean alternative fuel conversion system is fully installed and operable.
Dedicated vehicle/engine means any vehicle/engine engineered and designed to be operated using a single fuel.
Dual-fuel vehicle/engine means any vehicle/engine engineered and designed to be operated on two or more different fuels, but not on a mixture of the fuels.
Heavy-duty engines describes all engines intended for use in heavy-duty vehicles, covered under the applicability of 40 CFR part 86, subpart A.
Light-duty and heavy-duty chassis certified vehicles describes all light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, medium duty passenger vehicles, and heavy-duty complete and incomplete vehicles covered under the applicability of 40 CFR part 86, subpart S.
Mixed-fuel vehicle/engine means any vehicle/engine engineered and designed to be operated on the original fuel(s), alternative fuel(s), or a mixture of two or more fuels that are combusted together. Mixed-fuel vehicles/engines include flexible-fuel vehicles/engines as defined in 40 CFR part 86 subpart S.
Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) means the original manufacturer of the new vehicle/engine or relating to the vehicle/engine in its original certified configuration.
Original model year means the model year in which a vehicle/engine was originally certified by the original equipment manufacturer, as noted on the certificate and on the emission control information label.
We (us, our) means the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency or any authorized representative.
§ 85.505 Overview.
(a) You are exempted from the tampering prohibition in Clean Air Act section 203(a)(3) (42 U.S.C. 7522)(a)(3) (“tampering”) if you satisfy all the provisions of this subpart.
(b) The tampering exemption provisions described in this subpart are differentiated based on the age of the vehicle/engine at the point of conversion as follows:
(1) “New and relatively new” refers to a vehicle/engine where the date of conversion is in a calendar year that is not more than one year after the original model year. See § 85.510 for provisions that apply specifically to new and relatively new vehicles/engines.
(2) “Intermediate age” refers to a vehicle/engine that has not exceeded the useful life (in years, miles, or hours of operation) applicable to the vehicle/engine as originally certified, excluding new and relatively new vehicles/engines. See § 85.515 for provisions that apply specifically to intermediate-age vehicles/engines.
(3) “Outside useful life” refers to any vehicle/engine that has exceeded the useful life (in years, miles, or hours of operation) applicable to the vehicle/engine as originally certified. See § 85.520 for provisions that apply specifically to outside useful life vehicles/engines.
(c) If the converted vehicle/engine is a dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicle/engine, you must submit test data using each type of fuel, except that if you wish to certify to the same standards as the OEM vehicle/engine, you may omit testing for the fuel originally used to certify the vehicle/engine if you comply with § 85.510(b)(10)(ii), (iii), and (iv), § 85.515(b)(10)(iii)(B), (C), and (D), or § 85.520(b)(6)(iii)(B), (C), and (D), as applicable.
(d) This subpart specifies certain reporting requirements. We may ask you to give us more information than we specify in this subpart to determine whether your vehicles/engines conform to the requirements of this subpart. We may ask you to give us less information or do less testing than we specify in this subpart.
(e) EPA may require converters to submit vehicles/engines for EPA testing under any of the three age based programs. Under § 85.510 or § 85.515, if a vehicle/engine is selected for confirmatory testing as part of the demonstration and notification process, the vehicle/engines must satisfy the applicable intermediate and full useful life standards using the appropriate deterioration factors to qualify for an exemption from the tampering prohibition. If an outside useful life vehicle/engine is selected for testing, the vehicle/engine must demonstrate that emissions are maintained or improved upon after conversion to qualify for an exemption from the tampering prohibition.
(f) If you have previously used small volume conversion manufacturer or qualified small volume test group/engine family procedures and you may exceed the volume thresholds using the sum described in § 85.535(f) to determine small volume status in 40 CFR 86.1838-01 or 1036.150(d), as appropriate, you must satisfy the requirements for conversion manufacturers who do not qualify for small volume exemptions or your exemption from tampering is no longer valid.
(g) An exemption from the prohibition on tampering applies to previously issued alternative fuel conversion certificates of conformity for the applicable conversion test group/engine family and/or evaporative/refueling family, as long as the conditions under which the certificate was issued remain unchanged, such as small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test group/engine family status. Your exemption from tampering is valid only if the conversion is installed on the OEM test groups/engine families and/or evaporative emissions/refueling families listed on the certificate.
(h) The applicable useful life of a clean alternative fuel converted vehicle/engine shall end at the same time the OEM vehicle’s/engine’s original useful life ends.
§ 85.510 Exemption provisions for new and relatively new vehicles/engines.
(a) You are exempted from the tampering prohibition with respect to new and relatively new vehicles/engines if you certify the conversion system to the emission standards specified in § 85.525 as described in paragraph (b) in this section; you meet the labeling and packaging requirements in § 85.530 before you sell, import or otherwise facilitate the use of a clean alternative fuel conversion system; and you meet the liability, recordkeeping, and end of year reporting requirements in § 85.535.
(b) Certification under this section must be based on the certification procedures such as those specified in 40 CFR part 86, subparts A, B, and S, and 40 CFR part 1065, as applicable, subject to the following exceptions and special provisions:
(1) Test groups and evaporative/refueling families for light-duty and heavy-duty chassis certified vehicles.
(i) Small volume conversion manufacturers and qualified small volume test groups.
(A) If criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test groups are met as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01, you may combine light-duty vehicles or heavy-duty vehicles which can be chassis certified under 40 CFR part 86, subpart S using good engineering judgment into conversion test groups if the following criteria are satisfied instead of those specified in 40 CFR 86.1827-01.
(1) Same OEM and OEM model year.
(2) Same OBD group.
(3) Same vehicle classification (e.g., light-duty vehicle, heavy-duty vehicle).
(4) Engine displacement is within 15% of largest displacement or 50 CID, whichever is larger.
(5) Same number of cylinders or combustion chambers.
(6) Same arrangement of cylinders or combustion chambers (e.g., in-line, v-shaped).
(7) Same combustion cycle (e.g., two stroke, four stroke, Otto-cycle, diesel-cycle).
(8) Same engine type (e.g., piston, rotary, turbine, air cooled vs. water cooled).
(9) Same OEM fuel type (except otherwise similar gasoline and E85 flexible-fuel vehicles may be combined into dedicated alternative fuel vehicles).
(10) Same fuel metering system (e.g., throttle body injection vs. port injection).
(11) Same catalyst construction (e.g., metal vs. ceramic substrate).
(12) All converted vehicles are subject to the most stringent emission standards used in certifying the OEM test groups within the conversion test group.
(B) EPA-established scaled assigned deterioration factors for both exhaust and evaporative emissions may be used for vehicles with over 10,000 miles if the criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test groups are met as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01. This deterioration factor will be adjusted according to vehicle or engine miles of operation. The deterioration factor is intended to predict the vehicle’s emission levels at the end of the useful life. EPA may adjust these scaled assigned deterioration factors if we find the rate of deterioration non-constant or if the rate differs by fuel type.
(C) As part of the conversion system description provided in the application for certification, conversion manufacturers using EPA assigned deterioration factors must present detailed information to confirm the durability of all relevant new and existing components and to explain why the conversion system will not harm the emission control system or degrade the emissions.
(ii) Conversion evaporative/refueling families are identical to the OEM evaporative/refueling families unless the OEM evaporative emission system is no longer functionally necessary. You must create any new evaporative families according to 40 CFR 86.1821-01.
(2) Engine families and evaporative/refueling families for heavy-duty engines.
(i) Small volume conversion manufacturers and qualified small volume heavy-duty engine families.
(A) If criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume engine families are met as defined in 40 CFR 1036.150(d), you may combine heavy-duty engines using good engineering judgment into conversion engine families if the following criteria are satisfied instead of those specified in 40 CFR 1036.230.
(1) Same OEM.
(2) Same OBD group after MY 2013.
(3) Same service class (e.g., light heavy-duty diesel engines, medium heavy-duty diesel engines, heavy heavy-duty diesel engines).
(4) Engine displacement is within 15% of largest displacement or 50 CID, whichever is larger.
(5) Same number of cylinders.
(6) Same arrangement of cylinders.
(7) Same combustion cycle.
(8) Same method of air aspiration.
(9) Same fuel type (e.g., diesel/gasoline).
(10) Same fuel metering system (e.g., mechanical direct or electronic direct injection).
(11) Same catalyst/filter construction (e.g., metal vs. ceramic substrate).
(12) All converted engines are subject to the most stringent emission standards. For example, 2005 and 2007 heavy-duty diesel engines may be in the same family if they meet the most stringent (2007) standards.
(13) Same emission control technology (e.g., internal or external EGR).
(B) EPA-established scaled assigned deterioration factors for both exhaust and evaporative emissions may be used for engines with over 10,000 miles if the criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume engine families are met as defined in 40 CFR 1036.150(d). This deterioration factor will be adjusted according to vehicle or engine miles of operation. The deterioration factor is intended to predict the engine’s emission levels at the end of the useful life. EPA may adjust these scaled assigned deterioration factors if we find the rate of deterioration non-constant or if the rate differs by fuel type.
(C) As part of the conversion system description provided in the application for certification, conversion manufacturers using EPA assigned deterioration factors must present detailed information to confirm the durability of all relevant new and existing components and to explain why the conversion system will not harm the emission control system or degrade the emissions.
(ii) Conversion evaporative/refueling families are identical to the OEM evaporative/refueling families unless the OEM evaporative emission system is no longer functionally necessary. You must create any new evaporative families according to 40 CFR 86.1821.
(3) Conversion test groups/engine families for small volume conversion manufacturers and qualified small volume test groups/engine families may include vehicles/engines that are subject to different OEM emission standards; however, all the vehicles/engines certified under this subpart in a single conversion test group/engine family are subject to the most stringent standards that apply for vehicles/engines included in the conversion test group/engine family. For example, if OEM vehicle test groups originally certified to Tier 2, Bin 4 and Bin 5 standards are in the same conversion test group for purposes of fuel conversion, all the vehicles certified in the conversion test group under this subpart are subject to the Tier 2, Bin 4 standards. Conversion manufacturers may choose to certify a conversion test group/engine family to a more stringent standard than the OEM did. The optional, more stringent standard would then apply to all OEM test groups/engine families within the conversion test group/engine family. This paragraph (b)(3) does not apply to conversions to dual-fuel/mixed-fuel vehicles/engines, as provided in paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
(4)-(5) [Reserved]
(6) Durability testing is required unless the criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test groups/engine families are met as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01 or 1036.150(d), as applicable.
(7) Conversion test groups/engine families for conversions to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicles/engines cannot include vehicles/engines subject to different emission standards unless applicable exhaust and OBD demonstrations are also conducted for the original fuel(s) demonstrating compliance with the most stringent standard represented in the test group. However, for small volume conversion manufacturers and qualified small volume test groups/engine families the data generated from exhaust emission testing on the new fuel for dual-fuel or mixed-fuel test vehicles/engines may be carried over to vehicles/engines which otherwise meet the test group/engine family criteria and for which the test vehicle/engine data demonstrate compliance with the application vehicle/engine standard. Clean alternative fuel conversion evaporative families for dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicles may not include vehicles/engines which were originally certified to different evaporative emissions standards unless evaporative/refueling demonstrations are also conducted for the original fuel(s) demonstrating compliance with the most stringent standard represented in the evaporative/refueling family.
(8) The vehicle/engine selected for testing must qualify as a worst-case vehicle/engine under 40 CFR 86.1828-01 or 1036.235(a)(2), as applicable.
(9) The following requirements apply for OBD systems:
(i) The OBD system must properly detect and identify malfunctions in all monitored emission-related powertrain systems or components including any new monitoring capability necessary to identify potential emission problems associated with the new fuel.
(ii) Conduct OBD testing as needed to demonstrate that the vehicle/engine continues to comply with emission thresholds and other requirements that apply based on the original certification.
(iii) Submit the applicable OBD reporting information for vehicles as set forth in 40 CFR 86.1806-17. Submit the applicable OBD reporting information for engines as set forth in 40 CFR 86.010-18 or 1036.110, as appropriate. Submit the following statement of compliance if the OEM vehicles/engines were required to be OBD-equipped:
The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel has fully functional OBD systems and therefore meets the OBD requirements specified in [40 CFR part 86 or part 1036, as applicable] when operating on the alternative fuel.
(10) In lieu of specific certification test data, you may submit the following attestations for the appropriate statements of compliance, if you have sufficient basis to prove the statement is valid.
(i) The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel has properly exercised the optional and applicable statements of compliance or waivers in the certification regulations. Attest to each statement or waiver in your application for certification.
(ii) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation retains all the OEM fuel system, engine calibration, and emission control system functionality when operating on the fuel with which the vehicle/engine was originally certified.
(iii) The test group/engine family converted to dual fuel or mixed-fuel operation retains all the functionality of the OEM OBD system (if so equipped) when operating on the fuel with which the vehicle/engine was originally certified.
(iv) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation properly purges hydrocarbon vapor from the evaporative emission canister when the vehicle/engine is operating on the alternative fuel.
(11) Certification fees apply as described in 40 CFR part 1027.
(12) A certificate issued under this section is valid starting with the indicated effective date and expires on December 31 of the conversion model year for which it is issued. You may apply for a certificate of conformity for the next conversion model year using the applicable provisions for carryover certification. Even after the certificate expires, your exemption from the prohibition on tampering remains valid for the applicable conversion test group/engine family and/or evaporative/refueling family, as long as the conditions under which the certificate was issued remain unchanged, such as small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test group/engine family status. Your exemption from tampering is valid only if the conversion is installed on the OEM test groups/engine families and/or evaporative emissions/refueling families listed on the certificate. For example, if you have received a clean alternative fuel conversion certificate of conformity in conversion model year 2011 for converting a 2010 model year OEM test group/evaporative/refueling family, your exemption from tampering continues to apply for the conversion of the same 2010 model year OEM test group/evaporative/refueling family as long as the conditions under which the certificate was issued remain unchanged, such as small volume manufacturer status.
(13) Conversion systems must be properly installed and adjusted such that the vehicle/engine operates consistent with the principles of good engineering judgment and in accordance with all applicable regulations.
§ 85.515 Exemption provisions for intermediate age vehicles/engines.
(a) You are exempted from the tampering prohibition with respect to intermediate age vehicles/engines if you properly test, document and notify EPA that the conversion system complies with the emission standards specified in § 85.525 as described in paragraph (b) of this section; you meet the labeling requirements in § 85.530 before you sell, import or otherwise facilitate the use of a clean alternative fuel conversion system; and you meet the liability, recordkeeping, and end of year reporting requirements in § 85.535. You may also meet the requirements under this section by complying with the requirements in § 85.510.
(b) Documenting and notifying EPA under this section includes demonstrating compliance with all the provisions in this section and providing all notification information to EPA. You may notify us as described in this section instead of certifying the clean alternative fuel conversion system. You must demonstrate compliance with all exhaust and evaporative emissions standards by conducting all exhaust and evaporative emissions and durability testing as required for OEM certification subject to the exceptions and special provisions permitted in § 85.510. This paragraph (b) provides additional special provisions applicable to intermediate age vehicles/engines. Paragraph (b) is applicable to all conversion manufacturers unless otherwise specified.
(1) Conversion test groups for light-duty and heavy-duty chassis certified vehicles may be grouped together into an exhaust conversion test group using the criteria described in § 85.510(b)(1)(i)(A), except that the same OBD group is not a criterion. Evaporative/refueling families may be grouped together using the criteria described in § 85.510(b)(1)(ii).
(2) Conversion engine families for heavy-duty engines may be grouped together into an exhaust conversion engine family using the criteria described in § 85.510(b)(2)(i)(A), except that the same OBD group is not a criterion. Evaporative/refueling families may be grouped together using the criteria described in § 85.510(b)(2)(ii).
(3) Conversion test groups/engine families may include vehicles/engines that are subject to different OEM emission standards; however, all vehicles/engines in a single conversion test group/engine family are subject to the most stringent standards that apply for vehicles/engines included in the conversion test group/engine family. For example, if OEM vehicle test groups originally certified to Tier 2, Bin 4 and Bin 5 standards are in the same conversion test group for purposes of fuel conversion, all the vehicles in the conversion test group under this subpart are subject to the Tier 2, Bin 4 standards. This paragraph (b)(3) does not apply to conversions to dual-fuel/mixed-fuel vehicles/engines, as provided in paragraph (b)(7).
(4) EPA-established scaled assigned deterioration factors for both exhaust and evaporative emissions may be used for vehicles/engines with over 10,000 miles if the criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test groups/engine families are met as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01 or 40 CFR 1036.150(d), as appropriate. This deterioration factor will be adjusted according to vehicle/engine miles or hours of operation. The deterioration factor is intended to predict the vehicle/engine’s emission level at the end of the useful life. EPA may adjust these scaled assigned deterioration factors if we find the rate of deterioration non-constant or if the rate differs by fuel type.
(5) As part of the conversion system description required by paragraph (b)(10)(i) of this section, small volume conversion manufacturers and qualified small volume test groups/engine families using EPA assigned deterioration factors must present detailed information to confirm the durability of all relevant new and existing components and explain why the conversion system will not harm the emission control system or degrade the emissions.
(6) Durability testing is required unless the criteria for small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test groups/engine families are met as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01 or 40 CFR 1036.150(d), as applicable. Durability procedures for large volume conversion manufacturers of intermediate age light-duty and heavy-duty chassis certified vehicles that follow provisions in 40 CFR 86.1820-01 may eliminate precious metal composition and catalyst grouping statistic when creating clean alternative fuel conversion durability groupings.
(7) Conversion test groups/engine families for conversions to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicles/engines may not include vehicles/engines subject to different emissions standards unless applicable exhaust and OBD demonstrations are also conducted for the original fuel(s) demonstrating compliance with the most stringent standard represented in the test group/engine family. However, the data generated from testing on the new fuel for dual-fuel or mixed/fuel test vehicles/engines may be carried over to vehicles/engines that otherwise meet the conversion test group/engine family criteria and for which the test vehicle/engine data demonstrate compliance with the applicable vehicle/engine standards. Clean alternative fuel conversion evaporative families for dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicles/engines cannot include vehicles/engines that were originally certified to different evaporative emissions standards unless evaporative/refueling demonstrations are also conducted for the original fuel(s) demonstrating compliance with the most stringent standard represented in the evaporative/refueling family.
(8) You must conduct all exhaust and all evaporative and refueling emissions testing with a worst-case vehicle/engine to show that the conversion test group/engine family complies with exhaust and evaporative/refueling emission standards, based on the certification procedures.
(9)(i) The OBD system must properly detect and identify malfunctions in all monitored emission-related powertrain systems or components including any new monitoring capability necessary to identify potential emission problems associated with the new fuel. These include but are not limited to: Fuel trim lean and rich monitors, catalyst deterioration monitors, engine misfire monitors, oxygen sensor deterioration monitors, EGR system monitors, if applicable, and vapor leak monitors, if applicable. No original OBD system monitor that is still applicable to the vehicle/engine may be aliased, removed, bypassed, or turned-off. No MILs shall be illuminated after the conversion. Readiness flags must be properly set for all monitors that identify any malfunction for all monitored components.
(ii) Subsequent to the vehicle/engine fuel conversion, you must clear all OBD codes and reset all OBD monitors to not-ready status using an OBD scan tool appropriate for the OBD system in the vehicle/engine in question. You must operate the vehicle/engine with the new fuel on representative road operation or chassis dynamometer/engine dynamometer testing cycles to satisfy the monitors’ enabling criteria. When all monitors have reset to a ready status, you must submit an OBD scan tool report showing that with the vehicle/engine operating in the key-on/engine-on mode, all supported monitors have reset to a ready status and no emission related “pending” (or potential) or “confirmed” (or MIL-on) diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been set. The MIL must not be commanded “On” or be illuminated. A MIL check must also be conducted in a key-on/engine-off mode to verify that the MIL is functioning properly. You must include the VIN/EIN number of the test vehicle/engine. If necessary, the OEM evaporative emission readiness monitor may remain unset for dedicated gaseous fuel conversion systems.
(iii) In addition to conducting OBD testing described in this paragraph (b)(9), you must submit to EPA the following statement of compliance if the OEM vehicles/engines were required to be OBD-equipped:
The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel has fully functional OBD systems and therefore meets the OBD requirements specified in [40 CFR part 86 or part 1036, as applicable] when operating on the alternative fuel.
(10) You must notify us by electronic submission in a format specified by the Administrator with all required documentation. The following must be submitted:
(i) You must describe how your conversion system qualifies as a clean alternative fuel conversion. You must include emission test results from the required exhaust, evaporative emissions, and OBD testing, applicable exhaust and evaporative emissions standards and deterioration factors. You must also include a description of how the test vehicle/engine selected qualifies as a worst-case vehicle/engine under 40 CFR 86.1828-01 or 1036.235(a)(2), as applicable.
(ii) You must describe the group of vehicles/engines (conversion test group/conversion engine family) that are covered by your notification based on the criteria specified in paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section.
(iii) In lieu of specific test data, you may submit the following attestations for the appropriate statements of compliance, if you have sufficient basis to prove the statement is valid.
(A) The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel has properly exercised the optional and applicable statements of compliance or waivers in the certification regulations. Attest to each statement or waiver in your notification.
(B) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation retains all the OEM fuel system, engine calibration, and emission control system functionality when operating on the fuel with which the vehicle/engine was originally certified.
(C) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation retains all the functionality of the OEM OBD system (if the OEM vehicles/engines were required to be OBD equipped) when operating on the fuel for which the vehicle/engine was originally certified.
(D) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation properly purges hydrocarbon vapor from the evaporative emission canister when the vehicle/engine is operating on the alternative fuel.
(iv) Include any other information as the Administrator may deem appropriate to establish that the conversion system is for the purpose of conversion to a clean alternative fuel and meets applicable emission standards.
(11) [Reserved]
(12) Your exemption from the prohibition on tampering remains valid for the applicable conversion test group/engine family and/or evaporative/refueling family, as long as the conditions under which you previously complied remain unchanged, such as small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test group/engine family status. Your exemption from tampering is valid only if the conversion is installed on the OEM test groups/engine families and/or evaporative emissions/refueling families listed on the notification. For example, if you have complied properly with the provisions in this section in calendar year 2011 for converting a model year 2006 OEM test group/evaporative/refueling family, your exemption from tampering continues to apply for the conversion of the same model year 2006 OEM test group/evaporative/refueling family as long as the conditions under which the notification was submitted remain unchanged.
(13) Conversion systems must be properly installed and adjusted such that the vehicle/engine operates consistent with the principles of good engineering judgment and in accordance with all applicable regulations.
§ 85.520 Exemption provisions for outside useful life vehicles/engines.
(a) You are exempted from the tampering prohibition with respect to outside useful life vehicles/engines if you properly document and notify EPA that the conversion system satisfies all the provisions in this section; you meet the labeling requirements in § 85.530 before you sell, import or otherwise facilitate the use of a clean alternative fuel conversion system; and you meet the applicable requirements in § 85.535. You may also meet the requirements under this section by complying with the provisions in § 85.515.
(b) Documenting and notifying EPA under this section includes the following provisions:
(1) You must notify us as described in this section.
(2) Conversion test groups, evaporative/refueling families, and conversion engine families may be the same as those allowed for the intermediate age vehicle/engine program in § 85.515(b)(1) and (2).
(3) You must use good engineering judgment to specify, use, and assemble fuel system components and other hardware and software that are properly designed and matched for the vehicles/engines in which they will be installed. Good engineering judgment also dictates that any testing or data used to satisfy demonstration requirements be generated at a quality laboratory that follows good laboratory practices and that is capable of performing official EPA emission tests.
(4) The following requirements apply for OBD systems:
(i) The OBD system must properly detect and identify malfunctions in all monitored emission-related powertrain systems or components, including any new monitoring capability necessary to identify potential emission problems associated with the new fuel. These include but are not limited to: Fuel trim lean and rich monitors, catalyst deterioration monitors, engine misfire monitors, oxygen sensor deterioration monitors, EGR system monitors, if applicable, and evaporative system leak monitors, if applicable. No original OBD system monitor that is still applicable to the vehicle/engine may be aliased, removed, bypassed, or turned-off. No MILs shall be illuminated after the conversion. Readiness flags must be properly set for all monitors that identify any malfunction for all monitored components.
(ii) Subsequent to the vehicle/engine fuel conversion, you must clear all OBD codes and reset all OBD monitors to not-ready status using an OBD scan tool appropriate for the OBD system in the vehicle/engine in question. You must operate the vehicle/engine with the new fuel on representative road operation or chassis dynamometer/engine dynamometer testing cycles to satisfy the monitors’ enabling criteria. When all monitors have reset to a ready status, you must submit an OBD scan tool report showing that with the vehicle/engine operating in the key-on/engine-on mode, all supported monitors have reset to a ready status and no emission related “pending” (or potential) or “confirmed” (or MIL-on) diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been stored. The MIL must not be commanded “On” or be illuminated. A MIL check must also be conducted in a key-on/engine-off mode to verify that the MIL is functioning properly. You must include the VIN/EIN of the test vehicle/engine. If necessary, the OEM evaporative emission readiness monitor may remain unset for dedicated gaseous fuel conversion systems.
(iii) In addition to conducting OBD testing described in this paragraph (b)(4), you must submit to EPA the following statement of compliance if the OEM vehicles/engines were required to be OBD-equipped:
The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel has fully functional OBD systems and therefore meets the OBD requirements specified in [40 CFR part 86 or 40 CFR part 1036, as applicable] when operating on the alternative fuel.
(5) Conversion test groups/engine families for conversions to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicles/engines may not include vehicles/engines subject to different emissions standards unless applicable exhaust and OBD demonstrations are also conducted for the original fuel(s) demonstrating compliance with the most stringent standard represented in the test group. However the data generated from testing on the new fuel for dual-fuel or mixed-fuel test vehicles/engines may be carried over to vehicles/engines that otherwise meet the conversion test group/engine family criteria and for which the test vehicle/engine data demonstrate compliance with the applicable vehicle/engine standards. Clean alternative fuel conversion evaporative families for dual-fuel or mixed-fuel vehicles/engines cannot include vehicles/engines that were originally certified to different evaporative emissions standards.
(6) You must notify us by electronic submission in a format specified by the Administrator with all required documentation. The following must be submitted.
(i) You must describe how your conversion system complies with the good engineering judgment criteria in paragraph (b)(3) of this section and/or other requirements under this subpart or other applicable subparts such that the conversion system qualifies as a clean alternative fuel conversion. The submission must provide a level of technical detail sufficient for EPA to confirm the conversion system’s ability to maintain or improve on emission levels in a worst-case vehicle/engine. The submission of technical information must include a complete characterization of exhaust and evaporative emissions control strategies, the fuel delivery system, durability, and specifications related to OBD system functionality. You must present detailed information to confirm the durability of all relevant new and existing components and to explain why the conversion system will not harm the emission control system or degrade the emissions. EPA may ask you to supply additional information, including test data, to support the claim that the conversion system does not increase emissions and involves good engineering judgment that is being applied for purposes of conversion to a clean alternative fuel.
(ii) You must describe the group of vehicles/engines (conversion test group/conversion engine family) that is covered by your notification based on the criteria specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(iii) In lieu of specific test data, you may submit the following attestations for the appropriate statements of compliance, if you have sufficient basis to prove the statement is valid.
(A) The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel has properly exercised the optional and applicable statements of compliance or waivers in the certification regulations. Attest to each statement or waiver in your notification.
(B) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation retains all the OEM fuel system, engine calibration, and emission control system functionality when operating on the fuel with which the vehicle/engine was originally certified.
(C) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation retains all the functionality of the OEM OBD system (if the OEM vehicles/engines were required to be OBD equipped) when operating on the fuel with which the vehicle/engine was originally certified.
(D) The test group/engine family converted to dual-fuel or mixed-fuel operation properly purges hydrocarbon vapor from the evaporative emission canister when the vehicle/engine is operating on the alternative fuel.
(E) The test group/engine family converted to an alternative fuel uses fueling systems, evaporative emission control systems, and engine powertrain components that are compatible with the alternative fuel and designed with the principles of good engineering judgment.
(iv) You must include any other information as the Administrator may deem appropriate, which may include test data, to establish the conversion system is for the purpose of conversion to a clean alternative fuel.
(7) Conversion systems must be properly installed and adjusted such that the vehicle/engine operates consistent with the principles of good engineering judgment and in accordance with all applicable regulations.
(8) EPA may ask for any documentation and/or ask you to conduct emission testing to demonstrate the conversion is for the purpose of a clean alternative fuel.
§ 85.525 Applicable standards.
To qualify for an exemption from the tampering prohibition, vehicles/engines that have been converted to operate on a different fuel must meet emission standards and related requirements as described in this section. The modified vehicle/engine must meet the requirements that applied for the OEM vehicle/engine, or the most stringent OEM vehicle/engine standards in any allowable grouping. Fleet average standards do not apply unless clean alternative fuel conversions are specifically listed as subject to the standards.
(a) If the vehicle/engine was certified with a Family Emission Limit for NO
(b) Compliance with greenhouse gas emission standards is demonstrated as follows:
(1) Subject to the following exceptions and special provisions, compliance with light-duty vehicle greenhouse gas emission standards is demonstrated by complying with the N
(i) If the OEM complied with the light-duty greenhouse gas standards using the fleet averaging option for N
(ii) If the OEM complied with alternate standards for N
(iii) If the OEM complied with the nitrous oxide (N
(iv) Optionally, compliance with greenhouse gas emission requirements may be demonstrated by comparing emissions from the vehicle prior to the fuel conversion to the emissions after the fuel conversion. This comparison must be based on FTP test results from the emission data vehicle (EDV) representing the pre-conversion test group. The sum of CO
(2) Compliance with heavy-duty engine greenhouse gas emission standards is demonstrated by complying with the CO
(i) If the fuel conversion CO
(ii) Small volume conversion manufacturers may demonstrate compliance with N
(iii) For conversions of engines installed in vocational vehicles subject to Phase 2 standards under 40 CFR 1037.105 or in tractors subject to Phase 2 standards under 40 CFR 1037.106, conversion manufacturers may omit a demonstration related to the vehicle-based standards, as long as they have a reasonable technical basis for believing that the modified vehicle continues to meet those standards.
(3) Subject to the following exceptions and special provisions, compliance with greenhouse gas emission standards for medium-duty vehicles and heavy-duty vehicles subject to 40 CFR 86.1819-14 is demonstrated by complying with the N
(i) If the OEM complied with alternate standards for N
(ii) If you are unable to meet either the N
(iii) You may alternatively comply with the greenhouse gas emission requirements by comparing emissions from the vehicle before and after the fuel conversion. This comparison must be based on FTP test results from the emission data vehicle (EDV) representing the pre-conversion test group. The sum of CO
(c) Conversion systems for engines that would have qualified for chassis certification at the time of OEM certification may use those procedures, even if the OEM did not. Conversion manufacturers choosing this option must designate test groups using the appropriate criteria as described in this subpart and meet all vehicle chassis certification requirements set forth in 40 CFR part 86, subpart S.
§ 85.530 Vehicle/engine labels and packaging labels.
(a) The following labeling requirements apply for clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturers to qualify for an exemption from the tampering prohibition:
(1) You must make a supplemental emission control information label for each clean alternative fuel conversion system.
(2) On the supplemental label you must identify the OEM vehicles/engines for which you authorize the use of your clean alternative fuel conversion system, consistent with the requirements of this subpart. You may do this by identifying the OEM test group/engine family names and original model year to which your conversion is applicable as described in § 85.510(b)(1) or § 85.510(b)(2), § 85.515(b)(10)(ii), or § 85.520(b)(6)(ii). Your commercial packaging materials must also clearly describe this information.
(3) You must include the following on the supplemental label:
(i) You must state that the vehicle/engine has been equipped with a clean alternative fuel conversion system designed to allow it to operate on a fuel other than the fuel it was originally certified to operate on. Identify the fuel or fuels the vehicle/engine is designed to use and provide a unique conversion test group/conversion engine family name and conversion evaporative/refueling emissions family name.
(ii) You must identify your corporate name, address, and telephone number.
(iii) You must include one of the following statements that describes how you comply under this subpart and any applicable mileage or age restrictions due to how compliance was demonstrated:
(A) “This clean alternative fuel conversion system has been certified to meet EPA emission standards.”
(B) “Testing has shown that this clean alternative fuel conversion system meets EPA emission standards under the intermediate age vehicle/engine program.”
(C) “This conversion system is for the purpose of use of a clean alternative fuel in accordance with EPA regulations and is applicable only to vehicles/engines that are older than 11 years or 120,000 miles.” (Values must be adjusted to reflect OEM useful life; useful life in hours should be added, if applicable).
(iv) State the following: “This conversion was manufactured and installed consistent with the principles of good engineering judgment and all U.S. EPA regulations.”
(4) On the supplemental label, you must identify any original parts that will be removed for the conversion and any associated changes in maintenance specifications.
(5) On the supplemental label, you must include the date of conversion and the mileage of the vehicle/engine at the time of conversion. Include the hours of operation instead of mileage, if applicable.
(b) The supplemental emission control information label shall be placed in a permanent manner adjacent to the vehicle’s/engine’s original emission control information label if possible. If it is impractical to place the supplemental label adjacent to the original label, it must be placed where it will be seen by a person viewing the original label on a part that is needed for normal operation and does not normally need replacement. If the supplemental label information cannot fit on one label, the information can be logically split among two labels that are both near the original VECI or engine label.
(c) All information provided on clean alternative fuel conversion system packaging must be consistent with the required vehicle/engine labeling information.
(d) Examples of all labeling and warranty information must be provided as part of the application for certification or notification process.
(e) The marketing material and label information for a given conversion system must be consistent with the conversion manufacturer’s demonstration/notification to EPA for that system.
§ 85.535 Liability, recordkeeping, and end of year reporting.
(a) Clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturers are liable for in-use performance of their conversion systems as outlined in this part.
(b) We may conduct or require testing on any vehicles/engines as allowed under the Clean Air Act. This may involve confirmatory testing, in-use testing, and/or selective enforcement audits for clean alternative fuel conversion systems. Dual-fuel vehicles/engines may be tested when operating on any of the fuels. Mixed-fuel vehicles/engines may be tested on any fuel blend ratio that is expected to occur during normal operation.
(c) Except for an application for certification, your actions to document compliance and notify us under this subpart are not a request for our approval. We generally do not give any formal approval short of issuing a certificate of conformity. However, if we learn that your actions fall short of full compliance with applicable requirements we may notify you that you have not met applicable requirements or that we need more information to make that determination. The exemption from the tampering prohibition may be void ab initio if the conversion manufacturer has not satisfied all of the applicable provisions of this subpart even if a submission to EPA has been made and the conversion system appears on EPA’s publicly available list of compliant systems.
(d) Clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturers must accept in-use liability for warranty, are subject to defect reporting requirements, and may be required to recall any parts or systems for which the failure can be traced to the conversion, regardless of whether installation was proper or improper. The OEM shall remain liable for the performance of any parts or systems which retain their original function following conversion and are unaffected by the conversion.
(e) Clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturers must keep sufficient records for five years from the date of notification or certification, or the date of the last conversion installation, whichever is later, to show that they meet applicable requirements.
(f) Clean alternative fuel conversion manufacturers must submit an end of the year sales report to EPA describing the number of clean alternative fuel conversions by fuel type(s) and vehicle test group/engine family by January 31 of the following year. The number of conversions is the sum of the calendar year intermediate age conversions, outside useful life conversions, and the same conversion model year certified clean alternative fuel conversions. The number of conversions will be added to any other vehicle and engine sales accounted for using 40 CFR 86.1838-01 or 1036.150(d), as appropriate to determine small volume manufacturer or qualified small volume test group/engine family status.
(g) Conversion manufacturers who market conversion systems for use on vehicles/engines other than the test group/engine families and evaporative/refueling families covered by the compliance demonstration and notification may be liable for a tampering violation for each vehicle/engine to which conversion system is misapplied.
Subparts G-O [Reserved]
Subpart P—Importation of Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle Engines
§ 85.1501 Applicability.
(a) Except where otherwise indicated, this subpart is applicable to motor vehicles offered for importation or imported into the United States for which the Administrator has promulgated regulations under 40 CFR part 86, subpart D or S, prescribing emission standards, but which are not covered by certificates of conformity issued under section 206(a) of the Clean Air Act (i.e., which are nonconforming vehicles as defined in § 85.1502), as amended, and part 86 at the time of conditional importation. Compliance with regulations under this subpart shall not relieve any person or entity from compliance with other applicable provisions of the Clean Air Act. This subpart no longer applies for heavy-duty engines certified under 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, or 40 CFR part 1036; references in this subpart to “engines” therefore apply only for replacement engines intended for installation in motor vehicles that are subject to this subpart.
(b) Regulations prescribing further procedures for importation of motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines into the Customs territory of the United States, as defined in 19 U.S.C. 1202, are set forth at 19 CFR 12.73.
(c) References in this subpart to engine families and emission control systems shall be deemed to apply to durability groups and test groups as applicable for manufacturers certifying new light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, and Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles under the provisions of 40 CFR part 86, subpart S.
§ 85.1502 Definitions.
(a) As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein have the meanings given them in 19 CFR 12.73, in the Clean Air Act, as amended, and elsewhere in parts 85 and 86 of this chapter.
(1) Act. The Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.).
(2) Administrator. The Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency.
(3) Certificate of conformity. The document issued by the Administrator under section 206(a) of the Act.
(4) Certificate holder. The entity in whose name the certificate of conformity for a class of motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines has been issued.
(5) The Federal Compliance Testing sequence (FCT). The testing sequence that incorporates all of the testing requirements of part 86 applicable at the time of an emissions test conducted pursuant to this subpart.
(6) FTP. The Federal Test Procedure at part 86.
(7) Independent commercial importer (ICI). An importer who is not an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) (see definition below) or does not have a contractual agreement with an OEM to act as its authorized representative for the distribution of motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines in the U.S. market.
(8) Model year. The manufacturer’s annual production period (as determined by the Administrator) which includes January 1 of such calendar year; Provided, That if the manufacturer has no annual production period, the term “model year” shall mean the calendar year in which a vehicle is modified. A certificate holder shall be deemed to have produced a vehicle or engine when the certificate holder has modified the nonconforming vehicle or engine.
(9) Nonconforming vehicle or engine. A motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine which is not covered by a certificate of conformity prior to final or conditional importation and which has not been finally admitted into the United States under the provisions of § 85.1505, § 85.1509 or the applicable provisions of § 85.1512. Excluded from this definition are vehicles admitted under provisions of § 85.1512 covering EPA approved manufacturer and U.S. Government Agency catalyst and O
(10) Original equipment manufacturer (OEM). The entity which originally manufactured the motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine prior to conditional importation.
(11) Original production (OP) year. The calendar year in which the motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine was originally produced by the OEM.
(12) Original production (OP) years old. The age of a vehicle as determined by subtracting the original production year of the vehicle from the calendar year of importation.
(13) Running changes. Those changes in vehicle or engine configuration, equipment or calibration which are made by an OEM or ICI in the course of motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine production.
(14) United States. United States includes the States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Guam, American Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands.
(15) Useful life. A period of time/mileage as specified in part 86 for a nonconforming vehicle which begins at the time of resale (for a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine owned by the ICI at the time of importation) or release to the owner (for a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine not owned by the ICI at the time of importation) of the motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine by the ICI after modification and/or test pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509.
(16) Working day. Any day on which Federal government offices are open for normal business. Saturdays, Sundays, and official Federal holidays are not working days.
(b) [Reserved]
§ 85.1503 General requirements for importation of nonconforming vehicles and engines.
(a) A nonconforming vehicle or engine offered for importation into the United States must be imported by an ICI who is a current holder of a valid certificate of conformity unless an exemption or exclusion is granted by the Administrator under § 85.1511 or the vehicle is eligible for entry under § 85.1512.
(b) Final admission shall not be granted unless:
(1) The vehicle or engine is covered by a certificate of conformity issued in the name of the importer under part 86 and the certificate holder has complied with all requirements of § 85.1505; or
(2) The vehicle or engine is modified and emissions tested in accordance with the provisions of § 85.1509 and the certificate holder has complied with all other requirements of § 85.1509; or
(3) The vehicle or engine is exempted or excluded under § 85.1511; or
(4) The vehicle was covered originally by a certificate of conformity and is otherwise eligible for entry under § 85.1512.
(c) In any one certificate year (e.g., the current model year), an ICI may finally admit no more than the following numbers of nonconforming vehicles into the United States under the provisions of §§ 85.1505 and 85.1509, except as allowed by paragraph (e) of this section:
(1) [Reserved]
(2) A total of 25 light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, and medium-duty passenger vehicles. This limit applies for vehicles with engines, including plug-in hybrid electric vehicles. This limit does not apply for electric vehicles.
(3) 50 highway motorcycles.
(d) For ICIs owned by a parent company, the importation limits in paragraph (c) of this section include importation by the parent company and all its subsidiaries.
(e) An ICI may exceed the limits outlined paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, provided that any vehicles/engines in excess of the limits meet the emission standards and other requirements outlined in the provisions of § 85.1515 for the model year in which the motor vehicle/engine is modified (instead of the emission standards and other requirements applicable for the OP year of the vehicle/engine).
§ 85.1504 Conditional admission.
(a) A motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine offered for importation under § 85.1505, § 85.1509 or § 85.1512 may be conditionally admitted into the United States, but shall be refused final admission unless:
(1) At the time of conditional admission, the importer has submitted to the Administrator a written report that the subject vehicle or engine has been permitted conditional admission pending EPA approval of its application for final admission under § 85.1505, § 85.1509, or § 85.1512. This written report shall contain the following:
(i) Identification of the importer of the vehicle or engine and the importer’s address and telephone number;
(ii) Identification of the vehicle or engine owner and the vehicle or engine owner’s address, telephone number and taxpayer identification number;
(iii) Identification of the vehicle or engine;
(iv) Information indicating under what provision of these regulations the vehicle or engine is to be imported;
(v) Identification of the place where the subject vehicle or engine will be stored until EPA approval of the importer’s application to the Administrator for final admission;
(vi) Authorization for EPA Enforcement Officers to conduct inspections or testing otherwise permitted by the Act or regulations thereunder;
(vii) Identification, where applicable, of the certificate by means of which the vehicle is being imported;
(viii) The original production year of the vehicle; and
(ix) Such other information as is deemed necessary by the Administrator.
(b) Such conditional admission shall not be under bond for a vehicle or engine which is imported under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509. A bond will be required for a vehicle or engine imported under applicable provisions of § 85.1512. The period of conditional admission shall not exceed 120 days. During this period, the importer shall store the vehicle or engine at a location where the Administrator will have reasonable access to the vehicle or engine for his/her inspection.
§ 85.1505 Final admission of certified vehicles.
(a) A motor vehicle or engine may be finally admitted into the United States upon approval of the certificate holder’s application to the Administrator. Such application shall be made either by completing EPA forms or by submitting the data electronically to EPA’s computer, in accordance with EPA instructions. Such application shall contain:
(1) The information required in § 85.1504(a);
(2) Information demonstrating that the vehicle or engine has been modified in accordance with a valid certificate of conformity. Such demonstration shall be made in one of the following ways:
(i) Through an attestation by the certificate holder that the vehicle or engine has been modified in accordance with the provisions of the certificate holder’s certificate, and presentation to EPA of a statement by the appropriate OEM that the OEM will provide to the certificate holder and to EPA information concerning running changes to the vehicle or engine described in the certificate holder’s application for certification, and actual receipt by EPA of notification by the certificate holder of any running changes already implemented by the OEM at the time of application and their effect on emissions; or
(ii) Through an attestation by the certificate holder that the vehicle or engine has been modified in accordance with the provisions of the certificate holder’s certificate of conformity and that the certificate holder has conducted an FTP test, at a laboratory within the United States, that demonstrates compliance with Federal emission requirements on every third vehicle or third engine imported under that certificate within 120 days of entry, with sequencing of the tests to be determined by the date of importation of each vehicle or engine. Should the certificate holder have exceeded a threshold of 300 vehicles or engines imported under the certificate without adjustments or other changes in accordance with paragraph (a)(3) of this section, the amount of required FTP testing may be reduced to every fifth vehicle or engine. In order to make a demonstration under paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section, a certificate holder must have received permission from the Administrator to do so;
(3) The results of every FTP test which the certificate holder conducted on the vehicle or engine. Should a subject vehicle or engine have failed an FTP at any time, the following procedures are applicable:
(i) The certificate holder may either:
(A) Conduct one FTP retest that involves no adjustment of the vehicle or engine from the previous test (e.g., adjusting the RPM, timing, air-to-fuel ratio, etc.) other than adjustments to adjustable parameters that, upon inspection, were found to be out of tolerance. When such an allowable adjustment is made, the parameter may be reset only to the specified (i.e., nominal) value (and not any other value within the tolerance band); or
(B) Initiate a change in production (running change) under the provisions of 40 CFR 86.084-14(c)(13) or 86.1842-01, as applicable, that causes the vehicle to meet Federal emission requirements.
(ii) If the certificate holder chooses to retest in accordance with paragraph (a)(3)(i)(A) of this section:
(A) Such retests must be completed no later than five working days subsequent to the first FTP test;
(B) Should the subject vehicle or engine fail the second FTP, then the certificate holder must initiate a change in production (a running change) under the provisions of 40 CFR 86.084-14(c)(13) or 86.1842-01, as applicable, that causes the vehicle to meet Federal emission requirements.
(iii) If the certificate holder chooses to initiate a change in production (a running change) under the provisions of 40 CFR 86.084-14(c)(13) or 86.1842-01 as applicable, that causes the vehicle to meet Federal requirements, changes involving adjustments of adjustable vehicle parameters (e.g., adjusting the RPM, timing, air/fuel ratio) must be changes in the specified (i.e., nominal) values to be deemed acceptable by EPA.
(iv) Production changes made in accordance with this section must be implemented on all subsequent vehicles or engines imported under the certificate after the date of importation of the vehicle or engine which gave rise to the production change.
(v) Commencing with the first vehicle or engine receiving the running change, every third vehicle or engine imported under the certificate must be FTP tested to demonstrate compliance with Federal emission requirements until, as in paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section, a threshold of 300 vehicles or engines imported under the certificate is exceeded, at which time the amount of required FTP testing may be reduced to every fifth vehicle or engine.
(vi) Reports concerning these running changes shall be made to both the Manufacturers Operations and Certification Divisions of EPA within ten working days of initiation of the running change. The cause of any failure of an FTP shall be identified, if known;
(4) The applicable deterioration factor;
(5) The FTP results adjusted by the deterioration factor;
(6) Such other information that may be specified by applicable regulations or on the certificate under which the vehicle or engine has been modified in order to assure compliance with requirements of the Act;
(7) All information required under § 85.1510;
(8) An attestation by the certificate holder that the certificate holder is responsible for the vehicle’s or engine’s compliance with Federal emission requirements, regardless of whether the certificate holder owns the vehicle or engine imported under this section;
(9) The name, address and telephone number of the person who the certificate holder prefers to receive EPA notification under § 85.1505(c); and
(10) Such other information as is deemed necessary by the Administrator.
(b) EPA approval for final admission of a vehicle or engine under this section shall be presumed not to have been granted if a vehicle has not been properly modified to be in conformity in all material respects with the description in the application for certification or has not complied with the provisions of § 85.1505(a)(2) or its final FTP results, adjusted by the deterioration factor, if applicable, do not comply with applicable emission standards.
(c) Except as provided in § 85.1505(b), EPA approval for final admission of a vehicle or engine under this section shall be presumed to have been granted should the certificate holder not have received oral or written notice from EPA to the contrary within 15 working days of the date of EPA’s receipt of the certificate holder’s application under § 85.1505(a). Such EPA notice shall be made to an employee of the certificate holder. If application is made on EPA forms, the date on a certified mail receipt shall be deemed to be the official date of notification to EPA. If application is made by submitting the data electronically, the date of acceptance by EPA’s computer shall be deemed to be the official date of notification to EPA. During this 15 working day period, the vehicle or engine must be stored at a location where the Administrator will have reasonable access to the vehicle or engine for his/her inspection.
§ 85.1506 Inspection and testing of imported motor vehicles and engines.
(a) In order to allow the Administrator to determine whether a certificate holder’s production vehicles or engines comply with applicable emission requirements or requirements of this subpart, EPA Enforcement Officers are authorized to conduct inspections and/or tests of vehicles or engines imported by the certificate holder. EPA Enforcement Officers shall be admitted during operating hours upon demand and upon presentation of credentials to any of the following:
(1) Any facility where any vehicle or engine imported by the certificate holder under this subpart was or is being modified, tested or stored; and
(2) Any facility where any record or other document relating to modification, testing or storage of the vehicles or engines, or required to be kept by § 85.1507, is located.
(b) Upon admission to any facility referred to in paragraph (a) of this section, any EPA Enforcement Officer shall be allowed during operating hours:
(1) To inspect and monitor any part or aspect of activities relating to the certificate holder’s modification, testing and/or storage of vehicles or engines imported under this subpart;
(2) To inspect and make copies of any records or documents related to modification, testing and storage of a vehicle or engine, or required by § 85.1507; and
(3) To inspect and photograph any part or aspect of any such vehicle or engine and any component used in the assembly thereof.
(c) Any EPA Enforcement Officer shall be furnished, by those in charge of a facility being inspected, with such reasonable assistance as he/she may request to help him/her discharge any function listed in this subpart. A certificate holder shall cause those in charge of a facility operated for its benefit to furnish such reasonable assistance without charge to EPA (whether or not the certificate holder controls the facility).
(d) The requirements of paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of this section apply whether or not the certificate holder owns or controls the facility in question. Noncompliance with the requirements of paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) may preclude an informed judgment that vehicles or engines which have been or are being imported under this subpart by the certificate holder comply with applicable emission requirements or requirements of this subpart. It is the certificate holder’s responsibility to make such arrangements as may be necessary to assure compliance with paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of this section. Failure to do so, or other failure to comply with paragraphs (a), (b) and (c), may result in sanctions as provided for in the Act or § 85.1513(e).
(e) Duly designated Enforcement Officers are authorized to proceed ex parte to seek warrants authorizing the inspection or testing of the motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines described in paragraph (a) of this section whether or not the Enforcement Officer first attempted to seek permission from the certificate holder or facility owner to inspect such motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines.
(f) The results of the Administrator’s test under this section shall comprise the official test data for the vehicle or engine for purposes of determining whether the vehicle or engine should be permitted final entry under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509.
(g) For purposes of this section:
(1) “Presentation of Credentials” shall mean display of the document designating a person as an EPA Enforcement Officer.
(2) Where vehicle storage areas or facilities are concerned, “operating hours” shall means all times during which personnel other than custodial personnel are at work in the vicinity of the area or facility and have access to it.
(3) Where facilities or areas other than those specified in paragraph (g)(2) of this section are concerned, “operating hours” shall mean all times during which the facility is in operation.
(4) “Reasonable assistance” includes, but is not limited to, clerical, copying, interpreting and translating services, and the making available on request of personnel of the facility being inspected during their working hours to inform the EPA Enforcement Officer of how the facility operates and to answer his/her questions.
§ 85.1507 Maintenance of certificate holder’s records.
(a) The certificate holder subject to any of the provisions of this subpart shall establish, maintain and retain for six years from the date of entry of a nonconforming vehicle or engine imported by the certificate holder, adequately organized and indexed records, correspondence and other documents relating to the certification, modification, test, purchase, sale, storage, registration and importation of that vehicle or engine, including but not limited to:
(1) The declaration required by 19 CFR 12.73;
(2) Any documents or other written information required by a Federal government agency to be submitted or retained in conjunction with the certification, importation or emission testing of motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines;
(3) All bills of sale, invoices, purchase agreements, purchase orders, principal or agent agreements and correspondence between the certificate holder and the purchaser, of each vehicle or engine, and any agents of the above parties;
(4) Documents providing parts identification data associated with the emission control system installed on each vehicle or engine demonstrating that such emission control system was properly installed on such vehicle or engine;
(5) Documents demonstrating that, where appropriate, each vehicle or engine was emissions tested in accordance with the Federal Test Procedure.
(6) Documents providing evidence that the requirements of § 85.1510 have been met.
(7) Documents providing evidence of compliance with all relevant requirements of the Clean Air Act, the Energy Tax Act of 1978, and the Energy Policy and Conservation Act;
(8) Documents providing evidence of the initiation of the “15 day hold” period for each vehicle or engine imported pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509;
(9) For vehicles owned by the ICI at the time of importation, documents providing evidence of the date of sale subsequent to importation, together with the name, address and telephone number of the purchaser, for each vehicle or engine imported pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509;
(10) For vehicles not owned by the ICI at the time of importation, documents providing evidence of the release to the owner subsequent to importation for each vehicle or engine imported pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509; and
(11) Documents providing evidence of the date of original manufacture of the vehicle or engine.
(b) The certificate holder is responsible for ensuring the maintenance of records required by this section, regardless of whether facilities used by the certificate holder to comply with requirements of this subpart are under the control of the certificate holder.
§ 85.1508 “In Use” inspections and recall requirements.
(a) Vehicles or engines which have been imported, modified and/or FTP tested by a certificate holder pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 may be inspected and emission tested by EPA throughout the useful lives of the vehicles or engines.
(b) Certificate holders shall maintain for six years, and provide to EPA upon request, a list of owners of all vehicles or engines imported by the certificate holder under this subpart.
(c) A certificate holder will be notified whenever the Administrator has determined that a substantial number of a class or category of the certificate holder’s vehicles or engines, although properly maintained and used, do not conform to the regulations prescribed under section 202 when in actual use throughout their useful lives (as determined under section 202(d)). After such notification, the Recall Regulations at 40 CFR part 1068, subpart G, shall govern the certificate holder’s responsibilities and references to a manufacturer in the Recall Regulations shall apply to the certificate holder.
§ 85.1509 Final admission of modification and test vehicles.
(a) A motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine may be imported under this section by a certificate holder possessing a currently valid certificate of conformity only if—
(1)(i) The vehicle or engine is six OP years old or older; or
(ii) The vehicle was owned, purchased and used overseas by military or civilian employees of the U.S. Government and
(A) An ICI does not hold a currently valid certificate for that particular vehicle; and
(B) The Federal agency employing the owner of such vehicle determines that such owner is stationed in an overseas area which either prohibits the importation of U.S.-certified vehicles or which does not have adequate repair facilities for U.S.-certified vehicles; and
(C) The Federal agency employing the personnel owning such vehicles determines that such vehicles are eligible for shipment to the United States at U.S. Government expense; and
(2) The certificate holder’s name has not been placed on a currently effective EPA list of certificate holders ineligible to import such modification/test vehicles, as described in paragraph (j) of this section.
(b)-(f) [Reserved]
(g) A motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine conditionally imported under this section may be finally admitted into the United States upon approval of the certificate holder’s application to the Administrator. Such application shall be made either by completing EPA forms or, if the applicant chooses, by submitting the data electronically to EPA’s computer, in accordance with EPA instructions. Such application shall contain:
(1) The identification information required in § 85.1504;
(2) An attestation by the certificate holder that the vehicle or engine has been modified and/emission tested in accordance with the FTP at a laboratory within the United States;
(3) The results of any FTP;
(4) The deterioration factor assigned by EPA;
(5) The FTP results adjusted by the deterioration factor;
(6) An attestation by the certificate holder that emission testing and development of fuel economy data as required by § 85.1510 was performed after the vehicle or engine had been modified to conform to Department of Transportation safety standards;
(7) All information required under § 85.1510;
(8) An attestation by the certificate holder that the certificate holder is responsible for the vehicle’s or engine’s compliance with Federal emission requirements, regardless of whether the certificate holder owns the vehicle or engine imported under this section.
(9) The name, address and telephone number of the person who the certification holder prefers to receive EPA notification under § 85.1509(i).
(10) For any vehicle imported in accordance with paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section, an attestation by the certificate holder that the vehicle is of the same make and fuel type as the vehicle covered by a qualifying certificate as described in paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section, as applicable.
(11) Such other information as is deemed necessary by the Administrator.
(h) EPA approval for final admission of a vehicle or engine under this section shall be presumed not to have been granted if a vehicle’s final FTP results, adjusted by the deterioration factor, if applicable, do not comply with applicable emission standards.
(i) Except as provided in § 85.1509(h), EPA approval for final admission of a vehicle or engine under this section shall be presumed to have been granted should the certificate holder not have received oral or written notice from EPA to the contrary within 15 working days of the date of EPA’s receipt of the certificate holder’s application under § 85.1509(g). Such EPA notice shall be made to an employee of the certificate holder. If application is made on EPA form, the date of a certified mail receipt shall be deemed to be the official date of notification to EPA. If application is made by submitting the data electronically, the date of acceptance by EPA’s computer shall be deemed to be the official date of notification to EPA. During this 15 working day period, the vehicle or engine must be stored at a location where the Administrator will have reasonable access to inspect the vehicle or engine.
(j) EPA shall maintain a current list of certificate holders who have been determined to be ineligible to import vehicles or engines under this section. Such determinations shall be made in accordance with the criteria and procedures in § 85.1513(e) of this subpart.
(k) Prior to final entry, vehicles or engines imported under this section are subject to special inspections as described in § 85.1506 with these additional provisions:
(1) If a significant number of vehicles imported by a certificate holder fail to comply, in the judgment of the Administrator, with emission requirements upon inspection or retest, or if the certificate holder fails to comply with any provision of these regulations that pertain to vehicles imported pursuant to § 85.1509, the certificate holder may be placed on the EPA list of certificate holders ineligible to import vehicles under this section as specified in paragraph (j) of this section and § 85.1513(e);
(2) Individual vehicles or engines which fail an FTP retest or inspection must be repaired and retested, as applicable, to demonstrate compliance with emission requirements before final admission.
(3) Unless otherwise specified by EPA, the costs of all retesting under this subsection, including transportation, shall be borne by the certificate holder.
(l) Vehicles or engines imported under this section may be tested or inspected by EPA at any time during the vehicle’s or engine’s useful life in accordance with § 85.1508 (a) and (b). If, in the judgment of the Administrator, a significant number of properly maintained and used vehicles or engines imported by the certificate holder fail to meet emission requirements, the name of the certificate holder may be placed on the EPA list of certificate holders ineligible to import vehicles under the modification/test provision as specified in paragraph (j) of this section and § 85.1513(e).
§ 85.1510 Maintenance instructions, warranties, emission labeling and fuel economy requirements.
The provisions of this section are applicable to all vehicles or engines imported under the provisions of §§ 85.1505 and 85.1509.
(a) Maintenance instructions. (1) The certificate holder shall furnish to the purchaser or to the owner of each vehicle or engine imported under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 of this section, written instructions for the maintenance and use of the vehicle or engine by the purchaser or owner. Each application for final admission of a vehicle or engine shall provide an attestation that such instructions have been or will be (if the ultimate producer is unknown) furnished to the purchaser or owner of such vehicle or engine at the time of sale or redelivery. The certificate holder shall maintain a record of having furnished such instructions.
(2) For each vehicle or engine imported under § 85.1509, the maintenance and use instructions shall be maintained in a file containing the records for that vehicle or engine.
(3) Such instructions shall not contain requirements more restrictive than those set forth in 40 CFR part 86, subpart A or subpart S, as applicable (Maintenance Instructions), and shall be in sufficient detail and clarity that an automotive mechanic of average training and ability can maintain or repair the vehicle or engine.
(4) Certificate holders shall furnish with each vehicle or engine a list of the emission control parts, and emission-related parts added by the certificate holder and the emission control and emission related parts furnished by the OEM.
(b) Warranties. (1) Certificate holders shall provide to vehicle or engine owners emission warranties identical to those required by sections 207 (a) and (b) of the Act and 40 CFR part 85, subpart V. The warranty period for each vehicle or engine shall commence on the date the vehicle or engine is delivered by the certificate holder to the ultimate purchaser or owner.
(2) Certificate holders shall ensure that these warranties:
(i) Are insured by a prepaid mandatory service insurance policy underwritten by an independent insurance company;
(ii) Are transferable to each successive owner for the periods specified in sections 207 (a) and (b); and
(iii) Provide that in the absence of a certificate holder’s facility being reasonably available (i.e., within 50 miles) for performance of warranty repairs, such warranty repairs may be performed anywhere.
(3) Certificate holders shall attest in each application for final admission that such warranties will be or have been provided. Copies of such warranties shall be maintained in a file containing the records for that vehicle or engine.
(c) Emission labeling. (1) The certificate holder shall affix a permanent legible label in a readily visible position in the engine compartment. The label shall meet all the requirements of part 86 and shall contain the following statement “This vehicle or engine was originally produced in (month and year of original production). It has been imported and modified by (certificate holder’s name, address and telephone number) to conform to U.S. emission regulations applicable to the (year) model year.” If the vehicle or engine is owned by the certificate holder at the time of importation, the label shall also state “this vehicle or engine is warranted for five years or 50,000 miles from the date of purchase, whichever comes first.” If the vehicle or engine is not owned by the certificate holder at the time of importation, the label shall state “this vehicle or engine is warranted for five years or 50,000 miles from the date of release to the owner, whichever comes first.” For vehicles imported under § 85.1509, the label shall clearly state in bold letters that “this vehicle has not been manufactured under a certificate of conformity but meets EPA air pollution control requirements under a modification/test program.” In addition, for all vehicles, the label shall contain the vacuum hose routing diagram applicable to the vehicles.
(2) As part of the application to the Administrator for final admission of each individual vehicle or engine under § 85.1509, the certificate holder shall maintain a copy of such label for each vehicle or engine in a file containing the records for that vehicle or engine. Certificate holders importing under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 shall attest to compliance with the above labeling requirements in each application for final admission.
(d) Fuel economy labeling. (1) The certificate holder shall affix a fuel economy label that complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 600, subpart D. The requirement for fuel economy labels does not apply for electric vehicles.
(2) For purposes of generating the fuel economy data to be incorporated on such label, each vehicle imported under § 85.1509 shall be considered to be a separate model type.
(3) As part of the application to the Administrator for final admission of each individual vehicle or engine imported under § 85.1509, the certificate holder shall maintain a copy of such label for each vehicle or engine in a file containing the records for that vehicle or engine. In each application for final admission of a vehicle or engine under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509, the certificate holder shall attest to compliance with the above labeling requirements.
(e) Gas guzzler tax. (1) Certificate holders shall comply with any applicable provisions of the Energy Tax Act of 1978, 26 U.S.C. 4064, for every vehicle imported under §§ 85.1505 and 85.1509.
(2) For vehicles not owned by the certificate holder, the certificate holder shall furnish to the vehicle owner applicable IRS forms (currently numbered 720 (Quarterly Federal Excise Tax) and 6197 (Fuel Economy Tax Computation Form)) which relate to the collection of the gas guzzler tax under the Energy Tax Act of 1978, 26 U.S.C. 4064.
(3) As part of the certificate holder’s application to EPA for final admission of each vehicle imported under § 85.1509, the certificate holder shall furnish any fuel economy data required by the Energy Tax Act of 1978, 15 U.S.C. 4064.
(f) Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE). Certificate holders shall comply with any applicable CAFE requirements of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, 15 U.S.C. 2001 et seq., and 40 CFR part 600, for all vehicles imported under §§ 85.1505 and 85.1509.
§ 85.1511 Exemptions and exclusions.
The exemption provisions of 40 CFR part 1068, subpart D, apply instead of the provisions of this section for heavy-duty motor vehicles and heavy-duty motor vehicle engines regulated under 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, and 40 CFR parts 1036 and 1037. The following provisions apply for other motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines:
(a) Individuals, as well as certificate holders, shall be eligible for importing vehicles into the United States under the provisions of this section, unless otherwise specified.
(b) Notwithstanding any other requirements of this subpart, a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine entitled to a temporary exemption under this paragraph (b) may be conditionally admitted into the United States if prior written approval for such conditional admission is obtained from the Administrator. Conditional admission shall be under bond. A written request for approval from the Administrator shall contain the identification required in § 85.1504(a)(1) (except for § 85.1504(a)(1)(v)) and information that indicates that the importer is entitled to the exemption. Noncompliance with provisions of this section may result in the forfeiture of the total amount of the bond or exportation of the vehicle or engine. The following temporary exemptions apply:
(1) Exemption for repairs or alterations. Vehicles and engines may qualify for a temporary exemption under the provisions of 40 CFR 1068.325(a). Such vehicles or engines may not be registered or licensed in the United States for use on public roads and highways.
(2) Testing exemption. Vehicles and engines may qualify for a temporary exemption under the provisions of 40 CFR 1068.325(b). Test vehicles or engines may be operated on and registered for use on public roads or highways provided that the operation is an integral part of the test.
(3) Precertification exemption. Prototype vehicles for use in applying to EPA for certification may be imported by independent commercial importers subject to applicable provisions of § 85.1706 and the following requirements:
(i) No more than one prototype vehicle for each engine family for which an independent commercial importer is seeking certification shall be imported by each independent commercial importer.
(ii) Unless a certificate of conformity is issued for the prototype vehicle, the total amount of the bond shall be forfeited or the vehicle must be exported within 180 days from the date of entry.
(4) Display exemptions. Vehicles and engines may qualify for a temporary exemption under the provisions of 40 CFR 1068.325(c). Display vehicles or engines may not be registered or licensed for use or operated on public roads or highways in the United States, unless an applicable certificate of conformity has been received.
(5) Export exemption. Vehicles may qualify for a temporary exemption under the provisions of 40 CFR 1068.325(d).
(c) Notwithstanding any other requirements of this subpart, a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine may be finally admitted into the United States under this paragraph (c) if prior written approval for such final admission is obtained from the Administrator. Conditional admission of these vehicles is not permitted for the purpose of obtaining written approval from the Administrator. A request for approval shall contain the identification information required in § 85.1504(a)(1) (except for § 85.1504(a)(1)(v)) and information that indicates that the importer is entitled to the exemption or exclusion. The following exemptions or exclusions apply:
(1) National security exemption. Vehicles may be imported under the national security exemption found at 40 CFR 1068.315(a). Only persons who are manufacturers may import a vehicle under a national security exemption.
(2) Hardship exemption. The Administrator may exempt on a case-by-case basis certain motor vehicles from Federal emission requirements to accommodate unforeseen cases of extreme hardship or extraordinary circumstances. Some examples are as follows:
(i) Handicapped individuals who need a special vehicle unavailable in a certified configuration;
(ii) Individuals who purchase a vehicle in a foreign country where resale is prohibited upon the departure of such an individual;
(iii) Individuals emigrating from a foreign country to the U.S. in circumstances of severe hardship.
(d) Foreign diplomatic and military personnel may import nonconforming vehicles without bond. At the time of admission, the importer shall submit to the Administrator the written report required in § 85.1504(a)(1) (except for information required by § 85.1504(a)(1)(v)). Such vehicles may not be sold in the United States.
(e) Racing vehicles may be imported by any person provided the vehicles meet one or more of the exclusion criteria specified in § 85.1703. Racing vehicles may not be registered or licensed for use on or operated on public roads and highways in the United States.
(f) The following exclusions and exemptions apply based on date of original manufacture:
(1) Notwithstanding any other requirements of this subpart, the following motor vehicles or motor vehicle engines are excluded from the requirements of the Act in accordance with section 216(3) of the Act and may be imported by any person:
(i) Gasoline-fueled light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks originally manufactured prior to January 1, 1968.
(ii) Diesel-fueled light-duty vehicles originally manufactured prior to January 1, 1975.
(iii) Diesel-fueled light-duty trucks originally manufactured prior to January 1, 1976.
(iv) Motorcycles originally manufactured prior to January 1, 1978.
(v) Gasoline-fueled and diesel-fueled heavy-duty engines originally manufactured prior to January 1, 1970.
(2) Notwithstanding any other requirements of this subpart, a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine not subject to an exclusion under paragraph (f)(1) of this section but greater than twenty OP years old is entitled to an exemption from the requirements of the Act, provided that it is imported into the United States by a certificate holder. At the time of admission, the certificate holder shall submit to the Administrator the written report required in § 85.1504(a)(1) (except for information required by § 85.1504(a)(1)(v)).
(g) Applications for exemptions and exclusions provided for in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section shall be mailed to the Designated Compliance Officer (see 40 CFR 1068.30).
(h) Vehicles conditionally or finally admitted under this section must still comply with all applicable requirements, if any, of the Energy Tax Act of 1978, the Energy Policy and Conservation Act and any other Federal or state requirements.
§ 85.1512 Admission of catalyst and O2 sensor-equipped vehicles.
(a)(1) Notwithstanding other provisions of this subpart, any person may conditionally import a vehicle which:
(i) Was covered by a certificate of conformity at the time of original manufacture or had previously been admitted into the United States under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 (after June 30, 1988).
(ii) Was certified, or previously admitted under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 (after June 30, 1988), with a catalyst emission control system and/or O
(iii) Is labeled in accordance with 40 CFR part 86, subpart A or subpart S, or, where applicable, § 85.1510(c); and
(iv) Has been driven outside the United States, Canada and Mexico or such other countries as EPA may designate.
(2) Such vehicle must be entered under bond pursuant to 19 CFR 12.73 unless it is included in a catalyst and O
(b) For the purpose of this section, “catalyst and O
(c) For the purpose of this section, “driven outside the United States, Canada and Mexico” does not include mileage accumulated on vehicles solely under the control of manufacturers of new motor vehicles or engines for the purpose of vehicle testing and adjustment, and preparation for shipment to the United States.
(d) Vehicles conditionally imported pursuant to this section and under bond must be modified in accordance with the certificate of conformity applicable at the time of manufacture. In the case of vehicles previously imported under § 85.1509 or § 85.1504 (prior to July 1, 1988), the replacement catalyst and O
§ 85.1513 Prohibited acts; penalties.
(a) The importation of a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine which is not covered by a certificate of conformity other than in accordance with this subpart and the entry regulations of the U.S. Customs Service at 19 CFR 12.73 is prohibited. Failure to comply with this section is a violation of section 203(a)(1) of the Act.
(b) Unless otherwise permitted by this subpart, during a period of conditional admission, the importer of a vehicle shall not:
(1) Operate the vehicle on streets or highways,
(2) Sell or offer the vehicle or engine for sale, or
(3) Store the vehicle on the premises of a dealer.
(c) Any vehicle or engine conditionally admitted pursuant to § 85.1504, § 85.1511 or § 85.1512, and not granted final admission within 120 days of such conditional admission, or within such additional time as the U.S. Customs Service may allow, shall be deemed to be unlawfully imported into the United States in violation of section 203(a)(1) of the Act, unless such vehicle or engine shall have been delivered to the U.S. Customs Service for export or other disposition under applicable Customs laws and regulations. Any vehicles or engines not so delivered shall be subject to seizure by the U.S. Customs Service.
(d) Any importer who violates section 203(a)(1) of the Act is subject to a civil penalty under section 205 of the Act of not more than $32,500 for each vehicle or engine subject to the violation. In addition to the penalty provided in the Act, where applicable, under the exemption provisions of § 85.1511(b), or under § 85.1512, any person or entity who fails to deliver such vehicle or engine to the U.S. Customs Service is liable for liquidated damages in the amount of the bond required by applicable Customs laws and regulations. The civil monetary penalty amount listed in this section may not reflect recent inflation adjustments EPA is required to make. The current maximum and minimum statutory civil penalty amounts are located in § 19.4.
(e)(1) A certificate holder whose vehicles or engines imported under § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 fail to conform to Federal emission requirements after modification and/or testing under the Federal Test Procedure (FTP) or who fails to comply with applicable provisions of this subpart, may, in addition to any other applicable sanctions and penalties, be subject to any, or all, of the following sanctions:
(i) The certificate holder’s currently held certificates of conformity may be revoked or suspended;
(ii) The certificate holder may be deemed ineligible to apply for new certificates for up to 3 years; and
(iii) The certificate holder may be deemed ineligible to import vehicles or engines under § 85.1509 in the future and be placed on a list of certificate holders ineligible to import vehicles or engines under the provisions of § 85.1509.
(2) Grounds for the actions described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(i) Action or inaction by the certificate holder or the laboratory performing the FTP on behalf of the certificate holder which results in fraudulent, deceitful or grossly inaccurate representation of any fact or condition which affects a vehicle’s or engine’s eligibility for admission to the U.S. under this subpart;
(ii) Failure of a significant number of vehicles or engines imported to comply with Federal emission requirements upon EPA inspection or retest; or
(iii) Failure by a certificate holder to comply with requirements of this subpart.
(3) The following procedures govern any decision to suspend, revoke, or refuse to issue certificates under this subpart:
(i) When grounds appear to exist for the actions described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the Administrator shall notify the certificate holder in writing of any intended suspension or revocation of a certificate, proposed ineligibility to apply for new certificates, or intended suspension of eligibility to conduct modification/testing under § 85.1509, and the grounds for such action.
(ii) Except as provided by paragraph (e)(3)(iv) of this section, the certificate holder must take the following actions before the Administrator will consider withdrawing notice of intent to suspend or revoke the certificate holder’s certificate or the certificate holder’s eligibility to perform modification/testing under § 85.1509:
(A) Submit a written report to the Administrator which identifies the reason for the noncompliance of the vehicle or engines, describes the proposed remedy, including a description of any proposed quality control and/or quality assurance measures to be taken by the certificate holder to prevent the future occurrence of the problem, and states the date on which the remedies will be implemented; or
(B) Demonstrate that the vehicles or engines do in fact comply with applicable regulations in this chapter by retesting such vehicles or engines in accordance with the FTP.
(iii) A certificate holder may request within 15 calendar days of the Administrator’s notice of intent to suspend or revoke a certificate holder’s eligibility to perform modification/testing or certificate that the Administrator grant such certificate holder a hearing:
(A) As to whether the tests have been properly conducted,
(B) As to any substantial factual issue raised by the Administrator’s proposed action.
(iv) If, after the Administrator notifies a certificate holder of his/her intent to suspend or revoke a certificate holder’s certificate of conformity or its eligibility to perform modification/testing under § 85.1509 and prior to any final suspension or revocation, the certificate holder demonstrates to the Administrator’s satisfaction that the decision to initiate suspension or revocation of the certificate or eligibility to perform modification/testing under § 85.1509 was based on erroneous information, the Administrator will withdraw the notice of intent.
(4) Hearings on suspensions and revocations of certificates of conformity or of eligibility to perform modification/testing under § 85.1509 shall be held in accordance with 40 CFR part 1068, subpart G.
(5) [Reserved]
(6) In lieu of requesting a hearing under paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section, a certificate holder may respond in writing to EPA’s charges in the notice of intent to suspend or revoke. Such a written response must be received by EPA within 30 days of the date of EPA’s notice of intent. No final decision to suspend or revoke will be made before that time.
§ 85.1514 Treatment of confidential information.
The provisions of 40 CFR 1068.10 and 1068.11 apply for information you submit under this subpart.
§ 85.1515 Emission standards and test procedures applicable to imported nonconforming motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines.
(a) Notwithstanding any other requirements of this subpart, any motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine conditionally imported pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 and required to be emission tested shall be tested using the FCT at 40 CFR part 86 applicable to current model year motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines at the time of testing or reduced testing requirements as follows:
(1) ICIs are eligible for reduced testing under this paragraph (a) subject to the following conditions:
(i) The OEM must have a valid certificate of conformity covering the vehicle.
(ii) The vehicle must be in its original configuration as certified by the OEM. This applies for all emission-related components, including the electronic control module, engine calibrations, and all evaporative/refueling control hardware. It also applies for OBD software and hardware, including all sensors and actuators.
(iii) The vehicle modified as described in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section must fully comply with all applicable emission standards and requirements.
(iv) Vehicles must have the proper OBD systems installed and operating. When faults are present, the ICI must test and verify the system’s ability to find the faults (such as disconnected components), set codes, and illuminate the light, and set readiness codes as appropriate for each vehicle. When no fault is present, the ICI must verify that after sufficient prep driving (typically one FTP test cycle), all OBD readiness codes are set and the OBD system does not indicate a malfunction (i.e., no codes set and no light illuminated).
(v) The ICI may not modify more than 300 vehicles in any given model year using reduced testing provisions in this paragraph (a).
(vi) The ICI must state in the application for certification that it will meet all the conditions in this paragraph (a)(1).
(2) The following provisions allow for ICIs to certify vehicles with reduced testing:
(i) In addition to the test waivers specified in 40 CFR 86.1829, you may provide a statement in the application for certification, supported by engineering analysis, that vehicles comply with any of the following standards that apply instead of submitting test data:
(A) Cold temperature CO, NMHC, NMOG+NO
(B) SFTP emission standards specified in 40 CFR 86.1811 and 86.1816 for all pollutants, and separate emission standards that apply for US06 and SC03 duty cycles.
(C) For anything other than diesel-fueled vehicles, PM emission standards specified in 40 CFR 86.1811 and 86.1816.
(D) Any running loss, refueling, spitback, bleed emissions, and leak standards specified in 40 CFR part 86, subparts A and S.
(ii) You must perform testing and submit test data as follows to demonstrate compliance with emission standards:
(A) Exhaust and fuel economy tests. You must measure emissions over the FTP driving cycle and the highway fuel economy driving cycle as specified in 40 CFR 1066.801 to meet the fuel economy requirements in 40 CFR part 600 and demonstrate compliance with the exhaust emission standards in 40 CFR part 86 (other than PM). Measure exhaust emissions and fuel economy with the same test procedures used by the original manufacturer to test the vehicle for certification. However, you must use an electric dynamometer meeting the requirements of 40 CFR part 1066, subpart B, unless we approve a different dynamometer based on excessive compliance costs. If you certify based on testing with a different dynamometer, you must state in the application for certification that all vehicles in the emission family will comply with emission standards if tested on an electric dynamometer.
(B) Evaporative emission test. You may measure evaporative emissions as specified in this paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(B) to demonstrate compliance with the evaporative emission standards in 40 CFR part 86 instead of the otherwise specified procedures. Use measurement equipment for evaporative measurements specified in 40 CFR part 86, subpart B, except that the evaporative emission enclosure does not need to accommodate varying ambient temperatures. The evaporative measurement procedure is integral to the procedure for measuring exhaust emissions over the FTP driving cycle as described in paragraph (a)(ii)(2)(A) of this section. Perform canister preconditioning using the same procedure used by the original manufacturer to certify the vehicle; perform this canister loading before the initial preconditioning drive. Perform a diurnal emission test at the end of the stabilization period before the exhaust emission test by heating the fuel from 60 to 84 °F, either by exposing the vehicle to increasing ambient temperatures or by applying heat directly to the fuel tank. Measure hot soak emissions as described in 40 CFR 86.138-96(k). We may approve alternative measurement procedures that are equivalent to or more stringent than the specified procedures if the specified procedures are impractical for particular vehicle models or measurement facilities. The sum of the measured diurnal and hot soak values must meet the appropriate emission standard as specified in this section.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Nonconforming motor vehicles conditionally imported pursuant to § 85.1505 or § 85.1509 must meet all the emission standards specified in 40 CFR part 86 for the OP year of the vehicle, with the following exceptions and clarifications:
(1) The useful life specified in 40 CFR part 86 for the OP year of the motor vehicle is applicable where useful life is not designated in this subpart.
(2)(i) Nonconforming light-duty vehicles and light light-duty trucks (LDV/LLDTs) originally manufactured in OP years 2004, 2005 or 2006 must meet the FTP exhaust emission standards of bin 9 in Tables S04-1 and S04-2 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04 and the evaporative emission standards for light-duty vehicles and light light-duty trucks specified in 40 CFR 86.1811-01(e)(5).
(ii) Nonconforming LDT3s and LDT4s (HLDTs) and medium-duty passenger vehicles (MDPVs) originally manufactured in OP years 2004 through 2006 must meet the FTP exhaust emission standards of bin 10 in Tables S04-1 and S04-2 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04 and the applicable evaporative emission standards specified in 40 CFR 86.1811-04(e)(5). For 2004 OP year HLDTs and MDPVs where modifications commence on the first vehicle of a test group before December 21, 2003, this requirement does not apply to the 2004 OP year. ICIs opting to bring all their 2004 OP year HLDTs and MDPVs into compliance with the exhaust emission standards of bin 10 in Tables S04-1 and S04-2 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04, may use the optional higher NMOG values for their 2004-2006 OP year LDT2s and 2004-2008 LDT4s.
(iii) Nonconforming LDT3s and LDT4s (HLDTs) and medium-duty passenger vehicles (MDPVs) originally manufactured in OP years 2007 and 2008 must meet the FTP exhaust emission standards of bin 8 in Tables S04-1 and S04-2 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04 and the applicable evaporative standards specified in 40 CFR 86.1811-04(e)(5).
(iv) Nonconforming LDV/LLDTs originally manufactured in OP years 2007 through 2021 and nonconforming HLDTs and MDPVs originally manufactured in OP year 2009 through 2021 must meet the FTP exhaust emission standards of bin 5 in Tables S04-1 and S04-2 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04, and the evaporative standards specified in 40 CFR 86.1811-04(e)(1) through (4).
(v) ICIs are exempt from the Tier 2 and the interim non-Tier 2 phase-in intermediate percentage requirements for exhaust, evaporative, and refueling emissions described in 40 CFR 86.1811-04.
(vi) In cases where multiple standards exist in a given model year in 40 CFR part 86 due to phase-in requirements of new standards, the applicable standards for motor vehicle engines required to be certified to engine-based standards are the least stringent standards applicable to the engine type for the OP year.
(vii) Nonconforming LDV/LLDTs originally manufactured in OP years 2009 through 2021 must meet the evaporative emission standards in Table S09-1 in 40 CFR 86.1811-09(e). However, LDV/LLDTs originally manufactured in OP years 2009 and 2010 and imported by ICIs who qualify as small-volume manufacturers as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01 are exempt from the LDV/LLDT evaporative emission standards in Table S09-1 in 40 CFR 86.1811-09(e), but must comply with the Tier 2 evaporative emission standards in Table S04-3 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04(e).
(viii) Nonconforming HLDTs and MDPVs originally manufactured in OP years 2010 through 2021 must meet the evaporative emission standards in Table S09-1 in 40 CFR 86.1811-09(e). However, HLDTs and MDPVs originally manufactured in OP years 2010 and 2011 and imported by ICIs, who qualify as small-volume manufacturers as defined in 40 CFR 86.1838-01, are exempt from the HLDTs and MDPVs evaporative emission standards in Table S09-1 in 40 CFR 86.1811-09(e), but must comply with the Tier 2 evaporative emission standards in Table S04-3 in 40 CFR 86.1811-04(e).
(ix) Nonconforming LDV/LLDTs originally manufactured in OP years 2013 through 2021 must meet the cold temperature NMHC emission standards in Table S10-1 in 40 CFR 86.1811-10(g). Nonconforming HLDTs and MDPVs originally manufactured in OP years 2015 through 2021 must meet the cold temperature NMHC emission standards in Table S10-1 in 40 CFR 86.1811-10(g).
(x) Nonconforming vehicles subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 86, subpart S, originally manufactured in OP years 2022 through 2031 must meet the Tier 3 and related exhaust emission standards in 40 CFR 86.1811-17 and 86.1816-18, the Tier 3 evaporative emission standards in 40 CFR 86.1813-17, and the refueling emission standards in 40 CFR 86.1813-17(b) and have an OBD system meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 86.1806-17. In cases where the standard allows or requires demonstrating compliance using emission credits, each vehicle imported under this paragraph (c) is subject to the specified fleet average standard.
(xi) Nonconforming vehicles subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 86, subpart S, originally manufactured in OP years 2032 and later must meet the Tier 4 exhaust emission standards in 40 CFR 86.1811-27, the Tier 3 evaporative emission standards in 86.1813-17, and the refueling emission standards in 40 CFR 86.1813-17(b) and have an OBD system meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 86.1806-27. In cases where the standard allows or requires demonstrating compliance using emission credits, each vehicle imported under this paragraph (c) is subject to the specified fleet average standard.
(3) The following provisions apply for demonstrating compliance with the Tier 2 fleet average NO
(i) As an option to the requirements of paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (viii) of this section, independent commercial importers may elect to meet lower bins in Tables S04-1 and S04-2 of 40 CFR 86.1811-04 than specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section and bank or sell NO
(ii) Where an ICI desires to obtain a certificate of conformity using a bin higher than specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, but does not have sufficient credits to cover vehicles produced under such certificate, the Administrator may issue such certificate if the ICI has also obtained a certificate of conformity for vehicles certified using a bin lower than that required under paragraph (c)(2) of this section. The ICI may then produce vehicles to the higher bin only to the extent that it has generated sufficient credits from vehicles certified to the lower bin during the same model year.
(iii) Except for the situation where an ICI desires to bank, sell or use NO
(iv) ICIs using bins higher than those specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section must monitor their production so that they do not produce more vehicles certified to the standards of such bins than their available credits can cover. ICIs must not have a credit deficit at the end of a model year and are not permitted to use the deficit carryforward provisions provided in 40 CFR 86.1860-04(e).
(v) The Administrator may condition the certificates of conformity issued to ICIs as necessary to ensure that vehicles subject to this paragraph (c) comply with the appropriate average NO
(4) The following provisions apply for demonstrating compliance with the cold temperature NMHC fleet average standards in 40 CFR 86.1811-10 through 2021:
(i) As an alternative to the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2)(ix) of this section, ICIs may elect to meet a cold temperature NMHC family emission level below the cold temperature NMHC fleet average standards specified in Table S10-1 of 40 CFR 86.1811-10 and bank or sell credits as permitted in 40 CFR 86.1864-10. An ICI may not meet a higher cold temperature NMHC family emission level than the fleet average standards in Table S10-1 of 40 CFR 86.1811-10, unless it demonstrates to the Administrator at the time of certification that it has obtained appropriate and sufficient NMHC credits from another manufacturer, or has generated them in a previous model year or in the current model year and not traded them to another manufacturer or used them to address other vehicles as permitted in 40 CFR 86.1864-10.
(ii) Where an ICI desires to obtain a certificate of conformity using a higher cold temperature NMHC family emission level than specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ix) of this section, but does not have sufficient credits to cover vehicles imported under such certificate, the Administrator may issue such certificate if the ICI has also obtained a certificate of conformity for vehicles certified using a cold temperature NMHC family emission level lower than that required under paragraph (c)(2)(ix) of this section. The ICI may then import vehicles to the higher cold temperature NMHC family emission level only to the extent that it has generated sufficient credits from vehicles certified to a family emission level lower than the cold temperature NMHC fleet average standard during the same model year.
(iii) ICIs using cold temperature NMHC family emission levels higher than the cold temperature NMHC fleet average standards specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ix) of this section must monitor their imports so that they do not import more vehicles certified to such family emission levels than their available credits can cover. ICIs must not have a credit deficit at the end of a model year and are not permitted to use the deficit carryforward provisions provided in 40 CFR 86.1864-10.
(iv) The Administrator may condition the certificates of conformity issued to ICIs as necessary to ensure that vehicles subject to this paragraph (c)(8) comply with the applicable cold temperature NMHC fleet average standard for each model year.
(5) In cases where a vehicle is subject to a Tier 3 or Tier 4 credit-based standard as described in paragraphs (c)(2)(x) and (xi) of this section, an ICI may import a vehicle with emissions higher than the applicable standard if it first arranges to purchase appropriate and sufficient emission credits from a manufacturer that has generated the emission credits as specified in 40 CFR part 86, subpart S. A vehicle’s emissions may not exceed the specified values for the highest available NMOG + NO
(6) An ICI may comply with the cold temperature PM standard in 40 CFR 86.1811-27(c) based on an engineering evaluation.
(d) An ICI may not certify using nonconformance penalties and may not participate in the averaging, banking, and trading program for GHG emissions.
Subpart Q [Reserved]
Subpart R—Exclusion and Exemption of Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle Engines
§ 85.1701 General applicability.
(a) The provisions of this subpart regarding exemptions are applicable to new and in-use motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines, except as follows:
(1) Beginning January 1, 2014, the exemption provisions of 40 CFR part 1068, subpart C, apply instead of the provisions of this subpart for heavy-duty motor vehicle engines and heavy-duty motor vehicles regulated under 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, 40 CFR part 1036, or 40 CFR part 1037, except that the nonroad competition exemption of 40 CFR 1068.235 and the nonroad hardship exemption provisions of 40 CFR 1068.245, 1068.250, and 1068.255 do not apply for motor vehicle engines. Note that the provisions for emergency vehicle field modifications in § 85.1716 continue to apply for heavy-duty engines.
(2) Prior to January 1, 2014, the provisions of §§ 85.1706 through 85.1709 apply for heavy-duty motor vehicle engines.
(b) The provisions of 40 CFR 1068.10 and 1068.11 apply for information you submit under this subpart.
(c) References to engine families and emission control systems in this subpart or in 40 CFR part 1068 apply to durability groups and test groups as applicable for manufacturers certifying vehicles under the provisions of 40 CFR part 86, subpart S.
(d) In a given model year, manufacturers of motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines may ask us to approve the use of administrative or compliance procedures specified in 40 CFR part 1068 instead of the comparable procedures that apply for vehicles or engines certified under this part or 40 CFR part 86.
§ 85.1702 Definitions.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act:
Certificate holder has the meaning given in 40 CFR 1068.30.
Export exemption means an exemption granted by statute under 42 U.S.C. 7522(b)(3) for the purpose of exporting new motor vehicles or new motor vehicle engines.
National security exemption means an exemption which may be granted under 42 U.S.C. 7522(b)(1) of the Act for the purpose of national security.
Pre-certification vehicle means an uncertified vehicle that a certificate holder employs in fleets from year to year in the ordinary course of business for product development, production method assessment, and market promotion, but not involving lease or sale.
Pre-certification vehicle engine means an uncertified heavy-duty engine owned by a manufacturer and used in a manner not involving lease or sale in a vehicle employed from year to year in the ordinary course of business for product development, production method assessment and market promotion purposes.
Testing exemption means an exemption which may be granted under 42 U.S.C. 7522(b)(1) for the purpose of research investigations, studies, demonstrations or training, but not including national security.
§ 85.1703 Definition of motor vehicle.
(a) For the purpose of determining the applicability of section 216(2), a vehicle which is self-propelled and capable of transporting a person or persons or any material or any permanently or temporarily affixed apparatus shall be deemed a motor vehicle, unless any one or more of the criteria set forth below are met, in which case the vehicle shall be deemed not a motor vehicle:
(1) The vehicle cannot exceed a maximum speed of 25 miles per hour over level, paved surfaces; or
(2) The vehicle lacks features customarily associated with safe and practical street or highway use, such features including, but not being limited to, a reverse gear (except in the case of motorcycles), a differential, or safety features required by state and/or federal law; or
(3) The vehicle exhibits features which render its use on a street or highway unsafe, impractical, or highly unlikely, such features including, but not being limited to, tracked road contact means, an inordinate size, or features ordinarily associated with military combat or tactical vehicles such as armor and/or weaponry.
(b) Note that, in applying the criterion in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, vehicles that are clearly intended for operation on highways are motor vehicles. Absence of a particular safety feature is relevant only when absence of that feature would prevent operation on highways.
§ 85.1704 Who may request an exemption.
(a) Any person may request a testing exemption.
(b) Any manufacturer may request a national security exemption under § 85.1708.
(c) For manufacturers, vehicles or engines for export purposes are exempt without application, subject to the provisions of § 85.1709. For eligible manufacturers, as determined by § 85.1706, vehicles or engines for pre-certification purposes are exempt without application, subject to the provisions of § 85.1706(a).
§ 85.1705 Testing exemption.
(a) Any person requesting a testing exemption must demonstrate the following:
(1) That the proposed test program has a purpose which constitutes an appropriate basis for an exemption in accordance with section 203(b)(1);
(2) That the proposed test program necessitates the granting of an exemption;
(3) That the proposed test program exhibits reasonableness in scope; and
(4) That the proposed test program exhibits a degree of control consonant with the purpose of the program and the Environmental Protection Agency’s (hereafter EPA) monitoring requirements. Paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and (e) of this section describe what constitutes a sufficient demonstration for each of the four above identified elements.
(b) With respect to the purpose of the proposed test program, an appropriate purpose is one which is consistent with one or more of the bases for exemption set forth under section 203(b)(1), namely, research, investigations, studies, demonstrations, or training, but not including national security. A concise statement of purpose is a required item of information.
(c) With respect to the necessity that an exemption be granted, necessity arises from an inability to achieve the stated purpose in a practicable manner without performing or causing to be performed one or more of the prohibited acts under section 203(a). In appropriate circumstances time constraints may be a sufficient basis for necessity, but the cost of certification alone, in the absence of extraordinary circumstances, is not a basis for necessity.
(d) With respect to reasonableness, a test program must exhibit a duration of reasonable length and affect a reasonable number of vehicles or engines. In this regard, required items of information include:
(1) An estimate of the program’s duration;
(2) The maximum number of vehicles or engines involved; and
(e) With respect to control, the test program must incorporate procedures consistent with the purpose of the test and be capable of affording EPA monitoring capability. As a minimum, required items of information include:
(1) The technical nature of the test;
(2) The site of the test;
(3) The time or mileage duration of the test;
(4) The ownership arrangement with regard to the vehicles or engines involved in the test;
(5) The intended final disposition of the vehicles or engines;
(6) The manner in which vehicle identification numbers or the engine serial numbers will be identified, recorded, and made available; and
(7) The means or procedure whereby test results will be recorded.
(f) A manufacturer of new motor vehicles or new motor vehicle engines may request a testing exemption to cover any vehicles and/or engines intended for use in test programs planned or anticipated over the course of a subsequent one-year period. Unless otherwise required by the Director, Manufacturers Operations Division, a manufacturer requesting such an exemption need only furnish the information required by paragraphs (a)(1) and (d)(2) of this section along with a description of the recordkeeping and control procedures that will be employed to assure that the vehicles and/or engines are used for purposes consistent with section 203(b)(1).
§ 85.1706 Pre-certification exemption.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, any pre-certification vehicle or pre-certification vehicle engine, as defined by § 85.1702(a) (3) or (4), is exempt from section 203(a), without application, if the manufacturer complies with the following terms and conditions:
(1) The manufacturer shall create, maintain, and make available at reasonable times for review or copying by appropriate EPA employees records which provide each vehicle identification or engine serial number, indicate the use of the vehicle or engine on exempt status and indicate the final disposition of any vehicle or engine removed from exempt status; and
(2) Unless the requirement is waived or an alternative procedure is approved by the Director, Manufacturers Operations Division, the manufacturer shall permanently affix to each vehicle or engine on exempt status in a readily visible portion of the engine compartment (on a readily visible portion of a heavy-duty engine or in a readily accessible position on a motorcycle) a label which cannot be removed without destruction or defacement and which states in the English language, in block letters and numerals of a color that contrasts with the background of the label, the following information:
(i) The label heading: Emission Control Information;
(ii) Full corporate name and trademark of manufacturer;
(iii) Engine displacement, engine family identification and model year of vehicle or engine; or person or office to be contacted for further information about the vehicle or engine;
(iv) The statement: THIS VEHICLE OR ENGINE IS EXEMPT FROM THE PROHIBITIONS OF SECTIONS 203(a)(1), (3) and (4) OF THE CLEAN AIR ACT, AS AMENDED.
(3) No provision of paragraph (a)(2) of this section shall prevent a manufacturer from including any other information it desires on the label.
(b) Any manufacturer that desires a pre-certification exemption and is in the business of importing, modifying or testing uncertified vehicles for resale under the provisions of 40 CFR 85.1501 through 85.1515, must send the request to the Designated Compliance Officer as specified in 40 CFR 1068.30. The Designated Compliance Officer may require such manufacturers to submit information regarding the general nature of the fleet activities, the number of vehicles involved, and a demonstration that adequate record-keeping procedures for control purposes will be employed.
§ 85.1707 Display exemption.
Where an uncertified vehicle or engine is a display vehicle or engine to be used solely for display purposes, will not be operated on the public streets or highways except for that operation incident and necessary to the display purpose, and will not be sold unless an applicable certificate of conformity has been received, no request for exemption of the vehicle or engine is necessary.
§ 85.1708 National security exemption.
A manufacturer requesting a national security exemption must state the purpose for which the exemption is required and the request must be endorsed by an agency of the Federal Government charged with responsibility for national defense.
§ 85.1709 Export exemptions.
(a) A new motor vehicle or new motor vehicle engine intended solely for export, and so labeled or tagged on the outside of the container and on the vehicle or engine itself, shall be subject to the provisions of section 203(a) of the Act, unless the importing country has new motor vehicle emission standards which differ from the USEPA standards.
(b) For the purpose of paragraph (a) of this section, a country having no standards, whatsoever, is deemed to be a country having emission standards which differ from USEPA standards.
(c) EPA shall periodically publish in the
(d) It is a condition of any exemption for the purpose of export under section 203(b)(3) of the Act, that such exemption shall be void ab initio with respect to a new motor vehicle or new motor vehicle engine intended solely for export where:
(1) Such motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine is sold, or offered for sale, to an ultimate purchaser in the United States for purposes other than export; and
(2) The motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine manufacturer had reason to believe that any such vehicle would be sold or offered for sale as described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
§ 85.1710 Granting of exemptions.
(a) If upon completion of the review of an exemption request, as required by §§ 85.1705 and 85.1708, the granting of an exemption is deemed appropriate, a memorandum of exemption will be prepared and submitted to the person requesting the exemption. The memorandum will set forth the basis for the exemption, its scope, and such terms and conditions as are deemed necessary. Such terms and conditions will generally, include, but are not limited to, agreements by the applicant to conduct the exempt activity in the manner described to EPA, create and maintain adequate records accessible to EPA at reasonable times, employ labels for the exempt engines or vehicles setting forth the nature of the exemption, take appropriate measures to assure that the terms of the exemption are met, and advise EPA of the termination of the activity and the ultimate disposition of the vehicles or engines.
(b) Any exemption granted pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section shall be deemed to cover any subject vehicle or engine only to the extent that the specified terms and conditions are complied with. A breach of any term or condition shall cause the exemption to be void ab initio with respect to any vehicle or engine. Consequently, the causing or the performing of an act prohibited under sections 203(a) (1) or (3) of the Clean Air Act other than in strict conformity with all terms and conditions of this exemption shall render the person to whom the exemption is granted, and any other person to whom the provisions of section 203 are applicable, liable to suit under sections 204 and 205 of the Act.
§ 85.1711 Submission of exemption requests.
Requests for exemption or further information concerning exemptions and/or the exemption request review procedure should be addressed to the Designated Compliance Officer as specified at 40 CFR 1068.30.
§§ 85.1712-85.1714 [Reserved]
§ 85.1715 Aircraft meeting the definition of motor vehicle.
This section applies for aircraft meeting the definition of motor vehicle in § 85.1703.
(a) For the purpose of this section, aircraft means any vehicle capable of sustained air travel above treetop heights.
(b) The standards, requirements, and prohibitions of 40 CFR part 86 do not apply for aircraft or aircraft engines. Standards apply separately to certain aircraft engines, as described in 40 CFR part 87.
§ 85.1716 Approval of an emergency vehicle field modification (EVFM).
This section describes how you may implement design changes for an emergency vehicle that has already been placed into service to ensure that the vehicle will perform properly in emergency situations. This applies for any light-duty vehicle, light-duty truck, or heavy-duty vehicle meeting the definition of emergency vehicle in 40 CFR 86.1803-01 or 1036.801. In this section, “you” refers to the certifying manufacturer and “we” refers to the EPA Administrator and any authorized representatives.
(a) You must notify us in writing of your intent to install or distribute an emergency vehicle field modification (EVFM). In some cases you may install or distribute an EVFM only with our advance approval, as specified in this section.
(b) Include in your notification a full description of the EVFM and any documentation to support your determination that the EVFM is necessary to prevent the vehicle from losing speed, torque, or power due to abnormal conditions of its emission control system, or to prevent such abnormal conditions from occurring during operation related to emergency response. Examples of such abnormal conditions may include excessive exhaust backpressure from an overloaded particulate trap, or running out of diesel exhaust fluid for engines that rely on urea-based selective catalytic reduction. Your determination must be based on an engineering evaluation or testing or both.
(c) You may need our advance approval for your EVFM, as follows:
(1) Where the proposed EVFM is identical to an AECD we approved under this part for an engine family currently in production, no approval of the proposed EVFM is necessary.
(2) Where the proposed EVFM is for an engine family currently in production but the applicable demonstration is based on an AECD we approved under this part for an engine family no longer in production, you must describe to us how your proposed EVFM differs from the approved AECD. Unless we say otherwise, your proposed EVFM is deemed approved 30 days after you notify us.
(3) If we have not approved an EVFM comparable to the one you are proposing, you must get our approval before installing or distributing it. In this case, we may request additional information to support your determination under paragraph (b) of this section, as follows:
(i) If we request additional information and you do not provide it within 30 days after we ask, we may deem that you have retracted your request for our approval; however, we may extend this deadline for submitting the additional information.
(ii) We will deny your request if we determine that the EVFM is not necessary to prevent the vehicle from losing speed, torque, or power due abnormal conditions of the emission control system, or to prevent such abnormal conditions from occurring, during operation related to emergency response.
(iii) Unless we say otherwise, your proposed EVFM is deemed approved 30 days after we acknowledge that you have provided us with all the additional information we have specified.
(4) If your proposed EVFM is deemed to be approved under paragraph (c)(2) or (3) of this section and we find later that your EVFM in fact does not meet the requirements of this section, we may require you to no longer install or distribute it.
Subpart S—Recall Regulations
§ 85.1801 Applicability and definitions.
(a) The recall provisions of 40 CFR part 1068, subpart E, apply instead of the provisions of this subpart for heavy-duty motor vehicles and heavy-duty motor vehicle engines regulated under 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, and 40 CFR parts 1036 and 1037. The provisions of this subpart apply for other motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines.
(b) For the purposes of this subpart, except as otherwise provided, words shall be defined as provided for by sections 214 and 302 of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 1857, as amended.
(1) Act shall mean the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 1857, as amended.
(2) Days shall mean calendar days.
§ 85.1802 Notice to manufacturer of nonconformity; submission of Remedial Plan.
(a) A manufacturer will be notified whenever the Administrator has determined that a substantial number of a class or category of vehicles or engines produced by that manufacturer, although properly maintained and used, do not conform to the regulations prescribed under section 202 of the Act in effect during (and applicable to) the model year of such vehicle. The notification will include a description of each class or category of vehicles or engines encompassed by the determination of nonconformity, will give the factual basis for the determination of nonconformity (except information previously provided the manufacturer by the Agency), and will designate a date, no sooner than 45 days from the date of receipt of such notification, by which the manufacturer shall have submitted a plan to remedy the nonconformity.
(b) Unless a hearing is requested pursuant to § 85.1807, the remedial plan shall be submitted to the Administrator within the time limit specified in the Administrator’s notification, provided that the Administrator may grant the manufacturer an extension upon good cause shown.
(c) If a manufacturer requests a public hearing pursuant to § 85.1807, unless as a result of such hearing the Administrator withdraws his determination of nonconformity, the manufacturer shall submit the remedial plan within 30 days of the end of such hearing.
§ 85.1803 Remedial Plan.
(a) When any manufacturer is notified by the Administrator that a substantial number of any class or category of vehicles or engines, although properly maintained and used, do not conform to the regulations (including emission standards) or family particulate emission limits, as defined in part 86 promulgated under section 202 of the Act and in effect during (and applicable to) the model year of such class or classes of vehicles or engines, the manufacturer shall submit a plan to the Administrator to remedy such nonconformity. The plan shall contain the following:
(1) A description of each class or category of vehicle or engine to be recalled including the model year, the make, the model, and such other information as may be required to identify the vehicles or engines to be recalled.
(2) A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs, corrections, adjustments or other changes to be made to bring the vehicles or engines into conformity including a brief summary of the data and technical studies which support the manufacturer’s decision as to the particular remedial changes to be used in correcting the nonconformity.
(3) A description of the method by which the manufacturer will determine the names and addresses of vehicle or engine owners.
(4) A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, upon which the manufacturer conditions eligibility for repair under the remedial plan, an explanation of the manufacturer’s reasons for imposing any such condition, and a description of the proof to be required of a vehicle or engine owner to demonstrate compliance with any such condition. Eligibility may not be denied solely on the basis that the vehicle or engine owner used parts not manufactured by the original equipment vehicle manufacturer, or had repairs performed by outlets other than the vehicle manufacturer’s franchised dealers. No maintenance or use condition may be imposed unless it is, in the judgement of the Administrator, demonstrably related to preventing the nonconformity.
(5) A description of the procedure to be followed by vehicle or engine owners to obtain correction of the nonconformity. This shall include designation of the date on or after which the owner can have the nonconformity remedied, the time reasonably necessary to perform the labor required to correct the nonconformity, and the designation of facilities at which the nonconformity can be remedied: Provided, That repair shall be completed within a reasonable time designated by the Administrator from the date the owner first tenders his vehicle or engine after the date designated by the manufacturer as the date on or after which the owner can have the nonconformity remedied.
(6) If some or all of the nonconforming vehicles or engines are to be remedied by persons other than dealers or authorized warranty agents of the manufacturer, a description of the class of persons other than dealers and authorized warranty agents of the manufacturer who will remedy the nonconformity, and a statement indicating that the participating members of the class will be properly equipped to perform such remedial action.
(7) Three copies of the letters of notification to be sent to vehicle or engine owners.
(8) A description of the system by which the manufacturer will assure that an adequate supply of parts will be available to perform the repair under the remedial plan including the date by which an adequate supply of parts will be available to initiate the repair campaign, the percentage of the total parts requirement of each person who is to perform the repair under the remedial plan to be shipped to initiate the campaign, and the method to be used to assure the supply remains both adequate and responsive to owner demand.
(9) Three copies of all necessary instructions to be sent to those persons who are to perform the repair under the remedial plan.
(10) A description of the impact of the proposed changes on fuel consumption, driveability, and safety of each class or category of vehicles or engines to be recalled and a brief summary of the data, technical studies, or engineering evaluations which support these conclusions.
(11) Any other information, reports or data which the Administrator may reasonably determine is necessary to evaluate the remedial plan.
(b)(1) Notification to vehicle or engine owners shall be made by first class mail or by such means as approved by the Administrator: Provided, That for good cause, the Administrator may require the use of certified mail to ensure an effective notification.
(2) The manufacture shall use all reasonable means necessary to locate vehicle or engine owners: Provided, That for good cause, the Administrator may require the manufacturer to use motor vehicle registration lists as available from State or commercial sources to obtain the names and addresses of vehicle or engine owners to ensure an effective notification.
(3) The Administrator reserves the right to require the manufacturer to send by first class mail or other reasonable means subsequent notification to vehicle or engine owners: Provided, That for good cause, the Administrator may require the use of certified mail to ensure an effectctive notification.
(c)(1) The manufacturer shall require those who perform the repair under the remedial plan to affix a label to each vehicle or engine repaired or, when required, inspected under the remedial plan.
(2) The label shall be placed in such location as approved by the Administrator consistent with State law and shall be fabricated of a material suitable for the location in which it is installed and which is not readily removable intact.
(3) The label shall contain:
(i) The recall campaign number; and
(ii) A code designating the campaign facility at which the repair, or inspection for repair was performed.
(4) The Administrator reserves the right to waive any or all of the requirements of this paragraph if he determines that they constitute an unwarranted burden to the manufacturer.
(d) The Administrator may require the manufacturer to conduct tests on components and vehicles or engines incorporating a proposed change, repair, or modification reasonably designed and necessary to demonstrate the effectiveness of the change, repair, or modification.
(e) A remedial plan for an alternative remedy under 40 CFR 86.1865-12(j)(3) that does not involve vehicle repairs may omit items from this section that do not apply. For example, such a remedial plan will generally omit information related to proper maintenance, vehicle repairs, and vehicle labeling.
An interpretive ruling regarding § 85.1803 is published in appendix A to this subpart.
§ 85.1804 Approval of Plan: Implementation.
(a) If the Administrator finds that the remedial plan is designed and effective to correct the nonconformity, he will so notify the manufacturer in writing. If the remedial plan is not approved, the Administrator will provide the manufacturer notice of the disapproval and the reasons for the disapproval in writing.
(b) Upon receipt of notice from the Administrator that the remedial plan has been approved, the manufacturer shall commence implementation of the approved plan. Notification of vehicle or engine owners shall be in accordance with requirements of this subpart and shall proceed as follows:
(1) When no public hearing as described in § 85.1807 is requested by the manufacturer, notification of vehicles or engine owners shall commence within 15 working days of the receipt by the manufacturer of the Administrator’s approval unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
(2) When a public hearing as described in § 85.1807 is held, unless as a result of such hearing the Administrator withdraws the determination of nonconformity, the Administrator shall, within 60 days after the completion of such hearing, order the manufacturer to provide prompt notification of such nonconformity.
§ 85.1805 Notification to vehicle or engine owners.
(a) Except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the notification of vehicle or engine owners shall contain the following:
(1) The statement: “The Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency has determined that your vehicle or engine may be emitting pollutants in excess of the Federal emission standards or family particulate emission limits, as defined in part 86. These standards or family particulate emission limits, as defined in part 86 were established to protect the public health or welfare from the dangers of air pollution.”
(2) A statement that the nonconformity of any such vehicles or engines which have been, if required by the remedial plan, properly maintained and used, will be remedied at the expense of the manufacturer.
(3) A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, upon which the manufacturer conditions eligibility for repair under the remedial plan and a description of the proof to be required of a vehicle or engine owner to demonstrate compliance with such condition. Eligibility may not be denied solely on the basis that the vehicle or engine owner used parts not manufactured by the original equipment vehicle manufacturer, or had repairs performed by outlets other than the vehicle manufacturer’s franchised dealers.
(4) A clear description of the components which will be affected by the remedy and a general statement of the measures to be taken to correct the nonconformity.
(5) A statement that such nonconformity if not repaired may cause the vehicle or engine to fail an emission inspection test when such tests are required under State or local law.
(6) A description of the adverse affects, if any, that an uncorrected nonconformity would have on the performance or driveability of the vehicle or engine.
(7) A description of the adverse affects, if any, that such nonconformity would have on the functions of other engine components.
(8) A description of the procedure which the vehicle or engine owner should follow to obtain correction of the nonconformity. This shall include designation of the date on or after which the owner can have the nonconformity remedied, the time reasonably necessary to perform the labor required to correct the nonconformity, and the designation of facilities at which the nonconformity can be remedied.
(9) A card to be used by a vehicle or engine owner in the event the vehicle or engine to be recalled has been sold. Such card should be addressed to the manufacturer and shall provide a space in which the owner may indicate the name and address of the person to whom the vehicle or engine was sold.
(10) The statement: “In order to ensure your full protection under the emission warranty made applicable to your (vehicle or engine) by Federal law, and your right to participate in future recalls, it is recommended that you have (vehicle or engine) serviced as soon as possible. Failure to do so could legally be determined to be a lack of proper maintenance of your (vehicle or engine).”
(b) In the case of manufacturers submitting an alternative remedy under 40 CFR 86.1865-12(j)(3) that does not involve vehicle repairs, the proposed remedy must also include a proposal for notifying owners of the nonconformity. The notification must contain the following:
(1) The statement: “The Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency has determined that your vehicle or engine may be emitting pollutants in excess of the Federal emission standards as defined in 40 CFR part 86. These emission standards were established to protect the public health or welfare from the dangers of air pollution.”
(2) A clear description of the measures to be taken to correct the nonconformity.
(c) No notice sent pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section nor any other contemporaneous communication sent to vehicle or engine owners or dealers shall contain any statement or implication that the nonconformity does not exist or that the nonconformity will not degrade air quality.
(d) The manufacturer shall be informed of any other requirements pertaining to the notification under this section which the Administrator has determined are reasonable and necessary to ensure the effectiveness of the recall campaign.
§ 85.1806 Records and reports.
(a) The manufacturer shall provide to the Administrator a copy of all communications which relate to the remedial plan directed to dealers and other persons who are to perform the repair under the remedial plan. Such copies shall be mailed to the Administrator contemporaneously with their transmission to dealers and other persons who are to perform the repair under the remedial plan.
(b) The manufacturer shall provide for the establishment and maintenance of records to enable the Administrator to conduct a continuing analysis of the adequacy of the recall campaign. The records shall include, for each class or category of vehicle or engine, but need not be limited to, the following:
(1) Recall campaign number as designated by the manufacturer.
(2) Date owner notification was begun, and date completed.
(3) Number of vehicles or engines involved in the recall campaign.
(4) Number of vehicles or engines known or estimated to be affected by the nonconformity.
(5) Number of vehicles or engines inspected pursuant to the remedial plan.
(6) Number of inspected vehicles found to be affected by the nonconformity.
(7) Number of vehicles actually receiving repair under the remedial plan.
(8) Number of vehicles determined to be unavailable for inspection or repair under the remedial plan due to exportation, theft, scrapping or for other reasons (specify).
(9) Number of vehicles or engines determined to be ineligible for remedial action due to a failure to properly maintain or use such vehicles or engines.
(c) If the manufacturer determines that the original answers for paragraphs (b) (3) and (4) of this section are incorrect, revised figures and an explanatory note shall be submitted. Answers to paragraphs (b) (5), (6), (7), and (8), and (9) of this section shall be cumulative totals.
(d) Unless otherwise directed by the Administrator, the information specified in paragraph (b) of this section shall be included in quarterly reports, with respect to each recall campaign, for six consecutive quarters beginning with the quarter in which the notification of owners was initiated, or until all nonconforming vehicles or engines involved in the campaign have been remedied, whichever occurs sooner. Such reports shall be submitted no later than 25 working days after the close of each calendar quarter.
(e) The manufacturer shall maintain in a form suitable for inspection, such as computer information storage devices or card files, lists of the names and addresses of vehicles or engine owners.
(1) To whom notification was given;
(2) Who received remedial repair or inspection under the remedial plan; and
(3) When eligibility for repair is conditioned on proper maintenance or use, that were determined not to qualify for such remedial action.
(f) The records described in paragraph (e) of this section shall be made available to the Administrator upon request.
(g) The records and reports required by this section shall be retained for not less than 5 years.
§ 85.1807 Public hearings.
Manufacturers may request a hearing as described in 40 CFR part 1068, subpart G.
§ 85.1808 Treatment of confidential information.
The provisions of 40 CFR 1068.10 and 1068.11 apply for information you submit under this subpart.
Appendix A to Subpart S of Part 85—Interpretive Ruling for § 85.1803—Remedial Plans
The purpose of this rule is to set forth EPA’s interpretation regarding one aspect of a motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine manufacturer’s recall liability under section 207(c)(1) of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7641(c)(1). This rule will provide guidance to vehicle and engine manufacturers to better enable them to submit acceptable remedial plans.
Section 207(c)(1) requires the Administrator to base a recall order on a determination that a substantial number of in-use vehicles or engines within a given class or category of vehicles or engines, although properly maintained and used, fail to conform to the regulations prescribed under section 202 when in actual use throughout their useful lives. After making such a determination, he shall require the manufacturer to submit a plan to remedy the nonconformity of any such vehicles or engines. The plan shall provide that the manufacturer will remedy, at the manufacturer’s expense, all properly maintained and used vehicles which experienced the nonconformity during their useful lives regardless of their age or mileage at the time of repair.
Subpart T—Emission Defect Reporting Requirements
§ 85.1901 Applicability.
(a) The requirements of this subpart shall be applicable to all 1972 and later model year motor vehicles and motor vehicle engines, except that the provisions of 40 CFR 1068.501 apply instead for heavy-duty motor vehicle engines and heavy-duty motor vehicles certified under 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, or 40 CFR part 1036 or 1037 starting January 1, 2018.
(b) The requirement to report emission-related defects affecting a given class or category of vehicles or engines shall remain applicable for five years from the end of the model year in which such vehicles or engines were manufactured.
§ 85.1902 Definitions.
For the purposes of this subpart and unless otherwise noted:
(a) Act means the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q, as amended.
(b) Emission-related defect means:
(1) A defect in design, materials, or workmanship in a device, system, or assembly described in the approved Application for Certification that affects any parameter or specification enumerated in appendix VIII of this part; or
(2) A defect in the design, materials, or workmanship in one or more emission-related parts, components, systems, software, or elements of design which must function properly to ensure continued compliance with greenhouse gas emission standards in 40 CFR part 86.
(c) Useful life has the meaning given in section 202(d) of the Act (42 U.S.C.7521(d)) and regulations promulgated thereunder.
(d) Voluntary emissions recall means a repair, adjustment, or modification program voluntarily initiated and conducted by a manufacturer to remedy any emission-related defect for which direct notification of vehicle or engine owners has been provided, including programs to remedy defects related to emissions standards for CO
(e) Ultimate purchaser has the meaning given in section 216 of the Act (42 U.S.C.7550).
(f) Manufacturer has the meaning given in section 216 of the Act (42 U.S.C.7550).
§ 85.1903 Emissions defect information report.
(a) A manufacturer shall file a defect information report whenever, on the basis of data obtained subsequent to the effective date of these regulations:
(1) The manufacturer determines in accordance with procedures established by the manufacturer to identify safety related defects (pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 1381 et seq., as amended) that a specific emission-related defect exists; and
(2) That the specific emission-related defect exists in twenty-five or more vehicles or engines of the same model year.
(b) Defect information reports required under paragraph (a) of this section shall be submitted not more than 15 working days after an emission-related defect is found to affect twenty-five vehicles or engines of the same model year. Items of information required by paragraph (c) of this section that are either not available within that period or are significantly revised shall be submitted as they become available.
(c) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each defect report shall contain the following information in substantially the format outlined below:
(1) The manufacturer’s corporate name.
(2) A description of the defect.
(3) A description of each class or category of vehicles or engines potentially affected by the defect including make, model, model year, and such other information as may be required to identify the vehicles or engines affected.
(4) For each class or category of vehicle or engine described in response to paragraph (c)(3) of this section, the following shall also be provided:
(i) The number of vehicles or engines known or estimated to have the defect and an explanation of the means by which this number was determined.
(ii) The address of the plant(s) at which the potentially defective vehicles or engines were produced.
(5) An evaluation of the emissions impact of the defect and a description of any driveability problems which a defective vehicle might exhibit.
(6) Available emissions data which relate to the defect.
(7) An indication of any anticipated manufacturer follow-up.
§ 85.1904 Voluntary emissions recall report; quarterly reports.
(a) When any manufacturer initiates a voluntary emissions recall campaign involving twenty-five or more vehicles or engines, the manufacturer shall submit a report describing the manufacturer’s voluntary emissions recall plan as prescribed by this section within 15 working days of the date owner notification was begun. The report shall contain the following:
(1) A description of each class or category of vehicle or engine recalled including the number of vehicles to be recalled, the model year, the make, the model, and such other information as may be required to identify the vehicles or engines recalled.
(2) A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs, corrections, adjustments, or other changes to be made to correct the vehicles or engines affected by the emission-related defect.
(3) A description of the method by which the manufacturer will determine the names and addresses of vehicle or engine owners and the method by which they will be notified.
(4) A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, upon which the manufacturer conditions eligibility for repair under the remedial plan, an explanation of the manufacturer’s reasons for imposing any such condition, and a description of the proof to be required of a vehicle or engine owner to demonstrate compliance with any such condition.
(5) A description of the procedure to be followed by vehicle or engine owners to obtain correction of the nonconformity. This shall include designation of the date on or after which the owner can have the nonconformity remedied, the time reasonably necessary to perform the labor to remedy the defect, and the designation of facilities at which the defect can be remedied.
(6) If some or all of the nonconforming vehicles or engines are to be remedied by persons other than dealers or authorized warranty agents of the manufacturer, a description of the class of persons other than dealers and authorized warranty agents of the manufacturer who will remedy the defect.
(7) Three copies of the letters of notification to be sent to vehicle or engine owners.
(8) A description of the system by which the manufacturer will assure that an adequate supply of parts will be available to perform the repair under the remedial plan including the date by which an adequate supply of parts will be available to initiate the repair campaign, the percentage of the total parts requirement of each person who is to perform the repair under the remedial plan to be shipped to initiate the campaign, and the method to be used to assure the supply remains both adequate and responsive to owner demand.
(9) Three copies of all necessary instructions to be sent to those persons who are to perform the repair under the remedial plan.
(10) A description of the impact of the proposed changes on fuel consumption, driveability, and safety of each class or category of vehicles or engines to be recalled.
(11) A sample of any label to be applied to vehicles or engines which participate in the voluntary recall campaign.
(b) Unless otherwise specified by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall report on the progress of the recall campaign by submitting subsequent reports for six consecutive quarters commencing with the quarter after the voluntary emissions recall campaign actually begins. Such reports shall be submitted no later than 25 working days after the close of each calendar quarter. For each class or category of vehicle or engine subject to the voluntary emissions recall campaign, the quarterly report shall contain the:
(1) Emission recall campaign number, if any, designated by the manufacturer.
(2) Date owner notification was begun, and date completed.
(3) Number of vehicles or engines involved in the voluntary emissions recall campaign.
(4) Number of vehicles or engines known or estimated to be affected by the emission-related defect and an explanation of the means by which this number was determined.
(5) Number of vehicles or engines inspected pursuant to the voluntary emissions recall plan.
(6) Number of inspected vehicles found to be affected by the emission-related defect.
(7) Number of vehicles actually receiving repair under the remedial plan.
(8) Number of vehicles determined to be unavailable for inspection or repair under the remedial plan due to exportation, theft, scrapping, or for other reasons (specify).
(9) Number of vehicles or engines determined to be ineligible for remedial action due to a failure to properly maintain or use such vehicles or engines.
(10) Three copies of any service bulletins transmitted to dealers which relate to the defect to be corrected and which have not previously been reported.
(11) Three copies of all communications transmitted to vehicle or engine owners which relate to the defect to be corrected and which have not previously been submitted.
(c) If the manufacturer determines that any of the information requested in paragraph (b) of this section has changed or was incorrect, revised information and an explanatory note shall be submitted. Answers to paragraphs (b)(5), (6), (7), (8), and (9) of this section shall be cumulative totals.
(d) The manufacturer shall maintain in a form suitable for inspection, such as computer information storage devices or card files, the names and addresses of vehicles or engine owners:
(1) To whom notification was given;
(2) Who received remedial repair or inspection under the remedial plan; and
(3) Who were determined not to qualify for such remedial action when eligibility is conditioned on proper maintenance or use.
(e) The records described in paragraph (d) of this section shall be made available to the Administrator upon request.
§ 85.1905 Alternative report formats.
(a) Any manufacturer may submit a plan for making either of the reports required by §§ 85.1903 and 85.1904 on computer cards, magnetic tape or other machine readable format. The proposed plan shall be accompanied by sufficient technical detail to allow a determination that data requirements of these sections will be met and that the data in such format will be usable by EPA.
(b) Upon approval by the Administrator of the proposed reporting system, the manufacturer may utilize such system until otherwise notified by the Administrator.
§ 85.1906 Report filing: Record retention.
(a) The reports required by §§ 85.1903 and 85.1904 shall be sent to the Designated Compliance Officer as specified at 40 CFR 1068.30.
(b) The information gathered by the manufacturer to compile the reports required by §§ 85.1903 and 85.1904 shall be retained for not less than five years from the date of the manufacture of the vehicles or engines and shall be made available to duly authorized officials of the EPA upon request.
§ 85.1907 Responsibility under other legal provisions preserved.
The filing of any report under the provisions of this subpart shall not affect a manufacturer’s responsibility to file reports or applications, obtain approval, or give notice under any provision of law.
§ 85.1908 Disclaimer of production warranty applicability.
(a) The act of filing an Emission Defect Information Report pursuant to § 85.1903 is inconclusive as to the existence of a defect subject to the Production Warranty provided by section 207 (a) of the Act.
(b) A manufacturer may include on each page of its Emission Defect Information Report a disclaimer stating that the filing of a Defect Information Report pursuant to these regulations is not conclusive as to the applicability of the Production Warranty provided by section 207(a) of the Act.
§ 85.1909 Treatment of confidential information.
The provisions of 40 CFR 1068.10 and 1068.11 apply for information you submit under this subpart.
Subpart U [Reserved]
Subpart V—Warranty Regulations and Voluntary Aftermarket Part Certification Program
§ 85.2101 General applicability.
(a) Sections 85.2101 through 85.2111 are applicable to all 1981 and later model year vehicles subject to standards under 40 CFR part 86, subpart S.
(b) References in this subpart to engine families and emission control systems shall be deemed to apply to durability groups and test groups as applicable.
§ 85.2102 Definitions.
(a) As used in §§ 85.2101 through 85.2111 all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act. All terms additionally not defined in the Act shall have the meaning given in 40 CFR 86.1803-01, 1065.1001, or 1068.30:
(1) Act means Part A of Title II of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7421 et seq.
(2) Office Director means the Director for the Office of Transportation and Air Quality in the Office of Air and Radiation of the Environmental Protection Agency or other authorized representative of the Office Director.
(3) Certified part means a part certified in accordance with the aftermarket part certification regulations contained in this subpart.
(4) Emission performance warranty means that warranty described in § 85.2103(c) and 42 U.S.C. 7541(b).
(5) Emission warranty means a warranty given pursuant to this subpart and 42 U.S.C. 7541(a) or (b).
(6) Model year means the manufacturer’s annual production period as described in subpart X of this part.
(7) Original equipment part means a part present in or on a vehicle at the time the vehicle is sold to the ultimate purchaser, except for components installed by a dealer which are not manufactured by the vehicle manufacturer or are not installed at the direction of the vehicle manufacturer.
(8) Owner means the original purchaser or any subsequent purchaser of a vehicle.
(9) Owner’s manual means the instruction booklet normally provided to the purchaser of a vehicle.
(10) Useful life means that period established under 40 CFR 86.1805.
(11) Vehicle means any vehicle subject to standards under 40 CFR part 86, subpart S.
(12) Warranty booklet means a booklet, separate from the owner’s manual, containing all warranties provided with the vehicle.
(13) Written instructions for proper maintenance and use means those maintenance and operation instructions specified in the owner’s manual as being necessary to assure compliance of a vehicle with applicable emission standards for the useful life of the vehicle that are:
(i) In accordance with the instructions specified for performance on the manufacturer’s prototype vehicle used in certification (including those specified for vehicles used under special circumstances); and
(ii) In compliance with the requirements of 40 CFR 86.1808; and
(iii) In compliance with any other EPA regulations governing maintenance and use instructions.
(14) Emission related parts means those parts installed for the specific purpose of controlling emissions or those components, systems, or elements of design which must function properly to assure continued vehicle emission compliance.
(15) Objective evidence of an emission related repair means all diagnostic information and data, the actual parts replaced during repair, and any other information directly used to support a warranty claim, or to support denial of such a claim.
(16) Valid emission performance warranty claim means a claim in which there is no evidence that the vehicle had not been properly maintained and operated in accordance with manufacturer instructions, the vehicle failed to conform to applicable emission standards as measured by an Office Director-approved type of emission warranty test during its useful life and the owner is subject to sanction as a result of the test failure.
(17) Reasonable expense means any expense incurred due to repair of a warranty failure caused by a non-original equipment certified part, including, but not limited to, all charges in any expense categories that would be considered payable by the involved vehicle manufacturer to its authorized dealer under a similar warranty situation where an original equipment part was the cause of the failure. Included in “reasonable expense” are any additional costs incurred specifically due to the processing of a claim involving a certified aftermarket part or parts as covered in these regulations. The direct parts and labor expenses of carrying out repairs is immediately chargeable to the part manufacturer. All charges beyond the actual parts and labor repair expenses must be amortized over the number of claims and/or over a number of years in a manner that would be considered consistent with generally accepted accounting principles. These expense categories shall include but are not limited to the cost of labor, materials, record keeping, special handling, and billing as a result of replacement of a certified aftermarket part.
(18) MOD Director has the meaning given for “Designated Compliance Officer” in 40 CFR 1068.30.
(b) [Reserved]
§ 85.2103 Emission warranty.
(a) The manufacturer of each vehicle to which this subpart applies must provide a written commitment to meet warranty requirements as described in this section.
(b) The warranty periods under this section apply based on the vehicle’s age in years and on the vehicle’s odometer reading. The warranty period expires based on the specified age or mileage, whichever comes first. The warranty period for a particular vehicle begins on the date the vehicle is delivered to its ultimate purchaser or, if the vehicle is first placed in service as a “demonstrator” or “company” car prior to delivery, on the date it is first placed in service.
(c) Under the emission performance warranty, in the case of a vehicle failing to conform at any time during its useful life to the applicable emission standards or family emission limits as determined by an EPA-approved emission test, the manufacturer must remedy that nonconformity at no cost to the owner if such nonconformity results or will result in the vehicle owner having to bear any penalty or other sanction (including the denial of the right to use the vehicle) under local, State, or Federal law. The following warranty periods apply:
(1) For light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, and medium-duty passenger vehicles, the warranty period for the emission performance warranty is 24 months or 24,000 miles, except that the warranty period is 8 years or 80,000 miles for any nonconformity resulting from a failed specified major emission control component identified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) For medium-duty vehicles, the warranty period for the emission performance warranty is 5 years or 50,000 miles, except that the warranty period is 8 years or 80,000 miles for any nonconformity resulting from a failed specified major emission control component identified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) An emission defect warranty applies as follows:
(1) An emission defect warranty applies for light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, and medium-duty passenger vehicles for a warranty period of two years or 24,000 miles, except that the following specified major emission control components have a warranty period of eight years or 80,000 miles:
(i) Catalytic converters and SCR catalysts, and related components.
(ii) Particulate filters and particulate traps, used with both spark-ignition and compression-ignition engines.
(iii) Components related to exhaust gas recirculation with compression-ignition engines.
(iv) Emission control module.
(v) Batteries serving as a Renewable Energy Storage System for electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles, along with all components needed to charge the system, store energy, and transmit power to move the vehicle. This paragraph (d)(1)(v) is optional for vehicles not yet subject to battery monitoring requirements under 40 CFR 86.1815-27.
(2) An emission defect warranty applies for medium-duty vehicles for a warranty period of five years or 50,000 miles, except that the specific major emission control components identified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section have a warranty period of eight years or 80,000 miles.
(3) An electric vehicle or plug-in hybrid electric vehicle fails to meet the manufacturer-defined value for percentage usable battery energy for the specified period as determined by the State of Certified Energy monitor required under 40 CFR 86.1815-27, subject to the warranty claim procedures in § 85.2106.
§ 85.2104 Owners’ compliance with instructions for proper maintenance and use.
(a) An emission warranty claim may be denied on the basis of noncompliance by a vehicle owner with the written instructions for proper maintenance and use.
(b) When determining whether an owner has complied with the written instructions for proper maintenance and use, a vehicle manufacturer may require an owner to submit evidence of compliance only with those written maintenance instructions for which the manufacturer has an objective reason for believing:
(1) Were not performed; and
(2) If not performed could be the cause of the particular vehicle’s exceeding applicable emission standards.
(c) Evidence of compliance with a maintenance instruction may consist of:
(1) A maintenance log book which has been validated at the approximate time or mileage intervals specified for service by someone who regularly engages in the business of servicing automobiles for the relevant maintenance instruction(s); or
(2) A showing that the vehicle has been submitted for scheduled maintenance servicing at the approximate time or mileage intervals specified for service to someone who regularly engages in the business of servicing automobiles for the purpose of performing the relevant maintenance; or
(3) A statement by the vehicle owner that he or she performed the maintenance at the approximate time or mileage interval specified including a showing,
(i) That the owner purchased and used proper parts, and
(ii) Upon request by the vehicle manufacturer, that the owner is able to perform the maintenance properly.
(d) The time/mileage interval for scheduled maintenance services shall be the service interval specified for the part in the written instructions for proper maintenance and use. However, in the case of certified parts having a maintenance or replacement interval different from that specified in the written instructions for proper maintenance and use, the time/mileage interval shall be the service interval for which the part was certified.
(e) The owner may perform maintenance or have maintenance performed more frequently than required in the maintenance instructions.
(f) Written instruction for proper use of battery electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles may identify certain behaviors or vehicle operating modes expected to unreasonably or artificially shorten battery durability. For example, exceeding a vehicle’s towing capacity might be considered improper use. However, the manufacturer should not consider actions to be improper use if the vehicle can be designed to prevent the targeted behaviors or operating modes. Evidence of compliance with the requirement to properly use vehicles under this paragraph (f) is generally limited to onboard data logging, though manufacturers may also request vehicle owners to make a statement regarding specific behaviors or vehicle operating modes.
(g) Except as provided in paragraph (h) of this section, a manufacturer may deny an emission warranty claim on the basis of noncompliance with the written instructions for proper maintenance and use if and only if:
(1) An owner is not able to comply with a request by a manufacturer for evidence pursuant to paragraph (c) or (f) of this section; or
(2) Notwithstanding the evidence presented pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section, the manufacturer can prove that the vehicle failed because of any of the following conditions:
(i) The vehicle was abused.
(ii) An instruction for the proper maintenance and use was performed in a manner resulting in a component’s being improperly installed or a component or related parameter’s being adjusted substantially outside of the manufacturer’s specifications.
(iii) Unscheduled maintenance was performed on a vehicle which resulted in the removing or rendering inoperative of any component affecting the vehicle’s emissions.
(h) In no case may a manufacturer deny an emission warranty claim on the basis of—
(1) Warranty work or predelivery service performed by any facility authorized by the vehicle manufacturer to perform such work or service; or
(2) Work performed in an emergency situation to rectify an unsafe condition, including an unsafe driveability condition, attributable to the manufacturer, provided the vehicle owner has taken steps to put the vehicle back in a conforming condition in a timely manner; or
(3) The use of any uncertified part or non-compliance with any written instruction for proper maintenance and use which is not relevant to the reason that the vehicle failed to comply with applicable emission standards; or
(4) Any cause attributable to the vehicle manufacturer; or
(5) The use of any fuel which is commonly available in the geographical area in which the vehicle or engine is located, unless the written instructions for proper maintenance and use specify that the use of that fuel would adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle, and there is commonly available information for the owner to identify the proper fuel to be used.
§ 85.2105 Aftermarket parts.
(a) No valid emission performance warranty claim shall be denied on the basis of the use of a properly installed certified aftermarket part in the maintenance or repair of a vehicle. A vehicle manufacturer that honors a valid emission performance warranty claim involving a certified aftermarket part may seek reimbursement for reasonable expenses incurred in honoring the claim by following the warranty claim procedures listed in § 85.2107(c).
(b) Except as provided in § 85.2104(h), a vehicle manufacturer may deny an emission performance warranty claim on the basis of an uncertified aftermarket part used in the maintenance or repair of a vehicle if the vehicle manufacturer can demonstrate that the vehicle’s failure to meet emission standards was caused by use of the uncertified part. A warranty claim may be denied if the vehicle manufacturer submits a written document to the vehicle owner that the vehicle owner is unable or unwilling to refute. The document must:
(1) Establish a causal connection between the emissions short test failure and use of the uncertified part, and,
(2) Assert that:
(i) Removal of the uncertified part and installation of any comparable certified or original equipment part previously removed or replaced during installation of the uncertified part will resolve the observed emissions failure in the vehicle, and/or
(ii) Use of the uncertified part has caused subsequent damage to other specified certified components such that replacement of these components would also be necessary to resolve the observed vehicle emissions failure, and,
(3) List all objective evidence as defined in § 85.2102 that was used in the determination to deny warranty. This evidence must be made available to the vehicle owner or EPA upon request.
(c) A part not required to be replaced at a definite interval in accordance with the written instructions for maintenance and use shall be warranted for the full term of any warranty mandated by the Act. Instructions to replace a component only if checked and found to be operating below specification shall have no bearing on warranty coverage, unless an owner did not follow such an instruction prior to the short test failure and noncompliance with that instruction caused the failure of another vehicle component relevant to the nonconformity.
§ 85.2106 Warranty claim procedures.
(a) A claim under the emission performance warranty may be raised immediately upon the failure of an EPA-approved emission test if, as a result of that failure, an owner is required to take action of any kind in order to avoid imposition of a penalty or sanction. An owner need not suffer the loss of the right to use a vehicle, be fined, incur repair expenses, or actually bear any penalty or sanction to satisfy the requirement of § 85.2103(a)(3). That requirement shall be met if a test failure sets a procedure in motion under which the owner will bear a penalty or sanction if a vehicle is not brought into conformity or repaired to some specified extent within some specified period of time.
(b) A claim under any emission warranty required by 42 U.S.C. 7541(a) or (b) may be submitted by bringing a vehicle to:
(1) Any repair facility authorized by the vehicle manufacturer to service that model vehicle, or
(2) Any repair facility authorized by the vehicle manufacturer to perform emission performance warranty repairs for that model vehicle.
(c) To the extent required by any Federal or State law, whether statutory or common law, a vehicle manufacturer shall be required to provide a means for non-franchised repair facilities to perform emission warranty repairs.
(d) The manufacturer of each vehicle to which the warranty is applicable shall establish procedures as to the manner in which a claim under the emission warranty is to be processed. The procedures shall—
(1) Provide for a final decision by the vehicle manufacturer within a reasonable time, not to exceed 30 days from the time at which the vehicle is initially presented for repair or within the time period during which an owner is required by local, State or federal law to have the vehicle repaired without incurring further penalties or sanctions (whichever is shorter), unless a delay
(i) Is requested by the vehicle owner, or
(ii) Is caused by an event not attributable to the vehicle manufacturer or the warranty repair facility; and
(2) Require that if the facility at which the vehicle is initially presented for repair is unable for any reason to honor the particular claim, then, unless this requirement is waived in writing by the vehicle owner, the repair facility shall forward the claim to an individual or office authorized to make emission warranty determinations for the manufacturer.
(e) Within the time period specified in paragraph (d) of this section the manufacturer shall:
(1) Notify the owner that it will honor the claim; or
(2) Provide the owner, in writing, with an explanation of the basis upon which the claim is being denied; or
(3) If the basis of the claim denial involves use of an uncertified part, provide the owner in writing with an explanation of the basis upon which the claim is being denied according to all criteria specified in § 85.2105(b).
(f) Failure to notify an owner within the required time period (as determined under paragraph (d) of this section) for reasons that are not attributable to the vehicle owner or events which are not beyond the control of the vehicle manufacturer or the repair facility, shall result in the vehicle manufacturer being responsible for repairing the warranted items free of charge to the vehicle owner.
(g) The vehicle manufacturer shall incur all costs associated with a determination that an emission warranty claim is valid.
§ 85.2107 Warranty remedy.
(a) The manufacturer’s obligation under the emission warranties provided under 42 U.S.C. 7541(a) and (b) shall be to make all adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to assure that the vehicle complies with applicable emission standards of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, that it will continue to comply for the remainder of its useful life (if proper maintenance and operation are continued), and that it will operate in a safe manner. The manufacturer shall bear all costs incurred as a result of the above obligation, except that after the first 24 months or 24,000 miles (whichever first occurs) the manufacturer shall be responsible only for:
(1) The adjustment, repair or replacement of any of the specified major emission control components listed in 42 U.S.C. 7541(i)(2) or components which have been designated by the administrator to be specified major emission control components until the vehicle has been in operation for 8 years or 80,000 miles; and
(2) All other components which must be adjusted, repaired or replaced to enable a component adjusted, repaired, or replaced under paragraph (a)(1) of this section to perform properly.
(b) Manufacturers shall be liable for the total cost of the remedy for any vehicle validly presented for repair under an emission warranty to any authorized service facility authorized by the vehicle manufacturer. State or local limitations as to the extent of the penalty or sanction imposed upon an owner of a failed vehicle shall have no bearing on this liability.
(c) The remedy provided under paragraph (a) of this section shall include the repair or replacement of certified parts as required in § 85.2105(a). To seek reimbursement from the involved certified aftermarket part manufacturer for reasonable expenses incurred due to the certified aftermarket parts determined to be the cause of a performance warranty failure, the vehicle manufacturer must:
(1) Retain all parts replaced during the performance warranty repair, and
(2) Follow the procedures laid out in § 85.2117.
(d) If a manufacturer is unable (for reasons not attributable to the vehicle owner or events beyond the control of the vehicle manufacturer or an authorized repair facility) to repair a vehicle within the time period specified under § 85.2106(d) after the initial presentation of the vehicle to an authorized repair facility, then the owner shall be entitled to have the warranty remedy performed, at the expense of the manufacturer, by any repair facility of the owner’s choosing.
(e) The vehicle manufacturer may deny warranty for a failure caused by an uncertified part in accordance with the criteria in § 85.2105.
§ 85.2109 Inclusion of warranty provisions in owners’ manuals and warranty booklets.
(a) A manufacturer shall furnish with each new motor vehicle, a full explanation of the emission warranties required by 42 U.S.C. 7541(a) and (b), including at a minimum the following information:
(1) A basic statement of the coverage of the emissions performance warranty as set out in § 85.2103. This shall be separated from any other warranty given by the manufacturer and shall be prefaced by the title “Emissions Performance Warranty” set in bold face type.
(2) A list of all items which are covered by the emission performance warranty for the full useful life of the vehicle. This list shall contain all specified major emission control components. All items listed pursuant to this subsection shall be described in the same manner as they are likely to be described on a service facility work receipt for that vehicle.
(3) A list or a reference to the location of the instructions for proper maintenance and use, together with the time and/or mileage interval at which such instructions are to be performed.
(4) An explanation of the effect that the use of certified parts will have on the emission performance warranty. This explanation shall comport with the provisions of § 85.2105 (b) and (c), including a statement in boldface type that maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified part.
(5) Complete instructions as to when and how an owner may bring a claim under the emissions performance warranty, as governed by §§ 85.2104 and 85.2106. These instructions shall include all the following:
(i) An explanation of the point in time at which a claim may be raised.
(ii) Complete procedures as to the manner in which a claim may be raised.
(iii) The provisions for manufacturer liability contained in § 85.2106(f) if the manufacturer fails to respond within the time period set in accordance with § 85.2106(d).
(iv) For battery electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles, the manufacturer-defined value for percentage usable battery energy specified in § 85.2103(d)(3).
(6) An explanation that an owner may obtain further information concerning the emission warranties or that an owner may report violations of the terms of the emission warranties provided under 42 U.S.C. 7541(a) and (b) by contacting the Director, Compliance Division, Environmental Protection Agency, 2000 Traverwood Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48105 (Attention: Warranty) or email to: [email protected].
(b) The warranty information shall be provided in the same document as other warranties provided with the vehicle.
(c) If a separate warranty booklet is provided with the vehicle, the owner’s manual shall contain, at a minimum, the following information:
(1) A general list of all warranties covering the vehicle; and
(2) A statement that detailed warranty information can be found in the warranty booklet.
(d) If a separate warranty booklet is not provided with the vehicle, the information specified in paragraph (a) of this section shall be contained in the owner’s manual.
§ 85.2110 Submission of owners’ manuals and warranty statements to EPA.
(a) The manufacturer of each vehicle to which this subpart applies must send to EPA an owner’s manual and warranty booklet (if applicable) in electronic format for each model vehicle that completely and accurately represent the warranty terms for that vehicle.
(1) The owner’s manuals and warranty booklets should be received by EPA 60 days prior to the introduction of the vehicle for sale.
(2) If the manuals and warranty booklets are not in their final format 60 days prior to the introduction of the vehicle for sale, a manufacturer may submit the most recent draft at that time, provided that the manufacturer promptly submits final versions when they are complete.
(b) All materials described in paragraph (a) of this section shall be sent to the Designated Compliance Officer as specified at 40 CFR 1068.30 (Attention: Warranty Booklet).
§ 85.2111 Warranty enforcement.
The following acts are prohibited and may subject a manufacturer to a civil penalty as described in paragraph (d) of this section:
(a) Selling or leasing a light duty vehicle without providing in writing the warranty information required by § 85.2109;
(b) Failing or refusing to comply with the terms and conditions of the emission warranties provided under 42 U.S.C. 7541(a) and (b) with respect to any vehicle to which this subpart applies. Acts constituting such a failure or refusal shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
(1) Failure to honor a valid warranty claim,
(2) Performance of a warranty repair in a manner which cannot reasonably be expected to allow the vehicle to meet applicable emission standards for the remainder of its useful life,
(3) Failure of a manufacturer to reimburse a dealer or other designated agent for performance of a vehicle repair made pursuant to this subpart, and
(4) Failure of a manufacturer to supply a part necessary to perform a warranty repair within the time limit specified under § 85.2106(d), unless such failure is for a reason not attributable to the vehicle manufacturer or the warranty repair facility;
(c) To provide directly or indirectly in any communication to the ultimate purchaser or any subsequent purchaser that emission warranty coverage is conditioned upon the use of any name brand component, or system or upon service (other than a component or service provided without charge under the terms of the purchase agreement), unless the communication is made pursuant to a written waiver by the Office Director.
(d) The maximum penalty value is $37,500 for each offense that occurs after November 2, 2015. Maximum penalty limits may be adjusted based on the Consumer Price Index as described at 40 CFR part 19.
§ 85.2112 Applicability.
The provisions of §§ 85.2112 through 85.2122 apply to emission related automotive aftermarket parts which are to be installed in or on 1968 and later model year light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks.
§ 85.2113 Definitions.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined shall have the meaning given them in the Act:
(a) Act means Part A of Title II of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7421 et seq. (formerly 42 U.S.C. 1857 et seq.) as amended.
(b) Aftermarket part means any part offered for sale for installation in or on a motor vehicle after such vehicle has left the vehicle manufacturer’s production line.
(c) Aftermarket part manufacturer means:
(1) A manufacturer of an aftermarket part or,
(2) A party that markets aftermarket parts under its own brand name, or,
(3) A rebuilder of original equipment or aftermarket parts, or
(4) A party that licenses others to sell its parts.
(d) Agency means the Environmental Protection Agency.
(e) Certified aftermarket part means any aftermarket part which has been certified pursuant to this subpart.
(f) Emission warranty means those warranties given by vehicle manufacturers pursuant to section 207 of the Act.
(g) Emission-critical parameters means those critical parameters and tolerances which, if equivalent from one part to another, will not cause the vehicle to exceed applicable emission standards with such parts installed.
(h) Engine family means the basic classification unit of a vehicle’s product line for a single model year used for the purpose of emission-data vehicle or engine selection and as determined in accordance with 40 CFR 86.078-24.
(i) Vehicle or engine configuration means the specific subclassification unit of an engine family or certified part application group as determined by engine displacement, fuel system, engine code, transmission and inertia weight class, as applicable.
(j) Certification vehicle emission margin for a certified engine family means the difference between the EPA emission standards and the average FTP emission test results of that engine family’s emission-data vehicles at the projected applicable useful life mileage point (i.e., useful life mileage for light-duty vehicles is 50,000 miles and for light-duty trucks is 120,000 miles for 1985 and later model years or 50,000 miles for 1984 and earlier model years).
(k) Applications means all vehicle or engine configurations for which one part is being certified as set forth in the aftermarket part manufacturer’s notification of intent to certify pursuant to § 85.2115(a)(1).
§ 85.2114 Basis of certification.
(a) Prior to certifying, the aftermarket part manufacturer must determine:
(1) Whether the part to be certified is an emission related part as defined in § 85.2102. The MOD Director shall deny certification to any parts which he or she determines is not an emission related part.
(2) The vehicle or engine configurations for which this part is being certified. These are the vehicle and engine designs for which the aftermarket part manufacturer intends to sell the certified aftermarket part.
(3) Whether the part qualifies under one of the part categories, listed in § 85.2122 of this subpart that are eligible to certify using emission critical parameters and, if so, whether the manufacturer elects to demonstrate certification using emission critical parameters. An aftermarket part may be certified under this category only if the part’s emission-critical parameters, as set forth in § 85.2122, are equivalent to those of the original equipment or previously certified part it is to replace. Compliance with the emission-critical parameters discussed in paragraph (b) of this section may be demonstrated by compliance with the relevant test procedures and criteria specified in appendix I to this subpart. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all on-road vehicles and engines. Alternatively, the manufacturer may elect to demonstrate certification compliance according to the emission test procedures described in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) For parts eligible to certify using emission-critical parameters, certification compliance can be demonstrated as follows. (1) The durability procedure contained in appendix I to this subpart can be used. As an alternative, the aftermarket part manufacturer may use a different durability procedure if it can demonstrate to the MOD Director that the alternative procedure results in an improved technical evaluation of the part’s influence on vehicle or engine emissions for its useful life mileage interval, or results in a significant cost savings to the aftermarket part manufacturer with no loss in technical validity compared to the recommended durability procedure. The aftermarket part manufacturer shall receive the written approval from the MOD Director prior to implementation of the alternative procedures.
(2) Compliance with certification requirements is based on conformance with all emission-critical parameters in § 85.2122. This shall be accomplished by performing such procedures, tests, or analyses described in appendix I, or other procedures subject to the MOD Director’s approval, necessary to ascertain with a high degree of certainty the emission-critical parameter specifications and tolerances for the aftermarket part and the original equipment or previously certified part for which an equivalent aftermarket certified part is to be used.
(i) If information is available in appendix I of this subpart to identify the applicable emission-critical parameters, the aftermarket part certifier must use such information.
(ii) If sampling and analysis of original equipment or previously certified parts is relied upon, the aftermarket part certifier must use sound statistical sampling techniques to ascertain the mean and range of the applicable emission parameters.
(iii) If an aftermarket part replaces more than one part on the same application, it may be certified only if the aftermarket part meets the applicable emission-critical parameters of § 85.2122 for each part or parts which the aftermarket part is to replace. If an aftermarket part is to replace more than one part or an entire system, compliance must be demonstrated for all emission-critical parameters involved, except those which relate solely to the interface between the parts being replaced by the aftermarket part.
(c) For parts certifying on the basis of emission test results, durability demonstration testing shall be conducted as follows. (1) Prior to certification emission testing, the actual aftermarket part used for certification testing must meet the durability demonstration requirements of this paragraph for at least the part’s useful life mileage interval.
(i) If an original equipment part has no scheduled replacement interval, then the useful life mileage interval of the aftermarket part of that type or which replaces the function of that part may be certified with a service interval less than the useful life of the motor vehicle or motor vehicle engine, or
(ii) If any provision of 40 CFR part 86 establishes a minimum replacement or service interval for an original equipment part during vehicle or engine certification, then the useful life mileage interval of the aftermarket part of that type or which replaces the function of that part is said minimum interval.
(2) The part manufacturer must decide whether it can demonstrate to the MOD Director that, during normal vehicle operation, the candidate part will not accelerate deterioration of any original equipment emission related parts. This demonstration must be based on technical rationale that shows that the candidate part has no significant physical or operational effect on any original emission components or system which would be different than that experienced by the vehicle operating with all original equipment emission system parts. The part’s effect on each major emission system must be addressed separately in the demonstration.
(i) If the aftermarket part to be certified accelerates deterioration of any existing emission related parts then certification shall be carried out as specified under the paragraph (c)(3) of this section for parts that accelerate deterioration of existing emission related parts.
(ii) If the aftermarket part manufacturer can demonstrate that the part to be certified will not accelerate deterioration of any existing emission related components, then the manufacturer can certify according to paragraph (c)(4) in this section for parts demonstrated to not accelerate deterioration of existing emission related parts.
(3) For aftermarket parts that accelerate deterioration of existing emission related parts during normal operation. (i) The aftermarket test part can be installed on the durability test vehicle and aged for 50,000 miles using the vehicle durability driving schedules contained in part 86, appendix IV. As an alternative, the aftermarket part manufacturer may use a different durability procedure if it can demonstrate to the MOD Director that the alternative procedure results in an improved technical evaluation of the part’s influence on vehicle or engine emissions for the part’s useful life mileage interval, or results in a significant cost savings to the aftermarket part manufacturer with no loss in technical validity compared to the recommended durability schedules in part 86, appendix IV. The aftermarket part manufacturer shall receive the written approval from the MOD Director prior to implementation of the alternative procedures.
At the time of certification emission testing, the same part and vehicle combination used for mileage accumulation shall be used for emission testing.
(ii) Where the comparable original equipment part has a recommended replacement interval of less than 50,000 miles, the test part shall be replaced no sooner than its useful life mileage interval during the required 50,000 mile durability demonstration.
At the time of certification emission testing, one of the aftermarket parts that accumulated at least its useful life mileage during the aging process under this paragraph shall be installed on the durability test vehicle that has accumulated 50,000 miles.
(4) For aftermarket parts demonstrated not to accelerate deterioration on existing emission related parts during normal operation, the part manufacturer must determine whether the part will cause a noticeable change in vehicle driveability.
(i) Parts that cause no noticeable change in vehicle driveability, performance, and/or fuel economy when the part fails, the durability driving schedules contained in part 86, appendix IV can be used. As an alternative, the aftermarket part manufacturer may use a different durability procedure if it can demonstrate to the MOD Director that the alternative procedure results in an improved technical evaluation of the part’s influence on vehicle or engine emissions for its useful life mileage interval, or results in a significant cost savings to the aftermarket part manufacturer with no loss in technical validity compared to the durability schedules in part 86, appendix IV. The aftermarket part manufacturer shall receive the written approval from the MOD Director prior to implementation of the alternative procedures.
(ii) Parts demonstrated to cause a noticeable change in vehicle driveability, performance, and/or fuel economy when the part fails, are exempt from aging if the part manufacturer can demonstrate to the MOD Director that the primary failure mode of the aftermarket component or system affects the driveability, performance, and/or fuel economy of the vehicle at a level readily detectable by the driver and likely to result in near term repair of failing components and correction of the emissions failure. (Use of on-board diagnostics and malfunction indicators as covered in paragraph (g) of this section is not necessarily an adequate demonstration that the certified part will be replaced. The part manufacturer must demonstrate that the diagnostic and malfunction indicator system will routinely result in repair or replacement of the part in use).
(5) For parts which only affect evaporative emissions performance, the aftermarket part manufacturer shall determine and demonstrate to the MOD Director the appropriate durability procedure to age its part. The demonstration shall include all documentation, analyses, and test results that support this determination, and the documentation that support the durability procedure results shall be submitted with the notification of intent to certify as per § 85.2115 and is subject to MOD Director’s review.
(6) Durability demonstration vehicle selection. The demonstration vehicle used must represent the “worst case” of all the configurations for which the aftermarket part is being certified. The worst case configuration shall be that configuration which will likely cause the most deterioration in the performance characteristics of the aftermarket part which influence emissions during the part’s useful life mileage. The worst case configuration shall be selected from among those configurations for which the aftermarket part is to be certified. One of the following two methods shall be used to select the worst case durability demonstration vehicle(s):
(i) In the first method, the selection shall be based on a technical judgment by the aftermarket part manufacturer of the impact of the particular design, or calibration of a particular parameter or combination of parameters, and/or an analysis of appropriate data, or
(ii) In the second alternative method, the selection shall be made from among those vehicle configurations with the heaviest equivalent test weight, and within that group, the largest displacement engine.
(d) For parts certifying on the basis of emission test results, certification compliance shall be demonstrated as follows. (1) The emission test to be used is the Federal Test Procedure as set forth in the applicable portions of 40 CFR part 86. Certification emission testing must be carried out using representative production aftermarket parts as provided in paragraph (e) of this section. The test results must demonstrate that the proper installation of the certified aftermarket part will not cause the vehicle to fail to meet any applicable Federal emission requirements under section 202 of the Act.
(2) The following portions of the Federal Test Procedure are not required to be performed when certifying a part using emission testing:
(i) The evaporative emissions portion, if the aftermarket manufacturer has an adequate technical basis for believing that the part has no effect on the vehicle’s evaporative emissions;
(ii) The exhaust emissions portion, if the part manufacturer has an adequate technical basis for believing that the part has no affect on the vehicle’s exhaust emissions; and
(iii) Other portions therein which the part manufacturer believes are not relevant; Provided, That the part manufacturer has requested and been granted a waiver in writing by the MOD Director for excluding such portion.
(3) Exhaust Emission Testing. Certification exhaust emission testing for aftermarket parts shall be carried out in the following manner:
(i) For light duty vehicle parts that accelerate deterioration of existing emission related parts, at least one emission test is required. The test(s) shall be performed according to the Federal Test Procedure on the same test vehicle and aftermarket part combination that was previously aged as required. The results of all tests performed shall be averaged for each emission constituent. The average values shall meet all applicable Federal emission requirements under section 202 of the Act.
(A) For aftermarket parts where the comparable original equipment part has no recommended replacement interval, the same part and vehicle combination used for the durability demonstration shall be used for certification exhaust emission testing.
(B) For aftermarket parts where the comparable original equipment part has a recommended replacement interval of less than 50,000 miles, one of the aftermarket parts that accumulated at least the part’s useful life mileage during the durability demonstration must be installed on the durability demonstration vehicle that has accumulated 50,000 miles for certification exhaust emission testing.
(ii) For light duty truck parts that accelerate deterioration of existing emission related parts.
(A) An emission test shall be performed on emission test vehicles at 4000 miles and at 50,000 miles, with the part installed. Exhaust emission deterioration factors for the test vehicle shall be calculated from these two test results. The aftermarket part manufacturer may elect to perform other emission tests at interim mileages. However, any interim tests must be spaced at equal mileage intervals. If more than one test is performed at any one mileage point, then all tests at this point shall be averaged prior to determining the deterioration factor. The deterioration factor shall be calculated using the least squares straight line method, in accordance with § 86.088-28(a). The deterioration factor for each emission constituent shall be used to linearly project the 50,000 mile test result out to 120,000 miles. The projected 120,000 mile test result shall meet light duty truck emission standards.
(B) As an option, the light-duty truck part manufacturer may durability age the test vehicle and aftermarket part to 120,000 miles, and then perform one Federal Test Procedure test. The actual test results in this case must pass all Federal emission standards.
(iii) For parts demonstrated to not accelerate deterioration of existing emission related parts during normal operation:
(A) If parts cause no noticeable change in vehicle driveability, performance, and/or fuel economy when the part fails, the certification exhaust emission test vehicle need not be the same vehicle as that used for durability demonstration. Upon completion of aging, one Federal Test Procedure test shall be performed with the aged aftermarket part installed on a test vehicle that has just completed one Federal Test Procedure test in the original equipment configuration (i.e., before the aftermarket part or system is installed). If more than one test is performed either before or after the aftermarket part is installed, then an equivalent number of tests must be performed in both configurations. The results of all tests performed before the part is installed shall be averaged and the results of all tests performed after the part is installed shall be averaged for each emission constituent. The difference in Federal Test Procedure emission results between the tests with the aged aftermarket part installed and the test vehicle in the original equipment configuration shall be less than or equal to the certification vehicle emission margin of any and all of the certification test vehicles from the various configurations for which the aftermarket part is being certified.
(B) For parts demonstrated to cause a noticeable change in vehicle driveability, performance, and/or fuel economy when the part fails, no durability aging of the part is required before certification emission testing. One Federal Test Procedure test shall be performed on the test vehicle in its original equipment configuration (i.e., before the aftermarket part or system is installed) and one test with an aftermarket part representative of production (as provided in paragraph (e) of this section) installed on the test vehicle. If more than one test is performed either before or after the aftermarket part is installed, then an equivalent number of tests must be performed in both configurations. The results of all tests performed with the aftermarket part installed shall be averaged and the results of all tests performed in the original equipment configuration shall be averaged for each emission constituent. The difference in Federal Test Procedure emission results between the tests with the aftermarket part installed and the test vehicle in the original equipment configuration shall be less than or equal to the certification vehicle emission margin of any and all of the certification test vehicles from the various configurations for which the aftermarket part is being certified.
(4) Evaporative emission testing. For parts determined by the part manufacturer (with appropriate technical rationale) to affect only evaporative emissions performance, at least one evaporative emissions portion of the Federal Test Procedure test shall be performed on the vehicle in its original equipment configuration and at least one with the aftermarket part installed. Both the original equipment and aftermarket part shall be aged according to paragraph (c)(5) of this section prior to testing. If more than one test is performed either before or after the aftermarket part is installed, then an equivalent number of tests must be performed in both configurations. The emission results of all tests performed before the part is installed shall be averaged and the emission results of all tests performed after the part is installed shall be averaged. The difference in Federal Test Procedure emission results between the tests with the aged aftermarket part installed and the test vehicle in the original equipment configuration shall be less than or equal to the certification vehicle emission margin of any and all of the certification test vehicles from the various configurations for which the aftermarket part is being certified.
(5) Emission test vehicle selection: The test vehicle used must represent the “worst case” with respect to emissions of all those configurations for which the aftermarket part is being certified. The worst case configuration shall be that configuration which, having the aftermarket part installed, is least likely to meet the applicable emission standards among all those configurations on which the aftermarket part is intended to be installed as a certified aftermarket part. One of the following two methods shall be used to select the worst case emission test vehicle(s):
(i) In the first method, the selection shall be based on a technical judgment by the aftermarket part manufacturer of the impact of the particular design or calibration of a particular parameter or combination of parameters and/or an analysis of appropriate data, or
(ii) In the second alternative method, two defined worst case test vehicles shall be selected from the vehicle configurations using the following criteria:
(A) The first test vehicle is that engine family for which the largest number of parts are projected to be sold. Within that family the manufacturer shall select the configurations with the heaviest equivalent test weight, and then within that group the configuration with the largest displacement engine.
(B) The second test vehicle shall be from a different vehicle manufacturer than the first test vehicle, or if the aftermarket part applies to only one vehicle manufacturer, from a different engine family. Engine families are determined by the vehicle manufacturer or when certifying under 40 CFR part 86. Within that group, the second test vehicle is selected from the vehicle configurations with the heaviest equivalent test weight, and then, within that group, the configuration with the largest displacement engine. If a part applies to only one engine family then only the vehicle specified in paragraph (d)(5)(ii)(A), of this section, is required to be tested.
(iii) The results of certification tests using the worst case vehicle selections made in this section shall only be applicable for configurations that are required to meet the same or less stringent (numerically higher) emission standards than those of the worst case configuration.
(iv) The worst case test vehicle(s) selected for certification emission testing is(are) not required to meet Federal emission standards in its original configuration. However, each test vehicle shall have representative emissions performance that is close to the standards and have no obvious emission defects. Each test vehicle shall be tuned properly and set to the vehicle manufacturer’s specifications before testing is performed. Any excessively worn or malfunctioning emission related part shall be repaired prior to testing.
(e) Test part selection. Certification shall be based upon tests utilizing representative production aftermarket parts selected in a random manner in accordance with accepted statistical procedures.
(f) Replacing original equipment parts. Installation of any certified aftermarket part shall not result in the removal or rendering inoperative of any original equipment emission related part other than the part(s) being replaced. Furthermore, installation of any certified aftermarket part shall not require the readjustment of any other emission related part to other than the vehicle manufacturer specifications, cause or contribute to an unreasonable risk to the public health, welfare or safety, or result in any additional range of parameter adjustability or accessibility to adjustment than that of the vehicle manufacturer’s emission related parts.
(g) Affects on vehicle on board diagnostic system. Installation of any certified aftermarket part shall not alter or render inoperative any feature of the on-board diagnostic system incorporated by the vehicle manufacturer. The certified part may integrate with the existing diagnostic system if it does not alter or render inoperative any features of the system. However, use of on-board diagnostics or warning indicators to alert the driver to part failure is not sufficient by itself to qualify the part for exemption from aging under paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section. The part manufacturer must demonstrate that the diagnostic and malfunction indicator system will routinely result in repair or replacement of the aftermarket part in use.
§ 85.2115 Notification of intent to certify.
(a) At least 45 days prior to the sale of any certified automotive aftermarket part, notification of the intent to certify must be received by the Office Director.
(1) The notification shall include:
(i) Identification of each part to be certified; and.
(ii) Identification of all vehicle or engine configurations for which the part is being certified including make(s), model(s), year(s), engine size(s) and all other specific configuration characteristics necessary to assure that the part will not be installed in any configuration for which it has not been certified; and
(iii) All determinations, demonstrations, technical rationale, and documentation provided in § 85.2114; and
(iv) Any and all written waivers and approvals obtained from the MOD director as provided in § 85.2114, and any correspondence with EPA regarding certification of that part; and
(v) A description of the tests, techniques, procedures, and results utilized to demonstrate compliance with § 85.2114(b) applicable to parts eligible to certify using emission-critical parameters, except that, if the procedure utilized is recommended in appendix I of this subpart, then only a statement to this effect is necessary. A description of all statistical methods and analyses used to determine the emission-critical parameters of the original equipment parts and compliance of the certified part(s) with those parameters including numbers of parts tested, selection criteria, means, variance, etc; and
(vi) All results and documentation of tests and procedures used by the part manufacturer as evidence of compliance with the durability and emission requirements specified in § 85.2114; and
(vii) A discussion of the technical basis(es) for foregoing any portion of the Federal Test Procedure when applicable; and
(viii) A description of the test part selection criteria used, and a statement that the test part(s) used for certification testing is(are) a representative production aftermarket part(s) consistent with § 85.2114(e); and
(ix) A description of the test and demonstration vehicle selection criteria used, and rationale that supports the technical judgment that the vehicle configurations used for emission testing and durability demonstration represent worst case with respect to emissions of all those configurations for which the aftermarket part is being certified, and all data that supports that conclusion; and
(x) The service intervals of the part, including maintenance and replacement intervals in months and/or miles, as applicable, and a statement indicating whether it is different than the service, maintenance, and replacement interval of the original equipment requirements; and
(xi) A statement, if applicable, that the part will not meet the labeling requirements of § 85.2119(a) and the description of the markings the aftermarket manufacturer intends to put on the part in order to comply with § 85.2119(b); and
(xii) A statement that the aftermarket part manufacturer accepts, as a condition of certification, the obligation to comply with the warranty requirements and dispute resolution procedures provided in § 85.2117; and
(xiii) A statement of commitment and willingness to comply with all the relevant terms and conditions of this subpart; and
(xiv) A statement by the aftermarket part manufacturer that use of its certified part will not cause a substantial increase to vehicle emissions in any normal driving mode not represented during certification or compliance testing; and
(xv) The office or officer of the aftermarket part manufacturer authorized to receive correspondence regarding certification requirements pursuant to this subpart.
(2) The notification shall be signed by an individual attesting to the accuracy and completeness of the information supplied in the notification.
(3) Notification to the Agency shall be by certified mail or another method by which date of receipt can be established.
(4) Two complete and identical copies of the notification and any subsequent industry comments on any such notification shall be submitted by the aftermarket manufacturer to: MOD Director.
(5) A copy of the notification submitted under paragraph (a)(4) of this section will be placed in a public docket. Comments on any notice in the public docket may be made to the MOD Director.
(b) The MOD Director reserves the right to review an application to determine if the submitted documents adequately meet all the requirements for certification specified in §§ 85.2114 and 85.2115. A part may be sold as certified 45 days after the receipt by the Agency of the notification given pursuant to this subsection provided that the Office Director has not notified the part manufacturer otherwise.
§ 85.2116 Objections to certification.
(a) At any time prior to the end of the 45-day period after a notification of intent to certify an aftermarket part is received as specified in § 85.2115, the MOD Director may notify the manufacturer of the aftermarket part that such aftermarket part may not be certified pending further investigation. The basis upon which this notification shall be made may include, but not be limited to, information or test results which indicate:
(1) Compliance with the applicable emission-critical parameters was not achieved or that the testing methods used to demonstrate compliance with the emission-critical parameters were inadequate;
(2) The part is to be certified on the basis of emission testing, and the procedure used in such tests was not in compliance with those portions of the Federal Test Procedure not waived pursuant to § 85.2114(d)(2).
(3) Use of the certified part may cause a vehicle to exceed any applicable emission requirements;
(4) The durability requirement of § 85.2114 has not been complied with;
(5) Use of the certified part could cause or contribute to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare or safety in its operation or function;
(6) Installation of the certified part requires procedures or equipment which would likely cause it to be improperly installed under normal conditions or would likely result in a vehicle being misadjusted; or
(7) Information and/or data required to be in the notification of intent to certify as provided by § 85.2115 have not been provided or may be inadequate; or,
(8) Documentation submitted under § 85.2114(c)(4)(ii) was determined inadequate for durability exemption.
(b) The aftermarket part manufacturer must respond in writing to the statements made in the notification by the MOD Director, or the aftermarket part manufacturer shall withdraw its notification of intent to certify.
(1) Any party interested in the outcome of a decision as to whether a part may be certified may provide the MOD Director with any relevant written information up to ten days after the manufacturer responds to the MOD Director’s objection.
(2) Any interested party may request additional time to respond to the information submitted by the part manufacturer. The MOD Director upon a showing of good cause by the interested party may grant an extension of time to reply up to 30 days.
(3) The part manufacturer may reply to information submitted by interested parties. Notification of intent to reply shall be submitted to the MOD Director within 10 days of the date information from interested parties is submitted to the MOD Director.
(4) The MOD Director may, at his or her discretion, allow oral presentations by the aftermarket manufacturer or any interested party in connection with a contested part certification.
(c) If an objection has been sent to an aftermarket part manufacturer pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, the MOD Director shall, after reviewing all pertinent data and information, render a decision and inform the aftermarket part manufacturer in writing as to whether such part may be certified and, if so, under what conditions the part may be certified. The written decision shall include an explanation of the reasons therefor.
(1) The decision by the MOD Director shall be provided to the manufacturer within 30 working days of receipt of all necessary information by the manufacturer or interested parties, or of the date of any oral presentation regarding the certification, whichever occurs second.
(2) A copy of the decision shall be sent to all identified interested parties.
(3) Within 20 days of receipt of a decision made pursuant to this subsection, any party may file a written appeal to the Office Director. The Office Director may, in his or her discretion, allow additional oral or written submissions, prior to rendering a final decision. The schedule for such submission shall be in accordance with the schedule specified in § 85.2116(b).
(4) If no party files an appeal with the Office Director within 20 days, then the decision of the MOD Director shall be final.
(5) The Office Director shall make a final decision regarding the certification of a part within 30 working days of receipt of all necessary information by the part manufacturer or from the date of any oral presentation, whichever occurs later.
(6) A copy of all final decisions made under this section shall be published in the
§ 85.2117 Warranty and dispute resolution.
(a) Warranty. (1) As a condition of certification, the aftermarket part manufacturer shall warrant that if the certified part is properly installed it will not cause a vehicle to exceed Federal emission requirements as determined by an emission test approved by EPA under section 207(b)(1) of the Act. This aftermarket part warranty shall extend for the remaining performance warranty period of any vehicle on which the part is installed, or for the warranty period specified for an equivalent original equipment component, if this period is shorter than the remaining warranty period of the vehicle.
(2) The aftermarket part manufacturer’s minimum obligation under this warranty shall be to reimburse vehicle manufacturers for all reasonable expenses incurred as a result of honoring a valid emission performance warranty claim which arises because of the use of the certified aftermarket part.
(3) The procedure used to process a certified aftermarket part warranty claim is as follows. The time requirements are in units of calendar days.
(i) The vehicle manufacturer shall submit, by certified mail or another method by which date of receipt can be established, a bill for reasonable expenses incurred to the part manufacturer for reimbursement. Accompanying the bill shall be a letter to the part manufacturer with an explanation of how the certified part caused the failure and a copy of the warranty repair order or receipt establishing the date that the performance repair was initiated by the vehicle owner.
(ii) The parts retained pursuant to § 85.2107(c)(1) shall be retained until the reimbursement process is resolved. The vehicle manufacturer shall store these parts or transfer these parts to the involved certified part manufacturer for storage. If the vehicle manufacturer transfers these parts to the certified part manufacturer, the part manufacturer shall retain these parts:
(A) For at least one year from the date of repair involving these parts, if the part manufacturer does not receive a bill from the vehicle manufacturer within that time period, or
(B) Until the claim reimbursement process has been resolved, if the part manufacturer receives a bill from the vehicle manufacturer within one year of the date of repair involving these parts.
(iii) If the vehicle manufacturer transfers the parts retained pursuant to paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section to the part manufacturer, a bill shall be submitted to the part manufacturer within one year of the date of initiation of the actual repair by the vehicle owner. If this requirement is not met, the vehicle manufacturer shall forfeit all rights to the reimbursement provisions provided in this regulation.
(iv) Storage costs are not reimbursable as part of a performance warranty claim.
(b) Dispute resolution. (1) The part manufacturer shall respond to the vehicle manufacturer within 30 days of receipt of the bill by paying the claim or requesting a meeting to resolve any disagreement. A meeting shall occur within the next two week period. At this meeting the parties shall, in all good faith, attempt to resolve their disagreement. Discussions should be completed within 60 days of receipt of the bill for the warranty claim by the part manufacturer.
(2) If the parties cannot resolve their disagreement within 60 days, either party may file for arbitration. Neither party may file for arbitration within 60 days unless both parties agree to seek arbitration prior to the end of the 60-day period. If, after 60 days, either party files, then both parties shall submit to arbitration.
(3) This arbitration shall be carried out pursuant to the Arbitration Rules contained in appendix II of this subpart which are based on Commercial Arbitration Rules published by the American Arbitration Association, revised and in effect as of September 1, 1988. The Arbitration Rules detail the procedures to be followed by the parties and the arbitrator in resolving disputes under this section. They can be varied only with the agreement of both parties. If either involved manufacturer refuses to participate in the arbitration process, that party is treated as if it had lost the arbitration and is required to pay all reasonable expenses.
(4) Any party losing the arbitration has the right to resort to an appropriate federal district court or state court, subject to the established rules of that court regarding subject matter jurisdiction and personal jurisdiction.
(5) If the vehicle manufacturer wins the arbitration, the part manufacturer must provide reimbursement in accordance with the arbitrator’s award and decision. Such reimbursement must be made within 30 days of the award and decision.
(6)(i) If the part manufacturer refuses to pay a lost arbitration award, the involved part will be decertified pursuant to 40 CFR 85.2121, provided that if the part manufacturer resorts to a court of competent jurisdiction, decertification will be withheld pending the outcome of such judicial determination.
(ii) In addition, under these circumstances, the vehicle manufacturer has the right to bring an enforcement action on the arbitration award and decision in the appropriate federal district court or state court, subject to the established rules of that court regarding subject matter jurisdiction and personal jurisdiction. If this court agrees with the arbitrator’s award and decision, reimbursement shall be made within 30 days of the court’s decision unless the court orders otherwise.
§ 85.2118 Changes after certification.
The aftermarket part manufacturer shall be required to recertify any part which:
(a) Was certified pursuant to § 85.2114(b) and to which modifications are subsequently made which could affect the results of any test or judgment made that the part meets all of the applicable Emission-Critical Parameters;
(b) Was certified pursuant to § 85.2114(c) and to which modifications are made which are likely to affect emissions or the capability of the part to meet any other requirement of this subpart; or
(c) Was certified and is subsequently modified in a manner affecting the durability of the part or any emission control device, engine or the vehicle upon which such part is installed.
§ 85.2119 Labeling requirements.
(a) Except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, each part certified pursuant to these regulations shall have “Certified to EPA Standards” and the name of the aftermarket part manufacturer or other party designated to determine the validity of warranty claims placed on the part. The name of the aftermarket part manufacturer or other party and the statement, “Certified to EPA Standards,” must be made durable and readable for at least the useful life mileage interval of the part.
(b) In lieu of the name of the aftermarket part manufacturer or other party and “Certified to EPA Standards,” the part may contain unique identification markings. A description of the marking and statement that such marking is intended in lieu of the name of the aftermarket part manufacturer or other party and “Certified to EPA Standards,” shall be made to the Agency in the notification of intent to certify. The unique symbol shall not be used on any uncertified or decertified part built or assembled after the date of decertification.
(c) The package in which the certified aftermarket part is contained must have the following information conspicuously placed thereon:
(1) The statement “Certified by (name of manufacturer or warranter) to EPA Emission Standards”,
(2) A list of the vehicles or engines (in accordance with § 85.2115(a)(1)(ii)) for which the part has been certified,
(3) A statement of the maintenance or replacement interval for which the part has been certified, if the interval is of a shorter duration than the interval specified in the written instructions for proper maintenance and use for the original equipment,
(4) A description of the maintenance necessary to be performed on the part in the proper maintenance and use of the part, if such maintenance is in addition to or different from that maintenance necessary on the original equipment part, and
(5) The instructions for proper installation if different from the vehicle manufacturer’s recommended installation instruction for that part.
(d) The information required by paragraphs (c)(4) and (5) of this section may be provided on a written insert with the certified aftermarket part if the insert also contains the information required in paragraphs (c) (1), (2) and (3) of this section.
(e) The information required by paragraph (c)(2) of this section may be provided in a catalog rather than on the package or on an insert: Provided, That access to the catalog is readily available to purchasers and installers of the part.
(f) When an aftermarket part manufacturer desires to certify existing in-service stocks of its products, it may do so provided:
(1) The part does not differ in any operational or durability characteristic from the aftermarket parts specified in the notification made pursuant to § 85.2115, and
(2) A supplemental information sheet is made available to all parties selling the part.
(i) The supplemental sheet shall be made available in sufficient quantities so that it can be provided with all parts sold as certified, and
(ii) The supplemental sheet shall contain all of the information specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
§ 85.2120 Maintenance and submittal of records.
(a) For each certified aftermarket part, the aftermarket part manufacturer must establish, maintain and retain for 5 years the following adequately organized and indexed records:
(1) Detailed production drawings showing all dimensions, tolerances, performance requirements and material specifications and any other information necessary to completely describe the part;
(2) A description of the testing program, including all production part sampling techniques used to verify compliance of the certified aftermarket part with the applicable Emission-Critical Parameters and durability requirements;
(3) All data obtained during testing of the part and subsequent analyses based on that data, including the milege and the vehicle or engine configuration determinants if emission testing is utilized as the basis for certification;
(4) All information used in determining those vehicles for which the part is represented as being equivalent from an emissions standpoint to the original equipment part;
(5) A description of the quality control plan used to monitor production and assure compliance of the part with the applicable certification requirements;
(6) All data taken in implementing the quality control plan, and any subsequent analyses of that data;
(7) A description of all the methodology, analysis, testing and/or sampling techniques used to ascertain the emission critical parameter specifications of the originial equipment part; and
(8) All in-service data, analyses performed by the manufacturer and correspondence with vendors, distributors, consumers, retail outlets or vehicle manufacturers regarding any design, production or in-service problems associated with 25 or more of any certified part.
(b) The records required to be maintained in paragraph (a) of this section shall be made available to the Agency upon the written request of the MOD Director.
(c) For parts certified only for vehicles with less than 5 years of emission performance warranty coverage remaining, records must be kept for 3 years or until they determine that approximately 80% of the applicable vehicles are outside the warranty period, whichever occurs second.
(d) This section shall expire 5 years from the effective date of this regulation unless renewed prior to that date.
§ 85.2121 Decertification.
(a) The MOD Director may notify an aftermarket part manufacturer that the Agency has made a preliminary determination that one or more parts should be decertified.
(1) Such a preliminary determination may be made if there is reason to believe that the part manufactured has failed to comply with §§ 85.2112 through 85.2122. Information upon which such a determination will be made includes but is not limited to the following.
(i) Tests required to be performed to demonstrate compliance of the part with the applicable Emission-Critical Parameters
(A) Were not performed on the part(s), or
(B) Were insufficient to demonstrate compliance;
(ii) The part was certified on the basis of emission tests, and
(A) The procedures used in such tests were not in substantial compliance with a portion or portions of the Federal Test Procedure which were not waived pursuant to § 85.2114(d);
(B) The emission results were not in compliance with the requirements of § 85.2114(d); or
(C) The procedures used for part aging for durability demonstration were not in substantial compliance with the durability cycle required by § 85.2114.
(iii) Use of the certified part is causing vehicle emissions to exceed emission requirements for any regulated pollutant;
(iv) Use of the certified part causes or contributes to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare or safety or severely degrades drivability operation or function;
(v) The part has been modified in a manner requiring recertification pursuant to § 85.2118; or
(vi) The manufacturer of such parts has not established, maintained or retained the records required pursuant to § 85.2120 or fails to make the records available to the MOD Director upon written request pursuant to § 85.2120.
(vii) Documentation required to support the type of durability demonstration used for a part under § 85.2114:
(A) Were not submitted for the part, or
(B) Were insufficient to justify a claim of durability exemption status.
(viii) The aftermarket part manufacturer failed to pay a lost arbitration settlement within 30 days of the arbitrator’s decision or within 30 days after completion of judicial review, if any.
(2) Notice of a preliminary determination to decertify shall contain:
(i) A description of the noncomplying part(s);
(ii) The basis for the MOD Director’s preliminary decision; and
(iii) The date by which the manufacturer must
(A) Terminate the sale of the part as a certified part, or
(B) Make the necessary change (if so recommended by the Agency), and
(C) Request an opportunity in writing to dispute the allegations of the preliminary decertification.
(b) If the aftermarket part manufacturer requests an opportunity to respond to the preliminary determination, the manufacturer and other parties interested in the MOD Director’s decision whether to decertify a part may, within 15 days of the date of the request, submit written presentations, including the relevant information and data, to the MOD Director. The MOD Director, in his or her discretion, may provide an opportunity for oral presentations.
(1) Any interested party may request additional time to respond to the information submitted by the part manufacturer. The MOD Director upon a showing of good cause by the interested party may grant an extension of time to reply up to 30 days.
(2) The part manufacturer may have an extension of up to 30 days to reply to information submitted by interested parties. Notification of intent to reply shall be submitted to the MOD Director within 10 days of the date information from interested parties is submitted to the MOD Director.
(c) If a part manufacturer has disputed the allegations of the preliminary decisions, the MOD Director shall, after reviewing any additional information, notify the aftermarket part manufacturer of his or her decision whether the part may continue to be sold as certified. This notification shall include an explanation upon which the decision was made and the effective date for decertification, where appropriate.
(d) Within 20 days from the date of a decision made pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section, any adversely affected party may appeal the decision to the Office Director.
(1) A petition for appeal to the Office Director must state all of the reasons why the decision of the MOD Director should be reversed.
(2) The Office Director may, in his or her discretion, allow additional oral or written testimony.
(3) If no appeal is filed with the Office Director within the permitted time period, the decision of the MOD Director shall be final.
(e) If a final decision is made to decertify a part under paragraph (d) of this section, the manufacturer of such part shall notify his immediate customers (other than retail customers) that, as of the date of the final determination, the part in question has been decertified. The part manufacturer shall offer to replace decertified parts in the customer’s inventory with certified replacement parts or, if unable to do so, shall at the customer’s request repurchase such inventory at a reasonable price.
(f) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section, a part purchased by a vehicle owner as certified, shall be considered certified pursuant to this subpart.
§ 85.2122 Emission-critical parameters.
(a) The following parts may be certified in accordance with § 85.2114(b):
(1) Carburetor Vacuum Break (Choke Pull-Off). (i) The emission-critical parameters for carburetor vacuum breaks are:
(A) Diaphragm Displacement.
(B) Timed Delay.
(C) Modulated Stem Displacement.
(D) Modulated Stem Displacement Force.
(E) Vacuum Leakage.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Diaphragm Displacement” means the distance through which the center of the diaphragm moves when activated. In the case of a non-modulated stem, diaphragm displacement corresponds to stem displacement.
(B) “Timed Delay” means a delayed diaphragm displacement controlled to occur within a given time period.
(C) “Modulated Stem Displacement” means the distance through which the modulated stem may move when actuated independent of diaphragm displacement.
(D) “Modulated Stem Displacement Force” means the amount of force required at start and finish of a modulated stem displacement.
(E) “Vacuum Leakage” means leakage into the vacuum cavity of a vacuum break.
(F) “Vacuum Break” (“Choke Pull-off”) means a vacuum-operated device to open the carburetor choke plate a predetermined amount on cold start.
(G) “Modulated Stem” means a stem attached to the vacuum break diaphragm in such a manner as to allow stem displacement independent of diaphragm displacement.
(H) “Vacuum Purge System” means a vacuum system with a controlled air flow to purge the vacuum system of undesirable manifold vapors.
(2) Carburetor Choke Thermostats. (i) The emission-critical parameters for all Choke Thermostats are:
(A) Thermal Deflection Rate.
(B) Mechanical Torque Rate.
(C) Index Mark Position.
(ii) The emission-critical parameters for Electrically-Heated Choke Thermostats are:
(A) Those parameters set forth in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section
(B) Time to rotate coil tang when electrically energized
(C) Electrical circuit resistance
(D) Electrical switching temperature
(iii) For the purpose of this paragraph:
(A) “Choke” means a device to restrict air flow into a carburetor in order to enrich the air/fuel mixture delivered to the engine by the carburetor during cold-engine start and cold-engine operation.
(B) “Thermostat” means a temperature-actuated device.
(C) “Electrically-heated Choke” means a device which contains a means for applying heat to the thermostatic coil by electrical current.
(D) “Thermostatic Coil” means a spiral-wound coil of thermally-sensitive material which provides rotary force (torque) and/or displacement as a function of applied temperature.
(E) “Thermostatic Switch” means an element of thermally-sensitive material which acts to open or close an electrical circuit as a function of temperature.
(F) “Mechanical Torque Rate” means a term applied to a thermostatic coil, defined as the torque accumulation per angular degree of deflection of a thermostatic coil.
(G) “Thermal Deflection Rate” means the angular degrees of rotation per degree of temperature change of the thermostatic coil.
(H) “Index or Index Mark” means a mark on a choke thermostat housing, located in a fixed relationship to the thermostatic coil tang position to aid in assembly and service adjustment of the choke.
(I) “PTC Type Choke Heaters” means a positive termperature coefficient resistant ceramic disc capable of providing heat to the thermostatic coil when electrically energized.
(3) Carburetor Accelerator Pumps. (i) The emission-critical parameter for accelerator pumps (plungers or diaphragms) is the average volume of fuel delivered per stroke by the pump within prescribed time limits.
(ii) For the purpose of this paragraph an “Accelerator Pump (Plunger or Diaphragm)” means a device used to provide a supplemental supply of fuel during increasing throttle opening as required.
(4) Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valves. (i) The emission-critical parameter for a PCV valve is the volume of flow as a function of pressure differential across the valve.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph a “PCV Valve” means a device to control the flow of blow-by gasses and fresh air from the crankcase to the fuel induction system of the engine.
(5) Breaker Points. (i) The emission-critical parameters for breaker points are:
(A) Bounce.
(B) Dwell Angle.
(C) Contact Resistance.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Breaker Point” means a mechanical switch operated by the distributor cam to establish and interrupt the primary ignition coil current.
(B) “Bounce” means unscheduled point contact opening(s) after initial closure and before scheduled reopening.
(C) “Dwell Angle” means the number of degrees of distributor mechanical rotation during which the breaker points are conducting current.
(D) “Contact Resistance” means the opposition to the flow of current between the mounting bracket and the insulated terminal.
(6) Capacitors/Condensers. (i) The emission-critical parameters for capacitors/condensers are:
(A) Capacitance.
(B) Series Resistance.
(C) Breakdown Voltage.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Capacitance” means the property of a device which permits storage of electrically-separated charges when differences in electrical potential exist between the conductors and measured as the ratio of stored charge to the difference in electrical potential between conductors.
(B) “Series Resistance” means the sum of resistances from the condenser plates to the condenser’s external connections.
(C) “Breakdown Voltage” means the voltage level at which the capacitor fails.
(D) “Capacitor/Condenser” means a device for the storage of electrical energy consisting of two oppositely charged conducting plates separated by a dielectric and which resists the flow of direct current.
(7) Distributor Caps and/or Rotors. (i) The emission-critical parameters for distributor caps and/or rotors are:
(A) Physical and Thermal Integrity.
(B) Dielectric Strength.
(C) Flashover.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Flashover” means the discharge of ignition voltage across the surface of the distributor cap and/or rotor rather than at the spark plug gap.
(B) “Dielectric Strength” means the ability of the material of the cap and/or rotor to resist the flow of electric current.
(C) “Physical and Thermal Integrity” means the ability of the material of the cap and/or rotor to resist physical and thermal breakdown.
(8) Spark Plugs. (i) The emission critical parameters for spark plugs are:
(A) Heat Rating.
(B) Gap Spacing.
(C) Gap Location.
(D) Flashover.
(E) Dielectric Strength.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Spark Plug” means a device to suitably deliver high tension electrical ignition voltage to the spark gap in the engine combustion chamber.
(B) “Heat Rating” means that measurement of engine indicated mean effective pressure (IMEP) value obtained on the engine at a point when the supercharge pressure is 25.4mm (one inch) Hg below the preignition point of the spark plug, as rated according to SAE J549A Recommended Practice.
(C) “Gap Spacing” means the distance between the center electrode and the ground electrode where the high voltage ignition arc is discharged.
(D) “Gap Location” means the position of the electrode gap in the combustion chamber.
(E) “Dielectric Strength” means the ability of the spark plug’s ceramic insulator material to resist electrical breakdown.
(F) “Flashover” means the discharge of ignition voltage at any point other than at the spark plug gap.
(9) Inductive System Coils. (i) The emission-critical parameters for inductive system coils are:
(A) Open Circuit Voltage Output.
(B) Dielectric Strength.
(C) Flashover.
(D) Rise Time.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Coil” means a device used to provide high voltage in an inductive ignition system.
(B) “Flashover” means the discharge of ignition voltage across the coil.
(C) “Dielectric Strength” means the ability of the material of the coil to resist electrical breakdown.
(D) “Rise Time” means the time required for the spark voltage to increase from 10% to 90% of its maximum value.
(10) Primary Resistors. (i) The emission-critical parameter for primary resistors is the DC resistance.
(ii) For the purpose of this paragraph, a “Primary Resistor” means a device used in the primary circuit of an inductive ignition system to limit the flow of current.
(11) Breaker Point Distributors. (i) The emission-critical parameters for breaker point distributors are:
(A) Spark Timing.
(1) Centrifugal Advance Characteristics.
(2) Vacuum Advance Characteristics.
(B) Dwell Angle.
(C) Breaker point contact operation.
(D) Electrical resistance to ground.
(E) Capacity for compatibility with generally available original equipment and certified replacement parts listed in § 85.2112(a) (5), (6), (7), and (9).
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph:
(A) “Distributor” means a device for directing the secondary current from the induction coil to the spark plugs at the proper intervals and in the proper firing order.
(B) “Distributor Firing Angle” means the angular relationship of breaker point opening from one opening to the next in the firing sequence.
(C) “Dwell Angle” means the number of degrees of distributor mechanical rotation during which the breaker points are capable of conducting current.
(12) Engine Valves. [Reserved]
(13) Camshafts. [Reserved]
(14) Pistons. [Reserved]
(15) Oxidizing Catalytic Converter. (i) The emission-critical parameters for oxidizing catalytic converters are:
(A) Conversion Efficiency.
(B) Light-off Time.
(C) Mechanical and Thermal Integrity.
(ii) For the purposes of this paragraph including the relevant test procedures in the appendix:
(A) “Catalytic Converter” means a device installed in the exhaust system of an internal combustion engine that utilizes catalytic action to oxidize hydrocarbon (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) emissions to carbon dioxide (CO
(B) “Conversion Efficiency” means the measure of the catalytic converter’s ability to oxidize HC/CO to CO
(C) “Light-off Time” or “LOT” means the time required for a catalytic converter (at ambient temperature 68-86 °F) to warm-up sufficiently to convert 50% of the incoming HC and CO to CO
(D) “Peak Air Flow” means the maximum engine intake mass air flow rate measure during the 195 second to 202 second time interval of the Federal Test Procedure.
(E) “Feed Gas” means the chemical composition of the exhaust gas measured at the converter inlet.
(F) “Aged Catalytic Converter” means a converter that has been installed on a vehicle or engine stand and operated thru a cycle specifically designed to chemically age, including exposure to representative lead concentrations, and mechanically stress the catalytic converter in a manner representative of in-use vehicle or engine conditions.
(G) “Mechanical and Thermal Intergrity” means the ability of a converter to continue to operate at its previously determined efficiency and light-off time and be free from exhaust leaks when subject to thermal and mechanical stresses representative of the intended application.
(16) Air Cleaner Filter Element. (i) The emission-critical parameters for Air Cleaner Filter Elements are:
(A) Pressure drop.
(B) Efficiency.
(ii) For the purpose of this paragraph:
(A) “Air Cleaner Filter Element” means a device to remove particulates from the primary air that enters the air induction system of the engine.
(B) “Pressure Drop” means a measure, in kilopascals, of the difference in static pressure measured immediately upstream and downstream of the air filter element.
(C) “Efficiency” means the ability of the air cleaner or the unit under test to remove contaminant.
(17) Electronic Inductive Ignition System and Components. [Reserved]
(18) Electronic Inductive Distributors. [Reserved]
(b) Additional part standards. [Reserved]
§ 85.2123 Treatment of confidential information.
The provisions of 40 CFR 1068.10 and 1068.11 apply for information you submit under this subpart.
Appendix I to Subpart V of Part 85—Recommended Test Procedures and Test Criteria and Recommended Durability Procedures To Demonstrate Compliance With Emission Critical Parameters
1. Test Procedure and Criteria
a. Vacuum leakage: Apply 457 ±13 mm (18.0 ±0.5 inches) Hg. vacuum to the vacuum unit to achieve full diaphragm displacement. Seal vacuum source to unit. There shall be no visible loss of diaphragm displacement or drop in vacuum gauge reading after a 15 second observation. Vacuum purge system and diaphragm displacement adjusting screw holes should be temporarily sealed during this test when applicable.
b. Diaphragm displacement: At stabilized temperature of −29 °C and 121 °C (−20 °F and 250 °F) with 457 ±13 mm (18.0 ±0.5 inches) Hg. vacuum applied to unit, the diaphragm displacement shall be within ±1 mm (0.04 inches) of the nominal original equipment displacement. The vacuum purge system must be open during this test when applicable. Adjusting screws that limit displacement should be temporarily removed and adjusting screw holes temporarily sealed during this test.
c. Timed delay (when applicable): With 457 ±13 mm (18.0 ±0.5 inches) Hg. applied to the unit, the vacuum break diaphragm displacement shall occur within ±20% of the original equipment time over the specified range of displacement. The diaphragm displacement shall be timed over the same distance for the original equipment as the replacement part and shall not be less than 60% of the total displacement range. The vacuum purge system must be open and the adjusting screw holes should be temporarily sealed during this test when applicable.
d. Modulated stem displacement (when applicable): With a force sufficient to extend the modulated stem to its full displacement, the displacement shall be within ±0.8 mm (±0.03 inches) of the original equipment specification.
e. Modulated stem displacement force (when applicable): The force required to start and finish the modulated stem displacement shall be within ±35% of the original equipment specification for forces up to 142 grams (5 ounces) and shall be within ±20% of the original equipment specification for forces exceeding 142 grams (5 ounces).
2. Durability Procedures: After 250,000 full displacement cycles (from atmospheric pressure to a minimum of 530mm (21 inches) Hg. vacuum at a temperature of 79 °C (175 °F)) in air, the following conditions shall be met:
a. Diaphragm displacement shall not degrade more than 10% from the original test measurements of paragraph 1.b. above.
b. Timed delay shall not degrade more than 10% from the original test measurement in paragraph 1.c. above.
c. Following these tests, the units must be free of visible defects.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria
a. All chokes
i. Thermal deflection rate
When tested on a suitable fixture, the deflection rate shall be within ±6% of the original equipment value. The initial temperature and final temperature for purposes of this test may vary but shall exhibit a test temperature range of at least 44 °C (80 °F). Recommended test equipment, test procedures, and associated calculations are outlined in ASTM B389 (latest revision) or American National Standards Institute Z155-20.
ii. Mechanical torque rate
When tested on a suitable fixture, the torque rate shall be within ±12% of the mean original equipment value. Recommended test equipment, test procedures, and associated calculations are outlined in ASTM B362 (latest revision) or American National Standards Institute Z155-18 (latest revision).
iii. Index mark position
When stabilized for four hours at room temperature, the relative position of the thermostatic coil outer tang or loop and the index mark, when corrected to 24 °C (75 °F), shall be within ±5 angular degrees of the mean original equipment positions.
b. Electrically-heated Chokes
i. Time to rotate coil tang
When tested on a suitable fixture, the time to rotate through a prescribed angle at a prescribed temperature and prescribed voltage, for the specfic choke device under test shall be within ±12 seconds or ±25% of the mean original equipment value whichever is greater.
ii. Electrical circuit resistance
In an electrically-heated choke utilizing PTC type choke heater, the circuit resistance shall be within ±1.5 ohms of the mean original equipment value at 24 ±3 °C (75° ±5 °F) unenergized.
iii. Electrical switching temperature
In an electrically heated choke thermostat utilizing a thermostatic disc switch in the electrical circuit, the temperature to open the circuit shall be within ±5.5 °C (10 °F) and the temperature to close the circuit shall be within ±11 °C (20 °F) of the mean original equipment value. Circuit opening temperature shall be measured on a decreasing temperature change, and the circuit closing temperature shall be measured on an increasing temperature change.
1. Test Procedure and Criteria
a. Expose plunger or diaphragm assembly to temperatures of −30 °C (−20 °F) for 70 hours and at 70 °C (158 °F) for 24 hours, with a commercial grade fuel or equivalent.
b. Within one hour after temperature exposure of 1.a. above, each plunger or diaphragm assembly, when installed in an applicable carburetor or test fixture, shall at room temperature deliver a volume of test fluid (Stoddard solvent or equivalent) from a 10 stroke cycle,*
*10 stroke cycle: 10 strokes from closed throttle plate position to wide open throttle plate position occurring within a 15-25 second time period.
2. Durability Procedure: After 250,000 operational cycles, at approximately 30 cycles per minute at room temperature in test fluid, the output of the plunger/diaphragm shall not drop below 90% of the low limit as established in 1.b.
1. Test Procedure and Criteria
a. Measure the flow of the PCV valve in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM) vs. pressure differential across the valve over a range of operating pressures from 4-22 inches Hg., at standard atmospheric conditions (21.1 °C (70 °F) at 755mm (29.92 inches).
b. A PCV valve shall flow within the vehicle manufacturer’s specifications or shall meet the following criteria: Whenever the mean of the original equipment flow curve is below 1 SCFM, a maximum deviation of the mean replacement PCV valve shall not exceed ±0.1 SCFM. Whenever the mean original equipment curve is equal to or greater than 1 SCFM, a maximum deviation of the mean of the replacement PCV valve shall not exceed ±10%. The total flow tolerance of the replacement valve shall not exceed the original equipment variation from the mean, at any pressure differential.
2. Durability Procedure: The flow of any specific PCV valve must not deviate from the flow curve of the original equipment PCV valve by more than the total original allowable tolerance when each is similarly operated in the intended vehicle application over the service interval stated by the certifier.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria
a. Set up test system circuit and equipment per Figure 1 with an OE breaker point assembly. Connect the primary to a 14 ±.5 V DC regulated power supply.
b. Record dwell angle and open-circuit output voltage at 300 and 500 distributor rpm and at 500 rpm intervals up to the maximum speed of the intended application.
c. Insert the replacement part in the test system and repeat the observations per b above under identical test conditions.
d. The data observed with the replacement part in the system must meet the following criteria:
(1) The dwell angle change: Not to exceed that of the original equipment by more than ±2° at all measured rpm intervals.
(2) The open circuit output voltage (M-3): Not less than 90% of the OE breaker point assembly at any measured rpm.
e. Repeat step c above at −40 °C (−40 °F) and 100 °C (212 °F).
f. The breaker points shall operate without evidence of point bounce at all test speeds and temperatures and shall operate easily without binding when operated manually.
2. Durability Procedures
a. Set up a bench ignition system using an applicable distributor or electro-mechanical equivalent.
b. Install the breaker point assembly under test in the distributor, lubricate and adjust per applicable vehicle manufacturer’s specifications. Use applicable coil, primary resistor, capacitor, cap and rotor.
c. Connect the primary of the test system with a power supply regulated at 14 ±0.5 V DC for a 12V system.
d. The secondary portion of the test system is to be connected to a 12 ±2KV spark gap.
e. An external heat source shall generate an ambient temperature of 70° (158 °F) for the distributor.
f. Drive the distributor at 1750 ±50 rpm for 200 hours. After each 50 hour interval, run the distributor for 5 minutes with one open circuit spark gap instead of a 12KV gap.
g. The replacement breaker point assembly must have the capability of performing throughout the duration of the test without evidence of any failure resulting in loss of spark in the 12KV spark gap.
h. After the 200 hours repeat step 1.c. above. The open circuit output voltage must be at least 90% of that measured in 1.c.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria
a. The electrostatic capacitance of the replacement condenser shall be within ±20% of the value of the original part at 20 ±3 °C (68 ±5 °F). The capacitance is to be measured on a capacitance bridge having an accuracy of ±1% at 1 KHz frequency.
b. Set up the test system in accordance with Figure 1. The condenser series resistance shall be such that the output voltage at 500 distributor rpm with the replacement condenser shall not be less than 90% of the output voltage (M-3) with the original equipment condenser.
c. The capacitor must be able to withstand a minimum test voltage of 500V DC for a minimum of 0.1 seconds without failure.
d. (1) Measure capacitance after 4 hours minimum soak at 70° (158 °F).
(2) After one hour at room temperature, place capacitor at −18 °C (0 °F) for 4 hours minimum and measure capacitance.
(3) Place capacitor at room temperature for 4 hours minimum and measure capacitance.
e. After thermal cycling, repeat 1.a. and b. The results must be within ±10 percent of the intital measurements.
2. Durability Procedure
a. Set up a bench ignition system using an applicable distributor or an electro-mechanical equivalent.
b. Install the capacitor under test in the distributor adjusted to applicable vehicle manufacturer’s specifications. Use applicable coil, primary resistor, breaker points, cap and rotor.
c. Connect the primary of the test system with a power supply regulated at 14 ±0.5V DC for 12V system.
d. The secondary portion of the test system is to be connected to a 12 ±2KV spark gap.
e. An external heat source shall generate an ambient temperature of 70 °C (158 °F) for the distributor.
f. Drive the distributor at 1750 ±50 rpm for 200 hours. After each 50 hour interval, run the distributor for 5 minutes with one open circuit spark gap instead of a 12KV gap.
g. The replacement part must have the capability of performing throughout the duration of the test without evidence of any failure resulting in loss of spark in the 12KV spark gap.
h. After the 200 hours, the condenser shall be within 10 percent of the capacitance and voltage measured in 1.a. and b. respectively.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria
a. Set up test system in accordance with the circuit and equipment per Figure 1 with OE distributor cap and/or rotor. Connect the primary to a 14 ±.5V DC regulated power supply.
b. Record open circuit output voltage (M-3) at 300 and 500 distributor rpm and at intervals of 500 distributor rpm up to the maximum speed of the intended application.
c. Insert the intended replacement part(s) in the system and repeat step b. above under identical test conditions.
d. Subject the intended replacement part to the following thermal sequence through five complete cycles:
1. 12 hours at −40 °C (−40 °F)
2. 2 hours at room temperature
3. 4 hours at 100 °C (212 °F)
4. 2 hours at room temperature.
e. Repeat step b. above with the replacement part(s).
f. The output voltages measured with the replacement part(s) in the system must be at least 90% of the output voltage with the OE cap and/or rotor.
2. Durability Procedures
a. Set up test system in accordance with circuit and equipment per Figure 1.
b. Install the cap and/or rotor under test in distributor, lubricate and adjust per applicable vehicle manufacturer’s specifications. Use equivalent coil, primary resistor, breaker points and capacitor.
c. Connect the primary of the test system with a power supply regulated at 14 ±0.5 V D.C.
1. In breaker point operated systems, connect secondary to a 12 KV±2 KV gap.
2. In electronic ignition systems, connect secondary to a gap equivalent to at least 50% of peak open-circuit voltage.
d. An external heat source shall generate an ambient temperature of 70° (158 °F) for the distributor.
e. Distributor shall be driven at 1750 ±50 rpm for 200 hours. After each 50 hours interval, run the distributor for 5 minutes with one open-circuit spark gap instead of a 12KV gap.
f. The replacement part(s) must have the capability of performing throughout the duration of the test without evidence of any failure resulting in loss of spark at the spark gap.
g. Repeat step 1.c. above. The open circuit output voltage must be at least 90% of that measured in step 1.c.
h. The replacement cap and/or rotor must be free of any visual cracks, arcing or melting.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria
a. Heat rating: When comparatively rated in the SAE 17.6 Spark Plug Rating engine according to the SAE J549A Recommended Practice, the comparative average rating of at least five (5) replacement spark plugs shall be within 15 percent of the average IMEP of at least five (5) OE spark plugs.
b. Gap spacing: The electrode spark gap shall be equivalent or adjustable to the recommended gap for the original equipment spark plug.
c. Gap location: The electrode gap position in the chamber shall be the same as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.
d. Flashover: The spark plug terminal end, with the properly fitted connecting boot, shall not flash-over at peak anticipated voltage for the intended application when electrode gap is 15% larger than vehicle manufacturer’s gap specifications.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria
a. Set up the circuit in accordance with Figure 1. Operate the circuit by an applicable distributor or equivalent triggering device and applicable primarly resistor with a 50 pf load at 14.0 ±0.50 volts DC input as applicable and stabilized at an ambient temperature of 20 °C ±3 °C (68 °F ±5 °F).
b. With the original equipment coil installed, record the predominant minimum peak voltage and rise time at 300 and 500 distributor rpm, and at 500 rpm intervals up to the maximum intended operating speed. The measurement is to be taken after 4 minutes operation at each speed.
c. Install the replacement coil to be tested and repeat step b. above.
d. The replacement coil shall have an open-circuit output voltage (M-3) at least 90% of the OE coil output voltage and a rise time not to exceed 110% of original equipment coil at each distributor test speed.
2. Durability Procedure
a. Install the replacement ignition coil in the ignition system using the applicable rotor, cap, capacitor, breaker points, and primary resistor.
b. Operate the circuit with a regulated power supply of 14.0 ±.5 volts DC connected to the primary at an ambient temperature of 70 °C (158 °F) at 1750 ±50 distributor rpm for a duration of 200 hours. After each 50 hour interval, run the distributor for 5 minutes with one open-circuit spark gap instead of a 12KV gap.
c. The ignition coil shall perform throughout the test without any evidence of coil failure which would result in the loss of the spark in the 12 KV spark gap.
d. Repeat Step 1.c. above. The open-circuit output voltage must be at least 90% of that measured in 1.c.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria.
a. Configure the circuit shown in Figure 2, using the original equipment resistor.
b. At 20 ±3 °C (68 ±5 °F), apply voltage for 15 minutes; maintain current at 2.5 amps. At conclusion of 15 minutes, read voltage and current. Calculate resistance using the relationship
c. Replace OE test sample with part to be certified and repeat step b. above.
d. Resistance of the part shall be within ±20% of original equipment resistance.
2. Durability Procedure.
a. Using the circuit shown in Figure 1, apply current at 70 °C (150 °F), for 200 hours.
b. After 200 hours retest as in step 1.c. above, and verify that resistance is within ±20% of the value as measured in step 1.b. above.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria.
a. Using an appropriate test installation, operate the distributor through its intended speed range.
b. The advance mechanism shall function within the tolerance of the vehicle manufacturer’s original specification over the speed range of the intended application as to vacuum and centrifugal advance.
c. The advance mechanism shall repeatedly return to the zero setting
d. The distributor firing angle accuracy shall remain within the originally specified tolerances throughout the speed range of the intended application.
e. The distributor shall be capable of maintaining the dwell angle of the original equipment specification with ±2 degrees throughout the speed range of the intended application.
f. The distributor shall be capable of open-circuit output voltage (M-3) equal to at leat 90 percent of the voltage produced by the original equipment system over the speed range of the intended application.
2. Durability Procedure.
a. At an ambient temperature of 70 °C (150 °F), operate the distributor at 1750 ±50 rpm for 200 hours.
b. The distributor must meet the requirements of paragraph 1.b. through f. after the 200 hours.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria.
(a) The fresh and aged conversion efficiencies of the replacement oxidizing catalytic converter shall be equal to or exceed those of the original equipment converter for CO and HC emissions. The fresh and aged Light-off Time (LOT) of the replacement converter shall be equal to or less than those of the original equipment converter for CO and HC emissions. These parameters shall be determined for both fresh and aged converters under the same conditions using the following steady state feed gas concentrations and conditions for LOT and Conversion Efficiency respectively:
| LOT | Conversion efficiency | |
|---|---|---|
| Exhaust mass flow rate | See note (2) | See note (1). |
| Total hydrocarbons | See note (3) | See note (3). |
| Carbon monoxide | 1.0 to 2.5% | 1.0 to 2.5%. |
| Hydrogen | 0.33 × % CO maximum | 0.33 × % CO maximum. |
| Oxygen | 1.5 × % CO minimum | 1.5 × % CO minimum. |
| Converter inlet gas temperature | 650 °F to 850 °F | 650 °F to 850 °F. |
Not less than peak air flow of the vehicle or engine configuration being certified for. If more than one vehicle or engine application is to be covered by a generic converter, the greatest peak vehicle or engine air flow shall be used.
Between 0.10 and 0.40 times the value determined in Note 1.
500-2000 parts per million by volume minimum based on Methane calibration. If a non-engine simulator gas source is used, a mixture ratio of 10% propane to 90% propylene by volume will constitute an acceptable synthetic for total exhaust hydrocarbons.
(i) LOT tests shall be conducted by exposing the converter to a step change in temperature, from ambient to that specified above: 650°-850 °F. Converter inlet and outlet exhaust emissions as measured. Light-off Time is then determined by recording the time required for the converter to reduce the outlet emissions (HC and CO) to 50% of the inlet emissions, on a volumetric concentration basis, measured from the step temperature change.
(ii) Conversion efficiency measurements shall be obtained by passing stabilized-feed gas through the converter (at conditions specified above) and making simultaneous measurements of inlet and outlet emission volume concentrations. The conversion efficiency for CO and HC is then calculated.
(iii) The particular conditions for which LOT and conversion efficiency are measured (i.e., exhaust mass flow rate, total hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide, hydrogen, oxygen, and converter inlet temperature) for the replacement converter and original equipment converter tests must not vary from one another by more than 10%.
(b) Fresh and aged catalytic converters may be obtained by operating the converter on individual vehicle or engine application for which it is intended on the Federal Test Procedure road durability driving cycle. A fresh converter results when the converter has operated between 2000 and 5000 miles or equivalent hours. An aged converter results when the converter has been operated for the warranted life of the original equipment converter.
(c) Where one generic converter is intended to cover multiple vehicle or engine configurations, converter aging may be obtained per Paragraph (b) above, on a vehicle or engine which represents the greatest peak air flow of the group of vehicle configurations to be covered, and whose calibration and feed gas concentrations are representative of the vehicle or engine configurations being certified for.
2. Other Considerations.
(a) Replacement converter must fit within the width and length space envelope of the original equipment converter. Converter spacing from the underbody and for ground clearance must be the same or greater than the original equipment converter application.
(b) Pressure drop measured between inlet and outlet pipe interconnecting points on the replacement converter shall be within ±25% of similar measurements for the original equipment converter being replaced, when measured at each of three flow conditions 50 SCFM, 100 SCFM, and 150 SCFM with a suitable fluid medium such as air. Maximum allowable exhaust gas leakage from the replacement coverter shall be 0.4 cubic feet per minute measured at 4.0 pounds per square inch differential. All measurements must be normalized to equal density conditions.
(c) Converter skin temperature shall be measured during the converter efficiency test. The skin temperature for the replacement converter must equal or be less than that for the original equipment converter.
1. Test Procedures and Criteria.
(a) Using test equipment and procedures specified in SAE-J726c, perform:
(i) Air Flow and Pressure Drop Test (2.3) at 200 SCFM, record test conditions and pressure drop.
(ii) Efficiency Test (2.4) to measure full life efficiency at 200 SCFM to a total pressure drop of 9 inches of water, record test conditions and test duration from first to last addition of standard dust, weigh test element and absolute filter at end of test using three randomly selected original equipment air filter elements.
(b) Perform tests as in (a) above, under conditions controlled to within ±10% of the corresponding original equipment test conditions, for three randomly selected replacement air filter elements.
(c) The replacement air filter element average recorded test results. The pressure drop in (i) and absolute filter weight in (ii) must be equal to or less than those average results for the original equipment test results. The replacement air filter averaged test results for element weight in (ii) must be equal to or larger than averaged result for the original equipment averaged test results.
2. Durability Procedure.
(a) After use in the intended vehicle or engine application for the recommended service interval, the replacement element shall evidence an increase in pressure drop (as measured in 1 (a)(i) above) equal to or less than that of the original equipment air filter element tested in the identical manner.
Appendix II to Subpart V of Part 85—Arbitration Rules
Either party may commence an arbitration under these rules by filing at any regional office of the American Arbitration Association (the AAA) three copies of a written submission to arbitrate under these rules, signed by either party. It shall contain a statement of the matter in dispute, the amount of money involved, the remedy sought, and the hearing locale requested, together with the appropriate administrative fee as provided in the Administrative Fee Schedule of the AAA in effect at the time the arbitration is filed. The filing party shall notify the MOD Director in writing within 14 days of when it files for arbitration and provide the MOD Director with the date of receipt of the bill by the part manufacturer.
Unless the AAA in its discretion determines otherwise and no party disagrees, the Expedited Procedures (as described in Part E of these Rules) shall be applied in any case where no disclosed claim or counterclaim exceeds $32,500, exclusive of interest and arbitration costs. Parties may also agree to the Expedited Procedures in cases involving claims in excess of $32,500.
All other cases, including those involving claims not in excess of $32,500 where either party so desires, shall be administered in accordance with Parts A through D of these Rules.
Any arbitrator appointed pursuant to these Rules shall be neutral, subject to disqualification for the reasons specified in Section 6. If the parties specifically so agree in writing, the arbitrator shall not be subject to disqualification for said reasons.
The term “arbitrator” in these rules refers to the arbitration panel, whether composed of one or more arbitrators.
The involved manufacturers should select a mutually-agreeable arbitrator through which they will resolve their dispute. This step should be completed within 90 days from the date of receipt of the warranty claim bill by the part manufacturer.
If the parties have not appointed an arbitrator and have not provided any other method of appointment, the arbitrator shall be appointed in the following manner: 90 days from the date of receipt of the warranty claim bill by the part manufacturer, the AAA shall submit simultaneously to each party to the dispute an identical list of names of persons chosen from the National Panel of Commercial Arbitrators, established and maintained by the AAA.
Each party to the dispute shall have ten days from the mailing date in which to cross off any names objected to, number the remaining names in order of preference, and return the list to the AAA. If a party does not return the list within the time specified, all persons named therein shall be deemed acceptable. From among the persons who have been approved on both lists, and in accordance with the designated order of mutual preference, the AAA shall invite the acceptance of an arbitrator to serve. If the parties fail to agree on any of the persons named, or if acceptable arbitrators are unable to act, or if for any other reason the appointment cannot be made from the submitted lists, the AAA shall have the power to make the appointment from among other members of the panel without the submission of additional lists.
The dispute shall be heard and determined by one arbitrator, unless the AAA in its discretion, directs that a greater number of arbitrators be appointed.
Notice of the appointment of the arbitrator shall be mailed to the arbitrator by the AAA, together with a copy of these rules, and the signed acceptance of the arbitrator shall be filed with the AAA prior to the opening of the first hearing.
Any person appointed as an arbitrator shall disclose to the AAA any circumstance likely to affect impartiality, including any bias or any financial or personal interest in the result of the arbitration or any past or present relationship with the parties or their representatives. Upon receipt of such information from the arbitrator or another source, the AAA shall communicate the information to the parties and, if it deems it appropriate to do so, to the arbitrator and others. Upon objection of a party to the continued service of an arbitrator, the AAA shall determine whether the arbitrator should be disqualified and shall inform the parties of its decision, which shall be conclusive.
If for any reason an arbitrator should be unable to perform the duties of the office, the AAA may, on proof satisfactory to it, declare the office vacant. Vacancies shall be filled in accordance with the applicable provisions of these rules.
In the event of a vacancy in a panel of arbitrators after the hearings have commenced, the remaining arbitrator or arbitrators may continue with the hearing and determination of the controversy, unless the parties agree otherwise.
The arbitrator shall interpret and apply these rules insofar as they relate to the arbitrator’s powers and duties. When there is more than one arbitrator and a difference arises among them concerning the meaning or application of these rules, it shall be decided by a majority vote. If that is unobtainable, either an arbitrator or a party may refer the question to the AAA for final decision. All other rules shall be interpreted and applied by the AAA.
At the request of any party or at the discretion of the AAA, an administrative conference with the AAA and the parties and/or their representatives will be scheduled in appropriate cases to expedite the arbitration proceedings.
In large or complex cases, at the request of any party or at the discretion of the arbitrator or the AAA, a preliminary hearing with the parties and/or their representatives and the arbitrator may be scheduled by the arbitrator to specify the issues to be resolved, stipulate to uncontested facts, and to consider any other matters that will expedite the arbitration proceedings. Consistent with the expedited nature of arbitration, the arbitrator may, at the preliminary hearing, establish (i) the extent of and the schedule for the production of relevant documents and other information, (ii) the identification of any witnesses to be called, and (iii) a schedule for further hearings to resolve the dispute.
The parties may mutually agree on the locale where the arbitration is to be held. If any party requests that the hearing be held in a specific locale and the other party files no objection thereto within ten days after notice of the request has been mailed to it by the AAA, the locale shall be the one requested. If a party objects to the locale requested by the other party, the AAA shall have the power to determine the locale and its decision shall be final and binding.
The arbitrator shall set the date, time, and place for each hearing. The AAA shall mail to each party notice thereof at least ten days in advance, unless the parties by mutual agreement waive such notice or modify the terms thereof.
Any party may be represented by counsel or other authorized representative. A party intending to be so represented shall notify the other party and the AAA of the name and address of the representative at least three days prior to the date set for the hearing at which that person is first to appear. When such a representative initiates an arbitration or responds for a party, notice is deemed to have been given.
The arbitrator shall maintain the privacy of the hearings unless the law provides to the contrary. Representatives of the MOD director, and any persons having a direct interest in the arbitration are entitled to attend hearings. The arbitrator shall otherwise have the power to require the exclusion of any witness, other than a party or other essential person, during the testimony of any other witness. It shall be discretionary with the arbitrator to determine the propriety of the attendance of any other person.
Before proceeding with the first hearing, each arbitrator may take an oath of office and, if required by law, shall do so. The arbitrator may require witnesses to testify under oath administered by any duly qualified person and, if it is required by law or requested by any party, shall do so.
All decisions of the arbitrators must be by a majority. The award must also be made by a majority.
A hearing shall be opened by the filing of the oath of the arbitrator, where required; by the recording of the date, time, and place of the hearing, and the presence of the arbitrator, the parties and their representatives, if any; and by the receipt by the arbitrator of the statement of the claim and the answering statement, if any.
The arbitrator may, at the beginning of the hearing, ask for statements clarifying the issues involved. In some cases, part or all of the above will have been accomplished at the preliminary hearing conducted by the arbitrator pursuant to Part A Section 9 of these Rules.
The complaining party shall then present evidence to support its claim. The defending party shall then present evidence supporting its defense. Witnesses for each party shall submit to questions or other examination. The arbitrator has the discretion to vary this procedure but shall afford a full and equal opportunity to all parties for the presentation of any material and relevant evidence.
Exhibits, when offered by either party, may be received in evidence by the arbitrator.
The names and addresses of all witnesses and a description of the exhibits in the order received shall be made a part of the record.
There shall be no direct communication between the parties and an arbitrator other than at oral hearing, unless the parties and the arbitrator agree otherwise. Any other oral or written communication from the parties to the neutral arbitrator shall be directed to the AAA for transmittal to the arbitrator.
The parties may offer such evidence as is relevant and material to the dispute and shall produce such evidence as the arbitrator may deem necessary to an understanding and determination of the dispute. An arbitrator or other person authorized by law to subpoena witnesses or documents may do so upon the request of any party or independently.
The arbitrator shall be the judge of the relevance and materiality of the evidence offered, and conformity to legal rules of evidence shall not be necessary. All evidence shall be taken in the presence of all of the arbitrators and all of the parties, except where any of the parties is absent, in default, or has waived the right to be present.
The arbitrator may receive and consider the evidence of witnesses by affidavit, but shall give it only such weight as the arbitrator deems it entitled to after consideration of any objection made to its admission.
If the parties agree or the arbitrator directs that documents or other evidence be submitted to the arbitrator after the hearing, the documents or other evidence shall be filed with the AAA for transmission to the arbitrator. All parties shall be afforded an opportunity to examine such documents or other evidence.
The arbitrator shall specifically inquire of all parties whether they have any further proofs to offer or witnesses to be heard. Upon receiving negative replies or if satisfied that the record is complete, the arbitrator shall declare the hearing closed and a minute thereof shall be recorded. If briefs are to be filed, the hearing shall be declared closed as of the final date set by the arbitrator for the receipt of briefs. If documents are to be filed as provided for in Part B Section 9 and the date set for their receipt is later than that set for the receipt of briefs, the later date shall be the date of closing the hearing. The time limit within which the arbitrator is required to make the award shall commence to run, in the absence of other agreements by the parties, upon the closing of the hearing.
The hearing may be reopened on the arbitrator’s initiative, or upon application of a party, at any time before the award is made. The arbitrator may reopen the hearing and shall have 30 days from the closing of the reopened hearing within which to make an award.
The parties may provide, by written agreement, for the waiver of oral hearings.
Any party who proceeds with the arbitration after knowledge that any provision or requirement of these rules has not been complied with and who fails to state an objection thereto in writing, shall be deemed to have waived the right to object.
The parties may modify any period of time by mutual agreement. The AAA or the arbitrator may for good cause extend any period of time established by these rules, except the time for making the award. The AAA shall notify the parties of any extension.
Each party shall be deemed to have consented that any papers, notices, or process necessary or proper for the initiation or continuation of an arbitration under these rules; for any court action in connection therewith; or for the entry of judgment on any award made under these rules may be served on a party by mail addressed to the party or its representative at the last known address or by personal service, inside or outside the state where the arbitration is to be held, provided that reasonable opportunity to be heard with regard thereto has been granted to the party.
The AAA and the parties may also use facsimile transmission, telex, telegram, or other written forms of electronic communication to give the notices required by these rules.
The award shall be made promptly by the arbitrator and, unless otherwise agreed by the parties or specified by law, no later than 30 days from the date of closing the hearing, or, if oral hearings have been waived, from the date of the AAA’s transmittal of the final statements and proofs to the arbitrator.
The award shall be in writing and shall be signed by the arbitrator, or if a panel is utilized, a majority of the arbitrators. It shall be accompanied by a written decision which sets forth the reasons for the award. Both the award and the decision shall be filed by the arbitrator with the MOD Director.
The arbitrator may grant to the vehicle manufacturer any repair expenses that he or she deems to be just and equitable.
If the parties settle their dispute during the course of the arbitration, the arbitrator may set forth the terms of the agreed settlement in an award. Such an award is referred to as a consent award. The consent award shall be filed by the arbitrator with the MOD Director.
Parties shall accept as legal delivery of the award, the placing of the award, or a true copy thereof in the mail addressed to a party or its representative at the last known address, personal service of the award, or the filing of the award in any other manner that is permitted by law.
The AAA shall, upon the written request of a party, furnish to the party, at its expense, certified copies of any papers in the AAA’s possession that may be required in judicial proceedings relating to the arbitration.
The AAA shall be compensated for the cost of providing administrative services according to the AAA Administrative Fee Schedule and the AAA Refund Schedule. The Schedules in effect at the time the demand for arbitration or submission agreement is received shall be applicable.
The administrative fee shall be advanced by the initiating party or parties, subject to final allocation at the end of the case.
When a claim or counterclaim is withdrawn or settled, the refund shall be made in accordance with the Refund Schedule. The AAA may, in the event of extreme hardship on the part of any party, defer or reduce the administrative fee.
The loser of the arbitration is liable for all arbitration expenses unless determined otherwise by the arbitrator.
An arrangement for the compensation of an arbitrator shall be made through discussions by the parties with the AAA and not directly between the parties and the arbitrator. The terms of compensation of arbitrators on a panel shall be identical.
The AAA may require the parties to deposit in advance of any hearings such sums of money as it deems necessary to defray the expense of the arbitration, including the arbitrator’s fee, if any, and shall render an accounting to the parties and return any unexpended balance at the conclusion of the case.
The parties shall accept all notices from the AAA by telephone. Such notices by the AAA shall subsequently be confirmed in writing to the parties. Should there be a failure to confirm in writing any notice hereunder, the proceeding shall nonetheless be valid if notice has, in fact, been given by telephone.
The AAA shall submit simultaneously to each party an identical list of five proposed arbitrators drawn from the National Panel of Commercial Arbitrators, from which one arbitrator shall be appointed.
Each party may strike two names from the list on a preemptory basis. The list is returnable to the AAA within seven days from the date of the AAA’s mailing of the list to the parties.
If for any reason the appointment of an arbitrator cannot be made from the list, the AAA may make the appointment from among other members of the panel without the submission of additional lists.
The parties will be given notice by the AAA by telephone of the appointment of the arbitrator, who shall be subject to disqualification for the reasons specified in Part A, Section 6. The parties shall notify the AAA, by telephone, within seven days of any objection to the arbitrator appointed. Any objection by a party to the arbitrator shall be confirmed in writing to the AAA with a copy to the other party or parties.
The arbitrator shall set the date, time, and place of the hearing. The AAA will notify the parties by telephone, at least seven days in advance of the hearing date. Formal Notice of Hearing will be sent by the AAA to the parties and the MOD Director.
Generally, the hearing shall be completed within one day, unless the dispute is resolved by the submission of documents. The arbitrator, for good cause shown, may schedule an additional hearing to be held within seven days.
Unless otherwise agreed by the parties, the award shall be rendered not later than 14 days from the date of the closing of the hearing.
Unless explicitly contradicted by the provisions of this part, provisions of other parts of the Rules apply to proceedings conducted under this part.
Subpart W—Emission Control System Performance Warranty Tests
§ 85.2201 Applicability.
(a) This subpart describes the test provisions to be employed in conjunction with the Emissions Performance Warranty in subpart V of this part. These provisions generally rely on a vehicle’s onboard diagnostic system (OBD) to indicate whether a vehicle passes or fails the test.
(b) The provisions of this subpart may be used to establish warranty eligibility for light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, and medium-duty passenger vehicles when tested during the useful life as prescribed in subpart V of this part.
§ 85.2207 Onboard diagnostic test standards.
(a) A vehicle shall fail the OBD test if it is a 1996 or newer vehicle and the vehicle connector is missing, has been tampered with, or is otherwise inoperable.
(b) A vehicle shall fail the OBD test if the malfunction indicator light (MIL) is commanded to be illuminated and it is not visually illuminated according to visual inspection.
(c) A vehicle shall fail the OBD test if the MIL is commanded to be illuminated for one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), as described in 40 CFR 86.1806.
§ 85.2222 Onboard diagnostic test procedures.
The test sequence for the OBD inspection shall consist of the following steps:
(a) The OBD inspection shall be conducted with the key-on/engine running, with the exception of inspecting for MIL illumination as required in paragraph (d)(4) of this section, during which the inspection shall be conducted with the key-on/engine off.
(b) The inspector shall locate the vehicle connector and plug the test system into the connector.
(c) The test system shall send a Mode $01, PID $01 request in accordance with 40 CFR 86.1806 to determine the OBD evaluation status. The test system shall determine what monitors are supported by the OBD system, and perform the readiness evaluation for applicable monitors in accordance with the requirements and specifications in 40 CFR 86.1806.
(1) Coincident with the beginning of mandatory testing, repair, and retesting based upon the OBD test, if the readiness evaluation indicates that any onboard tests are not complete, the customer shall be instructed to return after the vehicle has been run under conditions that allow completion of all applicable onboard tests. If the readiness evaluation again indicates that any onboard test is not complete, the vehicle shall be failed.
(2) An exception to paragraph (c)(1) of this section is allowed for MY 1996 to MY 2000 vehicles, inclusive, with two or fewer unset readiness monitors, and for MY 2001 and newer vehicles with no more than one unset readiness monitor. Vehicles from those model years which would otherwise pass the OBD inspection, but for the unset readiness code in question, may be issued a passing certificate without being required to operate the vehicle in such a way as to activate those particular monitors. Vehicles from those model years with an unset readiness code that also have a DTC stored resulting in an illuminated MIL must be failed, though setting the unset readiness flag in question shall not be a prerequisite for passing the retest.
(d) The test system shall evaluate the MIL status bit and record status information in the vehicle test record.
(1) If the MIL status bit indicates that the MIL has been commanded to be illuminated, the test system shall send a Mode $03 request in accordance with 40 CFR 86.1806 to determine the stored DTCs. The system shall repeat this cycle until the number of codes reported equals the number expected based on the Mode $01 response. All DTCs resulting in MIL illumination shall be recorded in the vehicle test record and the vehicle shall fail the OBD inspection.
(2) If the MIL bit is not commanded to be illuminated the vehicle shall pass the OBD inspection, even if DTCs are present.
(3) If the MIL bit is commanded to be illuminated, the inspector shall visually inspect the MIL to determine if it is illuminated. If the MIL is commanded to be illuminated but is not, the vehicle shall fail the OBD inspection.
(4) If the MIL does not illuminate at all when the vehicle is in the key-on/engine-off condition, the vehicle shall fail the OBD inspection, even if no DTCs are present and the MIL has not been commanded on.
§ 85.2223 Onboard diagnostic test report.
(a) Motorists whose vehicles fail the OBD test described in § 85.2222 shall be provided with the OBD test results, including the codes retrieved, the name of the component or system associated with each DTC, the status of the MIL illumination command, and the customer alert statement as stated in paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) In addition to any codes that were retrieved, the test report shall include the following language:
Your vehicle’s computerized self-diagnostic system (OBD) registered the faults listed below. The faults are probably an indication of a malfunction of an emission component. However, multiple and/or seemingly unrelated faults may be an indication of an emission-related problem that occurred previously, but upon further evaluation by the OBD system was determined to be only temporary. Therefore, proper diagnosis by a qualified technician is required to positively identify the source of any emission-related problem.
§ 85.2231 Onboard diagnostic test equipment requirements.
(a) The test system interface to the vehicle shall include a plug that conforms to the requirements and specifications of 40 CFR 86.1806.
(b) The test system shall be capable of communicating with the standard data link connector of vehicles with certified OBD systems.
(c) The test system shall be capable of checking for OBD monitors and the evaluation status of supported monitors (test complete/test not complete) in Mode $01 PID $01, as well as be able to request the DTCs, consistent with the requirements and specifications of 40 CFR 86.1806.
Subpart X—Determination of Model Year for Motor Vehicles and Engines Used in Motor Vehicles Under Section 177 and Part A of Title II of the Clean Air Act
§ 85.2301 Applicability.
The definitions provided by this subpart are effective February 23, 1995 and apply to all motor vehicles regulated under 40 CFR part 86, subpart S, and to highway motorcycles regulated under 40 CFR part 86, subparts E and F. The definitions and related provisions in 40 CFR parts 1036, 1037, and 1068 apply instead of the provisions in this subpart for heavy-duty motor vehicles and heavy-duty motor vehicle engines regulated under 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, and 40 CFR parts 1036 and 1037.
§ 85.2302 Definition of model year.
Model year means the manufacturer’s annual production period (as determined under § 85.2304) which includes January 1 of such calendar year, provided, that if the manufacturer has no annual production period, the term “model year” shall mean the calendar year.
§ 85.2303 Duration of model year.
A specific model year must always include January 1 of the calendar year for which it is designated and may not include a January 1 of any other calendar year. Thus, the maximum duration of a model year is one calendar year plus 364 days.
§ 85.2304 Definition of production period.
(a) The “annual production period” for all models within an engine family of light-duty motor vehicles, heavy-duty motor vehicles and engines, and on-highway motorcycles begins either: when any vehicle or engine within the engine family is first produced; or on January 2 of the calendar year preceding the year for which the model year is designated, whichever date is later. The annual production period ends either: When the last such vehicle or engine is produced; or on December 31 of the calendar year for which the model year is named, whichever date is sooner.
(b) The date when a vehicle or engine is first produced is the “Job 1 date,” which is defined as that calendar date on which a manufacturer completes all manufacturing and assembling processes necessary to produce the first saleable unit of the designated model which is in all material respects the same as the vehicle or engine described in the manufacturer’s application for certification. The “Job 1 date” may be a date earlier in time than the date on which the certificate of conformity is issued.
§ 85.2305 Duration and applicability of certificates of conformity.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, a certificate of conformity is deemed to be effective and cover the vehicles or engines named in such certificate and produced during the annual production period, as defined in § 85.2304.
(b) Section 203 of the Clean Air Act prohibits the sale, offering for sale, delivery for introduction into commerce, and introduction into commerce, of any new vehicle or engine not covered by a certificate of conformity unless it is an imported vehicle exempted by the Administrator or otherwise authorized jointly by EPA and U.S. Customs Service regulations. However, the Act does not prohibit the production of vehicles or engines without a certificate of conformity. Vehicles or engines produced prior to the effective date of a certificate of conformity, as defined in paragraph (a) of this section, may also be covered by the certificate if the following conditions are met:
(1) The vehicles or engines conform in all material respects to the vehicles or engines described in the application for the certificate of conformity:
(2) The vehicles or engines are not sold, offered for sale, introduced into commerce, or delivered for introduction into commerce prior to the effective date of the certificate of conformity;
(3) The Agency is notified prior to the beginning of production when such production will start, and the Agency is provided full opportunity to inspect and/or test the vehicles during and after their production; for example, the Agency must have the opportunity to conduct selective enforcement auditing production line testing as if the vehicles had been produced after the effective date of the certificate.
(c) New vehicles or engines imported by an original equipment manufacturer after December 31 of the calendar year for which the model year was named are still covered by the certificate of conformity as long as the production of the vehicle or engine was completed before December 31 of that year. This paragraph does not apply to vehicles that may be covered by certificates held by independent commercial importers unless specifically approved by EPA.
(d) Vehicles or engines produced after December 31 of the calendar year for which the model year is named are not covered by the certificate of conformity for that model year. A new certificate of conformity demonstrating compliance with currently applicable standards must be obtained for these vehicles or engines even if they are identical to vehicles or engines built before December 31.
(e) The extended coverage period described here for a certificate of conformity (i.e., up to one year plus 364 days) is primarily intended to allow flexibility in the introduction of new models. Under no circumstances should it be interpreted that existing models may “skip” yearly certification by pulling ahead the production of every other model year.
Subpart Y—Fees for the Motor Vehicle and Engine Compliance Program
§ 85.2401 Assessment of fees.
See 40 CFR part 1027 for the applicable fees associated with certifying engines, vehicles, and equipment under this chapter.
Appendixes I-VII to Part 85 [Reserved]
Appendix VIII to Part 85—Vehicle and Engine Parameters and Specifications
I. Basic Engine Parameters-Reciprocating
1. Compression ratio.
2. Cranking compression pressure.
3. Valves (intake and exhaust).
a. Head diameter dimension.
b. Valve lifter or actuator type and valve lash dimension.
4. Camshaft timing.
a. Valve opening (degrees BTDC).
b. Valve closing (degrees ATDC).
c. Valve overlap (inch-degrees).
II. Basic Engine Parameters—Rotary Engines.
1. Intake port(s).
a. Timing and overlap if exposed to the combustion chamber.
2. Exhaust port(s).
a. Timing and overlap if exposed to the combustion chamber.
3. Cranking compression pressure.
4. Compression ratio.
III. Air Inlet System.
1. Temperature control system calibration.
IV. Fuel System.
1. General.
a. Engine idle speed.
b. Engine idle mixture.
2. Carburetion.
a. Air-fuel flow calibration.
b. Transient enrichment system calibration.
c. Starting enrichment system calibration.
d. Altitude compensation system calibration.
e. Hot idle compensation system calibration.
3. Fuel injection.
a. Control parameters and calibration.
b. Fuel shutoff system calibration.
c. Starting enrichment system calibration.
d. Transient enrichment system calibration.
e. Air-fuel flow calibration.
f. Altitude compensation system calibration.
g. Operating pressure(s).
h. Injector timing calibrations.
V. Injection System.
1. Control parameters and calibration.
2. Initial timing setting.
3. Dwell setting.
4. Altitude compensation system calibration.
5. Spark plug voltage.
VI. Engine Cooling System.
1. Thermostat calibration.
VII. Exhaust Emission Control System.
1. Air injection system.
a. Control parameters and calibrations.
b. Pump flow rate.
2. EGR system.
a. Control parameters and calibrations.
b. EGR valve flow calibration.
3. Catalytic converter system.
a. Active surface area.
b. Volume of catalyst.
c. Conversion efficiency.
4. Backpressure.
VIII. Evaporative Emission Control System.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Fuel tank.
a. Pressure and vacuum relief settings.
IX. Crankcase Emission Control System.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Valve calibration.
X. Auxiliary Emission Control Devices (AECD).
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Component calibration(s).
XI. Emission Control Related Warning Systems.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Component calibrations.
XII. Driveline Parameters.
1. Axle ratio(s).
I. Basic Engine Parameters.
1. Compression ratio.
2. Cranking compression pressure.
3. Supercharger/turbocharger calibration.
4. Valves (intake and exhaust).
a. Head diameter dimension.
b. Valve lifter or actuator type and valve lash dimension.
5. Camshaft timing.
a. Valve opening (degrees BTDC).
b. Valve closing (degrees ATDC).
c. Valve overlap (inch-degrees).
II. Air Inlet System.
1. Temperature control system calibration.
III. Fuel System.
1. General.
a. Engine idle speed.
b. Engine idle mixture.
2. Carburetion.
a. Air-fuel flow calibration.
b. Transient enrichment system calibration.
c. Starting enrichment system calibration.
d. Altitude compensation system calibration.
e. Hot idle compensation system calibration.
3. Fuel injection.
a. Control parameters and calibrations.
b. Fuel shutoff system calibration.
c. Starting enrichment system calibration.
d. Transient enrichment system calibration.
e. Air-fuel flow calibration.
f. Altitude compensation system calibration.
g. Operating pressure(s).
h. Injector timing calibration.
IV. Ignition System.
1. Control parameters and calibration.
2. Initial timing setting.
3. Dwell setting.
4. Altitude compensation system calibration.
5. Spark plug voltage.
V. Engine Cooling System.
1. Thermostat calibration.
VI. Exhaust Emission Control System.
1. Air injection system.
a. Control parameters and calibrations.
b. Pump flow rate.
2. EGR system.
a. Control parameters and calibrations.
b. EGR valve flow calibration.
3. Catalytic converter system.
a. Active surface area.
b. Volume of catalyst.
c. Conversion efficiency.
4. Backpressure.
VII. Evaporative Emission Control System.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Fuel tank.
a. Pressure and vacuum relief settings.
VIII. Crankcase Emission Control System.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Valve calibrations.
IX. Auxiliary Emission Control Devices (AECD).
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Component calibrations.
X. Emission Control Related Warning Systems.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Component calibrations.
I. Basic Engine Parameters-Four Stroke Cycle Reciprocating Engines.
1. Compression ratio.
2. Cranking compression pressure.
3. Supercharger/turbocharger calibration.
4. Valves (intake and exhaust).
a. Head diameter dimension.
b. Valve lifter or actuator type and valve lash dimension.
5. Camshaft timing.
a. Valve opening (degrees BTDC).
b. Valve closing (degrees ATDC).
c. Valve overlap (inch-degrees).
II. Basic Engine Parameters—Two-Stroke Cycle Reciprocating Engine.
1.-5. Same as Section C.I.
6. Intake port(s).
a. Timing in combustion cycle.
7. Exhaust port(s).
a. Timing in combustion cycle.
III. Air Inlet System.
1. Temperature control system calibration.
2. Maximum allowable air inlet restriction.
IV. Fuel System.
1. Fuel injection.
a. Control parameters and calibrations.
b. Transient enrichment system calibration.
c. Air-fuel flow calibration.
d. Altitude compensation system calibration.
e. Operating pressure(s).
f. Injector timing calibration.
V. Exhaust Emission Control System.
1. Maximum allowable backpressure.
VI. Crankcase Emission Control System.
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Valve calibrations.
VII. Auxiliary Emission Control Devices (AECD).
1. Control parameters and calibrations.
2. Component calibration(s).
PART 86—CONTROL OF EMISSIONS FROM NEW AND IN-USE HIGHWAY VEHICLES AND ENGINES
§ 86.1 Incorporation by reference.
Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, EPA must publish a document in the
(a) ASTM International (ASTM). ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959; (610) 832-9585; www.astm.org.
(1) ASTM C1549-09, Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer, approved August 1, 2009 (“ASTM C1549”); IBR approved for § 86.1869-12(b).
(2) ASTM D86-12, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure, approved December 1, 2012 (“ASTM D86”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.113-94(b); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(3) ASTM D93-13, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester, approved July 15, 2013 (“ASTM D93”); IBR approved for § 86.113-94(b).
(4) ASTM D445-12, Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids (and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity), approved April 15, 2012 (“ASTM D445”); IBR approved for § 86.113-94(b).
(5) ASTM D613-13, Standard Test Method for Cetane Number of Diesel Fuel Oil, approved December 1, 2013 (“ASTM D613”); IBR approved for § 86.113-94(b).
(6) ASTM D975-13a, Standard Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils, approved December 1, 2013 (“ASTM D975”); IBR approved for § 86.1910(c).
(7) ASTM D976-06 (Reapproved 2011), Standard Test Method for Calculated Cetane Index of Distillate Fuels, approved October 1, 2011 (“ASTM D976”); IBR approved for § 86.113-94(b).
(8) ASTM D1319-13, Standard Test Method for Hydrocarbon Types in Liquid Petroleum Products by Fluorescent Indicator Adsorption, approved May 1, 2013 (“ASTM D1319”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(9) ASTM D1945-03 (reapproved 2010), Standard Test Method for Analysis of Natural Gas by Gas Chromatography, approved January 1, 2010 (“ASTM D1945”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-94(e); 86.513(d).
(10) ASTM D2163-07, Standard Test Method for Determination of Hydrocarbons in Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases and Propane/Propene Mixtures by Gas Chromatography, approved December 1, 2007 (“ASTM D2163”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-94(f).
(11) ASTM D2622-10, Standard Test Method for Sulfur in Petroleum Products by Wavelength Dispersive X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometry, approved February 15, 2010 (“ASTM D2622”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.113-94(b); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(12) ASTM D2699-13b, Standard Test Method for Research Octane Number of Spark-Ignition Engine Fuel, approved October 1, 2013 (“ASTM D2699”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a).
(13) ASTM D2700-13b, Standard Test Method for Motor Octane Number of Spark-Ignition Engine Fuel, approved October 1, 2013 (“ASTM D2700”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a).
(14) ASTM D3231-13, Standard Test Method for Phosphorus in Gasoline, approved June 15, 2013 (“ASTM D3231”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(15) ASTM D3237-12, Standard Test Method for Lead in Gasoline by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy, approved June 1, 2012 (“ASTM D3237”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(16) ASTM D4052-11, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, and API Gravity of Liquids by Digital Density Meter, approved October 15, 2011 (“ASTM D4052”); IBR approved for § 86.113-94(b).
(17) ASTM D5186-03 (Reapproved 2009), Standard Test Method for Determination of the Aromatic Content and Polynuclear Aromatic Content of Diesel Fuels and Aviation Turbine Fuels by Supercritical Fluid Chromatography, approved April 15, 2009 (“ASTM D5186”); IBR approved for § 86.113-94(b).
(18) ASTM D5191-13, Standard Test Method for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Mini Method), approved December 1, 2013 (“ASTM D5191”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(19) ASTM D5769-20, Standard Test Method for Determination of Benzene, Toluene, and Total Aromatics in Finished Gasolines by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry, approved June 1, 2020 (“ASTM5769”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(20) ASTM D6550-20, Standard Test Method for Determination of Olefin Content of Gasolines by Supercritical-Fluid Chromatography, approved July 1, 2020 (“ASTM D6550”); IBR approved for §§ 86.113-04(a); 86.213(a); 86.513(a).
(21) ASTM E29-93a, Standard Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications, approved March 15, 1993 (“ASTM E29”); IBR approved for §§ 86.004-15(c); 86.007-11(a); 86.007- 15(m); 86.1803-01.
(22) ASTM E903-96, Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres, approved April 10, 1996 (“ASTM E903”); IBR approved for § 86.1869-12(b).
(23) ASTM E1918-06, Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Surfaces in the Field, approved August 15, 2006 (“ASTM E1918”); IBR approved for § 86.1869-12(b).
(b) American National Standards Institute (ANSI). American National Standards Institute, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; (212) 642-4900; www.ansi.org.
(1) ANSI NGV1-2006, Standard for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fueling Connection Devices, 2nd edition, reaffirmed and consolidated March 2, 2006; IBR approved for § 86.1813-17(f).
(2) CSA IR-1-15, Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) High Flow Fueling Connection Devices—Supplement to NGV 1-2006, ANSI approved August 26, 2015; IBR approved for § 86.1813-17(f).
(c) California Air Resources Board (California ARB). California Air Resources Board, 1001 I Street, Sacramento, CA 95812; (916) 322-2884; www.arb.ca.gov.
(1) California Requirements Applicable to the LEV III Program, including the following documents:
(i) LEV III exhaust emission standards are in Title 13 Motor Vehicles, Division 3 Air Resources Board, Chapter 1 Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices, Article 2 Approval of Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices (New Vehicles), § 1961.2 Exhaust Emission Standards and Test Procedures—2015 and Subsequent Model Passenger Cars, Light-Duty Trucks, and Medium-Duty Vehicles, effective as of December 31, 2012; IBR approved for § 86.1803-01.
(ii) LEV III evaporative emission standards for model year 2015 and later vehicles are in Title 13 Motor Vehicles, Division 3 Air Resources Board, Chapter 1 Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices, Article 2 Approval of Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices (New Vehicles) § 1976 Standards and Test Procedures for Motor Vehicle Fuel Evaporative Emissions, effective as of December 31, 2012; IBR approved for § 86.1803-01.
(2) 13 CCR 1962.5, Title 13, Motor Vehicles, Division 3, Air Resources Board, Chapter 1, Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices, Article 2, Approval of Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices (New Vehicles), § 1962.5 Data Standardization Requirements for 2026 and Subsequent Model Year Light-Duty Zero Emission Vehicles and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles; Operative November 30, 2022; IBR approved for § 86.1815-27(h).
(3) 13 CCR 1962.7, Title 13, Motor Vehicles, Division 3, Air Resources Board, Chapter 1, Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices, Article 2, Approval of Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices (New Vehicles), § 1962.7 In-Use Compliance, Corrective Action and Recall Protocols for 2026 and Subsequent Model Year Zero-Emission and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Passenger Cars and Light-Duty Trucks; Operative November 30, 2022; IBR approved for § 86.1815-27(h).
(4) 13 CCR 1968.2 (known as Onboard Diagnostics II (OBD-II)), Title 13, Motor Vehicles, Division 3, Air Resources Board, Chapter 1, Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices, Article 2, Approval of Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices (New Vehicles), § 1968.2 Malfunction and Diagnostic System Requirements—2004 and Subsequent Model-Year Passenger Cars, Light-Duty Trucks, and Medium-Duty Vehicles and Engines, effective as of July 31, 2013; IBR approved for § 86.1806-17(a).
(5) 13 CCR 1968.2 (known as Onboard Diagnostics II (OBD-II)), Title 13, Motor Vehicles, Division 3, Air Resources Board, Chapter 1, Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices, Article 2, Approval of Motor Vehicle Pollution Control Devices (New Vehicles), § 1968.2 Malfunction and Diagnostic System Requirements—2004 and Subsequent Model-Year Passenger Cars, Light-Duty Trucks, and Medium-Duty Vehicles and Engines; Operative November 30, 2022; IBR approved for § 86.1806-27(a).
(d) International Organization for Standardization (ISO). International Organization for Standardization, Case Postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland; 41-22-749-01-11; www.iso.org.
(1) ISO 13837:2008(E), Road Vehicles—Safety glazing materials—Method for the determination of solar transmittance, First edition, April 15, 2008; IBR approved for § 86.1869-12(b).
(2) ISO 15765-4:2005(E), Road Vehicles—Diagnostics on Controller Area Networks (CAN)—Part 4: Requirements for emissions-related systems, January 15, 2005; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(e) National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). National Institute of Standards and Technology, 100 Bureau Drive, Gaithersburg, MD 20899; [email protected]; www.nist.gov.
(1) NIST Special Publication 811, 2008 Edition, Guide for the Use of the International System of Units (SI), March 2008; IBR approved for § 86.1901(d).
(2) [Reserved]
(f) SAE International (SAE). SAE International, 400 Commonwealth Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001; (877) 606-7323 (U.S. and Canada) or (724) 776-4970 (outside the U.S. and Canada); www.sae.org.
(1) SAE J1151, Methane Measurement Using Gas Chromatography, stabilized September 2011; IBR approved for § 86.111-94(b).
(2) SAE J1349, Engine Power Test Code—Spark Ignition and Compression Ignition—As Installed Net Power Rating, revised September 2011; IBR approved for § 86.1803-01.
(3) SAE J1711 FEB2023, Recommended Practice for Measuring the Exhaust Emissions and Fuel Economy of Hybrid-Electric Vehicles, Including Plug-In Hybrid Vehicles; Revised February 2023; IBR approved for § 86.1866-12(b).
(4) SAE J1877, Recommended Practice for Bar-Coded Vehicle Identification Number Label, July 1994; IBR approved for § 86.1807-01(f).
(5) SAE J1930, Electrical/Electronic Systems Diagnostic Terms, Definitions, Abbreviations, and Acronyms, Revised May 1998; IBR approved for §§ 86.1808-01(f); 86.1808-07(f).
(6) SAE J1930, Electrical/Electronic Systems Diagnostic Terms, Definitions, Abbreviations, and Acronyms—Equivalent to ISO/TR 15031-2, April 30, 2002, Revised April 2002; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(7) SAE J1939, Recommended Practice for a Serial Control and Communications Vehicle Network, Revised October 2007; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(8) SAE J1939-13, Off-Board Diagnostic Connector, Revised March 2004; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(9) SAE J1939-71, Vehicle Application Layer (Through February 2007), Revised January 2008; IBR approved for § 86.010-38(j).
(10) SAE J1939-73, Application Layer—Diagnostics, Revised September 2006; IBR approved for §§ 86.010-18(k); 86.010-38(j).
(11) SAE J1939-81, Network Management, Revised May 2003; IBR approved for § 86.010-38(j).
(12) SAE J1962, Diagnostic Connector Equivalent to ISO/DIS 15031-3, December 14, 2001, Revised April 2002; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(13) SAE J1978, OBD II Scan Tool—Equivalent to ISO/DIS 15031-4, December 14, 2001, Revised April 2002; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(14) SAE J1979, E/E Diagnostic Test Modes, Revised September 1997; IBR approved for §§ 86.1808-01(f) and 86.1808-07(f).
(15) SAE J1979, (R) E/E Diagnostic Test Modes, Revised May 2007; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(16) SAE J2012, (R) Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions Equivalent to ISO/DIS 15031-6, April 30, 2002, Revised April 2002; IBR approved for § 86.010-18(k).
(17) SAE J2064 FEB2011, R134a Refrigerant Automotive Air-Conditioned Hose, Revised February 2011; IBR approved for § 86.1867-12(a).
(18) SAE J2284-3, High Speed CAN (HSC) for Vehicle Applications at 500 KBPS, May 2001; IBR approved for §§ 86.1808-01(f); 86.1808-07(f).
(19) SAE J2403, Medium/Heavy-Duty E/E Systems Diagnosis Nomenclature—Truck and Bus; Revised August 2007; IBR approved for §§ 86.010-18(k); 86.010-38(j).
(20) SAE J2534, Recommended Practice for Pass-Thru Vehicle Programming, February 2002; IBR approved for §§ 86.1808-01(f); 86.1808-07(f).
(21) SAE J2727 FEB2012, Mobile Air Conditioning System Refrigerant Emission Charts for R-134a and R-1234yf, Revised February 2012; IBR approved for § 86.1867-12(a).
(22) SAE J2727 SEP2023, Mobile Air Conditioning System Refrigerant Emissions Estimate for Mobile Air Conditioning Refrigerants, Revised September 2023; IBR approved for §§ 86.1819-14(h); 86.1867-12(a); 86.1867-31(a).
(23) SAE J2765 OCT2008, Procedure for Measuring System COP [Coefficient of Performance] of a Mobile Air Conditioning System on a Test Bench, Issued October 2008; IBR approved for § 86.1868-12(h).
(24) SAE J2807 FEB2020, Performance Requirements for Determining Tow-Vehicle Gross Combination Weight Rating and Trailer Weight Rating, Revised February 2020; IBR approved for § 86.1845-04(h).
(g) Truck and Maintenance Council (TMC). Truck and Maintenance Council, 950 North Glebe Road, Suite 210, Arlington, VA 22203-4181; (703) 838-1754; [email protected]; tmc.trucking.org.
(1) TMC RP 1210B, Revised June 2007, WINDOWSTMCOMMUNICATION API; IBR approved for § 86.010-38(j).
(2) [Reserved]
(h) UN Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE). UN Economic Commission for Europe, Information Service, Palais des Nations, CH-1211 Geneva 10, Switzerland; [email protected]; www.unece.org.
(1) ECE/TRANS/180/Add.22, Addendum 22: United Nations Global Technical Regulation, No. 22, United Nations Global Technical Regulation on In-vehicle Battery Durability for Electrified Vehicles; Adopted April 14, 2022, (“GTR No. 22”); IBR approved for § 86.1815-27.
(2) [Reserved]
Subpart A—General Provisions for Heavy-Duty Engines and Heavy-Duty Vehicles
§ 86.000-2 Definitions.
The definitions of § 86.098-2 continue to apply to 1998 and later model year vehicles. The definitions listed in this section apply beginning with the 2000 model year.
AC1 means a test procedure as described in § 86.162-00 which simulates testing with air conditioning operating in an environmental test cell by adding the air conditioning compressor load to the normal dynamometer forces.
AC2 means a test procedure as described in § 86.162-00 which simulates testing with air conditioning operating in an environmental test cell by adding a heat load to the passenger compartment.
Alternative fuels means any fuel other than gasoline and diesel fuels, such as methanol, ethanol, and gaseous fuels.
866 Cycle means the test cycle that consists of the last 866 seconds (seconds 505 to 1372) of the EPA Urban Dynamometer Driving Schedule, described in § 86.115-00 and listed in appendix I, paragraph (a), of this part.
Environmental test cell means a test cell capable of wind-speed, solar thermal load, ambient temperature, and humidity control or simulation which meets the requirements of § 86.161-00 for running emission tests with the air conditioning operating.
Federal Test Procedure, or FTP means the test procedure as described in § 86.130-00 (a) through (d) and (f) which is designed to measure urban driving tail pipe exhaust emissions and evaporative emissions over the Urban Dynamometer Driving Schedule as described in appendix I to this part.
505 Cycle means the test cycle that consists of the first 505 seconds (seconds 1 to 505) of the EPA Urban Dynamometer Driving Schedule, described in § 86.115-00 and listed in appendix I, paragraph (a), of this part.
SC03 means the test cycle, described in § 86.160-00 and listed in appendix I, paragraph (h), of this part, which is designed to represent driving immediately following startup.
Supplemental FTP, or SFTP means the additional test procedures designed to measure emissions during aggressive and microtransient driving, as described in § 86.159-00 over the US06 cycle, and also the test procedure designed to measure urban driving emissions while the vehicle’s air conditioning system is operating, as described in § 86.160-00 over the SC03 cycle.
US06 means the test cycle, described in § 86.159-00 and listed in appendix I, paragraph (g), of this part, which is designed to evaluate emissions during aggressive and microtransient driving.
§ 86.000-3 Abbreviations.
The abbreviations in § 86.098-3 continue to apply to 1998 and later model year vehicles. The abbreviations in this section apply beginning with the 2000 model year:
§ 86.000-7 Maintenance of records; submittal of information; right of entry.
Section 86.000-7 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.091-7 or § 86.094-7. Where a paragraph in § 86.091-7 or § 86.094-7 is identical and applicable to § 86.000-7, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.091-7.” or “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-7.”
(a) introductory text through (a)(2) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.091-7.
(a)(3) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-7.
(b)-(c)(2) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.091-7.
(c)(3) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-7.
(c)(4)-(d)(1)(v) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.091-7.
(d)(1)(vi)-(d)(2)(iv) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-7.
(d)(3)-(g) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.091-7.
(h)(1) [Reserved]
(h)(2)-(h)(5) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-7.
(6) EPA may void ab initio a certificate for a vehicle certified to Tier 1 certification standards or to the respective evaporative and/or refueling test procedure and accompanying evaporative and/or refueling standards as set forth or otherwise referenced in § 86.098-10 for which the manufacturer fails to retain the records required in this section or to provide such information to the Administrator upon request.
§ 86.000-24 Test vehicles and engines.
(a) [Reserved.
(b) introductory text [Reserved]
(b)(1)(i) Vehicles are chosen to be operated and tested for emission data based upon engine family groupings. Within each engine family, one test vehicle is selected. If air conditioning is projected to be available on any vehicles within the engine family, the Administrator will limit selections to engine codes which have air conditioning available and will require that any vehicle selected under this section has air conditioning installed and operational. The Administrator selects as the test vehicle the vehicle with the heaviest equivalent test weight (including options) within the family which meets the air conditioning eligibility requirement discussed earlier in this section. If more than one vehicle meets this criterion, then within that vehicle grouping, the Administrator selects, in the order listed, the highest road-load power, largest displacement, the transmission with the highest numerical final gear ratio (including overdrive), the highest numerical axle ratio offered in that engine family, and the maximum fuel flow calibration.
(ii) The Administrator selects one additional test vehicle from within each engine family. The additional vehicle selected is the vehicle expected to exhibit the highest emissions of those vehicles remaining in the engine family. The selected vehicle will include an air conditioning engine code unless the Administrator chooses a worst vehicle configuration that is not available with air conditioning. If all vehicles within the engine family are similar, the Administrator may waive the requirements of this paragraph.
(b)(1)(iii)-(b)(1)(vi) [Reserved]
(c)-(f) [Reserved]
(g)(1)-(2) [Reserved]
(g)(3) Except for air conditioning, where it is expected that 33 percent or less of a carline, within an engine-system combination, will be equipped with an item (whether that item is standard equipment or an option) that can reasonably be expected to influence emissions, that item may not be installed on any emission data vehicle or durability data vehicle of that carline within that engine-system combination, unless that item is standard equipment on that vehicle or specifically required by the Administrator.
(4) Air conditioning must be installed and operational on any emission data vehicle of any vehicle configuration that is projected to be available with air conditioning regardless of the rate of installation of air conditioning within the carline. Section 86.096-24(g) (1) and (2) and paragraph (g)(3) of this section will be used to determine whether the weight of the air conditioner will be included in equivalent test weight calculations for emission testing.
§ 86.001-2 Definitions.
The definitions of § 86.000-2 continue to apply to 2000 and later model year vehicles. The definitions listed in this section apply beginning with the 2001 model year.
Useful life means:
(1) For light-duty vehicles, and for light light-duty trucks not subject to the Tier 0 standards of § 86.094-9(a), intermediate useful life and/or full useful life. Intermediate useful life is a period of use of 5 years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Full useful life is a period of use of 10 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first, except as otherwise noted in § 86.094-9. The useful life of evaporative and/or refueling emission control systems on the portion of these vehicles subject to the evaporative emission test requirements of § 86.130-96, and/or the refueling emission test requirements of § 86.151-2001, is defined as a period of use of 10 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
(2) For light light-duty trucks subject to the Tier 0 standards of § 86.094-9(a), and for heavy light-duty truck engine families, intermediate and/or full useful life. Intermediate useful life is a period of use of 5 years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Full useful life is a period of use of 11 years or 120,000 miles, whichever occurs first. The useful life of evaporative emission and/or refueling control systems on the portion of these vehicles subject to the evaporative emission test requirements of § 86.130-96, and/or the refueling emission test requirements of § 86.151-2001, is also defined as a period of 11 years or 120,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
(3) For an Otto-cycle heavy-duty engine family:
(i) For hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide standards, a period of use of 8 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(ii) For the oxides of nitrogen standard, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(iii) For the portion of evaporative emission control systems subject to the evaporative emission test requirements of § 86.1230-96, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
(4) For a diesel heavy-duty engine family:
(i) For light heavy-duty diesel engines, for hydrocarbon, carbon monoxide, and particulate standards, a period of use of 8 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(ii) For light heavy-duty diesel engines, for the oxides of nitrogen standard, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(iii) For medium heavy-duty diesel engines, for hydrocarbon, carbon monoxide, and particulate standards, a period of use of 8 years or 185,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(iv) For medium heavy-duty diesel engines, for the oxides of nitrogen standard, a period of use of 10 years or 185,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(v) For heavy heavy-duty diesel engines, for hydrocarbon, carbon monoxide, and particulate standards, a period of use of 8 years or 290,000 miles, whichever first occurs, except as provided in paragraph (4)(vii) of this definition.
(vi) For heavy heavy-duty diesel engines, for the oxides of nitrogen standard, a period of use of 10 years or 290,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(vii) For heavy heavy-duty diesel engines used in urban buses, for the particulate standard, a period of use of 10 years or 290,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
§ 86.001-21 Application for certification.
Section 86.001-21 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.094-21 or § 86.096-21. Where a paragraph in § 86.094-21 or § 86.096-21 is identical and applicable to § 86.001-21, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.” or “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-21.”
(a)-(b)(1)(i)(B) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(1)(i)(C) The manufacturer must submit a Statement of Compliance in the application for certification which attests to the fact that they have assured themselves that the engine family is designed to comply with the intermediate temperature cold testing criteria of subpart C of this part, and does not unnecessarily reduce emission control effectiveness of vehicles operating at high altitude or other conditions not experienced within the US06 (aggressive driving) and SC03 (air conditioning) test cycles.
(b)(1)(i)(C)(1)-(b)(1)(ii)(C) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(2) Projected U.S. sales data sufficient to enable the Administrator to select a test fleet representative of the vehicles (or engines) for which certification is requested, and data sufficient to determine projected compliance with the standards implementation schedules of § 86.000-8 and 86.000-9. Volume projected to be produced for U.S. sale may be used in lieu of projected U.S. sales.
(b)(3) A description of the test equipment and fuel proposed to be used.
(b)(4)(i) For light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks, a description of the test procedures to be used to establish the evaporative emission and/or refueling emission deterioration factors, as appropriate, required to be determined and supplied in § 86.001-23(b)(2).
(b)(4)(ii)-(b)(5)(iv) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(5)(v) For light-duty vehicles and applicable light-duty trucks with non-integrated refueling emission control systems, the number of continuous UDDS cycles, determined from the fuel economy on the UDDS applicable to the test vehicle of that evaporative/refueling emission family-emission control system combination, required to use a volume of fuel equal to 85% of fuel tank volume.
(b)(6)-(b)(8) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(9) For each light-duty vehicle, light-duty truck, evaporative/refueling emission family or heavy-duty vehicle evaporative emission family, a description of any unique procedures required to perform evaporative and/or refueling emission tests, as applicable, (including canister working capacity, canister bed volume, and fuel temperature profile for the running loss test) for all vehicles in that evaporative and/or evaporative/refueling emission family, and a description of the method used to develop those unique procedures.
(10) For each light-duty vehicle or applicable light-duty truck evaporative/refueling emission family, or each heavy-duty vehicle evaporative emission family:
(i) Canister working capacity, according to the procedures specified in § 86.132-96(h)(1)(iv);
(ii) Canister bed volume; and
(iii) Fuel temperature profile for the running loss test, according to the procedures specified in § 86.129-94(d).
(c)-(j) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(k) and (l) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-21.
§ 86.001-23 Required data.
Section 86.001-23 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.098-23. Where a paragraph in § 86.098-23 is identical and applicable to § 86.001-23, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.”
(a)-(b)(1) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(b)(2) For light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks, the manufacturer shall submit evaporative emission and/or refueling emission deterioration factors for each evaporative/refueling emission family-emission control system combination and all test data that are derived from testing described under § 86.001-21(b)(4)(i) designed and conducted in accordance with good engineering practice to assure that the vehicles covered by a certificate issued under § 86.001-30 will meet the evaporative and/or refueling emission standards in § 86.099-8 or § 86.001-9, as appropriate, for the useful life of the vehicle.
(b)(3) and (b)(4) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(c) Emission data (1) [Reserved]
(c)(2)-(e)(1) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(e)(2) For evaporative and refueling emissions durability, or light-duty truck or HDE exhaust emissions durability, a statement of compliance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section or § 86.098-23 (b)(1)(ii), (b)(3), or (b)(4) as applicable.
(3) For certification of vehicles with non-integrated refueling systems, a statement that the drivedown used to purge the refueling canister was the same as described in the manufacturer’s application for certification. Furthermore, a description of the procedures used to determine the number of equivalent UDDS miles required to purge the refueling canisters, as determined by the provisions of § 86.001-21(b)(5)(v) and subpart B of this part. Furthermore, a written statement to the Administrator that all data, analyses, test procedures, evaluations and other documents, on which the above statement is based, are available to the Administrator upon request.
(f)-(g) [Reserved]
(h)-(m) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
§ 86.001-24 Test vehicles and engines.
Section 86.001-24 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.096-24, § 86.098-24 or § 86.000-24. Where a paragraph in § 86.096-24, § 86.098-24 or § 86.000-9 is identical and applicable to § 86.001-24, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.” or “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-24.” or “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.000-24.”
(a)-(a)(4) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.
(a)(5)-(a)(7) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-24.
(a)(8)-(b)(1) introductory text [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.
(b)(1)(i)-(b)(1)(ii) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.000-24.
(b)(1)(iii)-(b)(1)(vi) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.
(b)(1)(vii)(A)-(b)(1)(viii)(A) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-24.
(b)(1)(viii)(B)-(e)(2) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.
(f) Carryover and carryacross of durability and emission data. In lieu of testing an emission-data or durability vehicle (or engine) selected under § 86.096-24(b)(1) introductory text, (b)(1)(iii)-(b)(1)(vi) and § 86.000-24(b)(1)(i)-(b)(1)(ii) and § 86.098-24(b)(1)(vii)(A)-(b)(1)(viii)(A) or § 86.096-24(c), and submitting data therefor, a manufacturer may, with the prior written approval of the Administrator, submit exhaust emission data, evaporative emission data and/or refueling emission data, as applicable, on a similar vehicle (or engine) for which certification has been obtained or for which all applicable data required under § 86.001-23 has previously been submitted.
(g)(1)-(g)(2) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.
(g)(3)-(g)(4) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86-000-24.
(h) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-24.
§ 86.004-2 Definitions.
The definitions of § 86.001-2 continue to apply to 2001 and later model year vehicles. The definitions listed in this section apply beginning with the 2004 model year.
Ambulance has the meaning given in § 86.1803.
Defeat device means an auxiliary emission control device (AECD) that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control system under conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use, unless:
(1) Such conditions are substantially included in the applicable Federal emission test procedure for heavy-duty vehicles and heavy-duty engines described in subpart N of this part;
(2) The need for the AECD is justified in terms of protecting the vehicle against damage or accident;
(3) The AECD does not go beyond the requirements of engine starting; or
(4) The AECD applies only for engines that will be installed in emergency vehicles, and the need is justified in terms of preventing the engine from losing speed, torque, or power due abnormal conditions of the emission control system, or in terms of preventing such abnormal conditions from occurring, during operation related to emergency response. Examples of such abnormal conditions may include excessive exhaust backpressure from an overloaded particulate trap, and running out of diesel exhaust fluid for engines that rely on urea-based selective catalytic reduction.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) means a liquid reducing agent (other than the engine fuel) used in conjunction with selective catalytic reduction to reduce NO
Emergency vehicle has the meaning given in 40 CFR 1037.801.
Fire truck has the meaning given in § 86.1803.
U.S.-directed production means the engines and/or vehicles (as applicable) produced by a manufacturer for which the manufacturer has reasonable assurance that sale was or will be made to ultimate purchasers in the United States, excluding engines and/or vehicles that are certified to state emission standards different than the emission standards in this part.
Useful life means:
(1) For light-duty vehicles, and for light light-duty trucks not subject to the Tier 0 standards of § 86.094-9(a), intermediate useful life and/or full useful life. Intermediate useful life is a period of use of 5 years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Full useful life is a period of use of 10 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first, except as otherwise noted in § 86.094-9. The useful life of evaporative and/or refueling emission control systems on the portion of these vehicles subject to the evaporative emission test requirements of § 86.130-96, and/or the refueling emission test requirements of § 86.151-98, is defined as a period of use of 10 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
(2) For light light-duty trucks subject to the Tier 0 standards of § 86.094-9(a), and for heavy light-duty truck engine families, intermediate and/or full useful life. Intermediate useful life is a period of use of 5 years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Full useful life is a period of use of 11 years or 120,000 miles, whichever occurs first. The useful life of evaporative emission and/or refueling control systems on the portion of these vehicles subject to the evaporative emission test requirements of § 86.130-96, and/or the refueling emission test requirements of § 86.151-98, is also defined as a period of 11 years or 120,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
(3) For an Otto-cycle HDE family:
(i) For hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide standards, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(ii) For the oxides of nitrogen standard, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(iii) For the portion of evaporative emission control systems subject to the evaporative emission test requirements of § 86.1230-96, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(4) For a diesel HDE family:
(i) For light heavy-duty diesel engines, for carbon monoxide, particulate, and oxides of nitrogen plus non-methane hydrocarbons emissions standards, a period of use of 10 years or 110,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(ii) For medium heavy-duty diesel engines, for carbon monoxide, particulate, and oxides of nitrogen plus non-methane hydrocarbons emission standards, a period of use of 10 years or 185,000 miles, whichever first occurs.
(iii) For heavy heavy-duty diesel engines, for carbon monoxide, particulate, and oxides of nitrogen plus non-methane hydrocarbon emissions standards, a period of use of 10 years or 435,000 miles, or 22,000 hours, whichever first occurs, except as provided in paragraphs (4)(iv) and (4)(v) of this definition.
(iv) The useful life limit of 22,000 hours in paragraph (4)(iii) of this definition is effective as a limit to the useful life only when an accurate hours meter is provided by the manufacturer with the engine and only when such hours meter can reasonably be expected to operate properly over the useful life of the engine.
(v) For an individual engine, if the useful life hours limit of 22,000 hours is reached before the engine reaches 10 years or 100,000 miles, the useful life shall become 10 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first, as required under Clean Air Act section 202(d).
(5) As an option for both light-duty trucks under certain conditions and HDE families, an alternative useful life period may be assigned by the Administrator under the provisions of § 86.094-21(f).
Warranty period, for purposes of HDE emissions defect warranty and emissions performance warranty, shall be a period of 5 years/50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, for Otto-cycle HDEs and light heavy-duty diesel engines. For all other heavy-duty diesel engines the aforementioned period shall be 5 years/100,000 miles, whichever occurs first. However, in no case may this period be less than the basic mechanical warranty period that the manufacturer provides (with or without additional charge) to the purchaser of the engine. Extended warranties on select parts do not extend the emissions warranty requirements for the entire engine but only for those parts. In cases where responsibility for an extended warranty is shared between the owner and the manufacturer, the emissions warranty shall also be shared in the same manner as specified in the warranty agreement.
§ 86.004-11 Emission standards for 2004 and later model year diesel heavy-duty engines and vehicles.
This section applies to 2004 and later model year diesel HDEs.
(a)(1) Exhaust emissions from new 2004 and later model year diesel HDEs shall not exceed the following:
(i)(A) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbons (NO
(B) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbon Equivalent (NO
(C) Optional standard. Manufacturers may elect to certify to an Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbons (or equivalent for methanol-fueled engines) standard of 2.5 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.93 gram per megajoule), as measured under transient operating conditions, provided that Non-methane Hydrocarbons (or equivalent for methanol-fueled engines) do not exceed 0.5 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.19 gram per megajoule) NMHC (or NMHCE for methanol-fueled engines), as measured under transient operating conditions.
(D) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its diesel HDE families in any or all of the emissions ABT programs for HDEs, within the restrictions described in § 86.004-15 or superseding applicable sections. If the manufacturer elects to include engine families in any of these programs, the NO
(E) [Reserved]
(ii) Carbon monoxide. (A) 15.5 grams per brake horsepower-hour (5.77 grams per megajoule), as measured under transient operating conditions.
(B) 0.50 percent of exhaust gas flow at curb idle (methanol-, natural gas-, and liquefied petroleum gas-fueled diesel HDEs only).
(iii) Particulate. (A) For diesel engines to be used in urban buses, 0.05 gram per brake horsepower-hour (0.019 gram per megajoule) for certification testing and selective enforcement audit testing, and 0.07 gram per brake horsepower-hour (0.026 gram per megajoule) for in-use testing, as measured under transient operating conditions.
(B) For all other diesel engines, 0.10 gram per brake horsepower-hour (0.037 gram per megajoule), as measured under transient operating conditions.
(C) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its diesel HDE families in any or all of the particulate ABT programs for HDEs, within the restrictions described in § 86.004-15 or superseding applicable sections. If the manufacturer elects to include engine families in any of these programs, the particulate FEL may not exceed 0.25 gram per brake horsepower-hour (0.093 gram per megajoule).
(2) The standards set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section refer to the exhaust emitted over the operating schedule set forth in paragraph (f)(2) of appendix I to this part, and measured and calculated in accordance with the procedures set forth in subpart N or P of this part, except as noted in § 86.098-23(c)(2) or superceding sections.
(b)(1) The opacity of smoke emission from new 2004 and later model year diesel HDEs shall not exceed:
(i) 20 percent during the engine acceleration mode.
(ii) 15 percent during the engine lugging mode.
(iii) 50 percent during the peaks in either mode.
(2) The standards set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section refer to exhaust smoke emissions generated under the conditions set forth in subpart I of this part and measured and calculated in accordance with those procedures.
(3) This paragraph (b)(3) applies as specified in 40 CFR 1037.103. Evaporative emissions (total of non-oxygenated hydrocarbons plus methanol) from heavy-duty vehicles equipped with methanol-fueled diesel engines shall not exceed the following standards. The standards apply equally to certification and in-use vehicles. The spitback standard also applies to newly assembled vehicles.
(i) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 14,000 lbs:
(A)(1) For the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 3.0 grams per test.
(2) For the supplemental two-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 3.5 grams per test.
(B) Running loss test: 0.05 grams per mile.
(C) Fuel dispensing spitback test: 1.0 gram per test.
(ii) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 14,000 lbs:
(A)(1) For the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 4.0 grams per test.
(2) For the supplemental two-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 4.5 grams per test.
(B) Running loss test: 0.05 grams per mile.
(iii)(A) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 26,000 lbs, the standards set forth in paragraph (b)(3) of this section refer to a composite sample of evaporative emissions collected under the conditions and measured in accordance with the procedures set forth in subpart M of this part. For certification vehicles only, manufacturers may conduct testing to quantify a level of nonfuel background emissions for an individual test vehicle. Such a demonstration must include a description of the source(s) of emissions and an estimated decay rate. The demonstrated level of nonfuel background emissions may be subtracted from emission test results from certification vehicles if approved in advance by the Administrator.
(B) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 26,000 lbs., the standards set forth in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section refer to the manufacturer’s engineering design evaluation using good engineering practice (a statement of which is required in § 86.091-23(b)(4)(ii)).
(iv) All fuel vapor generated during in-use operations shall be routed exclusively to the evaporative control system (e.g., either canister or engine purge). The only exception to this requirement shall be for emergencies.
(4) This paragraph (b)(4) applies as specified in 40 CFR 1037.103. Evaporative emissions from 2004 and later model year heavy-duty vehicles equipped with natural gas-fueled or liquefied petroleum gas-fueled HDEs shall not exceed the following standards. The standards apply equally to certification and in-use vehicles.
(i) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 14,000 pounds for the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 3.0 grams per test.
(ii) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 14,000 pounds for the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 4.0 grams per test.
(iii)(A) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 26,000 pounds, the standards set forth in paragraph (b)(4) of this section refer to a composite sample of evaporative emissions collected under the conditions set forth in subpart M of this part and measured in accordance with those procedures.
(B) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating greater than 26,000 pounds, the standards set forth in paragraphs (b)(3)(ii) and (b)(4)(ii) of this section refer to the manufacturer’s engineering design evaluation using good engineering practice (a statement of which is required in § 86.091-23(b)(4)(ii)).
(iv) Compressed natural gas vehicles must meet the requirements for fueling connection devices as specified in § 86.1813-17(f)(1). Vehicles meeting these requirements are deemed to comply with evaporative emission standards.
(c) No crankcase emissions shall be discharged into the ambient atmosphere from any new 2004 or later model year methanol-, natural gas-, or liquefied petroleum gas-fueled diesel, or any naturally-aspirated diesel HDE. For petroleum-fueled engines only, this provision does not apply to engines using turbochargers, pumps, blowers, or superchargers for air induction.
(d) Every manufacturer of new motor vehicle engines subject to the standards prescribed in this section shall, prior to taking any of the actions specified in section 203(a)(1) of the Act, test or cause to be tested motor vehicle engines in accordance with applicable procedures in subpart I or N of this part to ascertain that such test engines meet the requirements of this section.
(e) The standards described in this section do not apply to diesel-fueled medium-duty passenger vehicles (MDPVs) that are subject to regulation under subpart S of this part, except as specified in subpart S of this part. The standards described in this section also do not apply to diesel engines used in such MDPVs, except as specified in the regulations in subpart S of this part. The term “medium-duty passenger vehicle” is defined in § 86.1803.
§ 86.004-15 NOX plus NMHC and particulate averaging, trading, and banking for heavy-duty engines.
(a) Overview. (1) Heavy-duty engines eligible for NO
(2)(i) Engine families with FELs exceeding the applicable standard shall obtain emission credits in a mass amount sufficient to address the shortfall. Credits may be obtained from averaging, trading, or banking, within the averaging set restrictions described in this section.
(ii) Engine families with FELs below the applicable standard will have emission credits available to average, trade, bank or a combination thereof. Credits may not be used for averaging or trading to offset emissions that exceed an FEL. Credits may not be used to remedy an in-use nonconformity determined by a Selective Enforcement Audit or by recall testing. However, credits may be used to allow subsequent production of engines for the family in question if the manufacturer elects to recertify to a higher FEL.
(b) Participation in the NO
(1) During certification, the manufacturer shall:
(i) Declare its intent to include specific engine families in the averaging, trading and/or banking programs. Separate declarations are required for each program and for each pollutant (i.e., NO
(ii) Declare an FEL for each engine family participating in one or more of these two programs.
(A) The FEL must be to the same level of significant digits as the emission standard (one-tenth of a gram per brake horsepower-hour for NO
(B) In no case may the FEL exceed the upper limit prescribed in the section concerning the applicable heavy-duty engine NO
(iii) Calculate the projected emission credits (positive or negative) based on quarterly production projections for each participating family and for each pollutant, using the applicable equation in paragraph (c) of this section and the applicable factors for the specific engine family.
(iv)(A) Determine and state the source of the needed credits according to quarterly projected production for engine families requiring credits for certification.
(B) State where the quarterly projected credits will be applied for engine families generating credits.
(C) Credits may be obtained from or applied to only engine families within the same averaging set as described in paragraph (d) or (e) of this section. Credits available for averaging, trading, or banking as defined in § 86.090-2, may be applied exclusively to a given engine family, or reserved as defined in § 86.091-2.
(2) Based on this information each manufacturer’s certification application must demonstrate:
(i) That at the end of model year production, each engine family has a net emissions credit balance of zero or more using the methodology in paragraph (c) of this section with any credits obtained from averaging, trading or banking.
(ii) The source of the credits to be used to comply with the emission standard if the FEL exceeds the standard, or where credits will be applied if the FEL is less than the emission standard. In cases where credits are being obtained, each engine family involved must state specifically the source (manufacturer/engine family) of the credits being used. In cases where credits are being generated/supplied, each engine family involved must state specifically the designated use (manufacturer/engine family or reserved) of the credits involved. All such reports shall include all credits involved in averaging, trading or banking.
(3) During the model year manufacturers must:
(i) Monitor projected versus actual production to be certain that compliance with the emission standards is achieved at the end of the model year.
(ii) Provide the end-of-model year reports required under § 86.001-23.
(iii) For manufacturers participating in emission credit trading, maintain the quarterly records required under § 86.091-7(c)(8).
(4) Projected credits based on information supplied in the certification application may be used to obtain a certificate of conformity. However, any such credits may be revoked based on review of end-of-model year reports, follow-up audits, and any other compliance measures deemed appropriate by the Administrator.
(5) Compliance under averaging, banking, and trading will be determined at the end of the model year. Engine families without an adequate amount of NO
(6) If EPA or the manufacturer determines that a reporting error occurred on an end-of-year report previously submitted to EPA under this section, the manufacturer’s credits and credit calculations will be recalculated. Erroneous positive credits will be void. Erroneous negative balances may be adjusted by EPA for retroactive use.
(i) If EPA review of a manufacturer’s end-of-year report indicates a credit shortfall, the manufacturer will be permitted to purchase the necessary credits to bring the credit balance for that engine family to zero, using the discount specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section on the ratio of credits purchased for every credit needed to bring the balance to zero. If sufficient credits are not available to bring the credit balance for the family in question to zero, EPA may void the certificate for that engine family ab initio.
(ii) If within 180 days of receipt of the manufacturer’s end-of-year report, EPA review determines a reporting error in the manufacturer’s favor (i.e., resulting in a positive credit balance) or if the manufacturer discovers such an error within 180 days of EPA receipt of the end-of-year report, the credits will be restored for use by the manufacturer.
(c)(1) For each participating engine family, NO
(i) For determining credit need for all engine families and credit availability for engine families generating credits for averaging programs only:
(ii) For determining credit availability for engine families generating credits for trading or banking programs:
(iii) For purposes of the equation in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section:
(2)(i) The transient cycle conversion factor is the total (integrated) cycle brake horsepower-hour or Megajoules, divided by the equivalent mileage of the applicable transient cycle. For Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, the equivalent mileage is 6.3 miles. For diesel heavy-duty engines, the equivalent mileage is 6.5 miles.
(ii) When more than one configuration is chosen by EPA to be tested in the certification of an engine family (as described in § 86.085-24), the conversion factor used is to be based upon a production weighted average value of the configurations in an engine family to calculate the conversion factor.
(d) Averaging sets for NO
(1) For NO
(i) Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines constitute an averaging set. Averaging and trading among all Otto-cycle heavy-duty engine families is allowed. There are no subclass restrictions.
(ii) Otto-cycle heavy-duty vehicles certified under the chassis-based provisions of subpart S of this part may not average or trade with heavy-duty Otto-cycle engines except as allowed in § 86.1817-05(o).
(2) For NO
(i) Each of the three primary intended service classes for heavy-duty diesel engines, as defined in § 86.004-2, constitute an averaging set. Averaging and trading among all diesel-cycle engine families within the same primary service class is allowed.
(ii) Urban buses are treated as members of the primary intended service class where they otherwise would fall.
(e) Averaging sets for particulate emission credits. The averaging and trading of particulate emission credits will only be allowed between diesel cycle heavy-duty engine families in the same averaging set. The averaging sets for the averaging and trading of particulate emission credits for diesel cycle heavy-duty engines are defined as follows:
(1) Engines intended for use in urban buses constitute a separate averaging set from all other heavy-duty engines. Averaging and trading between diesel cycle bus engine families is allowed.
(2) For heavy-duty engines, exclusive of urban bus engines, each of the three primary intended service classes for heavy-duty diesel cycle engines, as defined in § 86.004-2, constitute an averaging set. Averaging and trading between diesel-cycle engine families within the same primary service class is allowed.
(3) Otto cycle engines may not participate in particulate averaging, trading, or banking.
(f) Banking of NO
(ii) Manufacturers may bank credits only after the end of the model year and after actual credits have been reported to EPA in the end-of-year report. During the model year and before submittal of the end-of-year report, credits originally designated in the certification process for banking will be considered reserved and may be redesignated for trading or averaging.
(2) Credit withdrawals. (i) NO
(ii) Manufacturers withdrawing banked NO
(3) Use of banked emission credits. The use of banked credits shall be within the averaging set and other restrictions described in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, and only for the following purposes:
(i) Banked credits may be used in averaging, or in trading, or in any combination thereof, during the certification period. Credits declared for banking from the previous model year but not reported to EPA may also be used. However, if EPA finds that the reported credits can not be proven, they will be revoked and unavailable for use.
(ii) Banked credits may not be used for NO
(iii) NO
(iv) Except for early credits banked under § 86.000-15(k), NO
(g)(1) This paragraph (g) assumes NO
(2) Engine families using NO
(i) May not generate NO
(ii) May not use NO
(3) If a manufacturer has any engine family to which application of NCPs and banking and trading credits is desired, that family must be separated into two distinct families. One family, whose FEL equals the standard, must use NCPs only while the other, whose FEL does not equal the standard, must use credits only.
(4) If a manufacturer has any engine family in a given averaging set which is using NO
(h) In the event of a negative credit balance in a trading situation, both the buyer and the seller would be liable.
(i) Certification fuel used for credit generation must be of a type that is both available in use and expected to be used by the engine purchaser. Therefore, upon request by the Administrator, the engine manufacturer must provide information acceptable to the Administrator that the designated fuel is readily available commercially and would be used in customer service.
(j) Credit apportionment. At the manufacturer’s option, credits generated under the provisions described in this section may be sold to or otherwise provided to another party for use in programs other than the averaging, trading and banking program described in this section.
(1) The manufacturer shall pre-identify two emission levels per engine family for the purposes of credit apportionment. One emission level shall be the FEL and the other shall be the level of the standard that the engine family is required to certify to under § 86.005-10 or § 86.004-11. For each engine family, the manufacturer may report engine sales in two categories, “ABT-only credits” and “nonmanufacturer-owned credits”.
(i) For engine sales reported as “ABT-only credits”, the credits generated must be used solely in the ABT program described in this section.
(ii) The engine manufacturer may declare a portion of engine sales “nonmanufacturer-owned credits” and this portion of the credits generated between the standard and the FEL, based on the calculation in (c)(1) of this section, would belong to the engine purchaser. For ABT, the manufacturer may not generate any credits for the engine sales reported as “nonmanufacturer-owned credits”. Engines reported as “nonmanufacturer-owned credits” shall comply with the FEL and the requirements of the ABT program in all other respects.
(2) Only manufacturer-owned credits reported as “ABT-only credits” shall be used in the averaging, trading, and banking provisions described in this section.
(3) Credits shall not be double-counted. Credits used in the ABT program may not be provided to an engine purchaser for use in another program.
(4) Manufacturers shall determine and state the number of engines sold as “ABT-only credits” and “nonmanufacturer-owned credits” in the end-of-model year reports required under § 86.001-23.
(k) Additional flexibility for diesel-cycle engines. If a diesel-cycle engine family meets the conditions of either paragraph (k)(1) or (2) of this section, a Discount of 1.0 may be used in the trading and banking calculation, for both NO
(1) The engine family certifies with a certification level of 1.9 g/bhp-hr NO
(2) All of the following must apply to the engine family:
(i) Diesel-cycle engines only;
(ii) 2004, 2005, and 2006 model years only;
(iii) Must be an engine family using carry-over certification data from prior to model year 2004 where the NO
(l) Additional flexibility for Otto-cycle engines. If an Otto-cycle engine family meets the conditions of paragraph (l)(1) or (2) of this section, a discount of 1.0 may be used in the trading and banking credits calculation for NO
(1) The engine family has a FEL of 0.5 g/bhp-hr NO
(2) All of the following conditions are met:
(i) For first three consecutive model years that the engine family is certified to a NO
(ii) The engine family is certified using carry-over data from an engine family which was used to generate early NO
§ 86.004-16 Prohibition of defeat devices.
(a) No new heavy-duty vehicle or heavy-duty engine shall be equipped with a defeat device.
(b) The Administrator may test or require testing on any vehicle or engine at a designated location, using driving cycles and conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal operation and use, for the purpose of investigating a potential defeat device.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) For vehicle and engine designs designated by the Administrator to be investigated for possible defeat devices:
(1) General. The manufacturer must show to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the vehicle or engine design does not incorporate strategies that reduce emission control effectiveness exhibited during the applicable Federal emissions test procedures when the vehicle or engine is operated under conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal operation and use, unless one of the specific exceptions set forth in the definition of “defeat device” in § 86.004-2 has been met.
(2) Information submissions required. The manufacturer will provide an explanation containing detailed information (including information which the Administrator may request to be submitted) regarding test programs, engineering evaluations, design specifications, calibrations, on-board computer algorithms, and design strategies incorporated for operation both during and outside of the applicable Federal emission test procedure.
§ 86.004-21 Application for certification.
Section 86.004-21 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.094-21. Where a paragraph in § 86.094-21 is identical and applicable to § 86.004-21, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.”
(a)-(b)(3) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(4)(i) [Reserved]
(b)(4)(ii)-(b)(5)(iv) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(6) Participation in averaging programs—(i) Particulate averaging. (A) If the manufacturer elects to participate in the particulate averaging program for diesel light-duty vehicles and/or diesel light-duty trucks or the particulate averaging program for heavy-duty diesel engines, the application must list the family particulate emission limit and the projected U.S. production volume of the family for the model year.
(B) The manufacturer shall choose the level of the family particulate emission limits, accurate to hundredth of a gram per mile or hundredth of a gram per brake horsepowerhour for HDEs.
(C) The manufacturer may at any time during production elect to change the level of any family particulate emission limit(s) by submitting the new limit(s) to the Administrator and by demonstrating compliance with the limit(s) as described in §§ 86.090-2 and 86.094-28(b)(5)(i).
(ii) NO
(B) The manufacturer shall choose the level of the family emission limits, accurate to one-tenth of a gram per mile or to one-tenth of a gram per brake horsepower-hour for HDEs.
(C) The manufacturer may at any time during production elect to change the level of any family emission limit(s) by submitting the new limits to the Administrator and by demonstrating compliance with the limit(s) as described in §§ 86.088-2 and 86.094-28(b)(5)(ii).
(b)(7) and (b)(8) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(9) For each light-duty vehicle, light-duty truck, evaporative/refueling emission family or heavy-duty vehicle evaporative emission family, a description of any unique procedures required to perform evaporative and/or refueling emission tests, as applicable, (including canister working capacity, canister bed volume, and fuel temperature profile for the running loss test) for all vehicles in that evaporative and/or evaporative/refueling emission family, and a description of the method used to develop those unique procedures.
(10) For each light-duty vehicle or applicable light-duty truck evaporative/refueling emission family, or each heavy-duty vehicle evaporative emission family:
(i) Canister working capacity, according to the procedures specified in § 86.132-96(h)(1)(iv);
(ii) Canister bed volume; and
(iii) Fuel temperature profile for the running loss test, according to the procedures specified in § 86.129-94(d).
(c)-(j) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(k)-(l) [Reserved]
(m) For model years 2004 through 2007, within 180 days after submission of the application for certification of a heavy-duty diesel engine, the manufacturer must provide emission test results from the Load Response Test conducted according to § 86.1380-2004, including, at a minimum, test results conducted at each of the speeds identified in § 86.1380-2004. Load Response Test data submissions are not necessary for carry-over engine families for which Load Response Test data has been previously submitted. In addition, upon approval of the Administrator, manufacturers may carry Load Response Test data across from one engine family to other engine families, provided that the carry-across engine families use similar emission control technology hardware which would be expected to result in the generation of similar emission data when run over the Load Response Test.
(n) Upon request from EPA, a manufacturer must provide to EPA any hardware (including scan tools), passwords, and/or documentation necessary for EPA to read, interpret, and store (in engineering units if applicable) any information broadcast by an engine’s on-board computers and electronic control modules which relates in any way to emission control devices and auxiliary emission control devices, provided that such hardware, passwords, or documentation exists and is not otherwise commercially available. Passwords include any information necessary to enable generic scan tools or personal computers access to proprietary emission related information broadcast by an engine’s on-board computer, if such passwords exist. This requirement includes access by EPA to any proprietary code information which may be broadcast by an engine’s on-board computer and electronic control modules. Information which is confidential business information must be marked as such. Engineering units refers to the ability to read, interpret, and store information in commonly understood engineering units, for example, engine speed in revolutions per minute or per second, injection timing parameters such as start of injection in degree’s before top-dead center, fueling rates in cubic centimeters per stroke, vehicle speed in miles per hour or kilometers per hour. This paragraph (n) does not restrict EPA authority to take any action authorized by section 208 of the Clean Air Act.
§ 86.004-25 Maintenance.
Section 86.004-25 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.094-25. Where a paragraph in § 86.094-25 is applicable to § 86.004-25, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-25.”.
(a)(1) Applicability. This section applies to light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks, and HDEs.
(2) Maintenance performed on vehicles, engines, subsystems, or components used to determine exhaust, evaporative or refueling emission deterioration factors, as appropriate, is classified as either emission-related or non-emission-related and each of these can be classified as either scheduled or unscheduled. Further, some emission-related maintenance is also classified as critical emission-related maintenance.
(b) Introductory text through (b)(3)(ii) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-25.
(b)(3)(iii) For otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, the adjustment, cleaning, repair, or replacement of the items listed in paragraphs (b)(3)(iii) (A)-(E) of this section shall occur at 50,000 miles (or 1,500 hours) of use and at 50,000-mile (or 1,500-hour) intervals thereafter.
(A) Crankcase ventilation valves and filters.
(B) Emission-related hoses and tubes.
(C) Ignition wires.
(D) Idle mixture.
(E) Exhaust gas recirculation system related filters and coolers.
(iv) For otto-cycle light-duty vehicles, light-duty trucks and otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, the adjustment, cleaning, repair, or replacement of the oxygen sensor shall occur at 80,000 miles (or 2,400 hours) of use and at 80,000-mile (or 2,400-hour) intervals thereafter.
(v) For otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, the adjustment, cleaning, repair, or replacement of the items listed in paragraphs (b)(3)(v) (A)-(H) of this section shall occur at 100,000 miles (or 3,000 hours) of use and at 100,000-mile (or 3,000-hour) intervals thereafter.
(A) Catalytic converter.
(B) Air injection system components.
(C) Fuel injectors.
(D) Electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors (except oxygen sensor) and actuators.
(E) Evaporative emission canister.
(F) Turbochargers.
(G) Carburetors.
(H) Exhaust gas recirculation system (including all related control valves and tubing) except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(E) of this section.
(4) For diesel-cycle heavy-duty engines, emission-related maintenance in addition to or at shorter intervals than the following specified values will not be accepted as technologically necessary, except as provided in paragraph (b)(7) of this section:
(i) For diesel-cycle heavy-duty engines, the adjustment, cleaning, repair, or replacement of the following items shall occur at 50,000 miles (or 1,500 hours) of use and at 50,000-mile (or 1,500-hour) intervals thereafter:
(A) Exhaust gas recirculation system related filters and coolers.
(B) Crankcase ventilation valves and filters.
(C) Fuel injector tips (cleaning only).
(D) DEF filters.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) The adjustment, cleaning, repair, or replacement of items listed in paragraphs (b)(4)(iii) (A)-(G) of this section shall occur at 100,000 miles (or 3,000 hours) of use and at 100,000-mile (or 3,000-hour) intervals thereafter for light heavy-duty diesel engines, or, at 150,000 miles (or 4,500 hours) intervals thereafter for medium and heavy heavy-duty diesel engines.
(A) Fuel injectors.
(B) Turbocharger.
(C) Electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and actuators.
(D) Particulate trap or trap oxidizer systems including related components (adjustment and cleaning only for filter element, replacement of the filter element is not allowed during the useful life).
(E) Exhaust gas recirculation system (including all related control valves and tubing) except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b)(4)(i)(A) of this section.
(F) Catalytic converter (adjustment and cleaning only for catalyst beds, replacement of the bed is not allowed during the useful life).
(G) Any other add-on emissions-related component (i.e., a component whose sole or primary purpose is to reduce emissions or whose failure will significantly degrade emissions control and whose function is not integral to the design and performance of the engine.)
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) For engines that use selective catalytic reduction, the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank must be sized so that DEF replenishment can occur at an interval, in miles or hours of vehicle operation, that is no less than the miles or hours of vehicle operation corresponding to the vehicle’s fuel capacity. Use good engineering judgment to ensure that you meet this requirement for worst-case operation. For example, if the highest rate of DEF consumption (relative to fuel consumption) will occur under highway driving conditions (characterized by the SET), the DEF tank should be large enough that a single tankful of DEF would be enough to continue proper operation of the SCR system for the expected highway driving range with a single tank of fuel. Conversely, if the highest rate of DEF consumption (relative to fuel consumption) will occur under city or urban driving conditions (characterized by the transient FTP test), the DEF tank should be large enough that a single tank of DEF would be enough to continue proper operation of the SCR system for the expected city driving range with a single tank of fuel. For engine testing in a laboratory, any size DEF tank and fuel tank may be used; however, for our testing of engines, we may require you to provide us with a production-type DEF tank, including any associated sensors.
(5) [Reserved]
(6)(i) The following components are defined as critical emission-related components:
(A) Catalytic converter.
(B) Air injection system components.
(C) Electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors (including oxygen sensor if installed) and actuators.
(D) Exhaust gas recirculation system (including all related filters, coolers, control valves, and tubing).
(E) Crankcase ventilation valves and filters.
(F) Evaporative and refueling emission control system components (excluding canister air filter).
(G) Particulate trap or trap-oxidizer system.
(H) Components comprising the selective catalytic reduction system (including DEF tank).
(I) Any other component whose primary purpose is to reduce emissions or whose failure would commonly increase emissions of any regulated pollutant without significantly degrading engine performance.
(ii) All critical emission-related scheduled maintenance must have a reasonable likelihood of being performed in-use. The manufacturer shall be required to show the reasonable likelihood of such maintenance being performed in-use, and such showing shall be made prior to the performance of the maintenance on the durability data engine. Critical emission-related scheduled maintenance items which satisfy one of the conditions defined in paragraphs (b)(6)(ii) (A)-(F) of this section will be accepted as having a reasonable likelihood of the maintenance item being performed in-use, except that DEF replenishment must satisfy paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(A) or (F) of this section to be accepted as having a reasonable likelihood of the maintenance item being performed in-use.
(A) Data are presented which establish for the Administrator a connection between emissions and vehicle performance such that as emissions increase due to lack of maintenance, vehicle performance will simultaneously deteriorate to a point unacceptable for typical driving.
(B) Survey data are submitted which adequately demonstrate to the Administrator that, at an 80 percent confidence level, 80 percent of such engines already have this critical maintenance item performed in-use at the recommended interval(s).
(C) A clearly displayed visible signal system approved by the Administrator is installed to alert the vehicle driver that maintenance is due. A signal bearing the message “maintenance needed” or “check engine”, or a similar message approved by the Administrator, shall be actuated at the appropriate mileage point or by component failure. This signal must be continuous while the engine is in operation and not be easily eliminated without performance of the required maintenance. Resetting the signal shall be a required step in the maintenance operation. The method for resetting the signal system shall be approved by the Administrator. For HDEs, the system must not be designed to deactivate upon the end of the useful life of the engine or thereafter.
(D) A manufacturer may desire to demonstrate through a survey that a critical maintenance item is likely to be performed without a visible signal on a maintenance item for which there is no prior in-use experience without the signal. To that end, the manufacturer may in a given model year market up to 200 randomly selected vehicles per critical emission-related maintenance item without such visible signals, and monitor the performance of the critical maintenance item by the owners to show compliance with paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(B) of this section. This option is restricted to two consecutive model years and may not be repeated until any previous survey has been completed. If the critical maintenance involves more than one engine family, the sample will be sales weighted to ensure that it is representative of all the families in question.
(E) The manufacturer provides the maintenance free of charge, and clearly informs the customer that the maintenance is free in the instructions provided under § 86.087-38.
(F) Any other method which the Administrator approves as establishing a reasonable likelihood that the critical maintenance will be performed in-use.
(iii) Visible signal systems used under paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(C) of this section are considered an element of design of the emission control system. Therefore, disabling, resetting, or otherwise rendering such signals inoperative without also performing the indicated maintenance procedure is a prohibited act under section 203(a)(3) of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7522(a)(3)).
(b)(7)-(h) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-25.
(i) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (b)(4) and (6) of this section, manufacturers may schedule replacement or repair of particulate trap (or trap oxidizer) systems or catalytic converters (including NO
§ 86.004-26 Mileage and service accumulation; emission measurements.
(a)-(b) [Reserved]
(c)(1) Paragraph (c) of this section applies to heavy-duty engines.
(2) Two types of service accumulation are applicable to heavy-duty engines, as described in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. For Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines exhaust emissions, the service accumulation method used by a manufacturer must be designed to effectively predict the deterioration of emissions in actual use over the full useful life of the of the candidate in-use vehicles and must cover the breadth of the manufacturer’s product line that will be covered by the durability procedure. Manufacturers not selecting Options 1 or 2 described in § 86.005-10(f) may certify Otto-cycle engines using the provisions contained in § 86.094-26(c)(2) rather than those contained in this paragraph (c)(2) for 2004 model year engine families certified using carry-over durability data, except for those engines used for early credit banking as allowed in § 86.000-15(k).
(i) Service accumulation on engines, subsystems, or components selected by the manufacturer under § 86.094-24(c)(3)(i). The manufacturer determines the form and extent of this service accumulation, consistent with good engineering practice, and describes it in the application for certification.
(ii) Dynamometer service accumulation on emission data engines selected under § 86.094-24(b)(2) or (3). The manufacturer determines the engine operating schedule to be used for dynamometer service accumulation, consistent with good engineering practice. A single engine operating schedule shall be used for all engines in an engine family-control system combination. Operating schedules may be different for different combinations.
(3) Exhaust emission deterioration factors will be determined on the basis of the service accumulation described in § 86.000-26(b)(2)(i) and related testing, according to the manufacturer’s procedures.
(4) The manufacturer shall determine, for each engine family, the number of hours at which the engine system combination is stabilized for emission-data testing. The manufacturer shall maintain, and provide to the Administrator if requested, a record of the rationale used in making this determination. The manufacturer may elect to accumulate 125 hours on each test engine within an engine family without making a determination. Any engine used to represent emission-data engine selections under § 86.094-24(b)(2) shall be equipped with an engine system combination that has accumulated at least the number of hours determined under this paragraph. Complete exhaust emission tests shall be conducted for each emission-data engine selection under § 86.094-24(b)(2). Evaporative emission controls must be connected, as described in 40 CFR part 1065, subpart F. The Administrator may determine under § 86.094-24(f) that no testing is required.
(d)(1) This paragraph (d) applies for heavy-duty engines.
(2)(i) The results of all emission testing shall be supplied to the Administrator. The manufacturer shall furnish to the Administrator explanation for voiding any test. The Administrator will determine if voiding the test was appropriate based upon the explanation given by the manufacturer for the voided test. Tests between test points may be conducted as required by the Administrator. Data from all tests (including voided tests) may be submitted weekly to the Administrator, but shall be delivered to the Administrator within 7 days after completion of the test. In addition, all test data shall be compiled and provided to the Administrator in accordance with § 86.007-23. Where the Administrator conducts a test on a durability data vehicle at a prescribed test point, the results of that test will be used in the calculation of the deterioration factor.
(ii) The results of all emission tests shall be recorded and reported to the Administrator. These test results shall be rounded as specified in 40 CFR part 1065 to the number of decimal places contained in the applicable emission standard expressed to one additional significant figure.
(3) Whenever a manufacturer intends to operate and test a vehicle (or engine) that may be used for emission data, the manufacturer shall retain in its records all information concerning all emission tests and maintenance, including vehicle (or engine) alterations to represent other vehicle (or engine) selections. This information shall be submitted, including the vehicle (or engine) description and specification information required by the Administrator, to the Administrator following the emission test.
(4) Emission testing of any type with respect to any certification vehicle or engine other than that specified in this subpart is not allowed except as such testing may be specifically authorized by the Administrator.
§ 86.004-28 Compliance with emission standards.
(a)-(b) [Reserved]
(c)(1) Paragraph (c) of this section applies to heavy-duty engines.
(2) The applicable exhaust emission standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate) for Otto-cycle engines and for diesel-cycle engines apply to the emissions of engines for their useful life.
(3) Since emission control efficiency generally decreases with the accumulation of service on the engine, deterioration factors will be used in combination with emission data engine test results as the basis for determining compliance with the standards.
(4)(i) Paragraph (c)(4) of this section describes the procedure for determining compliance of an engine with emission standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate), based on deterioration factors supplied by the manufacturer. Deterioration factors shall be established using applicable emissions test procedures. NO
(ii) Separate exhaust emission deterioration factors, determined from tests of engines, subsystems, or components conducted by the manufacturer, shall be supplied for each engine-system combination. For Otto-cycle engines, separate factors shall be established for transient NMHC (NMHCE), CO, NO
(iii)(A) Paragraphs (c)(4)(iii)(A) (1) and (2) of this section apply to Otto-cycle HDEs.
(1) Otto-cycle HDEs not utilizing aftertreatment technology (e.g., catalytic converters). For transient NMHC (NMHCE), CO, NO
(2) Otto-cycle HDEs utilizing aftertreatment technology (e.g., catalytic converters). For transient NMHC (NMHCE), CO, NO
(3) An Otto-cycle heavy-duty engine manufacturer who believes that a deterioration factor derived using the calculation methodology described in paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(4)(A)(2) of this section are significantly unrepresentative for one or more engine families (either too high or too low) may petition the Administrator to allow for the use of an additive rather than a multiplicative deterioration factor. This petition must include full rationale behind the request together with any supporting data or other evidence. Based on this or other information the Administration may allow for an alternative procedure. Any petition should be submitted in a timely manner, to allow adequate time for a thorough evaluation. Manufacturers using an additive deterioration factor under this paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(A)(3) must perform in-use verification testing to determine if the additive deterioration factor reasonably predicts actual in-use emissions. The plan for the in-use verification testing must be approved by the Administrator as part of the approval process described in this paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(4)(A)(3) prior to the use of the additive deterioration factor. The Administrator may consider the results of the in-use verification testing both in certification and in-use compliance programs.
(B) Paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(B) of this section applies to diesel-cycle HDEs.
(1) Additive deterioration factor for exhaust emissions. Except as specified in paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(B)(2) of this section, use an additive deterioration factor for exhaust emissions. An additive deterioration factor for a pollutant is the difference between exhaust emissions at the end of the useful life and exhaust emissions at the low-hour test point. In these cases, adjust the official emission results for each tested engine at the selected test point by adding the factor to the measured emissions. If the factor is less than zero, use zero. Additive deterioration factors must be specified to one more decimal place than the applicable standard.
(2) Multiplicative deterioration factor for exhaust emissions. Use a multiplicative deterioration factor if good engineering judgment calls for the deterioration factor for a pollutant to be the ratio of exhaust emissions at the end of the useful life to exhaust emissions at the low-hour test point. For example, if you use aftertreatment technology that controls emissions of a pollutant proportionally to engine-out emissions, it is often appropriate to use a multiplicative deterioration factor. Adjust the official emission results for each tested engine at the selected test point by multiplying the measured emissions by the deterioration factor. If the factor is less than one, use one. A multiplicative deterioration factor may not be appropriate in cases where testing variability is significantly greater than engine-to-engine variability. Multiplicative deterioration factors must be specified to one more significant figure than the applicable standard.
(3) Diesel-cycle HDEs only. For acceleration smoke (“A”), lugging smoke (“B”), and peak smoke (“C”), the official exhaust emission results for each emission data engine at the selected test point shall be adjusted by the addition of the appropriate deterioration factor. However, if the deterioration factor supplied by the manufacturer is less than zero, it shall be zero for the purposes of this paragraph.
(4) The emission values to compare with the standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate) shall be the adjusted emission values of paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section, rounded to the same number of significant figures as contained in the applicable standard in accordance with ASTM E 29-93a (as referenced in § 86.094-28 (a)(4)(i)(B)(2)(ii)), for each emission data engine.
(5) and (6) [Reserved]
(7) Every test engine of an engine family must comply with all applicable standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate), as determined in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section, before any engine in that family will be certified.
(8) For the purposes of setting an NMHC plus NO
(i) THC may be used in lieu of NMHC for the standards set forth in § 86.004-11.
(ii) The manufacturer may choose its own method to analyze methane with prior approval of the Administrator.
(iii) The manufacturer may assume that two percent of the measured THC is methane (NMHC = 0.98 × THC).
(d)(1) Paragraph (d) of this section applies to heavy-duty vehicles equipped with gasoline-fueled or methanol-fueled engines.
(2) The applicable evaporative emission standards in this subpart apply to the emissions of vehicles for their useful life.
(3)(i) For vehicles with a GVWR of up to 26,000 pounds, because it is expected that emission control efficiency will change during the useful life of the vehicle, an evaporative emission deterioration factor shall be determined from the testing described in § 86.098-23(b)(3) for each evaporative emission family-evaporative emission control system combination to indicate the evaporative emission control system deterioration during the useful life of the vehicle (minimum 50,000 miles). The factor shall be established to a minimum of two places to the right of the decimal.
(ii) For vehicles with a GVWR of greater than 26,000 pounds, because it is expected that emission control efficiency will change during the useful life of the vehicle, each manufacturer’s statement as required in § 86.098-23(b)(4)(ii) shall include, in accordance with good engineering practice, consideration of control system deterioration.
(4) The evaporative emission test results, if any, shall be adjusted by the addition of the appropriate deterioration factor, provided that if the deterioration factor as computed in paragraph (d)(3) of this section is less than zero, that deterioration factor shall be zero for the purposes of this paragraph.
(5) The emission level to compare with the standard shall be the adjusted emission level of paragraph (d)(4) of this section. Before any emission value is compared with the standard, it shall be rounded, in accordance with ASTM E 29-93a (as referenced in § 86.094-28 (a)(4)(i)(B)(2)(ii)), to two significant figures. The rounded emission values may not exceed the standard.
(6) Every test vehicle of an evaporative emission family must comply with the evaporative emission standard, as determined in paragraph (d)(5) of this section, before any vehicle in that family may be certified.
(e) [Reserved]
(f)-(g) [Reserved]
(h) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.001-28.
(i) This paragraph (i) describes how to adjust emission results from model year 2020 and earlier heavy-duty engines equipped with exhaust aftertreatment to account for regeneration events. This provision only applies for engines equipped with emission controls that are regenerated on an infrequent basis. For the purpose of this paragraph (i), the term “regeneration” means an event during which emission levels change while the aftertreatment performance is being restored by design. Examples of regenerations are increasing exhaust gas temperature to remove sulfur from an adsorber or increasing exhaust gas temperature to oxidize PM in a trap. For the purpose of this paragraph (i), the term “infrequent” means having an expected frequency of less than once per transient test cycle. Calculation and use of adjustment factors are described in paragraphs (i)(1) through (5) of this section. If your engine family includes engines with one or more AECDs for emergency vehicle applications approved under paragraph (4) of the definition of defeat device in § 86.004-2, do not consider additional regenerations resulting from those AECDs when calculating emission factors or frequencies under this paragraph (i).
(1) Development of adjustment factors. Manufacturers must develop separate pairs of adjustment factors (an upward adjustment factor and a downward adjustment factor) for each pollutant based on measured emission data and observed regeneration frequency. Adjustment factors may be carried-over to subsequent model years or carried-across to other engine families only where the Administrator determines that such carry-over or carry-across is consistent with good engineering judgment. Adjustment factors should generally apply to an entire engine family, but manufacturers may develop separate adjustment factors for different engine configurations within an engine family. All adjustment factors for regeneration are additive.
(2) Calculation of adjustment factors. The adjustment factors are calculated from the following parameters: the measured emissions from a test in which the regeneration occurs (EF
(i) The upward adjustment factor (UAF) is calculated as: UAF = EF
(ii) The downward adjustment factor (DAF) is calculated as: DAF = EF
(3) Use of adjustment factors. Upward adjustment factors are added to measured emission rates for all tests in which the regeneration does not occur. Downward adjustment factors are added to measured emission rates for all tests in which the regeneration occurs. The occurrence of the regeneration must be identified in a manner that is readily apparent during all testing. Where no regeneration is identified, the upward adjustment factor shall be applied.
(4) Sample calculation. If EF
(5) Options. (i) A manufacturer may elect to omit adjustment factors for one or more of its engine families (or configurations) because the effect of the regeneration is small, or because it is not practical to identify when regenerations occur. In these cases, no upward or downward adjustment factor shall be added, and the manufacturer is liable for compliance with the emission standards for all tests, without regard to whether a regeneration occurs.
(ii) Upon request by the manufacturer, the Administrator may account for regeneration events differently than is provided in this paragraph (i). However, this option only applies for events that occur extremely infrequently, and which cannot be practically addressed using the adjustment factors described in this paragraph (i).
(j) For model year 2021 and later engines using aftertreatment technology with infrequent regeneration events that may occur during testing, take one of the following approaches to account for the emission impact of regeneration:
(1) You may use the calculation methodology described in 40 CFR 1065.680 to adjust measured emission results. Do this by developing an upward adjustment factor and a downward adjustment factor for each pollutant based on measured emission data and observed regeneration frequency as follows:
(i) Adjustment factors should generally apply to an entire engine family, but you may develop separate adjustment factors for different configurations within an engine family. Use the adjustment factors from this section for all testing for the engine family.
(ii) You may use carryover or carry-across data to establish adjustment factors for an engine family as described in § 86.001-24(f), consistent with good engineering judgment.
(iii) Identify the value of F in each application for the certification for which it applies.
(2) You may ask us to approve an alternate methodology to account for regeneration events. We will generally limit approval to cases where your engines use aftertreatment technology with extremely infrequent regeneration and you are unable to apply the provisions of this section.
(3) You may choose to make no adjustments to measured emission results if you determine that regeneration does not significantly affect emission levels for an engine family (or configuration) or if it is not practical to identify when regeneration occurs. If you choose not to make adjustments under paragraph (j)(1) or (2) of this section, your engines must meet emission standards for all testing, without regard to regeneration.
§ 86.004-38 Maintenance instructions.
(a) The manufacturer shall furnish or cause to be furnished to the purchaser of each new motor vehicle (or motor vehicle engine) subject to the standards prescribed in § 86.099-8, § 86.004-9, § 86.004-10, or § 86.004-11, as applicable, written instructions for the proper maintenance and use of the vehicle (or engine), by the purchaser consistent with the provisions of § 86.004-25, which establishes what scheduled maintenance the Administrator approves as being reasonable and necessary.
(1) The maintenance instructions required by this section shall be in clear, and to the extent practicable, nontechnical language.
(2) The maintenance instructions required by this section shall contain a general description of the documentation which the manufacturer will require from the ultimate purchaser or any subsequent purchaser as evidence of compliance with the instructions.
(b) Instructions provided to purchasers under paragraph (a) of this section shall specify the performance of all scheduled maintenance performed by the manufacturer on certification durability vehicles and, in cases where the manufacturer performs less maintenance on certification durability vehicles than the allowed limit, may specify the performance of any scheduled maintenance allowed under § 86.004-25.
(c) Scheduled emission-related maintenance in addition to that performed under § 86.004-25(b) may only be recommended to offset the effects of abnormal in-use operating conditions, except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section. The manufacturer shall be required to demonstrate, subject to the approval of the Administrator, that such maintenance is reasonable and technologically necessary to assure the proper functioning of the emission control system. Such additional recommended maintenance shall be clearly differentiated, in a form approved by the Administrator, from that approved under § 86.004-25(b).
(d) Inspections of emission-related parts or systems with instructions to replace, repair, clean, or adjust the parts or systems if necessary, are not considered to be items of scheduled maintenance which insure the proper functioning of the emission control system. Such inspections, and any recommended maintenance beyond that approved by the Administrator as reasonable and necessary under paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section, may be included in the written instructions furnished to vehicle owners under paragraph (a) of this section: Provided, That such instructions clearly state, in a form approved by the Administrator, that the owner need not perform such inspections or recommended maintenance in order to maintain the emissions defect and emissions performance warranty or manufacturer recall liability.
(e) The manufacturer may choose to include in such instructions an explanation of any distinction between the useful life specified on the label, and the emissions defect and emissions performance warranty period. The explanation must clearly state that the useful life period specified on the label represents the average period of use up to retirement or rebuild for the engine family represented by the engine used in the vehicle. An explanation of how the actual useful lives of engines used in various applications are expected to differ from the average useful life may be included. The explanation(s) shall be in clear, non-technical language that is understandable to the ultimate purchaser.
(f) If approved by the Administrator, the instructions provided to purchasers under paragraph (a) of this section shall indicate what adjustments or modifications, if any, are necessary to allow the vehicle to meet applicable emission standards at elevations above 4,000 feet, or at elevations of 4,000 feet or less.
(g) [Reserved]
(h) The manufacturer shall furnish or cause to be furnished to the purchaser of each new motor engine subject to the standards prescribed in § 86.004-10 or § 86.004-11, as applicable, the following:
(1) Instructions for all maintenance needed after the end of the useful life of the engine for critical emissions-related components as provided in § 86.004-25(b), including recommended practices for diagnosis, cleaning, adjustment, repair, and replacement of the component (or a statement that such component is maintenance free for the life of the engine) and instructions for accessing and responding to any emissions-related diagnostic codes that may be stored in on-board monitoring systems;
(2) A copy of the engine rebuild provisions contained in § 86.004-40.
(i) For each new diesel-fueled engine subject to the standards prescribed in § 86.007-11, as applicable, the manufacturer shall furnish or cause to be furnished to the ultimate purchaser a statement that “This engine must be operated only with ultra low-sulfur diesel fuel (meeting EPA specifications for highway diesel fuel, including a 15 ppm sulfur cap).”
§ 86.004-40 Heavy-duty engine rebuilding practices.
The provisions of this section are applicable to heavy-duty engines subject to model year 2004 or later standards and are applicable to the process of engine rebuilding (or rebuilding a portion of an engine or engine system). The process of engine rebuilding generally includes disassembly, replacement of multiple parts due to wear, and reassembly, and also may include the removal of the engine from the vehicle and other acts associated with rebuilding an engine. Any deviation from the provisions contained in this section is a prohibited act under section 203(a)(3) of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7522(a)(3)).
(a) When rebuilding an engine, portions of an engine, or an engine system, there must be a reasonable technical basis for knowing that the resultant engine is equivalent, from an emissions standpoint, to a certified configuration (i.e., tolerances, calibrations, specifications) and the model year(s) of the resulting engine configuration must be identified. A reasonable basis would exist if:
(1) Parts installed, whether the parts are new, used, or rebuilt, are such that a person familiar with the design and function of motor vehicle engines would reasonably believe that the parts perform the same function with respect to emissions control as the original parts; and
(2) Any parameter adjustment or design element change is made only:
(i) In accordance with the original engine manufacturer’s instructions; or
(ii) Where data or other reasonable technical basis exists that such parameter adjustment or design element change, when performed on the engine or similar engines, is not expected to adversely affect in-use emissions.
(b) When an engine is being rebuilt and remains installed or is reinstalled in the same vehicle, it must be rebuilt to a configuration of the same or later model year as the original engine. When an engine is being replaced, the replacement engine must be an engine of (or rebuilt to) a configuration of the same or later model year as the original engine.
(c) At time of rebuild, emissions-related codes or signals from on-board monitoring systems may not be erased or reset without diagnosing and responding appropriately to the diagnostic codes, regardless of whether the systems are installed to satisfy requirements in § 86.004-25 or for other reasons and regardless of form or interface. Diagnostic systems must be free of all such codes when the rebuilt engine is returned to service. Such signals may not be rendered inoperative during the rebuilding process.
(d) When conducting a rebuild without removing the engine from the vehicle, or during the installation of a rebuilt engine, all critical emissions-related components listed in § 86.004-25(b) not otherwise addressed by paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section must be checked and cleaned, adjusted, repaired, or replaced as necessary, following manufacturer recommended practices.
(e) Records shall be kept by parties conducting activities included in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section. The records shall include at minimum the mileage and/or hours at time of rebuild, a listing of work performed on the engine and emissions-related control components including a listing of parts and components used, engine parameter adjustments, emissions-related codes or signals responded to and reset, and work performed under paragraph (d) of this section.
(1) Parties may keep records in whatever format or system they choose as long as the records are understandable to an EPA enforcement officer or can be otherwise provided to an EPA enforcement officer in an understandable format when requested.
(2) Parties are not required to keep records of information that is not reasonably available through normal business practices including information on activities not conducted by themselves or information that they cannot reasonably access.
(3) Parties may keep records of their rebuilding practices for an engine family rather than on each individual engine rebuilt in cases where those rebuild practices are followed routinely.
(4) Records must be kept for a minimum of two years after the engine is rebuilt.
§ 86.005-1 General applicability.
Section 86.005-1 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.001-1. Where a paragraph in § 86.001-1 is identical and applicable to § 86.005-1, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.001-1.”.
(a) Applicability. The provisions of this subpart generally apply to 2005 and later model year new Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines used in incomplete vehicles and vehicles above 14,000 pounds GVWR and 2005 and later model year new diesel-cycle heavy-duty engines. In cases where a provision applies only to a certain vehicle group based on its model year, vehicle class, motor fuel, engine type, or other distinguishing characteristics, the limited applicability is cited in the appropriate section or paragraph. The provisions of this subpart continue to generally apply to 2000 and earlier model year new Otto-cycle and diesel-cycle light-duty vehicles, 2000 and earlier model year new Otto-cycle and diesel-cycle light-duty trucks, and 2004 and earlier model year new Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles at or below 14,000 pounds GVWR. Provisions generally applicable to 2001 and later model year new Otto-cycle and diesel-cycle light-duty vehicles, 2001 and later model year new Otto-cycle and diesel-cycle light-duty trucks, and 2005 and later model year Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles at or below 14,000 pounds GVWR are located in subpart S of this part.
(b) Optional applicability. (1) A manufacturer may request to certify any 2003 or 2004 model year heavy-duty vehicle of 14,000 pounds Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or less in accordance with the light-duty truck provisions located in subpart S of this part. Heavy-duty engine or vehicle provisions of this subpart A do not apply to such a vehicle. This option is not available in the 2003 model year for manufacturers choosing Otto-cycle HDE option 1 in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, or in the 2004 model year for manufacturers choosing Otto-cycle HDE option 2 in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(2) For 2005 and later model years, a manufacturer may request to certify any incomplete Otto-cycle heavy-duty vehicle of 14,000 pounds Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or less in accordance with the provisions for Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles located in subpart S of this part. Heavy-duty engine or heavy-duty vehicle provisions of this subpart A do not apply to such a vehicle. This option is available starting with the 2003 model year to manufacturers choosing Otto-cycle HDE option 1 in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. This option is available starting with the 2004 model year to manufacturers choosing Otto-cycle HDE option 2 in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(c) Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles. The manufacturer must select one of the three options for Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section. The emission standards and other requirements that apply under a given option shall apply to all Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles certified by the manufacturer (e.g., a manufacturer may not select one option for certain engine families and the other option for other engine families). The requirements under each option shall remain effective, once selected, for subsequent model years, until superceded or otherwise revised by the Administrator (e.g., a manufacturer may not select one option prior to the 2004 model year and change to another option in the 2006 model year). The complete requirements under each option are contained in subparts A and S of this part.
(1) Otto-cycle HDE Option 1. The following requirements apply to Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles certified by manufacturers selecting this option:
(i) Emission standards for 2003 and later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, according to the provisions of § 86.005-10(f)(1).
(ii) Emission standards for 2003 and later model year Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles, according to the provisions of § 86.1816-05, except that, for 2003 through 2006 model year Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles, manufacturers may optionally comply with the standards in either 86.005-10 or 86.1816-05.
(iii) Averaging, banking, and trading provisions that allow transfer of credits between a manufacturer’s complete vehicle averaging set and their heavy-duty Otto-cycle engine averaging set, according to the provisions of § 86.1817-05(o).
(iv) On-board diagnostics requirements effective starting with the 2004 model year for Otto-cycle engines and complete vehicles, according to the provisions of §§ 86.005-17 and 86.1806-05.
(v) Refueling emissions requirements effective starting with the 2004 model year for Otto-cycle complete vehicles, according to the provisions of §§ 86.1810-01 and 86.1816-05.
(2) Otto-cycle HDE Option 2. The following requirements apply to Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles certified by manufacturers selecting this option:
(i) Emission standards for 2004 and later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, according to the provisions of § 86.005-10(f)(2).
(ii) Emission standards for 2004 and later model year Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles, according to the provisions of § 86.1816-05.
(iii) Averaging, banking, and trading provisions that allow transfer of credits between a manufacturer’s complete vehicle averaging set and their heavy-duty Otto-cycle engine averaging set, according to the provisions of § 86.1817-05(o).
(iv) On-board diagnostics requirements effective starting with the 2004 model year for Otto-cycle engines and complete vehicles, according to the provisions of §§ 86.005-17 and 86.1806-05.
(v) Refueling emissions requirements effective starting with the 2004 model year for Otto-cycle complete vehicles, according to the provisions of §§ 86.1810-01 and 86.1816-05.
(3) Otto-cycle HDE Option 3. The following requirements apply to Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles certified by manufacturers that do not select one of the options for 2003 or 2004 model year compliance in paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2) of this section:
(i) Emission standards for 2005 and later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines, according to the provisions of § 86.005-10.
(ii) Emission standards for 2005 and later model year Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles, according to the provisions of § 86.1816-05.
(iii) On-board diagnostics requirements effective starting with the 2005 model year for Otto-cycle engines and complete vehicles, according to the provisions of §§ 86.005-17 and 86.1806-05.
(iv) Refueling emissions requirements effective starting with the 2005 model year for Otto-cycle complete vehicles, according to the provisions of §§ 86.1810-01 and 86.1816-05.
(v) Manufacturers selecting this option may exempt 2005 model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles whose model year commences before July 31, 2004 from the requirements in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vi) For 2005 model year engines or vehicles exempted under paragraph (c)(3)(v) of this section, a manufacturer shall certify such Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles to all requirements in this subpart applicable to 2004 model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines. The averaging, banking, and trading provisions contained in § 86.000-15 remain effective for these engines.
(d) [Reserved]
(e)-(f) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.001-1.
§ 86.005-10 Emission standards for 2005 and later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles.
Section 86.005-10 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.099-10. Where a paragraph in § 86.099-10 is identical and applicable to § 86.005-10, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.099-10.”
(a)(1) Exhaust emissions from new 2005 and later model year Otto-cycle HDEs, except for Otto-cycle HDEs subject to the alternative standards in paragraph (f) of this section, shall not exceed:
(i)(A) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbons (NO
(B) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbon Equivalent (NO
(C) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its Otto-cycle HDE families in any or all of the emissions ABT programs for HDEs, within the restrictions described in § 86.098-15. If the manufacturer elects to include engine families in any of these programs, the NO
(ii)(A) Carbon monoxide for engines intended for use in all vehicles, except as provided in paragraph (a)(3) of this section. 14.4 grams per brake horsepower-hour (5.36 grams per megajoule), as measured under transient operating conditions.
(B) Carbon monoxide for engines intended for use only in vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 14,000 pounds. 37.1 grams per brake horsepower-hour (13.8 grams per megajoule), as measured under transient operating conditions.
(C) Idle carbon monoxide. For all Otto-cycle HDEs utilizing aftertreatment technology, and not certified to the onboard diagnostics requirements of § 86.005-17: 0.50 percent of exhaust gas flow at curb idle.
(2) The standards set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) and (f) of this section refer to the exhaust emitted over the operating schedule set forth in paragraph (f)(1) of appendix I to this part, and measured and calculated in accordance with the procedures set forth in subpart N or P of this part.
(3)(i) A manufacturer may certify one or more Otto-cycle HDE configurations intended for use in all vehicles to the emission standard set forth in paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section: Provided, that the total model year sales of such configuration(s), segregated by fuel type, being certified to the emission standard in paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section represent no more than five percent of total model year sales of each fuel type Otto-cycle HDE intended for use in vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 14,000 pounds by the manufacturer.
(ii) The configurations certified to the emission standards of paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section under the provisions of paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section shall still be required to meet the evaporative emission standards set forth in § 86.099-10(b)(1)(i), (b)(2)(i) and (b)(3)(i).
(4) The manufacturer may exempt 2005 model year HDE engine families whose model year begins before July, 31, 2004 from the requirements in this paragraph (a). Exempted engine families shall be subject to the requirements in § 86.099-10.
(5) For certification purposes, where the applicable California evaporative emission standard is as stringent or more stringent than the applicable federal evaporative emission standard, the Administrator may accept California certification test data indicating compliance with the California standard to demonstrate compliance with the appropriate federal certification evaporative emission standard. The Administrator may require the manufacturer to provide comparative test data which clearly demonstrates that a vehicle meeting the California evaporative standard (when tested under California test conditions/test procedures) will also meet the appropriate federal evaporative emission standard when tested under federal test conditions/test procedures described in this part 86.
(b) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.099-10.
(c) No crankcase emissions shall be discharged into the ambient atmosphere from any new 1998 or later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engine.
(d) Every manufacturer of new motor vehicle engines subject to the standards prescribed in this section shall, prior to taking any of the actions specified in section 203(a)(1) of the Act, test or cause to be tested motor vehicle engines in accordance with applicable procedures in subpart N or P of this part to ascertain that such test engines meet the requirements of this section.
(e) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.099-10.
(f) Alternative exhaust emission standards. In lieu of the exhaust emission standards in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) or (B) of this section, the manufacturer may select the standards and provisions in either paragraph (f)(1) or (f)(2) of this section.
(1) Otto-cycle HDE Option 1. The alternative exhaust emission standards in this paragraph (f)(1) shall apply to new 2003 through 2007 model year Otto-cycle HDEs and, at the manufacturers option, to new 2003 through 2006 model year Otto-cycle complete heavy-duty vehicles less than or equal to 14,000 pounds GVWR
(i) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbons (NO
(ii) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbon Equivalent (NO
(2) Otto-cycle HDE Option 2. The alternative exhaust emission standards in this paragraph (f)(2) shall apply to new 2004 through 2007 model year Otto-cycle HDEs.
(i) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbons (NO,
(ii) Oxides of Nitrogen plus Non-methane Hydrocarbon Equivalent (NO
§ 86.007-11 Emission standards and supplemental requirements for 2007 and later model year diesel heavy-duty engines and vehicles.
This section applies to new 2007 and later model year diesel heavy-duty engines and vehicles. Starting in model year 2021, this section also applies to all heavy HDE, regardless of fuel or combustion cycle (see 40 CFR 1036.140(a) and 1036.150(c)). Section 86.007-11 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.004-11. Where a paragraph in § 86.004-11 is identical and applicable to § 86.007-11, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-11.”
(a)(1) Exhaust emissions from new 2007 and later model year diesel HDEs shall not exceed the following:
(i) Oxides of Nitrogen (NO
(B) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its diesel HDE families in any or all of the NO
(ii)(A) Nonmethane hydrocarbon (NMHC) for engines fueled with diesel fuel. 0.14 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.052 grams per megajoule).
(B) Nonmethane-nonethane hydrocarbon (NMNEHC) for engines fueled with natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas. 0.14 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.052 grams per megajoule).
(C) Nonmethane hydrocarbon equivalent (NMHCE) for engines fueled with methanol. 0.14 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.052 grams per megajoule).
(iii) Carbon monoxide. 15.5 grams per brake horsepower-hour (5.77 grams per megajoule).
(iv) Particulate. (A) 0.01 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.0037 grams per megajoule).
(B) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its diesel HDE families in any or all of the particulate ABT programs for HDEs, within the restrictions described in § 86.007-15 or other applicable sections. If the manufacturer elects to include engine families in any of these programs, the particulate FEL may not exceed 0.02 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.0075 grams per megajoule).
(2) The standards set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section refer to the exhaust emitted over the duty cycle specified in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section, where exhaust emissions are measured and calculated as specified in paragraphs (a)(2)(iv) and (v) of this section in accordance with the procedures set forth in subpart N of this part, except as noted in § 86.007-23(c)(2):
(i) Perform the test interval set forth in paragraph (f)(2) of appendix I of this part with a cold-start according to 40 CFR part 1065, subpart F. This is the cold-start test interval.
(ii) Shut down the engine after completing the test interval and allow 20±1 minutes to elapse. This is the hot soak.
(iii) Repeat the test interval. This is the hot-start test interval.
(iv) Calculate the total emission mass of each constituent, m, and the total work, W, over each test interval according to 40 CFR 1065.650.
(v) Determine your engine’s brake-specific emissions using the following calculation, which weights the emissions from the cold-start and hot-start test intervals:
(3) SET (i) Exhaust emissions, as determined under § 86.1360-2007(b) pertaining to the supplemental emission test cycle, for each regulated pollutant shall not exceed 1.0 times the applicable emission standards or FELs specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(ii) For engines not having a NO
(4) NTE (i)(A) The brake-specific exhaust NMHC or NO
(B) For engines not having a NO
(C) The brake-specific exhaust PM emissions in g/bhp-hr, as determined under § 86.1370-2007 pertaining to the not-to-exceed test procedures, shall not exceed 1.5 times the applicable PM emission standards or FEL (for FELs above the standard only) specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, during engine and vehicle operation specified in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section except as noted in paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section.
(D) The brake-specific exhaust CO emissions in g/bhp-hr, as determined under § 86.1370-2007 pertaining to the not-to-exceed test procedures, shall not exceed 1.25 times the applicable CO emission standards or FEL specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, during engine and vehicle operation specified in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section except as noted in paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section.
(ii) For each engine family, the not-to-exceed emission limits must apply during one of the following two ambient operating regions:
(A) The not-to-exceed limits apply for all altitudes less than or equal to 5,500 feet above sea-level, during all ambient conditions (temperature and humidity). Temperature and humidity ranges for which correction factors are allowed are specified in § 86.1370-2007(e); or
(B)(1) The not-to-exceed emission limits apply at all altitudes less than or equal to 5,500 feet above sea-level, for temperatures less than or equal to the temperature determined by the following equation at the specified altitude:
(2) Temperature and humidity ranges for which correction factors are allowed are specified in § 86.1370-2007(e);
(iii) For engines equipped with exhaust gas recirculation, the not-to-exceed emission limits specified in paragraph (a)(4)(i) of this section do not apply to engine or vehicle operation during cold operating conditions as specified in § 86.1370-2007(f).
(iv) Deficiencies for NTE emission standards. (A) For model years 2007 through 2009, upon application by the manufacturer, the Administrator may accept a HDDE as compliant with the NTE standards even though specific requirements are not fully met. Such compliances without meeting specific requirements, or deficiencies, will be granted only if compliance would be infeasible or unreasonable considering such factors as, but not limited to: Technical feasibility of the given hardware and lead time and production cycles including phase-in or phase-out of engines or vehicle designs and programmed upgrades of computers. Deficiencies will be approved on an engine model and/or horsepower rating basis within an engine family, and each approval is applicable for a single model year. A manufacturer’s application must include a description of the auxiliary emission control device(s) which will be used to maintain emissions to the lowest practical level, considering the deficiency being requested, if applicable. An application for a deficiency must be made during the certification process; no deficiency will be granted to retroactively cover engines already certified.
(B) Unmet requirements should not be carried over from the previous model year except where unreasonable hardware or software modifications would be necessary to correct the deficiency, and the manufacturer has demonstrated an acceptable level of effort toward compliance as determined by the Administrator. The NTE deficiency should only be seen as an allowance for minor deviations from the NTE requirements. The NTE deficiency provisions allow a manufacturer to apply for relief from the NTE emission requirements under limited conditions. EPA expects that manufacturers should have the necessary functioning emission control hardware in place to comply with the NTE.
(C) For model years 2010 through 2013, the Administrator may allow up to three deficiencies per engine family. The provisions of paragraphs (a)(4)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section apply for deficiencies allowed by this paragraph (a)(4)(iv)(C). In determining whether to allow the additional deficiencies, the Administrator may consider any relevant factors, including the factors identified in paragraph (a)(4)(iv)(A) of this section. If additional deficiencies are approved, the Administrator may set any additional conditions that he/she determines to be appropriate.
(v) The emission limits specified in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this section shall be rounded to the same number of significant figures as the applicable standards in paragraph (a)(1) of this section using ASTM E29-93a (Incorporated by reference at § 86.1).
(vi) Manufacturers are not required to provide engine information exclusively related to in-use testing as part of initial certification. However, upon request from EPA the manufacturers must provide the information which clearly identifies parameters defining all NTE deficiencies described under paragraph (a)(4)(iv) of this section and parameters defining all NTE limited testing regions described under § 86.1370-2007(b)(6) and (7) that are requested. When requested, deficiencies and limited testing regions must be reported for all engine families and power ratings in English with sufficient detail for us to determine if a particular deficiency or limited testing region will be encountered in the emission test data from the portable emission-sampling equipment and field-testing procedures referenced in § 86.1375. Such information is to be provided within 60 days of the request from EPA.
(b)(1) introductory text through (b)(1)(iii) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-11.
(b)(1)(iv) Operation within the NTE zone (defined in § 86.1370-2007) must comply with a filter smoke number of 1.0 under steady-state operation, or the following alternate opacity limits:
(A) A 30 second transient test average opacity limit of 4% for a 5 inch path; and
(B) A 10 second steady state test average opacity limit of 4% for a 5 inch path.
(2)(i) The standards set forth in § 86.004-11 (b)(1)(i)-(iii) refer to exhaust smoke emissions generated under the conditions set forth in subpart I of this part and measured and calculated in accordance with those procedures.
(ii) The standards set forth in paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section refer to exhaust smoke emissions generated under the conditions set forth in § 86.1370-2007 and calculated in accordance with the procedures set forth in § 86.1372-2007.
(b)(3) and (b)(4) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-11.
(c) No crankcase emissions shall be discharged directly into the ambient atmosphere from any new 2007 or later model year diesel HDE, with the following exception: HDEs equipped with turbochargers, pumps, blowers, or superchargers for air induction may discharge crankcase emissions to the ambient atmosphere if the emissions are added to the exhaust emissions (either physically or mathematically) during all emission testing. Manufacturers taking advantage of this exception must manufacture the engines so that all crankcase emission can be routed into a dilution tunnel (or other sampling system approved in advance by the Administrator), and must account for deterioration in crankcase emissions when determining exhaust deterioration factors. For the purpose of this paragraph (c), crankcase emissions that are routed to the exhaust upstream of exhaust aftertreatment during all operation are not considered to be “discharged directly into the ambient atmosphere.”
(d) Every manufacturer of new motor vehicle engines subject to the standards prescribed in this section shall, prior to taking any of the actions specified in section 203(a)(1) of the Act, test or cause to be tested motor vehicle engines in accordance with applicable procedures in subpart I or N of this part to ascertain that such test engines meet the requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
(e) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-11.
(f) Model year 2007 and later diesel-fueled heavy-duty engines and vehicles for sale in Guam, American Samoa, or the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands may be subject to alternative standards under 40 CFR 1036.655.
(g) Model years 2018 through 2026 engines at or above 56 kW that will be installed in specialty vehicles as allowed by 40 CFR 1037.605 may meet alternate emission standards as follows:
(1) The engines must be of a configuration that is identical to one that is certified under 40 CFR part 1039, and meet the following additional standards using the same duty cycles that apply under 40 CFR part 1039:
(i) The engines must be certified with a Family Emission Limit for PM of 0.020 g/kW-hr.
(ii) Diesel-fueled engines using selective catalytic reduction must meet an emission standard of 0.1 g/kW-hr for N
(2) Except as specified in this paragraph (g), engines certified under this paragraph (g) must meet all the requirements that apply under 40 CFR part 1039 instead of the comparable provisions in this subpart A. Before shipping engines under this section, you must have written assurance from the vehicle manufacturers that they need a certain number of exempted engines under this section. In your annual production report under 40 CFR 1039.250, count these engines separately and identify the vehicle manufacturers that will be installing them. Treat these engines as part of the corresponding engine family under 40 CFR part 1039 for compliance purposes such as selective enforcement audits, in-use testing, defect reporting, and recall.
(3) The engines must be labeled as described in § 86.095-35, with the following statement instead of the one specified in § 86.095-35(a)(3)(iii)(H): “This engine conforms to alternate standards for specialty vehicles under 40 CFR 86.007-11(g)”. Engines certified under this paragraph (g) may not have the label specified for nonroad engines in 40 CFR part 1039 or any other label identifying them as nonroad engines.
(4) In a separate application for a certificate of conformity, identify the corresponding nonroad engine family, describe the label required under this paragraph (g), state that you meet applicable diagnostic requirements under 40 CFR part 1039, and identify your projected U.S.-directed production volume.
(5) No additional certification fee applies for engines certified under this paragraph (g).
(6) Engines certified under this paragraph (g) may not generate or use emission credits under this part or under 40 CFR part 1039. The vehicles in which these engines are installed may generate or use emission credits as described in 40 CFR part 1037.
(7) Engines may instead meet standards for heavy-duty highway engines in California, as demonstrated by an Executive Order issued by the California Air Resources Board.
(h)(1) For model years prior to 2012, for purposes of determining compliance after title or custody has transferred to the ultimate purchaser, for engines having a NO
(2)(i) For engines with 110,000 or fewer miles, the adjustment is 0.10 g/bhp-hr.
(ii) For engines with 110,001 to 185,000 miles, the adjustment is 0.15 g/bhp-hr.
(iii) For engines with 185,001 or more miles, the adjustment is 0.20 g/bhp-hr.
(3) For model years prior to 2012, for purposes of determining compliance after title or custody has transferred to the ultimate purchaser, the applicable compliance limit shall be determined by adding 0.01 g/bhp-hr to the otherwise applicable standard or FEL for PM.
(i) [Reserved]
(j) Engines installed in new glider vehicles are subject to the standards of this section as specified in 40 CFR part 1037.
§ 86.007-15 NOX and particulate averaging, trading, and banking for heavy-duty engines.
Section 86.007-15 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.004-15. Where a paragraph in § 86.004-15 is identical and applicable to § 86.007-15, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-15.”
(a)-(l) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-15.
(m) The following provisions apply for model year 2007 and later engines (including engines certified during years 2007-2009 under the phase-in provisions of § 86.007-11(g)(1), § 86.005-10(a), or § 86.008-10(f)(1)). These provisions apply instead of the provisions of paragraphs § 86.004-15 (a) through (k) to the extent that they are in conflict.
(1) Manufacturers of Otto-cycle engines may participate in an NMHC averaging, banking and trading program to show compliance with the standards specified in § 86.008-10. The generation and use of NMHC credits are subject to the same provisions in paragraphs § 86.004-15 (a) through (k) that apply for NO
(2) Credits are calculated as NO
(3) NO
(4) Credits that were previously discounted when they were banked according to paragraph (c) of § 86.004-15, are subject to an additional discount factor of 0.888 instead of the 0.8 discount factor otherwise required by paragraph (m)(2) or (m)(3) of this section. This results in a total discount factor of 0.8 (0.9 × 0.888 = 0.8).
(5) For diesel engine families, the combined number of engines certified to FELs higher than 0.50 g/bhp-hr using banked NO
(6) The FEL must be expressed to the same number of decimal places as the standard (generally, one-hundredth of a gram per brake horsepower-hour). For engines certified to standards expressed only one-tenth of a gram per brake horsepower-hour, if the FEL is below 1.0, then add a zero to the standard in the second decimal place and express the FEL to nearest one-hundredth of a gram per brake horsepower-hour.
(7) Credits are to be rounded to the nearest one-hundredth of a Megagram using ASTM E29-93a (Incorporated by reference at § 86.1).
(8) Credits generated for 2007 and later model year diesel engine families, or generated for 2008 and later model year Otto-cycle engine families are not discounted (except as specified in paragraph (m)(2) or (m)(3) of this section), and do not expire.
(9) For the purpose of using or generating credits during a phase-in of new standards, a manufacturer may elect to split an engine family into two subfamilies (e.g., one which uses credits and one which generates credits). The manufacturer must indicate in the application for certification that the engine family is to be split, and may assign the numbers and configurations of engines within the respective subfamilies at any time prior to the submission of the end-of-year report required by § 86.001-23.
(i) Manufacturers certifying a split diesel engine family to both the Phase 1 and Phase 2 standards with equally sized subfamilies may exclude the engines within that split family from end-of-year NO
(ii) Manufacturers certifying a split Otto-cycle engine family to both the Phase 1 and Phase 2 standards with equally sized subfamilies may exclude the engines within that split family from end-of-year NO
(iii) Manufacturers certifying a split engine family may label all of the engines within that family with a single NO
(iv) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (m)(9)(iii) of this section, for split families, the NO
(10) For model years 2007 through 2009, to be consistent with the phase-in provisions of § 86.007-11(g)(1), credits generated from engines in one diesel engine service class (e.g., light-heavy duty diesel engines) may be used for averaging by engines in a different diesel engine service class, provided the credits are calculated for both engine families using the conversion factor and useful life of the engine family using the credits, and the engine family using the credits is certified to the standards listed in § 86.007-11(a)(1). Banked or traded credits may not be used by any engine family in a different service class than the service class of the engine family generating the credits.
§ 86.007-17 Onboard diagnostics for engines used in applications less than or equal to 14,000 pounds GVWR.
Heavy-duty engines intended to be installed in heavy duty vehicles at or below 14,000 pounds GVWR that are subject to standards under this subpart must meet onboard diagnostic requirements as specified in § 86.1806.
§ 86.007-21 Application for certification.
Section 86.007-21 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.004-21, 86.094-21 or 86.096-21. Where a paragraph in § 86.004-21, 86.094-21 or 86.096-21 is identical and applicable to § 86.007-21, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-21.”, “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.”, or “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.096-21.”.
(a)-(b)(3) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(4)(i) [Reserved]
(b)(4)(ii)-(b)(5)(iv) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(b)(5)(v)-(b)(6) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-21.
(b)(7)-(b)(8) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(c)-(j) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.094-21.
(k)-(l) [Reserved]
(m)-(n) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.004-21.
(o) For diesel heavy-duty engines, the manufacturer must provide the following additional information pertaining to the supplemental emission test conducted under § 86.1360-2007:
(1) Weighted brake-specific emissions data (i.e., in units of g/bhp-hr), calculated according to 40 CFR 1065.650 for all pollutants for which a brake-specific emission standard is established in this subpart;
(2) For engines subject to the MAEL (see § 86.007-11(a)(3)(ii)), brake specific gaseous emission data for each of the 12 non-idle test points (identified under § 86.1360-2007(b)(1)) and the 3 EPA-selected test points (identified under § 86.1360-2007(b)(2));
(3) For engines subject to the MAEL (see § 86.007-11(a)(3)(ii)), concentrations and mass flow rates of all regulated gaseous emissions plus carbon dioxide;
(4) Values of all emission-related engine control variables at each test point;
(5) A statement that the test results correspond to the test engine selection criteria in 40 CFR 1065.401. The manufacturer also must maintain records at the manufacturer’s facility which contain all test data, engineering analyses, and other information which provides the basis for this statement, where such information exists. The manufacturer must provide such information to the Administrator upon request;
(6) For engines subject to the MAEL (see § 86.007-11(a)(3)(ii)), a statement that the engines will comply with the weighted average emissions standard and interpolated values comply with the Maximum Allowable Emission Limits specified in § 86.007-11(a)(3) for the useful life of the engine where applicable. The manufacturer also must maintain records at the manufacturer’s facility which contain a detailed description of all test data, engineering analyses, and other information which provides the basis for this statement, where such information exists. The manufacturer must provide such information to the Administrator upon request.
(7) [Reserved]
(p)(1) The manufacturer must provide a statement in the application for certification that the diesel heavy-duty engine for which certification is being requested will comply with the applicable Not-To-Exceed Limits specified in § 86.007-11(a)(4) when operated under all conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use. The manufacturer also must maintain records at the manufacturers facility which contain all test data, engineering analyses, and other information which provides the basis for this statement, where such information exists. The manufacturer must provide such information to the Administrator upon request.
(2) For engines equipped with exhaust gas recirculation, the manufacturer must provide a detailed description of the control system the engine will use to comply with the requirements of §§ 86.007-11(a)(4)(iii) and 86.1370-2007(f) for NTE cold temperature operating exclusion, including but not limited to the method the manufacturer will use to access this exclusion during normal vehicle operation.
(3) For each engine model and/or horsepower rating within an engine family for which a manufacturer is applying for an NTE deficiency(ies) under the provisions of § 86.007-11(a)(4)(iv), the manufacturer’s application for an NTE deficiency(ies) must include a complete description of the deficiency, including but not limited to: the specific description of the deficiency; what pollutant the deficiency is being applied for, all engineering efforts the manufacturer has made to overcome the deficiency, what specific operating conditions the deficiency is being requested for (i.e., temperature ranges, humidity ranges, altitude ranges, etc.), a full description of the auxiliary emission control device(s) which will be used to maintain emissions to the lowest practical level; and what the lowest practical emission level will be.
(q) The manufacturer must name an agent for service of process located in the United States. Service on this agent constitutes service on you or any of your officers or employees for any action by EPA or otherwise by the United States related to the requirements of this part.
§ 86.007-23 Required data.
Section 86.007-23 includes text that specifies requirements that differ from § 86.098-23 or § 86.001-23. Where a paragraph in § 86.098-23 or § 86.001-23 is identical and applicable to § 86.007-23, this may be indicated by specifying the corresponding paragraph and the statement “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.” or “[Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.001-23.”.
(a)-(b)(1) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(b)(2) [Reserved]
(b)(3) and (b)(4) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(c) Emission data from certification vehicles and engines. The manufacturer shall submit emission data for each applicable emission standard from vehicles and engines tested in accordance with applicable test procedures and in such numbers as specified. These data shall include zero-mile or zero-hour data, if generated, and emission data generated for certification as required under § 86.004-26. However, manufacturers may provide a statement in the application for certification that vehicles and engines comply with the following standards instead of submitting test data, provided that the statement is supported by previous emission tests, development tests, or other appropriate information, and good engineering judgment:
(1) Idle CO, smoke, or particulate matter emissions from methanol-fueled or gaseous-fueled diesel-cycle certification engines.
(2) Particulate matter emissions from Otto-cycle certification engines or gaseous-fueled certification engines.
(3) CO emissions from diesel-cycle certification engines.
(4) Formaldehyde emissions from petroleum-fueled engines.
(5) Particulate matter and formaldehyde emissions when conducting Selective Enforcement Audit testing of Otto-cycle engines.
(6) Smoke from methanol-fueled or petroleum-fueled diesel-cycle certification engines.
(7) Smoke when conducting Selective Enforcement Audit testing of diesel-cycle engines.
(8) Evaporative emissions from vehicles fueled by natural gas, liquefied petroleum gas, or hydrogen.
(d)-(e)(1) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(e)(2) and (e)(3) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.001-23.
(f)-(g) [Reserved]
(h)-(k) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
(l) [Reserved]
(m) [Reserved]. For guidance see § 86.098-23.
§ 86.007-30 Certification.
(a)(1)(i) If, after a review of the test reports and data submitted by the manufacturer, data derived from any inspection carried out under § 86.091-7(c) and any other pertinent data or information, the Administrator determines that a test vehicle(s) (or test engine(s)) meets the requirements of the Act and of this subpart, he will issue a certificate of conformity with respect to such vehicle(s) (or engine(s)) except in cases covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) and (c) of this section.
(ii) Gasoline-fueled and methanol-fueled heavy-duty vehicles. If, after a review of the statement(s) of compliance submitted by the manufacturer under § 86.094-23(b)(4) and any other pertinent data or information, the Administrator determines that the requirements of the Act and this subpart have been met, he will issue one certificate of conformity per manufacturer with respect to the evaporative emission family(ies) covered by paragraph (c) of this section.
(2) Such certificate will be issued for such period not to exceed one model year as the Administrator may determine and upon such terms as he may deem necessary or appropriate to assure that any new motor vehicle (or new motor vehicle engine) covered by the certificate will meet the requirements of the Act and of this part.
(3)(i) One such certificate will be issued for each engine family. For gasoline-fueled and methanol-fueled light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks, and petroleum-fueled diesel cycle light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks not certified under § 86.098-28(g), one such certificate will be issued for each engine family-evaporative/refueling emission family combination. Each certificate will certify compliance with no more than one set of in-use and certification standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate).
(ii) For gasoline-fueled and methanol fueled heavy-duty vehicles, one such certificate will be issued for each manufacturer and will certify compliance for those vehicles previously identified in that manufacturer’s statement(s) of compliance as required in § 86.098-23(b)(4)(i) and (ii).
(iii) For diesel light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks, or diesel HDEs, included in the applicable particulate averaging program, the manufacturer may at any time during production elect to change the level of any family particulate emission limit by demonstrating compliance with the new limit as described in § 86.094-28(a)(6), § 86.094-28(b)(5)(i), or § 86.004-28(c)(5)(i). New certificates issued under this paragraph will be applicable only for vehicles (or engines) produced subsequent to the date of issuance.
(iv) For light-duty trucks or HDEs included in the applicable NO
(4)-(5) [Reserved]
(6) Catalyst-equipped vehicles, otherwise covered by a certificate, which are driven outside the United States, Canada, and Mexico will be presumed to have been operated on leaded gasoline resulting in deactivation of the catalysts. If these vehicles are imported or offered for importation without retrofit of the catalyst, they will be considered not to be within the coverage of the certificate unless included in a catalyst control program operated by a manufacturer or a United States Government agency and approved by the Administrator.
(7) [Reserved]
(8) For heavy-duty engines, a certificate covers only those new motor vehicle engines installed in heavy-duty vehicles which conform to the minimum gross vehicle weight rating, curb weight, or frontal area limitations for heavyduty vehicles described in § 86.082-2.
(9) For incomplete gasoline-fueled and methanol-fueled heavy-duty vehicles a certificate covers only those new motor vehicles which, when completed, conform to the nominal maximum fuel tank capacity limitations as described in the application for certification as required in § 86.094-21(e).
(10)(i) [Reserved]
(ii) For all heavy-duty diesel-cycle engines which are included in the particulate ABT programs under § 86.098-15 or superseding ABT sections as applicable, the provisions of paragraphs (a)(10)(ii)(A)-(C) of this section apply.
(A) All certificates issued are conditional upon the manufacturer complying with the provisions of § 86.098-15 or superseding ABT sections as applicable and the ABT related provisions of other applicable sections, both during and after the model year production.
(B) Failure to comply with all provisions of § 86.098-15 or superseding ABT sections as applicable will be considered to be a failure to satisfy the conditions upon which the certificate was issued, and the certificate may be deemed void ab initio.
(C) The manufacturer shall bear the burden of establishing to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the conditions upon which the certificate was issued were satisfied or excused.
(11)(i) [Reserved]
(ii) For all HDEs which are included in the NO
(A) All certificates issued are conditional upon the manufacturer complying with the provisions of § 86.098-15 or superseding ABT sections as applicable and the ABT related provisions of other applicable sections, both during and after the model year production.
(B) Failure to comply with all provisions of § 86.098-15 or superseding ABT sections as applicable will be considered to be a failure to satisfy the conditions upon which the certificate was issued, and the certificate may be deemed void ab initio.
(C) The manufacturer shall bear the burden of establishing to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the conditions upon which the certificate was issued were satisfied or excused.
(12)-(16) [Reserved]
(17) For all heavy-duty vehicles certified to evaporative test procedures and accompanying standards specified under § 86.096-10:
(i) All certificates issued are conditional upon the manufacturer complying with all provisions of § 86.096-10 both during and after model year production.
(ii) Failure to meet the required implementation schedule sales percentages as specified in § 86.096-10 will be considered to be a failure to satisfy the conditions upon which the certificate was issued and the vehicles sold in violation of the implementation schedule shall not be covered by the certificate.
(iii) The manufacturer shall bear the burden of establishing to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the conditions upon which the certificate was issued were satisfied.
(18) For all heavy-duty vehicles certified to evaporative test procedures and accompanying standards specified under § 86.098-11:
(i) All certificates issued are conditional upon the manufacturer complying with all provisions of § 86.098-11 both during and after model year production.
(ii) Failure to meet the required implementation schedule sales percentages as specified in § 86.098-11 will be considered to be a failure to satisfy the conditions upon which the certificate was issued and the vehicles sold in violation of the implementation schedule shall not be covered by the certificate.
(iii) The manufacturer shall bear the burden of establishing to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the conditions upon which the certificate was issued were satisfied.
(b)(1) The Administrator will determine whether a vehicle (or engine) covered by the application complies with applicable standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate) by observing the following relationships: in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section:
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Heavy-duty engines. (A) An Otto-cycle emission data test engine selected under § 86.094-24(b)(2)(iv) shall represent all engines in the same family of the same engine displacement-exhaust emission control system combination.
(B) An Otto-cycle emission data test engine selected under § 86.094-24(b)(2)(iii) shall represent all engines in the same engine family of the same engine displacement-exhaust emission control system combination.
(C) A diesel emission data test engine selected under § 86.094-24(b)(3)(ii) shall represent all engines in the same engine-system combination.
(D) A diesel emission data test engine selected under § 86.094-24(b)(3)(iii) shall represent all engines of that emission control system at the rated fuel delivery of the test engine.
(iv) Gasoline-fueled and methanol-fueled heavy-duty vehicles. A statement of compliance submitted under § 86.094-23(b)(4)(i) or (ii) shall represent all vehicles in the same evaporative emission family-evaporative emission control system combination.
(2) The Administrator will proceed as in paragraph (a) of this section with respect to the vehicles (or engines) belonging to an engine family or engine family-evaporative/refueling emission family combination (as applicable), all of which comply with all applicable standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate).
(3) If after a review of the test reports and data submitted by the manufacturer, data derived from any additional testing conducted pursuant to § 86.091-29, data or information derived from any inspection carried out under § 86.094-7(d) or any other pertinent data or information, the Administrator determines that one or more test vehicles (or test engines) of the certification test fleet do not meet applicable standards (or family emission limits, as appropriate), he will notify the manufacturer in writing, setting forth the basis for his determination. Within 30 days following receipt of the notification, the manufacturer may request a hearing on the Administrator’s determination. The request shall be in writing, signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer and shall include a statement specifying the manufacturer’s objections to the Administrator’s determination and data in support of such objections. If, after a review of the request and supporting data, the Administrator finds that the request raises a substantial factual issue, he shall provide the manufacturer a hearing in accordance with § 86.078-6 with respect to such issue.
(4) [Reserved]
(5) For heavy-duty engines the manufacturer may, at his option, proceed with any of the following alternatives with respect to any engine family represented by a test engine(s) determined not in compliance with applicable standards (or family emission limit, as appropriate):
(i) Request a hearing under § 86.078-6; or
(ii) Delete from the application for certification the engines represented by the failing test engine. (Engines so deleted may be included in a later request for certification under § 86.079-32.) The Administrator may then select in place of each failing engine an alternate engine chosen in accordance with selection criteria employed in selecting the engine that failed; or
(iii) Modify the test engine and demonstrate by testing that it meets applicable standards. Another engine which is in all material respect the same as the first engine, as modified, may then be operated and tested in accordance with applicable test procedures.
(6) If the manufacturer does not request a hearing or present the required data under paragraphs (b)(4) or (5) of this section (as applicable) of this section, the Administrator will deny certification.
(c)(1) Notwithstanding the fact that any certification vehicle(s) (or certification engine(s)) may comply with other provisions of this subpart, the Administrator may withhold or deny the issuance of a certificate of conformity (or suspend or revoke any such certificate which has been issued) with respect to any such vehicle(s) (or engine(s)) if:
(i) The manufacturer submits false or incomplete information in his application for certification thereof;
(ii) The manufacturer renders inaccurate any test data which he submits pertaining thereto or otherwise circumvents the intent of the Act, or of this part with respect to such vehicle (or engine);
(iii) Any EPA Enforcement Officer is denied access on the terms specified in § 86.091-7(d) to any facility or portion thereof which contains any of the following:
(A) The vehicle (or engine);
(B) Any components used or considered for use in its modification or buildup into a certification vehicle (or certification engine);
(C) Any production vehicle (or production engine) which is or will be claimed by the manufacturer to be covered by the certificate;
(D) Any step in the construction of a vehicle (or engine) described in paragraph (c)(iii)(C) of this section;
(E) Any records, documents, reports, or histories required by this part to be kept concerning any of the above; or
(iv) Any EPA Enforcement Officer is denied “reasonable assistance” (as defined in § 86.091-7(d) in examining any of the items listed in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section.
(2) The sanctions of withholding, denying, revoking, or suspending of a certificate may be imposed for the reasons in paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this section only when the infraction is substantial.
(3) In any case in which a manufacturer knowingly submits false or inaccurate information or knowingly renders inaccurate or invalid any test data or commits any other fraudulent acts and such acts contribute substantially to the Administrator’s decision to issue a certificate of conformity, the Administrator may deem such certificate void ab initio.
(4) In any case in which certification of a vehicle (or engine) is proposed to be withheld, denied, revoked, or suspended under paragraph (c)(1)(iii) or (iv) of this section, and in which the Administrator has presented to the manufacturer involved reasonable evidence that a violation of § 86.091-7(d) in fact occurred, the manufacturer, if he wishes to contend that, even though the violation occurred, the vehicle (or engine) in question was not involved in the violation to a degree that would warrant withholding, denial, revocation, or suspension of certification under either paragraph (c)(1)(iii) or (iv) of this section, shall have the burden of establishing that contention to the satisfaction of the Administrator.
(5) Any revocation or suspension of certification under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall:
(i) Be made only after the manufacturer concerned has been offered an opportunity for a hearing conducted in accordance with § 86.078-6 hereof; and
(ii) Extend no further than to forbid the introduction into commerce of vehicles (or engines) previously covered by the certification which are still in the hands of the manufacturer, except in cases of such fraud or other misconduct as makes the certification invalid ab initio.
(6) The manufacturer may request in the form and manner specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section that any determination made by the Administrator under paragraph (c)(1) of this section to withhold or deny certification be reviewed in a hearing conducted in accordance with § 86.078-6. If the Administrator finds, after a review of the request and supporting data, that the request raises a substantial factual issue, he will grant the request with respect to such issue.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) For light-duty trucks and heavy-duty engines. (1) Notwithstanding the fact that any vehicle configuration or engine family may be covered by a valid outstanding certificate of conformity, the Administrator may suspend such outstanding certificate of conformity in whole or in part with respect to such vehicle or engine configuration or engine family if:
(i) The manufacturer refuses to comply with the provisions of a test order issued by the Administrator pursuant to § 86.1003; or
(ii) The manufacturer refuses to comply with any of the requirements of § 86.1003; or
(iii) The manufacturer submits false or incomplete information in any report or information provided pursuant to the requirements of § 86.1009; or
(iv) The manufacturer renders inaccurate any test data submitted pursuant to § 86.1009; or
(v) Any EPA Enforcement Officer is denied the opportunity to conduct activities related to entry and access as authorized in § 86.1006 of this part and in a warrant or court order presented to the manufacturer or the party in charge of a facility in question; or
(vi) EPA Enforcement Officers are unable to conduct activities related to entry and access as authorized in § 86.1006 of this part because a manufacturer has located a facility in a foreign jurisdiction where local law prohibits those activities; or
(vii) The manufacturer refuses to or in fact does not comply with the requirements of §§ 86.1004(a), 86.1005, 86.1007, 86.1008, 86.1010, 86.1011, or 86.1013.
(2) The sanction of suspending a certificate may not be imposed for the reasons in paragraph (e)(1) (i), (ii), or (vii) of this section where such refusal or denial is caused by conditions and circumstances outside the control of the manufacturer which renders it impossible to comply with those requirements. Such conditions and circumstances shall include, but are not limited to, any uncontrollable factors which result in the temporary unavailability of equipment and personnel needed to conduct the required tests, such as equipment breakdown or failure or illness of personnel, but shall not include failure of the manufacturers to adequately plan for and provide the equipment and personnel needed to conduct the tests. The manufacturer will bear the burden of establishing the presence of the conditions and circumstances required by this paragraph.
(3) The sanction of suspending a certificate may be imposed for the reasons outlined in paragraph (e)(1)(iii), (iv), or (v) of this section only when the infraction is substantial.
(4) In any case in which a manufacturer knowingly submitted false or inaccurate information or knowingly rendered inaccurate any test data or committed any other fraudulent acts, and such acts contributed substantially to the Administrator’s original decision not to suspend or revoke a certificate of conformity in whole or in part, the Administrator may deem such certificate void from the date of such fraudulent act.
(5) In any case in which certification of a light-duty truck or heavy-duty engine is proposed to be suspended under paragraph (e)(1)(v) of this section and in which the Administrator has presented to the manufacturer involved reasonable evidence that a violation of § 86.1006 in fact occurred, if the manufacturer wishes to contend that, although the violation occurred, the vehicle or engine configuration or engine family in question was not involved in the violation to a degree that would warrant suspension of certification under paragraph (e)(1)(v) of this section, he shall have the burden of establishing that contention to the satisfaction of the Administrator.
(6) Any suspension of certification under paragraph (e)(1) of this section shall:
(i) Be made only after the manufacturer concerned has been offered an opportunity for a hearing conducted in accordance with § 86.1014; and
(ii) Not apply to vehicles or engines no longer in the hands of the manufacturer.
(7) Any voiding of a certificate of conformity under paragraph (e)(4) of this section shall be made only after the manufacturer concerned has been offered an opportunity for a hearing conducted in accordance with § 86.1014.
(8) Any voiding of the certificate under paragraph (a) (10) or (11) of this section will be made only after the manufacturer concerned has been offered an opportunity for a hearing conducted in accordance with § 86.1014.
§ 86.008-10 Emission standards for 2008 and later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles.
This section applies to new 2008 and later model year Otto-cycle heavy-duty engines and vehicles. Starting in model year 2021, this section applies to light HDE and medium HDE, but it no longer applies to heavy HDE (see 40 CFR 1036.140(a) and 1036.150(c)).
(a)(1) Exhaust emissions from new 2008 and later model year Otto-cycle HDEs shall not exceed:
(i)(A) Oxides of Nitrogen (NO
(B) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its Otto-cycle HDE families in any or all of the NO
(ii)(A) Nonmethane hydrocarbon (NMHC) for engines fueled with gasoline. 0.14 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.052 grams per megajoule).
(B) Nonmethane-nonethane hydrocarbon (NMNEHC) for engines fueled with natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas. 0.14 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.052 grams per megajoule).
(C) Nonmethane hydrocarbon equivalent (NMHCE) for engines fueled with methanol. 0.14 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.052 grams per megajoule).
(D) A manufacturer may elect to include any or all of its Otto-cycle HDE families in any or all of the hydrocarbon emission ABT programs for HDEs, within the restrictions described in § 86.007-15 or § 86.004-15. If the manufacturer elects to include engine families in any of these programs, the hydrocarbon FEL may not exceed 0.30 grams per brake horsepower-hour. This ceiling value applies whether credits for the family are derived from averaging, banking, or trading programs. The hydrocarbon FEL cap is 0.40 for model years before 2011 for manufacturers choosing to certify to the 1.5 g/bhp-hr NO
(iii) Carbon monoxide. 14.4 grams per brake horsepower-hour (5.36 grams per megajoule).
(iv) Particulate. 0.01 grams per brake horsepower-hour (0.0037grams per megajoule).
(2) The standards set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section refer to the exhaust emitted over the operating schedule set forth in paragraph (f)(1) of Appendix I to this part, and measured and calculated in accordance with the procedures set forth in subpart N or P of this part:
(i) Perform the test interval set forth in paragraph (f)(1) of Appendix I of this part with a cold-start according to 40 CFR part 1065, subpart F. This is the cold-start test interval.
(ii) Shut down the engine after completing the test interval and allow 20 minutes to elapse. This is the hot soak.
(iii) Repeat the test interval. This is the hot-start test interval.
(iv) Calculate the total emission mass of each constituent, m, and the total work, W, over each test interval according to 40 CFR 1065.650.
(v) Determine your engine’s brake-specific emissions using the following calculation, which weights the emissions from the cold-start and hot-start test intervals:
(3)-(4) [Reserved]
(b) This paragraph (b) applies as specified in 40 CFR 1037.103. Evaporative emissions from heavy-duty vehicles shall not exceed the following standards when measured using the test procedures specified in 40 CFR 1037.501. The standards apply equally to certification and in-use vehicles. The spitback standard also applies to newly assembled vehicles. For certification vehicles only, manufacturers may conduct testing to quantify a level of nonfuel background emissions for an individual test vehicle. Such a demonstration must include a description of the source(s) of emissions and an estimated decay rate. The demonstrated level of nonfuel background emissions may be subtracted from emission test results from certification vehicles if approved in advance by the Administrator.
(1) Hydrocarbons (for vehicles equipped with gasoline-fueled, natural gas-fueled or liquefied petroleum gas-fueled engines).
(i) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 14,000 lbs:
(A)(1) For the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 1.4 grams per test.
(2) For the supplemental two-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements (gasoline-fueled vehicles only): 1.75 grams per test.
(B) Running loss test (gasoline-fueled vehicles only): 0.05 grams per mile.
(C) Fuel dispensing spitback test (gasoline-fueled vehicles only): 1.0 grams per test.
(ii) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 14,000 lbs:
(A)(1) For the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 1.9 grams per test.
(2) For the supplemental two-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements (gasoline-fueled vehicles only): 2.3 grams per test.
(B) Running loss test (gasoline-fueled vehicles only): 0.05 grams per mile.
(2) Total Hydrocarbon Equivalent (for vehicles equipped with methanol-fueled engines).
(i) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 14,000 lbs:
(A)(1) For the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 1.4 grams carbon per test.
(2) For the supplemental two-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 1.75 grams carbon per test.
(B) Running loss test: 0.05 grams carbon per mile.
(C) Fuel dispensing spitback test: 1.0 grams carbon per test.
(ii) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 14,000 lbs:
(A)(1) For the full three-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 1.9 grams carbon per test.
(2) For the supplemental two-diurnal test sequence described in § 86.1230-96, diurnal plus hot soak measurements: 2.3 grams carbon per test.
(B) Running loss test: 0.05 grams carbon per mile.
(3)(i) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of up to 26,000 lbs, the standards set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section refer to a composite sample of evaporative emissions collected under the conditions and measured in accordance with the procedures set forth in subpart M of this part.
(ii) For vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of greater than 26,000 lbs., the standards set forth in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section refer to the manufacturer’s engineering design evaluation using good engineering practice (a statement of which is required in § 86.098-23(b)(4)(ii)).
(4) All fuel vapor generated in a gasoline- or methanol-fueled heavy-duty vehicle during in-use operations shall be routed exclusively to the evaporative control system (e.g., either canister or engine purge). The only exception to this requirement shall be for emergencies.
(5) Compressed natural gas vehicles must meet the requirements for fueling connection devices as specified in § 86.1813-17(f)(1). Vehicles meeting these requirements are deemed to comply with evaporative emission standards.
(c) No crankcase emissions shall be discharged into the ambient atmosphere from any new 2008 or later model year Otto-cycle HDE.
(d) Every manufacturer of new motor vehicle engines subject to the standards prescribed in this section shall, prior to taking any of the actions specified in section 203(a)(1) of the Act, test or cause to be tested motor vehicle engines in accordance with applicable procedures in subpart N or P of this part to ascertain that such test engines meet the requirements of this section.
(e) The standards described in this section do not apply to Otto-cycle medium-duty passenger vehicles (MDPVs) that are subject to regulation under subpart S of this part, except as specified in subpart S of this part. The standards described in this section also do not apply to Otto-cycle engines used in such MDPVs, except as specified in subpart S of this part. The term “medium-duty passenger vehicle” is defined in § 86.1803.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) Model years 2018 through 2026 engines that will be installed in specialty vehicles as allowed by 40 CFR 1037.605 may meet alternate emission standards as follows:
(1) The engines must be of a configuration that is identical to one that is certified under 40 CFR part 1048 to the Blue Sky standards under 40 CFR 1048.140.
(2) Except as specified in this paragraph (g), engines certified under this paragraph (g) must meet all the requirements that apply under 40 CFR part 1048 instead of the comparable provisions in this subpart A. Before shipping engines under this section, you must have written assurance from the vehicle manufacturers that they need a certain number of exempted engines under this section. In your annual production report under 40 CFR 1048.250, count these engines separately and identify the vehicle manufacturers that will be installing them. Treat these engines as part of the corresponding engine family under 40 CFR part 1048 for compliance purposes such as testing production engines, in-use testing, defect reporting, and recall.
(3) The engines must be labeled as described in § 86.095-35, with the following statement instead of the one specified in § 86.095-35(a)(3)(iii)(H): “This engine conforms to alternate standards for specialty vehicles under 40 CFR 86.008-10(g)”. Engines certified under this paragraph (g) may not have the label specified for nonroad engines in 40 CFR part 1048 or any other label identifying them as nonroad engines.
(4) In a separate application for a certificate of conformity, identify the corresponding nonroad engine family, describe the label required under this paragraph (g), state that you meet applicable diagnostic requirements under 40 CFR part 1048, and identify your projected U.S.-directed production volume.
(5) No additional certification fee applies for engines certified under this paragraph (g).
(6) Engines certified under this paragraph (g) may not generate or use emission credits under this part. The vehicles in which these engines are installed may generate or use emission credits as described in 40 CFR part 1037.
(7) Engines may instead meet standards for heavy-duty highway engines in California, as demonstrated by an Executive Order issued by the California Air Resources Board.
§ 86.010-2 Definitions.
The definitions of § 86.004-2 continue to apply to 2004 and later model year vehicles. The definitions listed in this section apply beginning with the 2010 model year.
DTC means diagnostic trouble code.
Engine or engine system as used in §§ 86.007-17, 86.007-30, 86.010-18, and 86.010-38 means the engine, fuel system, induction system, aftertreatment system, and everything that makes up the system for which an engine manufacturer has received a certificate of conformity.
Engine start as used in § 86.010-18 means the point when the engine reaches a speed 150 rpm below the normal, warmed-up idle speed (as determined in the drive position for vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission). For hybrid vehicles or for engines employing alternative engine start hardware or strategies (e.g., integrated starter and generators.), the manufacturer may use an alternative definition for engine start (e.g., key-on) provided the alternative definition is based on equivalence to an engine start for a conventional vehicle.
Functional check, in the context of onboard diagnostics, means verifying that a component and/or system that receives information from a control computer responds properly to a command from the control computer.
Ignition cycle as used in § 86.010-18 means a cycle that begins with engine start, meets the engine start definition for at least two seconds plus or minus one second, and ends with engine shutoff.
Limp-home operation as used in § 86.010-18 means an operating mode that an engine is designed to enter upon determining that normal operation cannot be maintained. In general, limp-home operation implies that a component or system is not operating properly or is believed to be not operating properly.
Malfunction means the conditions have been met that require the activation of an OBD malfunction indicator light and storage of a DTC.
MIL-on DTC means the diagnostic trouble code stored when an OBD system has detected and confirmed that a malfunction exists (e.g., typically on the second drive cycle during which a given OBD monitor has evaluated a system or component). Industry standards may refer to this as a confirmed or an active DTC.
Onboard Diagnostics (OBD) group means a combination of engines, engine families, or engine ratings that use the same OBD strategies and similar calibrations.
Pending DTC means the diagnostic trouble code stored upon the detection of a potential malfunction.
Permanent DTC means a DTC that corresponds to a MIL-on DTC and is stored in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). A permanent DTC can only be erased by the OBD system itself and cannot be erased through human interaction with the OBD system or any onboard computer.
Potential malfunction means that conditions have been detected that meet the OBD malfunction criteria but for which more drive cycles are allowed to provide further evaluation prior to confirming that a malfunction exists.
Previous-MIL-on DTC means a DTC that corresponds to a MIL-on DTC but is distinguished by representing a malfunction that the OBD system has determined no longer exists but for which insufficient operation has occurred to satisfy the DTC erasure provisions.
Rationality check, in the context of onboard diagnostics, means verifying that a component that provides input to a control computer provides an accurate input to the control computer while in the range of normal operation and when compared to all other available information.
Similar conditions, in the context of onboard diagnostics, means engine conditions having an engine speed within 375 rpm, load conditions within 20 percent, and the same warm up status (i.e., cold or hot). The manufacturer may use other definitions of similar conditions based on comparable timeliness and reliability in detecting similar engine operation.
§ 86.010-18 On-board Diagnostics for engines used in applications greater than 14,000 pounds GVWR.
(a) General. Heavy-duty engines intended for use in a heavy-duty vehicle weighing more than 14,000 pounds GVWR must be equipped with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system capable of monitoring all emission-related engine systems or components during the life of the engine. The OBD requirements of 40 CFR 1036.110 apply starting in model year 2027. In earlier model years, manufacturers may meet the requirements of this section or the requirements of 40 CFR 1036.110. Note that 40 CFR 1036.150(v) allows for an alternative communication protocol before model year 2027. The OBD system is required to detect all malfunctions specified in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section even though the OBD system is not required to use a unique monitor to detect each of those malfunctions.
(1) When the OBD system detects a malfunction, it must store a pending, a MIL-on, or a previous-MIL-on diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the onboard computer’s memory. A malfunction indicator light (MIL) must also be activated as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) Data link connector. (i) For model years 2010 through 2012, the OBD system must be equipped with a data link connector to provide access to the stored DTCs as specified in paragraph (k)(2) of this section.
(ii) For model years 2013 and later, the OBD system must be equipped with a standardized data link connector to provide access to the stored DTCs as specified in paragraph (k)(2) of this section.
(3) The OBD system cannot be programmed or otherwise designed to deactivate based on age and/or mileage. This requirement does not alter existing law and enforcement practice regarding a manufacturer’s liability for an engine beyond its regulatory useful life, except where an engine has been programmed or otherwise designed so that an OBD system deactivates based on age and/or mileage of the engine.
(4) Drive cycle or driving cycle, in the context of this § 86.010-18, means operation that meets any of the conditions of paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(iv) of this section. Further, for OBD monitors that run during engine-off conditions, the period of engine-off time following engine shutoff and up to the next engine start may be considered part of the drive cycle for the conditions of paragraphs (a)(4)(i) and (a)(4)(iv) of this section. For engines/vehicles that employ engine shutoff OBD monitoring strategies that do not require the vehicle operator to restart the engine to continue vehicle operation (e.g., a hybrid bus with engine shutoff at idle), the manufacturer may use an alternative definition for drive cycle (e.g., key-on followed by key-off). Any alternative definition must be based on equivalence to engine startup and engine shutoff signaling the beginning and ending of a single driving event for a conventional vehicle. For engines that are not likely to be routinely operated for long continuous periods of time, a manufacturer may also request approval to use an alternative definition for drive cycle (e.g., solely based on engine start and engine shutoff without regard to four hours of continuous engine-on time). Administrator approval of the alternative definition will be based on manufacturer-submitted data and/or information demonstrating the typical usage, operating habits, and/or driving patterns of these vehicles.
(i) Begins with engine start and ends with engine shutoff;
(ii) Begins with engine start and ends after four hours of continuous engine-on operation;
(iii) Begins at the end of the previous four hours of continuous engine-on operation and ends after four hours of continuous engine-on operation; or
(iv) Begins at the end of the previous four hours of continuous engine-on operation and ends with engine shutoff.
(5) As an alternative to demonstrating compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (b) through (l) of this § 86.010-18, a manufacturer may demonstrate how the OBD system they have designed to comply with California OBD requirements for engines used in applications greater than 14,000 pounds also complies with the intent of the provisions of paragraphs (b) through (l) of this section. To make use of this alternative, the manufacturer must demonstrate to the Administrator how the OBD system they intend to certify meets the intent behind all of the requirements of this section, where applicable (e.g., paragraph (h) of this section would not apply for a diesel fueled/CI engine). Furthermore, if making use of this alternative, the manufacturer must comply with the specific certification documentation requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
(6) Temporary provisions to address hardship due to unusual circumstances. (i) After considering the unusual circumstances, the Administrator may permit the manufacturer to introduce into U.S. commerce engines that do not comply with this § 86.010-18 for a limited time if all the following conditions apply:
(A) Unusual circumstances that are clearly outside the manufacturer’s control prevent compliance with the requirements of this § 86.010-18.
(B) The manufacturer exercised prudent planning and was not able to avoid the violation and has taken all reasonable steps to minimize the extent of the nonconformity.
(C) No other allowances are available under the regulations in this chapter to avoid the impending violation.
(ii) To apply for an exemption, the manufacturer must send to the Administrator a written request as soon as possible before being in violation. In the request, the manufacturer must show that all the conditions and requirements of paragraph (a)(6)(i) of this section are met.
(iii) The request must also include a plan showing how all the applicable requirements will be met as quickly as possible.
(iv) The manufacturer shall give the Administrator other relevant information upon request.
(v) The Administrator may include additional conditions on an approval granted under the provisions of this paragraph (a)(6), including provisions that may require field repair at the manufacturer’s expense to correct the noncompliance.
(vi) Engines sold as non-compliant under this temporary hardship provision must display “non-OBD” in the data stream as required under paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section. Upon correcting the noncompliance, the data stream value must be updated accordingly.
(b) Malfunction indicator light (MIL) and Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC). The OBD system must incorporate a malfunction indicator light (MIL) or equivalent and must store specific types of diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). Unless otherwise specified, all provisions of this paragraph (b) apply for 2010 and later model years.
(1) MIL specifications. (i) For model years 2013 and later, the MIL must be located on the primary driver’s side instrument panel and be of sufficient illumination and location to be readily visible under all lighting conditions. The MIL must be amber (yellow) in color; the use of red for the OBD-related MIL is prohibited. More than one general purpose malfunction indicator light for emission-related problems shall not be used; separate specific purpose warning lights (e.g., brake system, fasten seat belt, oil pressure, etc.) are permitted. When activated, the MIL shall display the International Standards Organization (ISO) engine symbol.
(ii) The OBD system must activate the MIL when the ignition is in the key-on/engine-off position before engine cranking to indicate that the MIL is functional. The MIL shall be activated continuously during this functional check for a minimum of 5 seconds. During this MIL key-on functional check, the data stream value (see paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section) for MIL status must indicate “commanded off” unless the OBD system has detected a malfunction and has stored a MIL-on DTC. This MIL key-on functional check is not required during vehicle operation in the key-on/engine-off position subsequent to the initial engine cranking of an ignition cycle (e.g., due to an engine stall or other non-commanded engine shutoff).
(iii) As an option, the MIL may be used to indicate readiness status (see paragraph (k)(4)(i) of this section) in a standardized format in the key-on/engine-off position.
(iv) A manufacturer may also use the MIL to indicate which, if any, DTCs are currently stored (e.g., to “blink” the stored DTCs). Such use must not activate unintentionally during routine driver operation.
(v) For model years 2013 and later, the MIL required by this paragraph (b) must not be used in any other way than is specified in this section.
(2) MIL activation and DTC storage protocol. (i) Within 10 seconds of detecting a potential malfunction, the OBD system must store a pending DTC that identifies the potential malfunction.
(ii) If the potential malfunction is again detected before the end of the next drive cycle during which monitoring occurs (i.e., the potential malfunction has been confirmed as a malfunction), then within 10 seconds of such detection the OBD system must activate the MIL continuously and store a MIL-on DTC (systems using the SAE J1939 standard protocol specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section may either erase or retain the pending DTC in conjunction with storing the MIL-on DTC). If the potential malfunction is not detected before the end of the next drive cycle during which monitoring occurs (i.e., there is no indication of the malfunction at any time during the drive cycle), the corresponding pending DTC should be erased at the end of the drive cycle. Similarly, if a malfunction is detected for the first time and confirmed on a given drive cycle without need for further evaluation, then within 10 seconds of such detection the OBD system must activate the MIL continuously and store a MIL-on DTC (again, systems using the SAE J1939 standard protocol specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section may optionally store a pending DTC in conjunction with storing the MIL-on DTC).
(iii) A manufacturer may request Administrator approval to employ alternative statistical MIL activation and DTC storage protocols to those specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section. Approval will depend upon the manufacturer providing data and/or engineering evaluations that demonstrate that the alternative protocols can evaluate system performance and detect malfunctions in a manner that is equally effective and timely. Strategies requiring on average more than six drive cycles for MIL activation will not be accepted.
(iv) The OBD system must store a “freeze frame” of the operating conditions (as defined in paragraph (k)(4)(iii) of this section) present upon detecting a malfunction or a potential malfunction. In the event that a pending DTC has matured to a MIL-on DTC, the manufacturer shall either retain the currently stored freeze frame conditions or replace the stored freeze frame with freeze frame conditions regarding the MIL-on DTC. Any freeze frame stored in conjunction with any pending DTC or MIL-on DTC should be erased upon erasure of the corresponding DTC.
(v) If the engine enters a limp-home mode of operation that can affect emissions or the performance of the OBD system, or in the event of a malfunction of an onboard computer(s) itself that can affect the performance of the OBD system, the OBD system must activate the MIL and store a MIL-on DTC within 10 seconds to inform the vehicle operator. If the limp-home mode of operation is recoverable (i.e., operation automatically returns to normal at the beginning of the following ignition cycle), the OBD system may wait to activate the MIL and store the MIL-on DTC if the limp-home mode of operation is again entered before the end of the next ignition cycle rather than activating the MIL within 10 seconds on the first drive cycle during which the limp-home mode of operation is entered.
(vi) Before the end of an ignition cycle, the OBD system must store a permanent DTC(s) that corresponds to any stored MIL-on DTC(s).
(3) MIL deactivation and DTC erasure protocol—(i) Deactivating the MIL. Except as otherwise provided for in paragraphs (g)(2)(iv)(E) and (g)(6)(iv)(B) of this section for diesel misfire malfunctions and empty reductant tanks, and paragraphs (h)(1)(iv)(F), (h)(2)(viii), and (h)(7)(iv)(B) of this section for gasoline fuel system, misfire, and evaporative system malfunctions, once the MIL has been activated, it may be deactivated after three subsequent sequential drive cycles during which the monitoring system responsible for activating the MIL functions and the previously detected malfunction is no longer present and provided no other malfunction has been detected that would independently activate the MIL according to the requirements outlined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(ii) Erasing a MIL-on DTC. The OBD system may erase a MIL-on DTC if the identified malfunction has not again been detected in at least 40 engine warm up cycles and the MIL is presently not activated for that malfunction. The OBD system may also erase a MIL-on DTC upon deactivating the MIL according to paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section provided a previous-MIL-on DTC is stored upon erasure of the MIL-on DTC. The OBD system may erase a previous-MIL-on DTC if the identified malfunction has not again been detected in at least 40 engine warm up cycles and the MIL is presently not activated for that malfunction.
(iii) Erasing a permanent DTC. The OBD system can erase a permanent DTC only if:
(A) The OBD system itself determines that the malfunction that caused the corresponding permanent DTC to be stored is no longer present and is not commanding activation of the MIL, concurrent with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section which, for purposes of this paragraph (b)(3)(iii), shall apply to all monitors.
(B) All externally erasable DTC information stored in the onboard computer has been erased (i.e., through the use of a scan tool or battery disconnect) and the monitor of the malfunction that caused the permanent DTC to be stored is subject to the minimum ratio requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, the OBD system shall erase the permanent DTC at the end of a drive cycle if the monitor has run and made one or more determinations during a drive cycle that the malfunction of the component or the system is not present and has not made any determinations within the same drive cycle that the malfunction is present.
(C)(1) All externally erasable DTC information stored in the onboard computer has been erased (i.e., through the use of a scan tool or battery disconnect) and the monitor of the malfunction that caused the permanent DTC to be stored is not subject to the minimum ratio requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, the OBD system shall erase the permanent DTC at the end of a drive cycle provided the following two criteria have independently been satisfied:
(i) The monitor has run and made one or more determinations during a drive cycle that the malfunction is no longer present and has not made any determinations within the same drive cycle that the malfunction is present; and,
(ii) The monitor does not detect a malfunction on a drive cycle and the criteria of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section has been met.
(2) These two separate criteria may be met on the same or different drive cycles provided the monitor never detects a malfunction during either drive cycle, and if criteria (b)(3)(iii)(C)(1)(i) happens first then no malfunction may be detected before criteria (b)(3)(iii)(C)(1)(ii) occurs. If a malfunction occurs after criteria (b)(3)(iii)(C)(1)(i) then criteria (b)(3)(iii)(C)(1)(i) must be satisfied again. For the second criterion, the manufacturer must exclude any temperature and/or elevation provisions of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section. For this paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(C), monitors required to use “similar conditions” as defined in § 86.010-2 to store and erase pending and MIL-on DTCs cannot require that the similar conditions be met prior to erasure of the permanent DTC.
(D) The Administrator shall allow monitors subject to paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(B) of this section to use the criteria of paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section in lieu of paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(B). Further, manufacturers may request Administrator approval to use alternative criteria to erase the permanent DTC. The Administrator shall approve alternate criteria that will not likely require driving conditions that are longer and more difficult to meet than those required under paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section and do not require access to enhanced scan tools to determine conditions necessary to erase the permanent DTC.
(4) Exceptions to MIL and DTC requirements. (i) If a limp-home mode of operation causes a overt indication (e.g., activation of a red engine shut-down warning light) such that the driver is certain to respond and have the problem corrected, a manufacturer may choose not to activate the MIL as required by paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section. Additionally, if an auxiliary emission control device has been properly activated as approved by the Administrator, a manufacturer may choose not to activate the MIL.
(ii) For gasoline engines, a manufacturer may choose to meet the MIL and DTC requirements in § 86.007-17 in lieu of meeting the requirements of paragraph (b) of this § 86.010-18.
(c) Monitoring conditions. The OBD system must monitor and detect the malfunctions specified in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section under the following general monitoring conditions. The more specific monitoring conditions of paragraph (d) of this section are sometimes required according to the provisions of paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section.
(1) As specifically provided for in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section, the monitoring conditions for detecting malfunctions must be technically necessary to ensure robust detection of malfunctions (e.g., avoid false passes and false indications of malfunctions); designed to ensure monitoring will occur under conditions that may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and normal vehicle use; and, designed to ensure monitoring will occur during the FTP transient test cycle contained in appendix I paragraph (f), of this part, or similar drive cycle as approved by the Administrator.
(2) Monitoring must occur at least once per drive cycle in which the monitoring conditions are met.
(3) Manufacturers may define monitoring conditions that are not encountered during the FTP cycle as required in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. In doing so, the manufacturer would be expected to consider the degree to which the requirement to run during the FTP transient cycle restricts monitoring during in-use operation, the technical necessity for defining monitoring conditions that are not encountered during the FTP cycle, whether monitoring is otherwise not feasible during the FTP cycle, and/or the ability to demonstrate that the monitoring conditions satisfy the minimum acceptable in-use monitor performance ratio requirement as defined in paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) In-use performance tracking. As specifically required in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section, the OBD system must monitor and detect the malfunctions specified in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section according to the criteria of this paragraph (d). The OBD system is not required to track and report in-use performance for monitors other than those specifically identified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, but all monitors on applicable model year engines are still required to meet the in-use performance ratio as specified in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section.
(1) The manufacturer must implement software algorithms in the OBD system to individually track and report the in-use performance of the following monitors, if equipped, in the standardized format specified in paragraph (e) of this section: NMHC converting catalyst (paragraph (g)(5) of this section); NO
(i) The manufacturer shall not use the calculated ratio specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section or any other indication of monitor frequency as a monitoring condition for a monitor (e.g., using a low ratio to enable more frequent monitoring through diagnostic executive priority or modification of other monitoring conditions, or using a high ratio to enable less frequent monitoring).
(ii) For model years 2013 and later, manufacturers must define monitoring conditions that, in addition to meeting the criteria in paragraphs (c)(1) and (d)(1) of this section, ensure that the monitor yields an in-use performance ratio (as defined in paragraph (d)(2) of this section) that meets or exceeds the minimum acceptable in-use monitor performance ratio of 0.100 for all monitors specifically required in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section to meet the monitoring condition requirements of this paragraph (d).
(iii) If the most reliable monitoring method developed requires a lower ratio for a specific monitor than that specified in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section, the Administrator may lower the minimum acceptable in-use monitoring performance ratio.
(2) In-use performance ratio definition. For monitors required to meet the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, the performance ratio must be calculated in accordance with the specifications of this paragraph (d)(2).
(i) The numerator of the performance ratio is defined as the number of times a vehicle has been operated such that all monitoring conditions have been encountered that are necessary for the specific monitor to detect a malfunction.
(ii) The denominator is defined as the number of times a vehicle has been operated in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(4) of this section.
(iii) The performance ratio is defined as the numerator divided by the denominator.
(3) Specifications for incrementing the numerator. (i) Except as provided for in paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section, the numerator, when incremented, must be incremented by an integer of one. The numerator shall not be incremented more than once per drive cycle.
(ii) The numerator for a specific monitor must be incremented within 10 seconds if and only if the following criteria are satisfied on a single drive cycle:
(A) Every monitoring condition has been satisfied that is necessary for the specific monitor to detect a malfunction and store a pending DTC, including applicable enable criteria, presence or absence of related DTCs, sufficient length of monitoring time, and diagnostic executive priority assignments (e.g., diagnostic “A” must execute prior to diagnostic “B”). For the purpose of incrementing the numerator, satisfying all the monitoring conditions necessary for a monitor to determine that the monitor is not malfunctioning shall not, by itself, be sufficient to meet this criteria.
(B) For monitors that require multiple stages or events in a single drive cycle to detect a malfunction, every monitoring condition necessary for all events to complete must be satisfied.
(C) For monitors that require intrusive operation of components to detect a malfunction, a manufacturer must request approval of the strategy used to determine that, had a malfunction been present, the monitor would have detected the malfunction. Administrator approval of the request will be based on the equivalence of the strategy to actual intrusive operation and the ability of the strategy to determine accurately if every monitoring condition was satisfied that was necessary for the intrusive event to occur.
(D) For the secondary air system monitor, the criteria in paragraphs (d)(3)(ii)(A) through (d)(3)(ii)(C) of this section are satisfied during normal operation of the secondary air system. Monitoring during intrusive operation of the secondary air system later in the same drive cycle for the sole purpose of monitoring shall not, by itself, be sufficient to meet these criteria.
(iii) For monitors that can generate results in a “gray zone” or “non-detection zone” (i.e., monitor results that indicate neither a properly operating system nor a malfunctioning system) or in a “non-decision zone” (e.g., monitors that increment and decrement counters until a pass or fail threshold is reached), the numerator, in general, shall not be incremented when the monitor indicates a result in the “non-detection zone” or prior to the monitor reaching a complete decision. When necessary, the Administrator will consider data and/or engineering analyses submitted by the manufacturer demonstrating the expected frequency of results in the “non-detection zone” and the ability of the monitor to determine accurately, had an actual malfunction been present, whether or not the monitor would have detected a malfunction instead of a result in the “non-detection zone.”
(iv) For monitors that run or complete their evaluation with the engine off, the numerator must be incremented either within 10 seconds of the monitor completing its evaluation in the engine off state, or during the first 10 seconds of engine start on the subsequent drive cycle.
(v) Manufacturers that use alternative statistical MIL activation protocols as allowed in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section for any of the monitors requiring a numerator, are required to increment the numerator(s) appropriately. The manufacturer may be required to provide supporting data and/or engineering analyses demonstrating both the equivalence of their incrementing approach to the incrementing specified in this paragraph (d)(3) for monitors using the standard MIL activation protocol, and the overall equivalence of the incrementing approach in determining that the minimum acceptable in-use performance ratio of paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section, if applicable, has been satisfied.
(4) Specifications for incrementing the denominator. (i) The denominator, when incremented, must be incremented by an integer of one. The denominator shall not be incremented more than once per drive cycle.
(ii) The denominator for each monitor must be incremented within 10 seconds if and only if the following criteria are satisfied on a single drive cycle:
(A) Cumulative time since the start of the drive cycle is greater than or equal to 600 seconds while at an elevation of less than 8,000 feet (2,400 meters) above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to 20 degrees Fahrenheit (−7 C);
(B) Cumulative gasoline engine operation at or above 25 miles per hour or diesel engine operation at or above 1,150 rotations per minute (diesel engines may use the gasoline criterion for 2010 through 2012 model years), either of which occurs for greater than or equal to 300 seconds while at an elevation of less than 8,000 feet (2,400 meters) above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to 20 degrees Fahrenheit (−7 C); and,
(C) Continuous engine operation at idle (e.g., accelerator pedal released by driver and engine speed less than or equal to 200 rpm above normal warmed-up idle (as determined in the drive position for vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission) or vehicle speed less than or equal to one mile per hour) for greater than or equal to 30 seconds while at an elevation of less than 8,000 feet (2,400 meters) above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to 20 degrees Fahrenheit (−7 C).
(iii) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section, the evaporative system monitor denominator(s) may be incremented if and only if:
(A) Cumulative time since the start of the drive cycle is greater than or equal to 600 seconds while at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 C) but less than or equal to 95 degrees Fahrenheit (35 C); and,
(B) Engine cold start occurs with the engine coolant temperature greater than or equal to 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 C) but less than or equal to 95 degrees Fahrenheit (35 C) and less than or equal to 12 degrees Fahrenheit (7 C) higher than the ambient temperature.
(iv) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section, the denominator(s) for the following monitors may be incremented if and only if the component or strategy is commanded “on” for a cumulative time greater than or equal to 10 seconds. For purposes of determining this commanded “on” time, the OBD system shall not include time during intrusive operation of any of the components or strategies that occurs later in the same drive cycle for the sole purpose of monitoring.
(A) Secondary air system (paragraph (h)(5) of this section).
(B) Cold start emission reduction strategy (paragraph (h)(4) of this section).
(C) Components or systems that operate only at engine start-up (e.g., glow plugs, intake air heaters) and are subject to monitoring under “other emission control systems” (paragraph (i)(4) of this section) or comprehensive component output components (paragraph (i)(3)(iii) of this section).
(v) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section, the denominator(s) for the following monitors of output components (except those operated only at engine start-up and subject to the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(iv) of this section, may be incremented if and only if the component is commanded to function (e.g., commanded “on”, “opened”, “closed”, “locked”) on two or more occasions during the drive cycle or for a cumulative time greater than or equal to 10 seconds, whichever occurs first:
(A) Variable valve timing and/or control system (paragraph (g)(10) of this section or (h)(9) of this section).
(B) “Other emission control systems” (paragraph (i)(4) of this section).
(C) Comprehensive component output component (paragraph (i)(3) of this section) (e.g., turbocharger waste-gates, variable length manifold runners).
(vi) For monitors of the following components, the manufacturer may use alternative or additional criteria for incrementing the denominator to that set forth in paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section. To do so, the alternative criteria must be based on equivalence to the criteria of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section in measuring the frequency of monitor operation relative to the amount of engine operation:
(A) Engine cooling system input components (paragraph (i)(1) of this section).
(B) “Other emission control systems” (paragraph (i)(4) of this section).
(C) Comprehensive component input components that require extended monitoring evaluation (paragraph (i)(3) of this section) (e.g., stuck fuel level sensor rationality).
(D) Comprehensive component input component temperature sensor rationality monitors (paragraph (i)(3) of this section) (e.g., intake air temperature sensor, ambient temperature sensor, fuel temperature sensor).
(E) Diesel particulate filter (DPF) frequent regeneration (paragraph (g)(8)(ii)(B) of this section).
(vii) For monitors of the following components or other emission controls that experience infrequent regeneration events, the manufacturer may use alternative or additional criteria for incrementing the denominator to that set forth in paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section. To do so, the alternative criteria must be based on equivalence to the criteria of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section in measuring the frequency of monitor operation relative to the amount of engine operation:
(A) NMHC converting catalyst (paragraph (g)(5) of this section).
(B) Diesel particulate filter (DPF) (paragraphs (g)(8)(ii)(A) and (g)(8)(ii)(D) of this section).
(viii) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section, the denominator(s) for the following monitors shall be incremented if and only if a regeneration event is commanded for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds:
(A) DPF incomplete regeneration (paragraph (g)(8)(ii)(C) of this section).
(B) DPF active/intrusive injection (paragraph (g)(8)(ii)(E) of this section).
(ix) For hybrids that employ alternative engine start hardware or strategies (e.g., integrated starter and generators), or alternative fuel vehicles (e.g., dedicated, bi-fuel, or dual-fuel applications), the manufacturer may use alternative criteria for incrementing the denominator to that set forth in paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section. In general, the Administrator will not approve alternative criteria for those hybrids that employ engine shut off only at or near idle and/or vehicle stop conditions. To use alternative criteria, the alternative criteria must be based on the equivalence to the criteria of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section in measuring the amount of vehicle operation relative to the measure of conventional vehicle operation.
(5) Disablement of numerators and denominators. (i) Within 10 seconds of detecting a malfunction (i.e., a pending or a MIL-on DTC has been stored) that disables a monitor for which the monitoring conditions in paragraph (d) of this section must be met, the OBD system must stop incrementing the numerator and denominator for any monitor that may be disabled as a consequence of the detected malfunction. Within 10 seconds of the time at which the malfunction is no longer being detected (e.g., the pending DTC is erased through OBD system self-clearing or through a scan tool command), incrementing of all applicable numerators and denominators must resume.
(ii) Within 10 seconds of the start of a power take-off unit (e.g., dump bed, snow plow blade, or aerial bucket, etc.) that disables a monitor for which the monitoring conditions in paragraph (d) of this section must be met, the OBD system must stop incrementing the numerator and denominator for any monitor that may be disabled as a consequence of power take-off operation. Within 10 seconds of the time at which the power take-off operation ends, incrementing of all applicable numerators and denominators must resume.
(iii) Within 10 seconds of detecting a malfunction (i.e., a pending or a MIL-on DTC has been stored) of any component used to determine if the criteria of paragraphs (d)(4)(ii) and (d)(4)(iii) of this section are satisfied, the OBD system must stop incrementing all applicable numerators and denominators. Within 10 seconds of the time at which the malfunction is no longer being detected (e.g., the pending DTC is erased through OBD system self-clearing or through a scan tool command), incrementing of all applicable numerators and denominators must resume.
(e) Standardized tracking and reporting of in-use monitor performance—(1) General. For monitors required to track and report in-use monitor performance according to paragraph (d) of this section, the performance data must be tracked and reported in accordance with the specifications in paragraphs (d)(2), (e), and (k)(5) of this section. The OBD system must separately report an in-use monitor performance numerator and denominator for each of the following components:
(i) For diesel engines, NMHC catalyst bank 1, NMHC catalyst bank 2, NO
(ii) For gasoline engines, catalyst bank 1, catalyst bank 2, exhaust gas sensor bank 1, exhaust gas sensor bank 2, evaporative leak detection system, EGR/VVT system, and secondary air system. The OBD system must also report a general denominator and an ignition cycle counter in the standardized format specified in paragraphs (e)(5), (e)(6), and (k)(5) of this section.
(iii) For specific components or systems that have multiple monitors that are required to be reported under paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section (e.g., exhaust gas sensor bank 1 may have multiple monitors for sensor response or other sensor characteristics), the OBD system must separately track numerators and denominators for each of the specific monitors and report only the corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific monitor that has the lowest numerical ratio. If two or more specific monitors have identical ratios, the corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific monitor that has the highest denominator must be reported for the specific component.
(2) Numerator. (i) The OBD system must report a separate numerator for each of the applicable components listed in paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
(ii) The numerator(s) must be reported in accordance with the specifications in paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section.
(3) Denominator. (i) The OBD system must report a separate denominator for each of the applicable components listed in paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
(ii) The denominator(s) must be reported in accordance with the specifications in paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section.
(4) Monitor performance ratio. For purposes of determining which corresponding numerator and denominator to report as required in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, the ratio must be calculated in accordance with the specifications in paragraph (k)(5)(iii) of this section.
(5) Ignition cycle counter. (i) The ignition cycle counter is defined as a counter that indicates the number of ignition cycles a vehicle has experienced according to the specifications of paragraph (e)(5)(ii)(B) of this section. The ignition cycle counter must be reported in accordance with the specifications in paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section.
(ii) The ignition cycle counter must be incremented as follows:
(A) The ignition cycle counter, when incremented, must be incremented by an integer of one. The ignition cycle counter shall not be incremented more than once per ignition cycle.
(B) The ignition cycle counter must be incremented within 10 seconds if and only if the engine exceeds an engine speed of 50 to 150 rpm below the normal, warmed-up idle speed (as determined in the drive position for engines paired with an automatic transmission) for at least two seconds plus or minus one second.
(iii) Within 10 seconds of detecting a malfunction (i.e., a pending or a MIL-on DTC has been stored) of any component used to determine if the criteria in paragraph (e)(5)(ii)(B) of this section are satisfied (i.e., engine speed or time of operation), the OBD system must stop incrementing the ignition cycle counter. Incrementing of the ignition cycle counter shall not be stopped for any other condition. Within 10 seconds of the time at which the malfunction is no longer being detected (e.g., the pending DTC is erased through OBD system self-clearing or through a scan tool command), incrementing of the ignition cycle counter must resume.
(6) General denominator. (i) The general denominator is defined as a measure of the number of times an engine has been operated according to the specifications of paragraph (e)(6)(ii)(B) of this section. The general denominator must be reported in accordance with the specifications in paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section.
(ii) The general denominator must be incremented as follows:
(A) The general denominator, when incremented, must be incremented by an integer of one. The general denominator shall not be incremented more than once per drive cycle.
(B) The general denominator must be incremented within 10 seconds if and only if the criteria identified in paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section are satisfied on a single drive cycle.
(C) Within 10 seconds of detecting a malfunction (i.e., a pending or a MIL-on DTC has been stored) of any component used to determine if the criteria in paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section are satisfied (i.e., vehicle speed/load, ambient temperature, elevation, idle operation, or time of operation), the OBD system must stop incrementing the general denominator. Incrementing of the general denominator shall not be stopped for any other condition (e.g., the disablement criteria in paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and (d)(5)(ii) of this section shall not disable the general denominator). Within 10 seconds of the time at which the malfunction is no longer being detected (e.g., the pending DTC is erased through OBD system self-clearing or through a scan tool command), incrementing of the general denominator must resume.
(f) Malfunction criteria determination. (1) In determining the malfunction criteria for the diesel engine monitors required under paragraphs (g) and (i) of this section that are required to indicate a malfunction before emissions exceed an emission threshold based on any applicable standard, the manufacturer must:
(i) Use the emission test cycle and standard (i.e., the transient FTP or the supplemental emissions test (SET)) determined by the manufacturer to provide the most effective monitoring conditions and robust monitor provided all other applicable requirements of this section are met.
(ii) Identify in the certification documentation required under paragraph (m) of this section, the test cycle and standard determined by the manufacturer to be the most stringent for each applicable monitor and the most effective and robust for each applicable monitor.
(iii) If the Administrator reasonably believes that a manufacturer has determined incorrectly the test cycle and standard that is most stringent or effective, the manufacturer must be able to provide emission data and/or engineering analysis supporting their choice of test cycle and standard.
(2) On engines equipped with emission controls that experience infrequent regeneration events, a manufacturer need not adjust the emission test results that are used to determine the malfunction criteria for monitors that are required to indicate a malfunction before emissions exceed a certain emission threshold. For each such monitor, should the manufacturer choose to adjust the emission test results, the manufacturer must adjust the emission result as done in accordance with the provisions of § 86.004-28(i) with the component for which the malfunction criteria are being established having been deteriorated to the malfunction threshold. The adjusted emission value must be used for purposes of determining whether or not the applicable emission threshold is exceeded.
(i) For purposes of this paragraph (f)(2), regeneration means an event, by design, during which emissions levels change while the emission control performance is being restored.
(ii) For purposes of this paragraph (f)(2), infrequent means having an expected frequency of less than once per transient FTP cycle.
(3) For gasoline engines, rather than meeting the malfunction criteria specified under paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section, the manufacturer may request approval to use an OBD system certified to the requirements of § 86.007-17. To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate use of good engineering judgment in determining equivalent malfunction detection criteria to those required in this section.
(g) OBD monitoring requirements for diesel-fueled/compression-ignition engines. The following table shows the thresholds at which point certain components or systems, as specified in this paragraph (g), are considered malfunctioning.
Table 1—OBD Emissions Thresholds for Diesel-Fueled/Compression-Ignition Engines Meant for Placement in Applications Greater Than 14,000 Pounds GVWR (g/bhp-hr)
| Component | § 86.010-18 reference | NMHC | CO | NO | PM |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Model years 2010-2012: | |||||
| NO | (g)(6) (g)(7) | + 0.6 | |||
| Diesel particulate filter (DPF) system | (g)(8) | 2.5x | 0.05/ + 0.04 | ||
| Air-fuel ratio sensors upstream of aftertreatment devices | (g)(9) | 2.5x | 2.5x | + 0.3 | 0.03/ + 0.02 |
| Air-fuel ratio sensors downstream of aftertreatment devices | (g)(9) | 2.5x | + 0.3 | 0.05/ + 0.04 | |
| NO | (g)(9) | + 0.6 | 0.05/ + 0.04 | ||
| “Other monitors” with emissions thresholds | (g)(1) (g)(3) (g)(4) (g)(10) | 2.5x | 2.5x | + 0.3 | 0.03/ + 0.02 |
| Model years 2013 and later: | |||||
| NO | (g)(6) (g)(7) | + 0.3 | |||
| Diesel particulate filter (DPF) system | (g)(8) | 2x | 0.05/ + 0.04 | ||
| Air-fuel ratio sensors upstream of aftertreatment devices | (g)(9) | 2x | 2x | + 0.3 | 0.03/ + 0.02 |
| Air-fuel ratio sensors downstream of aftertreatment devices | (g)(9) | 2x | + 0.3 | 0.05/ + 0.04 | |
| NO | (g)(9) | + 0.3 | 0.05/ + 0.04 | ||
| “Other monitors” with emissions thresholds | (g)(1) (g)(2) (g)(3) (g)(4) (g)(10) | 2x | 2x | + 0.3 | 0.03/ + 0.02 |
Notes: FEL = Family Emissions Limit; 2.5x std means a multiple of 2.5 times the applicable emissions standard; + 0.3 means the standard or FEL plus 0.3; 0.05/ + 0.04 means an absolute level of 0.05 or an additive level of the standard or FEL plus 0.04, whichever level is higher; these emissions thresholds apply to the monitoring requirements of paragraph (g) of this § 86.010-18.
(1) Fuel system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the fuel delivery system to verify that it is functioning properly. The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors, pumps) that are used in the fuel system and are not specifically addressed in this paragraph (g)(1) must be monitored in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) Fuel system malfunction criteria—(A) Fuel system pressure control. The OBD system must monitor the fuel system’s ability to control to the desired fuel pressure. This monitoring must be done continuously unless new hardware has to be added, in which case the monitoring must be done at least once per drive cycle. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the fuel system’s pressure control system when the pressure control system is unable to maintain an engine’s emissions at or below the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the fuel system pressure control could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that the commanded fuel system pressure cannot be delivered. For model year 2010 to 2012 engines with a unit injector fuel system, this requirement may be met by conducting a functional check of the fuel system pressure control in lieu of monitoring for conditions that could cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the applicable emissions thresholds.
(B) Fuel system injection quantity. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the fuel injection system when the system is unable to deliver the commanded quantity of fuel necessary to maintain an engine’s emissions at or below the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the fuel injection quantity could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that the commanded fuel quantity cannot be delivered. For model year 2010 to 2012 engines with a unit injector fuel system, this requirement may be met by conducting a functional check of the fuel system injection quantity in lieu of monitoring for conditions that could cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the applicable emissions thresholds.
(C) Fuel system injection timing. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the fuel injection system when the system is unable to deliver fuel at the proper crank angle/timing (e.g., injection timing too advanced or too retarded) necessary to maintain an engine’s emissions at or below the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the fuel injection timing could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that the commanded fuel injection timing cannot be achieved. For model year 2010 to 2012 engines with a unit injector fuel system, this requirement may be met by conducting a functional check of the fuel system injection timing in lieu of monitoring for conditions that could cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the applicable emissions thresholds.
(D) Combined Monitoring. For engines with a unit injector fuel system, the manufacturer may request Administrator approval to combine the malfunction criteria of paragraphs (g)(1)(ii)(A) through (g)(1)(ii)(C) of this section into one malfunction provided the manufacturer can demonstrate that the combined malfunction will satisfy the intent of each separate malfunction criteria. For engines with a common rail fuel system, the manufacturer may request Administrator approval to combine the malfunction criteria of paragraphs (g)(1)(ii)(B) through (g)(1)(ii)(C) of this section into one malfunction provided the manufacturer can demonstrate that the combined malfunction will satisfy the intent of each separate malfunction criteria.
(E) Fuel system feedback control. See paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(iii) Fuel system monitoring conditions. (A) With the exceptions noted in this paragraph for unit injector systems, the OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(1)(ii)(A) and (g)(1)(ii)(E) of this section. For 2010 through 2012 unit injector systems, where functional monitoring is done in lieu of emission threshold monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(1)(ii)(A) of this section, the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For 2013 and later unit injector systems, the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(1)(ii)(A) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(B) For 2010 through 2012, the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(1)(ii)(B), (g)(1)(ii)(C), and (g)(1)(ii)(D) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For 2013 and later, the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(iv) Fuel system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) Engine misfire monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the engine for misfire causing excess emissions.
(ii) Engine misfire malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must be capable of detecting misfire occurring in one or more cylinders. To the extent possible without adding hardware for this specific purpose, the OBD system must also identify the specific misfiring cylinder. If more than one cylinder is misfiring continuously, or if more than one but less than half of the cylinders are misfiring continuously (if the manufacturer can demonstrate the robustness of their monitor to the approval of the Administrator), a separate DTC must be stored indicating that multiple cylinders are misfiring. When identifying multiple cylinder misfire, the OBD system is not required to identify individually through separate DTCs each of the continuously misfiring cylinders.
(B) For model years 2013 and later, on engines equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality (e.g., for use in engines with homogeneous charge compression ignition (HCCI) control systems), the OBD system must detect a misfire malfunction when the percentage of misfire is 5 percent or greater.
(iii) Engine misfire monitoring conditions. (A) The OBD system must monitor for engine misfire during engine idle conditions at least once per drive cycle in which the monitoring conditions for misfire are met. The manufacturer must be able to demonstrate via engineering analysis and/or data that the self-defined monitoring conditions: are technically necessary to ensure robust detection of malfunctions (e.g., avoid false passes and false detection of malfunctions); require no more than 1000 cumulative engine revolutions; and, do not require any single continuous idle operation of more than 15 seconds to make a determination that a malfunction is present (e.g., a decision can be made with data gathered during several idle operations of 15 seconds or less); or, satisfy the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section with alternative engine operating conditions.
(B) Manufacturers may employ alternative monitoring conditions (e.g., off-idle) provided the manufacturer is able to demonstrate that the alternative monitoring ensure equivalent robust detection of malfunctions and equivalent timeliness in detection of malfunctions.
(C) For model years 2013 through 2018, on engines equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality, the OBD system must monitor continuously for engine misfire when positive torque is between 20 and 75 percent of peak torque, and engine speed is less than 75 percent of maximum engine speed. If a monitoring system cannot detect all misfire patterns under all required engine speed and load conditions, the manufacturer may request that the Administrator approve the monitoring system nonetheless. In evaluating the manufacturer’s request, the Administrator will consider the following factors: The magnitude of the region(s) in which misfire detection is limited; the degree to which misfire detection is limited in the region(s) (i.e., the probability of detection of misfire events); the frequency with which said region(s) are expected to be encountered in-use; the type of misfire patterns for which misfire detection is troublesome; and demonstration that the monitoring technology employed is not inherently incapable of detecting misfire under required conditions (i.e., compliance can be achieved on other engines). The evaluation will be based on the following misfire patterns: Equally spaced misfire occurring on randomly selected cylinders; single cylinder continuous misfire; and, paired cylinder (cylinders firing at the same crank angle) continuous misfire.
(D) For 20 percent of 2019 model year, 50 percent of 2020 model, and 100 percent of 2021 and later model year diesel engines (percentage based on the manufacturer’s projected sales volume of all diesel engines subject to this regulation) equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality, the OBD system must monitor continuously for engine misfire under all positive torque engine speed conditions except within the following range: The engine operating region bound by the positive torque line (i.e., engine torque with transmission in neutral) and the two following points: engine speed of 50 percent of maximum engine speed with the engine torque at the positive torque line, and 100 percent of the maximum engine speed with the engine torque at 10 percent of peak torque above the positive torque line. If a monitoring system cannot detect all misfire patterns under all required engine speed and load conditions, the manufacturer may request that the Administrator approve the monitoring system nonetheless. In evaluating the manufacturer’s request, the Administrator will consider the following factors: The magnitude of the region(s) in which misfire detection is limited; the degree to which misfire detection is limited in the region(s) (i.e., the probability of detection of misfire events); the frequency with which said region(s) are expected to be encountered in-use; the type of misfire patterns for which misfire detection is troublesome; and demonstration that the monitoring technology employed is not inherently incapable of detecting misfire under required conditions (i.e., compliance can be achieved on other engines). The evaluation will be based on the following misfire patterns: Equally spaced misfire occurring on randomly selected cylinders; single cylinder continuous misfire; and, paired cylinder (cylinders firing at the same crank angle) continuous misfire.
(iv) Engine misfire MIL activation and DTC storage. (A) General requirements for MIL activation and DTC storage are set forth in paragraph (b) of this section.
(B) For model years 2013 and later, on engines equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality, upon detection of the percentage of misfire specified in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, the following criteria shall apply for MIL activation and DTC storage: A pending DTC must be stored no later than after the fourth exceedance of the percentage of misfire specified in paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section during a single drive cycle; if a pending fault code has been stored, the OBD system must activate the MIL and store a MIL-on DTC within 10 seconds if the percentage of misfire specified in paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section is again exceeded four times during the drive cycle immediately following storage of the pending DTC, regardless of the conditions encountered during the drive cycle, or on the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that were occurring when the pending DTC was stored. Similar conditions means an engine speed within 375 rpm, engine load within 20 percent, and the same warm up status (i.e., cold or hot). The Administrator may approve other definitions of similar conditions based on comparable timeliness and reliability in detecting similar engine operation. The pending DTC may be erased at the end of the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that were occurring when the pending DTC was stored provided the specified percentage of misfire was not again exceeded. The pending DTC may also be erased if similar conditions are not encountered during the 80 drive cycles immediately following initial detection of the malfunction.
(C) For model years 2013 and later, on engines equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality, the OBD system must store and erase freeze frame conditions either in conjunction with storing and erasing a pending DTC or in conjunction with storing and erasing a MIL-on DTC. If freeze frame conditions are stored for a malfunction other than a misfire malfunction when a DTC is stored as specified in paragraph (g)(2)(iv)(B) of this section, the stored freeze frame information must be replaced with the freeze frame information regarding the misfire malfunction.
(D) For model years 2013 and later, on engines equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality, upon detection of misfire according to paragraph (g)(2)(iv)(B) of this section, the OBD system must also store the following engine conditions: engine speed, load, and warm up status of the first misfire event that resulted in the storage of the pending DTC.
(E) For model years 2013 and later, on engines equipped with sensors that can detect combustion or combustion quality, the MIL may be deactivated after three sequential drive cycles in which similar conditions have been encountered without an exceedance of the specified percentage of misfire.
(3) EGR system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the EGR system on engines so equipped for low flow rate, high flow rate, and slow response malfunctions. For engines equipped with EGR coolers (e.g., heat exchangers), the OBD system must monitor the cooler for insufficient cooling malfunctions. The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors) that are used in the EGR system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive component requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) EGR system malfunction criteria—(A) EGR low flow. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the EGR system prior to a decrease from the manufacturer’s specified EGR flow rate that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the EGR system that causes a decrease in flow could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that it cannot increase EGR flow to achieve the commanded flow rate.
(B) EGR high flow. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the EGR system, including a leaking EGR valve (i.e., exhaust gas flowing through the valve when the valve is commanded closed) prior to an increase from the manufacturer’s specified EGR flow rate that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the EGR system that causes an increase in flow could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that it cannot reduce EGR flow to achieve the commanded flow rate.
(C) EGR slow response. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the EGR system prior to any failure or deterioration in the capability of the EGR system to achieve the commanded flow rate within a manufacturer-specified time that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). The OBD system must monitor both the capability of the EGR system to respond to a commanded increase in flow and the capability of the EGR system to respond to a commanded decrease in flow.
(D) EGR system feedback control. See paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(E) EGR cooler performance. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the EGR cooler prior to a reduction from the manufacturer’s specified cooling performance that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the EGR cooler could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has no detectable amount of EGR cooling.
(iii) EGR system monitoring conditions. (A) The OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(3)(ii)(A), (g)(3)(ii)(B), and (g)(3)(ii)(D) of this section.
(B) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(C) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(C) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(C) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(E) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(3)(ii)(E) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(D) The manufacturer may request Administrator approval to disable temporarily the EGR system monitor(s) under specific ambient conditions (e.g., when freezing may affect performance of the system) or during specific operating conditions (e.g., transients, extreme low or high flow conditions). The manufacturer must be able to demonstrate via data or engineering analysis that a reliable system monitor cannot be run when these conditions exist because it cannot robustly distinguish between a malfunctioning system and a properly operating system. The manufacturer is still required to maintain comprehensive component monitoring as required in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(iv) EGR system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(4) Turbo boost control system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the boost pressure control system (e.g., turbocharger) on engines so equipped for under and over boost malfunctions. For engines equipped with variable geometry turbochargers (VGT), the OBD system must monitor the VGT system for slow response malfunctions. For engines equipped with charge air cooler systems, the OBD system must monitor the charge air cooler system for cooling system performance malfunctions. The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors) that are used in the boost pressure control system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive component requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) Turbo boost control system malfunction criteria—(A) Turbo underboost. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the boost pressure control system prior to a decrease from the manufacturer’s commanded boost pressure, or expected boost pressure on engines not equipped with a boost pressure control system, that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the boost pressure control system that causes a decrease in boost could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that it cannot increase boost to achieve the commanded boost pressure.
(B) Turbo overboost. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the boost pressure control system on engines so equipped prior to an increase from the manufacturer’s commanded boost pressure that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the boost pressure control system that causes an increase in boost could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that it cannot decrease boost to achieve the commanded boost pressure.
(C) VGT slow response. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration in the capability of the VGT system on engines so equipped to achieve the commanded turbocharger geometry within a manufacturer-specified time that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the VGT system response could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the VGT system when proper functional response of the system to computer commands does not occur.
(D) Turbo boost feedback control. See paragraph (i)(6)of this section.
(E) Charge air undercooling. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the charge air cooling system prior to a decrease from the manufacturer’s specified cooling rate that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the charge air cooling system that causes a decrease in cooling performance could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has no detectable amount of charge air cooling.
(iii) Turbo boost monitoring conditions. (A) The OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(4)(ii)(A), (g)(4)(ii)(B), and (g)(4)(ii)(D) of this section.
(B) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(C) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(C) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(C) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(E) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(E) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(D) The manufacturer may request Administrator approval to disable temporarily the turbo boost system monitor(s) during specific operating conditions (e.g., transients, extreme low or high flow conditions). The manufacturer must be able to demonstrate via data or engineering analysis that a reliable system monitor cannot be run when these conditions exist because it cannot robustly distinguish between a malfunctioning system and a properly operating system. The manufacturer is still required to maintain comprehensive component monitoring as required in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(iv) Turbo boost system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(5) NMHC converting catalyst monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the NMHC converting catalyst(s) for proper NMHC conversion capability. For purposes of this paragraph (g)(5), each catalyst that converts NMHC must be monitored either individually or in combination with others. For purposes of this paragraph (g)(5), NMHC conversion that may occur over the DPF or other aftertreatment devices is not included.
(ii) NMHC converting catalyst malfunction criteria—(A) NMHC converting catalyst conversion efficiency. The OBD system must detect a malfunction when the catalyst has no detectable amount of NMHC conversion capability.
(B) NMHC converting catalyst aftertreatment assistance functions. For catalysts used to generate an exotherm to assist DPF regeneration, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the catalyst is unable to generate a sufficient exotherm to achieve DPF regeneration. In meeting this requirement, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the DOC is unable to generate a temperature rise of 100 degrees C, or to reach the necessary DPF regeneration temperature, within 60 seconds of initiating an active DPF regeneration. Further, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the DOC is unable to sustain the necessary regeneration temperature for the duration of the regeneration event. The OBD or control system must abort the regeneration if the regeneration temperature has not been reached within five minutes of initiating an active regeneration event, or if the regeneration temperature cannot be sustained for the duration of the regeneration event. As an alternative to these specific malfunction criteria, the manufacturer may employ different criteria. To do so, the manufacturer must submit a description with supporting data, subject to Administrator approval, of their DPF regeneration monitoring strategy. The Administrator will consider the strategy’s equivalence to the specific criteria stated in this paragraph when considering the request. Also as an alternative to these specific malfunction criteria, the manufacturer may employ an OBD monitor that detects a catalyst malfunction when the catalyst conversion capability decreases to the point that NMHC emissions exceed 2.5 times the applicable NMHC emission standard but must adjust emission test results pursuant to paragraph (f)(2) of this section. For catalysts located downstream of a DPF and used to convert NMHC emissions during DPF regeneration, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the catalyst has no detectable amount of NMHC conversion capability unless the manufacturer can demonstrate that deterioration or malfunction of the catalyst will not result in emissions that exceed the applicable NMHC standard.
(iii) NMHC converting catalyst monitoring conditions. The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(5)(ii)(A) and (g)(5)(ii)(B) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(5)(ii)(A) and (g)(5)(ii)(B) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(iv) NMHC converting catalyst MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section. The monitoring method for the NMHC converting catalyst(s) must be capable of detecting all instances, except diagnostic self-clearing, when a catalyst DTC has been erased but the catalyst has not been replaced (e.g., catalyst over-temperature histogram approaches are not acceptable).
(6) Selective catalytic reduction (SCR) and lean NO
(ii) SCR and lean NO
(B) SCR and lean NO
(C) SCR and lean NO
(D) SCR and lean NO
(E) SCR and lean NO
(iii) SCR and lean NO
(B) The OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(6)(ii)(B), (g)(6)(ii)(C), and (g)(6)(ii)(E) of this section.
(iv) SCR and lean NO
(B) For malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(6)(ii)(B), (g)(6)(ii)(C), and (g)(6)(ii)(D) of this section, the manufacturer may delay activating the MIL if the vehicle is equipped with an alternative indicator for notifying the vehicle operator of the malfunction. The alternative indicator must be of sufficient illumination and be located such that it is readily visible to the vehicle operator under all lighting conditions. If the vehicle is not equipped with such an alternative indicator and the OBD MIL activates, the MIL may be immediately deactivated and the corresponding DTC(s) erased once the OBD system has verified that the reductant tank has been refilled properly and the MIL has not been activated for any other malfunction. The Administrator may approve other strategies that provide equivalent assurance that a vehicle operator would be promptly notified and that corrective action would be taken.
(C) The monitoring method for the SCR and lean NO
(7) NO
(ii) NO
(B) NO
(C) NO
(iii) NO
(B) The OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(7)(ii)(B) and (g)(7)(ii)(C) of this section.
(iv) NO
(8) Diesel particulate filter (DPF) system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the DPF on engines so-equipped for proper performance. For engines equipped with active regeneration systems that use an active/intrusive injection (e.g., in-exhaust fuel injection, in-exhaust fuel/air burner), the OBD system must monitor the active/intrusive injection system for proper performance. The individual electronic components (e.g., injectors, valves, sensors) that are used in the active/intrusive injection system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive component requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) DPF system malfunction criteria—(A) DPF filtering performance. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to a decrease in the PM filtering capability of the DPF (e.g., cracking, melting, etc.) that would cause an engine’s PM emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for DPF systems as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). If no failure or deterioration of the PM filtering performance could result in an engine’s PM emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when no detectable amount of PM filtering occurs. As an alternative to a threshold monitor, the OBD system, on model year 2010 through 2012 engines only, can be designed to detect a malfunction based on a detectable decrease in the expected pressure drop across the DPF for a period of 5 seconds or more. The monitoring area for this alternative is determined using engine speed and load points defined in test cycles and procedures for the supplemental emissions test (SET) under § 86.1360-2007. The monitoring area shall include all engine speed and load points greater than a region bounded by a line connecting mode numbers 2, 6, 3, and 13 (i.e. A100, A75, B50, and C50). At engine speeds greater than “speed C”, the monitor shall run whenever engine load is greater than 50%. For purposes of this paragraph, the detectable change in pressure drop is determined by operating the engine at the B50 engine speed and load point (as described in the SET test procedures), observing the pressure drop on a clean, nominal DPF, and multiplying the observed pressure drop by 0.5 or other factor supported by data and approved by the Administrator. The detectable change in pressure drop shall be reported in units of kilopascals (kPa). At time of certification, manufacturers shall provide the detectable change in pressure drop value along with OBD data stream parameters recorded with a clean DPF under the following nine engine speed/load operating points of the SET: A50, A75, A100, B50, B75, B100, C50, C75, and C100. The OBD data stream pararmeters to be reported are described in (k)(4)(ii) of this section and shall include the following: Engine speed; calculated load; air flow rate from mass air flow sensor (if so equipped); fuel rate; and DPF delta pressure.
(B) DPF regeneration frequency. The OBD system must detect a malfunction when the DPF regeneration frequency increases from (i.e., occurs more often than) the manufacturer’s specified regeneration frequency to a level such that it would cause an engine’s NMHC emissions to exceed the emissions threshold for DPF systems as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g). If no such regeneration frequency exists that could cause NMHC emissions to exceed the applicable emission threshold, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the DPF regeneration frequency exceeds the manufacturer’s specified design limits for allowable regeneration frequency.
(C) DPF incomplete regeneration. The OBD system must detect a regeneration malfunction when the DPF does not properly regenerate under manufacturer-defined conditions where regeneration is designed to occur.
(D) DPF missing substrate. The OBD system must detect a malfunction if either the DPF substrate is completely destroyed, removed, or missing, or if the DPF assembly has been replaced with a muffler or straight pipe.
(E) DPF system active/intrusive injection. For DPF systems that use active/intrusive injection (e.g., in-cylinder post fuel injection, in-exhaust air-assisted fuel injection) to achieve regeneration of the DPF, the OBD system must detect a malfunction if any failure or deterioration of the injection system’s ability to properly regulate injection causes the system to be unable to achieve regeneration of the DPF.
(F) DPF regeneration feedback control. See paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(iii) DPF monitoring conditions. The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For OBD systems designed to the alternative malfunction criteria of paragraph (g)(8)(ii)(A) of this section, the alternative DPF monitor shall run continuously whenever engine speed and load conditions are within the monitoring area described in paragraph (g)(8)(ii)(A). The OBD system may make a malfunction or potential malfunction determination during any successful monitoring event but shall include in the enable criteria of any subsequent monitoring events a confirmed successful and complete DPF regeneration. The subsequent monitoring events must be conducted within an operating period that ensures that the detected malfunction has not “healed” due to trapped particulates in the compromised portion of the DPF substrate. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(iv) DPF system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(9) Exhaust gas sensor and sensor heater monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor for proper output signal, activity, response rate, and any other parameter that can affect emissions, all exhaust gas sensors (e.g., oxygen, air-fuel ratio, NO
(ii) Malfunction criteria for air-fuel ratio sensors located upstream of aftertreatment devices—(A)Sensor performance. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration of the sensor voltage, resistance, impedance, current, response rate, amplitude, offset, or other characteristic(s) that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g).
(B) Circuit integrity. The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the sensor related to a lack of circuit continuity or signal out-of-range values.
(C) Feedback function. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the sensor if the emission control system (e.g., EGR, SCR, or NO
(D) Monitoring function. To the extent feasible, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the sensor when the sensor output voltage, resistance, impedance, current, amplitude, activity, offset, or other characteristics are no longer sufficient for use as an OBD system monitoring device (e.g., for catalyst, EGR, SCR, or NO
(iii) Malfunction criteria for air-fuel ratio sensors located downstream of aftertreatment devices—(A) Sensor performance. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration of the sensor voltage, resistance, impedance, current, response rate, amplitude, offset, or other characteristic(s) that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for air-fuel ratio sensors downstream of aftertreatment devices as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g).
(B) Circuit integrity. The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the sensor related to a lack of circuit continuity or signal out-of-range values.
(C) Feedback function. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the sensor if the emission control system (e.g., EGR, SCR, or NO
(D) Monitoring function. To the extent feasible, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the sensor when the sensor output voltage, resistance, impedance, current, amplitude, activity, offset, or other characteristics are no longer sufficient for use as an OBD system monitoring device (e.g., for catalyst, EGR, SCR, or NO
(iv) Malfunction criteria for NO
(B) Circuit integrity. The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the sensor related to a lack of circuit continuity or signal out-of-range values.
(C) Feedback function. The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the sensor if the emission control system (e.g., EGR, SCR, or NO
(D) Monitoring function. To the extent feasible, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the sensor when the sensor output voltage, resistance, impedance, current, amplitude, activity, offset, or other characteristics are no longer sufficient for use as an OBD system monitoring device (e.g., for catalyst, EGR, SCR, or NO
(v) Malfunction criteria for other exhaust gas sensors. For other exhaust gas sensors, the manufacturer must submit a monitoring plan to the Administrator for approval. The plan must include data and/or engineering evaluations that demonstrate that the monitoring plan is as reliable and effective as the monitoring required in paragraphs (g)(9)(ii), (g)(9)(iii), (g)(9)(iv) of this section.
(vi) Malfunction criteria for exhaust gas sensor heaters. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the heater performance when the current or voltage drop in the heater circuit is no longer within the manufacturer’s specified limits for normal operation (i.e., within the criteria required to be met by the component vendor for heater circuit performance at high mileage). The manufacturer may use other malfunction criteria for heater performance malfunctions. To do so, the manufacturer must be able to demonstrate via data and/or an engineering evaluation that the monitor is reliable and robust.
(B) The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the heater circuit including open or short circuits that conflict with the commanded state of the heater (e.g., shorted to 12 Volts when commanded to 0 Volts (ground)).
(vii) Monitoring conditions for exhaust gas sensors. (A) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(9)(ii)(A), (g)(9)(iii)(A), and (g)(9)(iv)(A) of this section (i.e., sensor performance) in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(9)(ii)(A), (g)(9)(iii)(A), and (g)(9)(iv)(A) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(B) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(9)(ii)(D), (g)(9)(iii)(D), and (g)(9)(iv)(D) of this section (i.e., monitoring function) in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(C) Except as provided for in paragraph (g)(9)(vii)(D) of this section, the OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (g)(9)(ii)(B), (g)(9)(ii)(C), (g)(9)(iii)(B), (g)(9)(iii)(C), (g)(9)(iv)(B), (g)(9)(iv)(C) of this section (i.e., circuit integrity and feedback function).
(D) A manufacturer may request approval to disable continuous exhaust gas sensor monitoring when an exhaust gas sensor malfunction cannot be distinguished from other effects (e.g., disable monitoring for out-of-range on the low side during fuel cut conditions). To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate via data and/or engineering analyses that a properly functioning sensor cannot be distinguished from a malfunctioning sensor and that the disablement interval is limited only to that necessary for avoiding falsemalfunction detection.
(viii) Monitoring conditions for exhaust gas sensor heaters—(A) The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(9)(vi)(A) of this section (i.e., sensor heater performance) in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(B) The OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(9)(vi)(B) of this section (i.e., circuit malfunctions).
(ix) Exhaust gas sensor and sensor heater MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(10) Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the VVT system on engines so equipped for target error and slow response malfunctions. The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors) that are used in the VVT system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive components requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) VVT system malfunction criteria—(A) VVT system target error. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration in the capability of the VVT system to achieve the commanded valve timing and/or control within a crank angle and/or lift tolerance that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emission thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g).
(B) VVT slow response. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration in the capability of the VVT system to achieve the commanded valve timing and/or control within a manufacturer-specified time that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emission thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 1 of this paragraph (g).
(C) For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the VVT system could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds of paragraphs (g)(10)(ii)(A) and (g)(10)(ii)(B) of this section, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the VVT system when proper functional response of the system to computer commands does not occur.
(iii) VVT system monitoring conditions. Manufacturers must define the monitoring conditions for VVT system malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(10)(ii) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (g)(10)(ii) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(iv) VVT MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(h) OBD monitoring requirements for gasoline-fueled/spark-ignition engines. The following table shows the thresholds at which point certain components or systems, as specified in this paragraph (h), are considered malfunctioning.
Table 2—OBD Emissions Thresholds for Gasoline-Fueled/Spark-Ignition Engines Meant for Placement in Applications Greater Than 14,000 Pounds GVWR (g/bhp-hr)
| Component | NO | NMHC | CO | § 86.010-18 reference |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Catalyst system | 1.75x std | 1.75x std | (h)(6) | |
| Evaporative emissions control system | 0.150 inch leak | (h)(7) | ||
| “Other monitors” with emissions thresholds | 1.5x std | 1.5x std | 1.5x std | (h)(1), (h)(2), (h)(3), (h)(4), (h)(5), (h)(8), (h)(9) |
Notes: 1.75x std means a multiple of 1.75 times the applicable emissions standard; these emissions thresholds apply to the monitoring requirements of paragraph (h) of this section; The evaporative emissions control system threshold is not, technically, an emissions threshold but rather a leak size that must be detected; nonetheless, for ease we refer to this as the threshold.
(1) Fuel system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the fuel delivery system to determine its ability to provide compliance with emission standards.
(ii) Fuel system malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the fuel delivery system (including feedback control based on a secondary oxygen sensor) when the fuel delivery system is unable to maintain an engine’s emissions at or below the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(B) Except as provided for in paragraph (h)(1)(ii)(C) of this section, if the engine is equipped with adaptive feedback control, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the adaptive feedback control has used up all of the adjustment allowed by the manufacturer.
(C) If the engine is equipped with feedback control that is based on a secondary oxygen (or equivalent) sensor, the OBD system is not required to detect a malfunction of the fuel system solely when the feedback control based on a secondary oxygen sensor has used up all of the adjustment allowed by the manufacturer. However, if a failure or deterioration results in engine emissions that exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h), the OBD system is required to detect a malfunction.
(D) The OBD system must detect a malfunction whenever the fuel control system fails to enter closed loop operation following engine start within a manufacturer specified time interval. The specified time interval must be supported by data and/or engineering analyses submitted by the manufacturer.
(E) The manufacturer may adjust the malfunction criteria and/or monitoring conditions to compensate for changes in altitude, for temporary introduction of large amounts of purge vapor, or for other similar identifiable operating conditions when such conditions occur.
(iii) Fuel system monitoring conditions. The fuel system must be monitored continuously for the presence of a malfunction.
(iv) Fuel system MIL activation and DTC storage. (A) A pending DTC must be stored immediately upon the fuel system exceeding the malfunction criteria established in paragraph (h)(1)(ii) of this section.
(B) Except as provided for in paragraph (h)(1)(iv)(C) of this section, if a pending DTC is stored, the OBD system must activate the MIL immediately and store a MIL-on DTC if a malfunction is again detected during either the drive cycle immediately following storage of the pending DTC regardless of the conditions encountered during that drive cycle, or on the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that occurred when the pending DTC was stored. Similar conditions means engine conditions having an engine speed within 375 rpm, load conditions within 20 percent, and the same warm-up status (i.e., cold or hot) as the engine conditions stored pursuant to paragraph (h)(1)(iv)(E) of this section. Other definitions of similar conditions may be used but must result in comparable timeliness and reliability in detecting similar engine operation.
(C) The pending DTC may be erased at the end of the next drive cycle in which similar conditions have been encountered without having again exceeded the specified fuel system malfunction criteria. The pending DTC may also be erased if similar conditions are not encountered during the 80 drive cycles immediately following detection of the potential malfunction for which the pending DTC was stored.
(D) Storage of freeze frame conditions. The OBD system must store and erase freeze frame conditions either in conjunction with storing and erasing a pending DTC or in conjunction with storing and erasing a MIL-on DTC. Freeze frame information associated with a fuel system malfunction shall be stored in preference to freeze frame information required elsewhere in paragraphs (h) or (i) of this section.
(E) Storage of fuel system conditions for determining similar conditions of operation. The OBD must store the engine speed, load, and warm-up status present at the time it first detects a potential malfunction meeting the criteria of paragraph (h)(1)(ii) of this section and stores a pending DTC.
(F) Deactivating the MIL. The MIL may be extinguished after three sequential driving cycles in which similar conditions have been encountered without detecting a malfunction of the fuel system.
(2) Engine misfire monitoring—(i) General. (A) The OBD system must monitor the engine for misfire causing catalyst damage and misfire causing excess emissions.
(B) The OBD system must identify the specific cylinder that is misfiring. The manufacturer may store a general misfire DTC instead of a cylinder specific DTC under certain operating conditions. To do so, the manufacturer must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that the misfiring cylinder cannot be identified reliably when the conditions occur.
(C) If more than one cylinder is misfiring, a separate DTC must be stored to indicate that multiple cylinders are misfiring unless otherwise allowed by this paragraph (h)(2). When identifying multiple cylinder misfire, the OBD system is not required to also identify using separate DTCs each of the misfiring cylinders individually. If more than 90 percent of the detected misfires occur in a single cylinder, an appropriate DTC may be stored that indicates the specific misfiring cylinder rather than storing the multiple cylinder misfire DTC. If two or more cylinders individually have more than 10 percent of the total number of detected misfires, a multiple cylinder DTC must be stored.
(ii) Engine misfire malfunction criteria—(A) Misfire causing catalyst damage. The manufacturer must determine the percentage of misfire evaluated in 200 revolution increments for each engine speed and load condition that would result in a temperature that causes catalyst damage. If this percentage of misfire is exceeded, it shall be considered a malfunction that must be detected. For every engine speed and load condition for which this percentage of misfire is determined to be lower than five percent, the manufacturer may set the malfunction criteria at five percent. The manufacturer may use a longer interval than 200 revolutions but only for determining, on a given drive cycle, the first misfire exceedance as provided in paragraph (h)(2)(iv)(A) of this section. To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate that the interval is not so long that catalyst damage would occur prior to the interval being elapsed.
(B) Misfire causing emissions to exceed the applicable thresholds. The manufacturer must determine the percentage of misfire evaluated in 1000 revolution increments that would cause emissions from an emissions durability demonstration engine to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h) if that percentage of misfire were present from the beginning of the test. If this percentage of misfire is exceeded, regardless of the pattern of misfire events (e.g., random, equally spaced, continuous), it shall be considered a malfunction that must be detected. To establish this percentage of misfire, the manufacturer must use misfire events occurring at equally spaced, complete engine cycle intervals, across randomly selected cylinders throughout each 1000-revolution increment. If this percentage of misfire is determined to be lower than one percent, the manufacturer may set the malfunction criteria at one percent. The manufacturer may use a longer interval than 1000 revolutions. To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate that the strategy would be equally effective and timely at detecting misfire.
(iii) Engine misfire monitoring conditions. (A) The OBD system must monitor continuously for misfire under the following conditions: from no later than the end of the second crankshaft revolution after engine start; during the rise time and settling time for engine speed to reach the desired idle engine speed at engine start-up (i.e., “flare-up” and “flare-down”); and, under all positive torque engine speeds and load conditions except within the engine operating region bound by the positive torque line (i.e., engine load with the transmission in neutral), and the points represented by an engine speed of 3000 rpm with the engine load at the positive torque line and the redline engine speed with the engine’s manifold vacuum at four inches of mercury lower than that at the positive torque line. For this purpose, redline engine speed is defined as either the recommended maximum engine speed as displayed on the instrument panel tachometer, or the engine speed at which fuel shutoff occurs.
(B) If an OBD monitor cannot detect all misfire patterns under all required engine speed and load conditions as required by paragraph (h)(2)(iii)(A) of this section, the OBD system may still be acceptable. The Administrator will evaluate the following factors in making a determination: The magnitude of the region(s) in which misfire detection is limited; the degree to which misfire detection is limited in the region(s) (i.e., the probability of detection of misfire events); the frequency with which said region(s) are expected to be encountered in-use; the type of misfire patterns for which misfire detection is troublesome; and demonstration that the monitoring technology employed is not inherently incapable of detecting misfire under the required conditions (i.e., compliance can be achieved on other engines). The evaluation will be based on the following misfire patterns: equally spaced misfire occurring on randomly selected cylinders; single cylinder continuous misfire; and paired cylinder (cylinders firing at the same crank angle) continuous misfire.
(C) The manufacturer may use monitoring system that has reduced misfire detection capability during the portion of the first 1000 revolutions after engine start that a cold start emission reduction strategy is active that reduces engine torque (e.g., spark retard strategies). To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate that the probability of detection is greater than or equal to 75 percent during the worst case condition (i.e., lowest generated torque) for a vehicle operated continuously at idle (park/neutral idle) on a cold start between 50 and 86 degrees Fahrenheit and that the technology cannot reliably detect a higher percentage of the misfire events during the conditions.
(D) The manufacturer may disable misfire monitoring or use an alternative malfunction criterion when misfire cannot be distinguished from other effects. To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate that the disablement interval or the period of use of an alternative malfunction criterion is limited only to that necessary for avoiding false detection and for one or more of the following operating conditions: Rough road; fuel cut; gear changes for manual transmission vehicles; traction control or other vehicle stability control activation such as anti-lock braking or other engine torque modifications to enhance vehicle stability; off-board control or intrusive activation of vehicle components or monitors during service or assembly plant testing; portions of intrusive evaporative system or EGR monitors that can significantly affect engine stability (i.e., while the purge valve is open during the vacuum pull-down of an evaporative system leak check but not while the purge valve is closed and the evaporative system is sealed or while an EGR monitor causes the EGR valve to be cycled intrusively on and off during positive torque conditions); or, engine speed, load, or torque transients due to throttle movements more rapid than those that occur over the FTP cycle for the worst case engine within each engine family. In general, the Administrator will not approve disablement for conditions involving normal air conditioning compressor cycling from on-to-off or off-to-on, automatic transmission gear shifts (except for shifts occurring during wide open throttle operation), transitions from idle to off-idle, normal engine speed or load changes that occur during the engine speed rise time and settling time (i.e., “flare-up” and “flare-down”) immediately after engine starting without any vehicle operator-induced actions (e.g., throttle stabs), or excess acceleration (except for acceleration rates that exceed the maximum acceleration rate obtainable at wide open throttle while the vehicle is in gear due to abnormal conditions such as slipping of a clutch). The Administrator may approve misfire monitoring disablement or use of an alternate malfunction criterion for any other condition on a case by case basis upon determining that the manufacturer has demonstrated that the request is based on an unusual or unforeseen circumstance and that it is applying the best available computer and monitoring technology.
(E) For engines with more than eight cylinders that cannot meet the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iii)(A) of this section, a manufacturer may use alternative misfire monitoring conditions. Such use must be based on data and/or an engineering evaluation submitted by the manufacturer that demonstrate that misfire detection throughout the required operating region cannot be achieved when employing proven monitoring technology (i.e., a technology that provides for compliance with these requirements on other engines) and provided misfire is detected to the fullest extent permitted by the technology. However, the misfire detection system must still monitor during all positive torque operating conditions encountered during an FTP cycle.
(iv) MIL activation and DTC storage for engine misfire causing catalyst damage—(A) Pending DTCs. A pending DTC must be stored immediately if, during a single drive cycle, the specified misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(A) of this section is exceeded three times when operating in the positive torque region encountered during a FTP cycle or is exceeded on a single occasion when operating at any other engine speed and load condition in the positive torque region defined in paragraph (h)(2)(iii)(A) of this section. Immediately after a pending DTC is stored pursuant to this paragraph, the MIL must blink once per second at all times during the drive cycle that engine misfire is occurring. The MIL may be deactivated during those times that misfire is not occurring. If, at the time that a catalyst damaging misfire malfunction occurs, the MIL is already activated for a malfunction other than misfire, the MIL must still blink once per second at all times during the drive cycle that engine misfire is occurring. If misfire ceases, the MIL must stop blinking but remain activated as appropriate in accordance with the other malfunction.
(B) MIL-on DTCs. If a pending DTC is stored in accordance with paragraph (h)(2)(iv)(A) of this section, the OBD system must immediately store a MIL-on DTC if the percentage of misfire described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(A) of this section is again exceeded one or more times during either the drive cycle immediately following storage of the pending DTC, regardless of the conditions encountered during that drive cycle, or on the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that occurred when the pending DTC was stored. If, during a previous drive cycle, a pending DTC is stored in accordance with paragraph (h)(2)(iv)(A) of this section, a MIL-on DTC must be stored immediately upon exceeding the percentage misfire described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(A) of this section regardless of the conditions encountered. Upon storage of a MIL-on DTC, the MIL must blink once per second at all times during the drive cycle that engine misfire is occurring. If misfire ceases, the MIL must stop blinking but remain activated until the conditions are met for extinguishing the MIL.
(C) Erasure of pending DTCs. Pending DTCs stored in accordance with paragraph (h)(2)(iv)(A) of this section must be erased at the end of the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that occurred when the pending DTC was stored provided no exceedances have been detected of the misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(A) of this section. The pending DTC may also be erased if similar conditions are not encountered during the next 80 drive cycles immediately following storage of the pending DTC.
(D) Exemptions for engines with fuel shutoff and default fuel control. In engines that provide for fuel shutoff and default fuel control to prevent over fueling during catalyst damaging misfire conditions, the MIL need not blink as required by paragraphs (h)(2)(iv)(A) and (h)(2)(iv)(B) of this section. Instead, the MIL may be activated continuously upon misfire detection provided that the fuel shutoff and default fuel control are activated immediately upon misfire detection. Fuel shutoff and default fuel control may be deactivated only when the engine is outside of the misfire range except that the manufacturer may periodically, but not more than once every 30 seconds, deactivate fuel shutoff and default fuel control to determine if the catalyst damaging misfire is still occurring. Normal fueling and fuel control may be resumed if the catalyst damaging misfire is no longer occurring.
(E) The manufacturer may use a strategy that activates the MIL continuously rather than blinking the MIL during extreme catalyst damage misfire conditions (i.e., catalyst damage misfire occurring at all engine speeds and loads). Use of such a strategy must be limited to catalyst damage misfire levels that cannot be avoided during reasonable driving conditions. To use such a strategy, the manufacturer must be able to demonstrate that the strategy will encourage operation of the vehicle in conditions that will minimize catalyst damage (e.g., at low engine speeds and loads).
(v) MIL activation and DTC storage for engine misfire causing emissions to exceed applicable emissions thresholds. (A) Immediately upon detection, during the first 1000 revolutions after engine start of the misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, a pending DTC must be stored. If such a pending DTC is stored already and another such exceedance of the misfire percentage is detected within the first 1000 revolutions after engine start on any subsequent drive cycle, the MIL must activate and a MIL-on DTC must be stored. The pending DTC may be erased if, at the end of the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that occurred when the pending DTC was stored, there has been no exceedance of the misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. The pending DTC may also be erased if similar conditions are not encountered during the next 80 drive cycles immediately following storage of the pending DTC.
(B) No later than the fourth detection during a single drive cycle, following the first 1000 revolutions after engine start of the misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, a pending DTC must be stored. If such a pending DTC is stored already, then the MIL must activate and a MIL-on DTC must be stored within 10 seconds of the fourth detection of the misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section during either the drive cycle immediately following storage of the pending DTC, regardless of the conditions encountered during that drive cycle excepting those conditions within the first 1000 revolutions after engine start, or on the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that occurred when the pending DTC was stored excepting those conditions within the first 1000 revolutions after engine start. The pending DTC may be erased if, at the end of the next drive cycle in which similar conditions are encountered to those that occurred when the pending DTC was stored, there has been no exceedance of the misfire percentage described in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. The pending DTC may also be erased if similar conditions are not encountered during the next 80 drive cycles immediately following storage of the pending DTC.
(vi) Storage of freeze frame conditions for engine misfire. (A) The OBD system must store and erase freeze frame conditions (as defined in paragraph (k)(4)(iii) of this section) either in conjunction with storing and erasing a pending DTC or in conjunction with storing and erasing a MIL-on DTC.
(B) If, upon storage of a DTC as required by paragraphs (h)(2)(iv) and (h)(2)(v) of this section, there already exist stored freeze frame conditions for a malfunction other than a misfire or fuel system malfunction (see paragraph (h)(1) of this section) then the stored freeze frame information shall be replaced with freeze frame information associated with the misfire malfunction.
(vii) Storage of engine conditions in association with engine misfire. Upon detection of the misfire percentages described in paragraphs (h)(2)(ii)(A) and (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, the following engine conditions must be stored for use in determining similar conditions: Engine speed, load, and warm up status of the first misfire event that resulted in pending DTC storage.
(viii) MIL deactivation in association with engine misfire. The MIL may be deactivated after three sequential drive cycles in which similar conditions have been encountered without an exceedance of the misfire percentages described in paragraphs (h)(2)(ii)(A) and (h)(2)(ii)(B) of this section.
(3) Exhaust gas recirculation system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the EGR system on engines so equipped for low and high flow rate malfunctions. The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors) that are used in the EGR system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive component requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) EGR system malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the EGR system prior to a decrease from the manufacturer’s specified EGR flow rate that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the EGR system that causes a decrease in flow could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has no detectable amount of EGR flow.
(B) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the EGR system prior to an increase from the manufacturer’s specified EGR flow rate that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h). For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the EGR system that causes an increase in flow could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the system has reached its control limits such that it cannot reduce EGR flow.
(iii) EGR system monitoring conditions. (A) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(3)(ii) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(3)(ii) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(B) The manufacturer may disable temporarily the EGR monitor under conditions when monitoring may not be reliable (e.g., when freezing may affect performance of the system). To do so, the manufacturer must be able to demonstrate that the monitor is unreliable when such conditions exist.
(iv) EGR system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(4) Cold start emission reduction strategy monitoring—(i) General. If an engine incorporates a specific engine control strategy to reduce cold start emissions, the OBD system must monitor the key components (e.g., idle air control valve), other than secondary air, while the control strategy is active to ensure proper operation of the control strategy.
(ii) Cold start strategy malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration of the individual components associated with the cold start emission reduction control strategy that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h). The manufacturer must establish the malfunction criteria based on data from one or more representative engine(s) and provide an engineering evaluation for establishing the malfunction criteria for the remainder of the manufacturer’s product line.
(B) Where no failure or deterioration of a component used for the cold start emission reduction strategy could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the individual component must be monitored for proper functional response while the control strategy is active in accordance with the malfunction criteria in paragraphs (i)(3)(ii) and (i)(3)(iii) of this section.
(iii) Cold start strategy monitoring conditions. The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(4)(ii) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(iv) Cold start strategy MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(5) Secondary air system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system on engines equipped with any form of secondary air delivery system must monitor the proper functioning of the secondary air delivery system including all air switching valve(s). The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors) that are used in the secondary air system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive component requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section. For purposes of this paragraph (h)(5), “air flow” is defined as the air flow delivered by the secondary air system to the exhaust system. For engines using secondary air systems with multiple air flow paths/distribution points, the air flow to each bank (i.e., a group of cylinders that share a common exhaust manifold, catalyst, and control sensor) must be monitored in accordance with the malfunction criteria in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this section. Also for purposes of this paragraph (h)(5), “normal operation” is defined as the condition when the secondary air system is activated during catalyst and/or engine warm-up following engine start. “Normal operation” does not include the condition when the secondary air system is turned on intrusively for the sole purpose of monitoring.
(ii) Secondary air system malfunction criteria. (A) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(5)(ii)(C) of this section, the OBD system must detect a secondary air system malfunction prior to a decrease from the manufacturer’s specified air flow during normal operation that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(B) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(5)(ii)(C) of this section, the OBD system must detect a secondary air system malfunction prior to an increase from the manufacturer’s specified air flow during normal operation that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(C) For engines in which no deterioration or failure of the secondary air system would result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when no detectable amount of air flow is delivered by the secondary air system during normal operation.
(iii) Secondary air system monitoring conditions. The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(iv) Secondary air system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(6) Catalyst system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the catalyst system for proper conversion capability.
(ii) Catalyst system malfunction criteria. The OBD system must detect a catalyst system malfunction when the catalyst system’s conversion capability decreases to the point that emissions exceed the emissions thresholds for the catalyst system as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(iii) Catalyst system monitoring conditions. The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(6)(ii) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(6)(ii) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(iv) Catalyst system MIL activation and DTC storage. (A) The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(B) The monitoring method for the catalyst system must be capable of detecting when a catalyst DTC has been erased (except OBD system self erasure), but the catalyst has not been replaced (e.g., catalyst overtemperature histogram approaches are not acceptable).
(7) Evaporative system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must verify purge flow from the evaporative system and monitor the complete evaporative system, excluding the tubing and connections between the purge valve and the intake manifold, for vapor leaks to the atmosphere. Individual components of the evaporative system (e.g. valves, sensors) must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive components requirements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
(ii) Evaporative system malfunction criteria—(A) Purge monitor. The OBD system must detect an evaporative system malfunction when no purge flow from the evaporative system to the engine can be detected by the OBD system.
(B) Leak monitor. The OBD system must detect an evaporative system malfunction when the complete evaporative system contains a leak or leaks that cumulatively are greater than or equal to a leak caused by a 0.150 inch diameter hole.
(C) The manufacturer may demonstrate that detection of a larger hole is more appropriate than that specified in paragraph (h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section. To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate through data and/or engineering analyses that holes smaller than the proposed detection size would not result in evaporative or running loss emissions that exceed 1.5 times the applicable evaporative emissions standards. Upon such a demonstration, the proposed detection size could be substituted for the requirement of paragraph (h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section.
(iii) Evaporative system monitoring conditions. (A) The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(7)(ii)(A) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(B) The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(C) The manufacturer may disable or abort an evaporative system monitor when the fuel tank level is over 85 percent of nominal tank capacity or during a refueling event.
(D) The manufacturer may request Administrator approval to run the evaporative system monitor during only those drive cycles characterized as cold starts provided such a condition is needed to ensure reliable monitoring. In making the request, the manufacturer must demonstrate through data and/or engineering analyses that a reliable monitor can only be run on drive cycles that begin with a specific set of cold start criteria. A set of cold start criteria based solely on ambient temperature exceeding engine coolant temperature will not be acceptable.
(E) The OBD system may disable temporarily the evaporative purge system to run an evaporative system leak monitor.
(iv) Evaporative system MIL activation and DTC storage. (A) Except as provided for in paragraph (h)(7)(iv)(B) of this section, the MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(B) If the OBD system is capable of discerning that a system leak is being caused by a missing or improperly secured gas cap, the OBD system need not activate the MIL or store a DTC provided the vehicle is equipped with an alternative indicator for notifying the operator of the gas cap problem. The alternative indicator must be of sufficient illumination and location to be readily visible under all lighting conditions. If the vehicle is not equipped with such an alternative indicator, the MIL must activate and a DTC be stored as required in paragraph (h)(7)(iv)(A) of this section; however, these may be deactivated and erased, respectively, if the OBD system determines that the gas cap problem has been corrected and the MIL has not been activated for any other malfunction. The Administrator may approve other strategies that provide equivalent assurance that a vehicle operator will be notified promptly of a missing or improperly secured gas cap and that corrective action will be undertaken.
(8) Exhaust gas sensor monitoring—(i) General. (A) The OBD system must monitor for malfunctions the output signal, response rate, and any other parameter that can affect emissions of all primary (i.e., fuel control) exhaust gas sensors (e.g., oxygen, wide-range air/fuel). Both the lean-to-rich and rich-to-lean response rates must be monitored.
(B) The OBD system must also monitor all secondary exhaust gas sensors (those used for secondary fuel trim control or as a monitoring device) for proper output signal, activity, and response rate.
(C) For engines equipped with heated exhaust gas sensor, the OBD system must monitor the heater for proper performance.
(ii) Primary exhaust gas sensor malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration of the exhaust gas sensor output voltage, resistance, impedance, current, response rate, amplitude, offset, or other characteristic(s) (including drift or bias corrected for by secondary sensors) that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(B) The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the exhaust gas sensor caused by either a lack of circuit continuity or out-of-range values.
(C) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the exhaust gas sensor when a sensor failure or deterioration causes the fuel system to stop using that sensor as a feedback input (e.g., causes default or open-loop operation).
(D) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the exhaust gas sensor when the sensor output voltage, resistance, impedance, current, amplitude, activity, or other characteristics are no longer sufficient for use as an OBD system monitoring device (e.g., for catalyst monitoring).
(iii) Secondary exhaust gas sensor malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration of the exhaust gas sensor voltage, resistance, impedance, current, response rate, amplitude, offset, or other characteristic(s) that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emissions thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(B) The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the exhaust gas sensor caused by a lack of circuit continuity.
(C) To the extent feasible, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the exhaust gas sensor when the sensor output voltage, resistance, impedance, current, amplitude, activity, offset, or other characteristics are no longer sufficient for use as an OBD system monitoring device (e.g., for catalyst monitoring).
(D) The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the exhaust gas sensor caused by out-of-range values.
(E) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the exhaust gas sensor when a sensor failure or deterioration causes the fuel system (e.g., fuel control) to stop using that sensor as a feedback input (e.g., causes default or open-loop operation).
(iv) Exhaust gas sensor heater malfunction criteria. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of the heater performance when the current or voltage drop in the heater circuit is no longer within the manufacturer’s specified limits for normal operation (i.e., within the criteria required to be met by the component vendor for heater circuit performance at high mileage). Other malfunction criteria for heater performance malfunctions may be used upon demonstrating via data or engineering analyses that the monitoring reliability and timeliness is equivalent to the stated criteria in this paragraph (h)(8)(iv)(A).
(B) The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the heater circuit including open or short circuits that conflict with the commanded state of the heater (e.g., shorted to 12 Volts when commanded to 0 Volts (ground)).
(v) Primary exhaust gas sensor monitoring conditions. (A) The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (h)(8)(ii)(A) and (h)(8)(ii)(D) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraphs (h)(8)(ii)(A) and (h)(8)(ii)(D) of this section must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(B) Except as provided for in paragraph (h)(8)(v)(C) of this section, monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (h)(8)(ii)(B) and (h)(8)(ii)(C) of this section must be conducted continuously.
(C) The manufacturer may disable continuous primary exhaust gas sensor monitoring when a primary exhaust gas sensor malfunction cannot be distinguished from other effects (e.g., disable out-of-range low monitoring during fuel cut conditions). To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate via data or engineering analyses that a properly functioning sensor cannot be distinguished from a malfunctioning sensor and that the disablement interval is limited only to that necessary for avoiding false detection.
(vi) Secondary exhaust gas sensor monitoring conditions. (A) The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (h)(8)(iii)(A) through (h)(8)(iii)(C) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(B) Except as provided for in paragraph (h)(8)(vi)(C) of this section, monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (h)(8)(iii)(D) and (h)(8)(iii)(E) of this section must be conducted continuously.
(C) The manufacturer may disable continuous secondary exhaust gas sensor monitoring when a secondary exhaust gas sensor malfunction cannot be distinguished from other effects (e.g., disable out-of-range low monitoring during fuel cut conditions). To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate via data or engineering analyses that a properly functioning sensor cannot be distinguished from a malfunctioning sensor and that the disablement interval is limited only to that necessary for avoiding false detection.
(vii) Exhaust gas sensor heater monitoring conditions. (A) The manufacturer must define monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(8)(iv)(A) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(B) Monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(8)(iv)(B) of this section must be conducted continuously.
(viii) Exhaust gas sensor MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(9) Variable valve timing (VVT) system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the VVT system on engines so equipped for target error and slow response malfunctions. The individual electronic components (e.g., actuators, valves, sensors) that are used in the VVT system must be monitored in accordance with the comprehensive components requirements in paragraph (i)(3).
(ii) VVT system malfunction criteria—(A) VVT system target error. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration in the capability of the VVT system to achieve the commanded valve timing and/or control within a crank angle and/or lift tolerance that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emission thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(B) VVT slow response. The OBD system must detect a malfunction prior to any failure or deterioration in the capability of the VVT system to achieve the commanded valve timing and/or control within a manufacturer-specified time that would cause an engine’s emissions to exceed the emission thresholds for “other monitors” as shown in Table 2 of this paragraph (h).
(C) For engines in which no failure or deterioration of the VVT system could result in an engine’s emissions exceeding the applicable emissions thresholds of paragraphs (h)(9)(ii)(A) and (h)(9)(ii)(B) of this section, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the VVT system when proper functional response of the system to computer commands does not occur.
(iii) VVT system monitoring conditions. Manufacturers must define the monitoring conditions for VVT system malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(9)(ii) in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that monitoring must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For purposes of tracking and reporting as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, all monitors used to detect malfunctions identified in paragraph (h)(9)(ii) must be tracked separately but reported as a single set of values as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
(iv) VVT MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(i) OBD monitoring requirements for all engines—(1) Engine cooling system monitoring—(i) General. (A) The OBD system must monitor the thermostat on engines so equipped for proper operation.
(B) The OBD system must monitor the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor for electrical circuit continuity, out-of-range values, and rationality malfunctions.
(C) For engines that use a system other than the cooling system and ECT sensor (e.g., oil temperature, cylinder head temperature) to determine engine operating temperature for emission control purposes (e.g., to modify spark or fuel injection timing or quantity), the manufacturer may forego cooling system monitoring and instead monitor the components or systems used in their approach. To do so, the manufacturer must to submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that their monitoring plan is as reliable and effective as the monitoring required in this paragraph (i)(1).
(ii) Malfunction criteria for the thermostat. (A) The OBD system must detect a thermostat malfunction if, within the manufacturer specified time interval following engine start, any of the following conditions occur: The coolant temperature does not reach the highest temperature required by the OBD system to enable other diagnostics; and, the coolant temperature does not reach a warmed-up temperature within 20 degrees Fahrenheit of the manufacturer’s nominal thermostat regulating temperature. For the second of these two conditions, the manufacturer may use a lower temperature for this criterion if either the manufacturer can demonstrate that the fuel, spark timing, and/or other coolant temperature-based modification to the engine control strategies would not cause an emissions increase greater than or equal to 50 percent of any of the applicable emissions standards; or, ambient air temperature is between 20 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 degrees Fahrenheit in which case, upon Administrator approval, the minimum coolant temperature required to be reached may be decreased based on the ambient air temperature.
(B) With Administrator approval, the manufacturer may use alternative malfunction criteria to those of paragraph (i)(1)(ii)(A) of this section and/or alternative monitoring conditions to those of paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section that are a function of temperature at engine start on engines that do not reach the temperatures specified in the malfunction criteria when the thermostat is functioning properly. To do so, the manufacturer is required to submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that a properly operating system does not reach the specified temperatures and that the possibility is minimized for cooling system malfunctions to go undetected thus disabling other OBD monitors.
(C) The manufacturer may request Administrator approval to forego monitoring of the thermostat if the manufacturer can demonstrate that a malfunctioning thermostat cannot cause a measurable increase in emissions during any reasonable driving condition nor cause any disablement of other OBD monitors.
(iii) Malfunction criteria for the ECT sensor—(A) Circuit integrity. The OBD system must detect malfunctions of the ECT sensor related to a lack of circuit continuity or out-of-range values.
(B) Time to reach closed-loop/feedback enable temperature. The OBD system must detect if, within the manufacturer specified time interval following engine start, the ECT sensor does not achieve the highest stabilized minimum temperature that is needed to initiate closed-loop/feedback control of all affected emission control systems (e.g., fuel system, EGR system). The manufacturer specified time interval must be a function of the engine coolant temperature and/or intake air temperature at startup. The manufacturer time interval must be supported by data and/or engineering analyses demonstrating that it provides robust monitoring and minimizes the likelihood of other OBD monitors being disabled. The manufacturer may forego the requirements of this paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(B) provided the manufacturer does not use engine coolant temperature or the ECT sensor to enable closed-loop/feedback control of any emission control systems.
(C) Stuck in range below the highest minimum enable temperature. To the extent feasible when using all available information, the OBD system must detect a malfunction if the ECT sensor inappropriately indicates a temperature below the highest minimum enable temperature required by the OBD system to enable other monitors (e.g., an OBD system that requires ECT to be greater than 140 degrees Fahrenheit to enable a diagnostic must detect malfunctions that cause the ECT sensor to inappropriately indicate a temperature below 140 degrees Fahrenheit). The manufacturer may forego this requirement for temperature regions in which the monitors required under paragraphs (i)(1)(ii) or (i)(1)(iii)(B) of this section will detect ECT sensor malfunctions as defined in this paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(C).
(D) Stuck in range above the lowest maximum enable temperature. The OBD system must detect a malfunction if the ECT sensor inappropriately indicates a temperature above the lowest maximum enable temperature required by the OBD system to enable other monitors (e.g., an OBD system that requires an engine coolant temperature less than 90 degrees Fahrenheit at startup prior to enabling an OBD monitor must detect malfunctions that cause the ECT sensor to indicate inappropriately a temperature above 90 degrees Fahrenheit). The manufacturer may forego this requirement within temperature regions in which the monitors required under paragraphs (i)(1)(ii), (i)(1)(iii)(B), (i)(1)(iii)(C) of this section will detect ECT sensor malfunctions as defined in this paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(D) or in which the MIL will be activated according to the provisions of paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section. The manufacturer may also forego this monitoring within temperature regions where a temperature gauge on the instrument panel indicates a temperature in the “red zone” (engine overheating zone) and displays the same temperature information as used by the OBD system.
(iv) Monitoring conditions for the thermostat. (A) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (i)(1)(ii)(A) of this section in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. Additionally, except as provided for in paragraphs (i)(1)(iv)(B) and (i)(1)(iv)(C) of this section, monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraph (i)(1)(ii)(A) of this section must be conducted once per drive cycle on every drive cycle in which the ECT sensor indicates, at engine start, a temperature lower than the temperature established as the malfunction criteria in paragraph (i)(1)(ii)(A) of this section.
(B) The manufacturer may disable thermostat monitoring at ambient engine start temperatures below 20 degrees Fahrenheit.
(C) The manufacturers may request Administrator approval to suspend or disable thermostat monitoring if the engine is subjected to conditions that could lead to false diagnosis. To do so, the manufacturer must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that the suspension or disablement is necessary. In general, the manufacturer will not be allowed to suspend or disable the thermostat monitor on engine starts where the engine coolant temperature at engine start is more than 35 degrees Fahrenheit lower than the thermostat malfunction threshold temperature determined under paragraph (i)(1)(ii)(A) of this section.
(v) Monitoring conditions for the ECT sensor. (A) Except as provided for in paragraph (i)(1)(v)(D) of this section, the OBD system must monitor continuously for malfunctions identified in paragraph monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) of this section (i.e., circuit integrity and out-of-range).
(B) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(B) of this section in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. Additionally, except as provided for in paragraph (i)(1)(v)(D) of this section, monitoring for malfunctions identified in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(B) of this section must be conducted once per drive cycle on every drive cycle in which the ECT sensor indicates a temperature lower than the closed-loop enable temperature at engine start (i.e., all engine start temperatures greater than the ECT sensor out-of-range low temperature and less than the closed-loop enable temperature).
(C) The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraphs (i)(1)(iii)(C) and (i)(1)(iii)(D) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(D) The manufacturer may suspend or delay the monitor for the time to reach closed-loop enable temperature if the engine is subjected to conditions that could lead to false diagnosis (e.g., vehicle operation at idle for more than 50 to 75 percent of the warm-up time).
(E) The manufacturer may request Administrator approval to disable continuous ECT sensor monitoring when an ECT sensor malfunction cannot be distinguished from other effects. To do so, the manufacturer must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate a properly functioning sensor cannot be distinguished from a malfunctioning sensor and that the disablement interval is limited only to that necessary for avoiding false detection.
(vi) Engine cooling system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) Crankcase ventilation (CV) system monitoring—(i) General. The OBD system must monitor the CV system on engines so equipped for system integrity. Engines not required to be equipped with CV systems are exempt from monitoring the CV system. For diesel engines, the manufacturer must submit a plan for Administrator approval prior to OBD certification. That plan must include descriptions of the monitoring strategy, malfunction criteria, and monitoring conditions for CV system monitoring. The plan must demonstrate that the CV system monitor is of equivalent effectiveness, to the extent feasible, to the malfunction criteria and the monitoring conditions of this paragraph (i)(2).
(ii) Crankcase ventilation system malfunction criteria. (A) For the purposes of this paragraph (i)(2), “CV system” is defined as any form of crankcase ventilation system, regardless of whether it utilizes positive pressure. “CV valve” is defined as any form of valve or orifice used to restrict or control crankcase vapor flow. Further, any additional external CV system tubing or hoses used to equalize crankcase pressure or to provide a ventilation path between various areas of the engine (e.g., crankcase and valve cover) are considered part of the CV system “between the crankcase and the CV valve” and subject to the malfunction criteria in paragraph (i)(2)(ii)(B) of this section.
(B) Except as provided for in paragraphs (i)(2)(ii)(C) through (i)(2)(ii)(E) of this section, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of the CV system when a disconnection of the system occurs between either the crankcase and the CV valve, or between the CV valve and the intake manifold.
(C) The manufacturer may forego monitoring for a disconnection between the crankcase and the CV valve provided the CV system is designed such that the CV valve is fastened directly to the crankcase such that it is significantly more difficult to remove the CV valve from the crankcase than to disconnect the line between the CV valve and the intake manifold (taking aging effects into consideration). To do so, the manufacturer must be able to provide data and/or an engineering evaluation demonstrating that the CV system is so designed.
(D) The manufacturer may forego monitoring for a disconnection between the crankcase and the CV valve provided the CV system is designed such that it uses tubing connections between the CV valve and the crankcase that are: resistant to deterioration or accidental disconnection; significantly more difficult to disconnect than is the line between the CV valve and the intake manifold; and, not subject to disconnection per the manufacturer’s repair procedures for any non-CV system repair. To do so, the manufacturer must be able to provide data and/or engineering evaluation demonstrating that the CV system is so designed.
(E) The manufacturer may forego monitoring for a disconnection between the CV valve and the intake manifold provided the CV system is designed such that any disconnection either causes the engine to stall immediately during idle operation, or is unlikely to occur due to a CV system design that is integral to the induction system (e.g., machined passages rather than tubing or hoses). To do so, the manufacturer must be able to provide data and/or an engineering evaluation demonstrating that the CV system is so designed.
(iii) Crankcase ventilation system monitoring conditions. The manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for malfunctions identified in paragraph (i)(2) of this section in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(iv) Crankcase ventilation system MIL activation and DTC storage. The MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section. The stored DTC need not identify specifically the CV system (e.g., a DTC for idle speed control or fuel system monitoring can be stored) if the manufacturer can demonstrate that additional monitoring hardware is necessary to make such an identification and provided the manufacturer’s diagnostic and repair procedures for the detected malfunction include directions to check the integrity of the CV system.
(3) Comprehensive component monitoring—(i) General. Except as provided for in paragraph (i)(4) of this section, the OBD system must detect a malfunction of any electronic engine component or system not otherwise described in paragraphs (g), (h), (i)(1), and (i)(2) of this section that either provides input to (directly or indirectly, such components may include the crank angle sensor, knock sensor, throttle position sensor, cam position sensor, intake air temperature sensor, boost pressure sensor, manifold pressure sensor, mass air flow sensor, exhaust temperature sensor, exhaust pressure sensor, fuel pressure sensor, fuel composition sensor of a flexible fuel vehicle, etc.) or receives commands from (such components or systems may include the idle speed control system, glow plug system, variable length intake manifold runner systems, supercharger or turbocharger electronic components, heated fuel preparation systems, the wait-to-start lamp on diesel applications, the MIL, etc.) the onboard computer(s) and meets either of the criteria described in paragraphs (i)(3)(i)(A) and/or (i)(3)(i)(B) of this section. Note that, for the purposes of this paragraph (i)(3), “electronic engine component or system” does not include components that are driven by the engine and are not related to the control of the fueling, air handling, or emissions of the engine (e.g., PTO components, air conditioning system components, and power steering components).
(A) It can cause emissions to exceed applicable emission standards. To preclude monitoring, the manufacturer must be able to provide emission data showing that the component or system, when malfunctioning and installed on a suitable test engine, does not cause emissions to exceed the emission standards.
(B) It is used as part of the monitoring strategy for any other monitored system or component.
(ii) Comprehensive component malfunction criteria for input components. (A) The OBD system must detect malfunctions of input components caused by a lack of circuit continuity and out-of-range values. In addition, where feasible, rationality checks must also be done and shall verify that a sensor output is neither inappropriately high nor inappropriately low (i.e., “two-sided” monitoring).
(B) To the extent feasible, the OBD system must separately detect and store different DTCs that distinguish rationality malfunctions from lack of circuit continuity and out-of-range malfunctions. For lack of circuit continuity and out-of-range malfunctions, the OBD system must, to the extent feasible, separately detect and store different DTCs for each distinct malfunction (e.g., out-of-range low, out-of-range high, open circuit). The OBD system is not required to store separate DTCs for lack of circuit continuity malfunctions that cannot be distinguished from other out-of-range circuit malfunctions.
(C) For input components that are used to activate alternative strategies that can affect emissions (e.g., AECDs, engine shutdown systems), the OBD system must conduct rationality checks to detect malfunctions that cause the system to activate erroneously or deactivate the alternative strategy. To the extent feasible when using all available information, the rationality check must detect a malfunction if the input component inappropriately indicates a value that activates or deactivates the alternative strategy. For example, for an alternative strategy that activates when the intake air temperature is greater than 120 degrees Fahrenheit, the OBD system must detect malfunctions that cause the intake air temperature sensor to indicate inappropriately a temperature above 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
(D) For engines that require precise alignment between the camshaft and the crankshaft, the OBD system must monitor the crankshaft position sensor(s) and camshaft position sensor(s) to verify proper alignment between the camshaft and crankshaft in addition to monitoring the sensors for circuit continuity and proper rationality. Proper alignment monitoring between a camshaft and a crankshaft is required only in cases where both are equipped with position sensors. For engines equipped with VVT systems and a timing belt or chain, the OBD system must detect a malfunction if the alignment between the camshaft and crankshaft is off by one or more cam/crank sprocket cogs (e.g., the timing belt/chain has slipped by one or more teeth/cogs). If a manufacturer demonstrates that a single tooth/cog misalignment cannot cause a measurable increase in emissions during any reasonable driving condition, the OBD system must detect a malfunction when the minimum number of teeth/cogs misalignment has occurred that does cause a measurable emission increase.
(iii) Comprehensive component malfunction criteria for output components/systems. (A) The OBD system must detect a malfunction of an output component/system when proper functional response does not occur in response to computer commands. If such a functional check is not feasible, the OBD system must detect malfunctions of output components/systems caused by a lack of circuit continuity or circuit malfunction (e.g., short to ground or high voltage). For output component lack of circuit continuity malfunctions and circuit malfunctions, the OBD system is not required to store different DTCs for each distinct malfunction (e.g., open circuit, shorted low). Manufacturers are not required to activate an output component/system when it would not normally be active for the sole purpose of performing a functional check of it as required in this paragraph (i)(3).
(B) For gasoline engines, the idle control system must be monitored for proper functional response to computer commands. For gasoline engines using monitoring strategies based on deviation from target idle speed, a malfunction must be detected when either of the following conditions occurs: The idle speed control system cannot achieve the target idle speed within 200 revolutions per minute (rpm) above the target speed or 100 rpm below the target speed; or, the idle speed control system cannot achieve the target idle speed within the smallest engine speed tolerance range required by the OBD system to enable any other monitors. Regarding the former of these conditions, the manufacturer may use larger engine speed tolerances. To do so, the manufacturer must be able to provide data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that the tolerances can be exceeded without a malfunction being present.
(C) For diesel engines, the idle control system must be monitored for proper functional response to computer commands. For diesel engines, a malfunction must be detected when either of the following conditions occurs: the idle fuel control system cannot achieve the target idle speed or fuel injection quantity within ±50 percent of the manufacturer-specified fuel quantity and engine speed tolerances; or, the idle fuel control system cannot achieve the target idle speed or fueling quantity within the smallest engine speed or fueling quantity tolerance range required by the OBD system to enable any other monitors.
(D) For model years 2010 through 2012, glow plugs must be monitored for circuit continuity malfunctions. For model years 2010 and later, intake air heater systems and, for model years 2013 and later, glow plugs must be monitored for proper functional response to computer commands and for circuit continuity malfunctions. The glow plug/intake air heater circuit(s) must be monitored for proper current and voltage drop. The manufacturer may use other monitoring strategies but must be able to provide data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate reliable and timely detection of malfunctions. The OBD system must also detect a malfunction when a single glow plug no longer operates within the manufacturer’s specified limits for normal operation. If a manufacturer can demonstrate that a single glow plug malfunction cannot cause a measurable increase in emissions during any reasonable driving condition, the OBD system must instead detect a malfunction when the number of glow plugs needed to cause an emission increase is malfunctioning. To the extent feasible, the stored DTC must identify the specific malfunctioning glow plug(s).
(E) The wait-to-start lamp circuit and the MIL circuit must be monitored for malfunctions that cause either lamp to fail to activate when commanded to do so (e.g., burned out bulb). This monitoring of the wait-to-start lamp circuit and the MIL circuit is not required for wait-to-start lamps and MILs using light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
(iv) Monitoring conditions for input components. (A) The OBD system must monitor input components continuously for out-of-range values and circuit continuity. The manufacturer may disable continuous monitoring for circuit continuity and out-of-range values when a malfunction cannot be distinguished from other effects. To do so, the manufacturer must be able to provide data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that a properly functioning input component cannot be distinguished from a malfunctioning input component and that the disablement interval is limited only to that necessary for avoiding false malfunction detection.
(B) For input component rationality checks (where applicable), the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for detecting malfunctions in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that rationality checks must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(v) Monitoring conditions for output components/systems. (A) The OBD system must monitor output components/systems continuously for circuit continuity and circuit malfunctions. The manufacturer may disable continuous monitoring for circuit continuity and circuit malfunctions when a malfunction cannot be distinguished from other effects. To do so, the manufacturer must be able to provide data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that a properly functioning output component/system cannot be distinguished from a malfunctioning one and that the disablement interval is limited only to that necessary for avoiding false malfunction detection.
(B) For output component/system functional checks, the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for detecting malfunctions in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section. Specifically for the idle control system, the manufacturer must define the monitoring conditions for detecting malfunctions in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, with the exception that functional checks must occur every time the monitoring conditions are met during the drive cycle rather than once per drive cycle as required in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(vi) Comprehensive component MIL activation and DTC storage. (A) Except as provided for in paragraphs (i)(3)(vi)(B) and (i)(3)(vi)(C) of this section, the MIL must activate and DTCs must be stored according to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(B) The MIL need not be activated in conjunction with storing a MIL-on DTC for any comprehensive component if: the component or system, when malfunctioning, could not cause engine emissions to increase by 15 percent or more of the applicable FTP standard during any reasonable driving condition; or, the component or system is not used as part of the monitoring strategy for any other system or component that is required to be monitored.
(C) The MIL need not be activated if a malfunction has been detected in the MIL circuit that prevents the MIL from activating (e.g., burned out bulb or light-emitting diode, LED). Nonetheless, the electronic MIL status (see paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section) must be reported as MIL commanded-on and a MIL-on DTC must be stored.
(4) Other emission control system monitoring—(i) General. For other emission control systems that are either not addressed in paragraphs (g) through (i)(3) of this section (e.g., hydrocarbon traps, homogeneous charge compression ignition control systems), or addressed in paragraph (i)(3) of this section but not corrected or compensated for by an adaptive control system (e.g., swirl control valves), the manufacturer must submit a plan for Administrator approval of the monitoring strategy, malfunction criteria, and monitoring conditions prior to introduction on a production engine. The plan must demonstrate the effectiveness of the monitoring strategy, the malfunction criteria used, the monitoring conditions required by the monitor, and, if applicable, the determination that the requirements of paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this section are satisfied.
(ii) For engines that use emission control systems that alter intake air flow or cylinder charge characteristics by actuating valve(s), flap(s), etc., in the intake air delivery system (e.g., swirl control valve systems), the manufacturer, in addition to meeting the requirements of paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this section, may elect to have the OBD system monitor the shaft to which all valves in one intake bank are physically attached rather than performing a functional check of the intake air flow, cylinder charge, or individual valve(s)/flap(s). For non-metal shafts or segmented shafts, the monitor must verify all shaft segments for proper functional response (e.g., by verifying that the segment or portion of the shaft farthest from the actuator functions properly). For systems that have more than one shaft to operate valves in multiple intake banks, the manufacturer is not required to add more than one set of detection hardware (e.g., sensor, switch) per intake bank to meet this requirement.
(5) Exceptions to OBD monitoring requirements. (i) The Administrator may revise the PM filtering performance malfunction criteria for DPFs to exclude detection of specific failure modes such as partially melted substrates, if the most reliable monitoring method developed requires it.
(ii) The manufacturer may disable an OBD system monitor at ambient engine start temperatures below 20 degrees Fahrenheit (low ambient temperature conditions may be determined based on intake air or engine coolant temperature at engine start) or at elevations higher than 8,000 feet above sea level. To do so, the manufacturer must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that monitoring is unreliable during the disable conditions. A manufacturer may request that an OBD system monitor be disabled at other ambient engine start temperatures by submitting data and/or engineering analyses demonstrating that misdiagnosis would occur at the given ambient temperatures due to their effect on the component itself (e.g., component freezing).
(iii) The manufacturer may disable an OBD system monitor when the fuel level is 15 percent or less of the nominal fuel tank capacity for those monitors that can be affected by low fuel level or running out of fuel (e.g., misfire detection). To do so, the manufacturer must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that monitoring at the given fuel levels is unreliable, and that the OBD system is still able to detect a malfunction if the component(s) used to determine fuel level indicates erroneously a fuel level that causes the disablement.
(iv) The manufacturer may disable OBD monitors that can be affected by engine battery or system voltage levels.
(A) For an OBD monitor affected by low vehicle battery or system voltages, manufacturers may disable monitoring when the battery or system voltage is below 11.0 Volts. The manufacturer may use a voltage threshold higher than 11.0 Volts to disable monitors but must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that monitoring at those voltages is unreliable and that either operation of a vehicle below the disablement criteria for extended periods of time is unlikely or the OBD system monitors the battery or system voltage and will detect a malfunction at the voltage used to disable other monitors.
(B) For an OBD monitor affected by high engine battery or system voltages, the manufacturer may disable monitoring when the battery or system voltage exceeds a manufacturer-defined voltage. To do so, the manufacturer must submit data and/or engineering analyses that demonstrate that monitoring above the manufacturer-defined voltage is unreliable and that either the electrical charging system/alternator warning light will be activated (or voltage gauge would be in the “red zone”) or the OBD system monitors the battery or system voltage and will detect a malfunction at the voltage used to disable other monitors.
(v) The manufacturer may also disable affected OBD monitors in systems designed to accommodate the installation of power take off (PTO) units provided monitors are disabled only while the PTO unit is active and the OBD readiness status (see paragraph (k)(4)(i) of this section) is cleared by the onboard computer (i.e., all monitors set to indicate “not complete” or “not ready”) while the PTO unit is activated. If monitors are so disabled and when the disablement ends, the readiness status may be restored to its state prior to PTO activation.
(6) Feedback control system monitoring. If the engine is equipped with feedback control of any of the systems covered in paragraphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section, then the OBD system must detect as malfunctions the conditions specified in this paragraph (i)(6) for each of the individual feedback controls.
(i) The OBD system must detect when the system fails to begin feedback control within a manufacturer specified time interval.
(ii) When any malfunction or deterioration causes open loop or limp-home operation.
(iii) When feedback control has used up all of the adjustment allowed by the manufacturer.
(iv) A manufacturer may temporarily disable monitoring for malfunctions specified in paragraph (i)(6)(iii) of this section during conditions that the specific monitor cannot distinguish robustly between a malfunctioning system and a properly operating system. To do so, the manufacturer is required to submit data and/or engineering analyses demonstrating that the individual feedback control system, when operating as designed on an engine with all emission controls working properly, routinely operates during these conditions while having used up all of the adjustment allowed by the manufacturer. In lieu of detecting, with a system specific monitor, the malfunctions specified in paragraphs (i)(6)(i) and (i)(6)(ii) of this section the OBD system may monitor the individual parameters or components that are used as inputs for individual feedback control systems provided that the monitors detect all malfunctions that meet the criteria of paragraphs (i)(6)(i) and (i)(6)(ii) of this section.
(j) Production evaluation testing—(1) Verification of standardization requirements. (i) For model years 2013 and later, the manufacturer must perform testing to verify that production vehicles meet the requirements of paragraphs (k)(3) and (k)(4) of this section relevant to the proper communication of required emissions-related messages to a SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool.
(ii) Selection of test vehicles. (A) The manufacturer must perform this testing every model year on ten unique production vehicles (i.e., engine rating and chassis application combination) per engine family. If there are less than ten unique production vehicles for a certain engine family, the manufacturer must test each unique production vehicle in that engine family. The manufacturer must perform this testing within either three months of the start of engine production or one month of the start of vehicle production, whichever is later. The manufacturer may request approval to group multiple production vehicles together and test one representative vehicle per group. To do so, the software and hardware designed to comply with the standardization requirements of paragraph (k)(1) of this section (e.g., communication protocol message timing, number of supported data stream parameters, engine and vehicle communication network architecture) in the representative vehicle must be identical to all others in the group and any differences in the production vehicles cannot be relevant with respect to meeting the criteria of paragraph (j)(1)(iv) of this section.
(B) For 2016 and subsequent model years, the required number of vehicles to be tested shall be reduced to five per engine family provided zero vehicles fail the testing required by paragraph (j)(1) of this section for two consecutive years.
(C) For 2019 and subsequent model years, the required number of vehicles to be tested shall be reduced to three per engine family provided zero vehicles fail the testing required by paragraph (j)(1) of this section for three consecutive years.
(D) The requirement for submittal of data from one or more of the production vehicles shall be waived if data have been submitted previously for all of the production vehicles. The manufacturer may request approval to carry over data collected in previous model years. To do so, the software and hardware designed to comply with the standardization requirements of paragraph (k)(1) of this section must be identical to the previous model year and there must not have been other hardware or software changes that affect compliance with the standardization requirements.
(E) For hybrid engine families with projected U.S.-directed production volume of less than 5,000 engines, the manufacturers are only required to test one engine-hybrid combination per family.
(iii) Test equipment. For the testing required by paragraph (j)(1) of this section, the manufacturer shall use an off-board device to conduct the testing. The manufacturer must be able to show that the off-board device is able to verify that the vehicles tested using the device are able to perform all of the required functions in paragraph (j)(1)(iv) of this section with any other off-board device designed and built in accordance with the SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) generic scan tool specifications.
(iv) Required testing. The testing must verify that communication can be established properly between all emission-related on-board computers and a SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool designed to adhere strictly to the communication protocols allowed in paragraph (k)(3) of this section. The testing must also verify that all emission-related information is communicated properly between all emission-related on-board computers and a SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (k)(1) of this section and the applicable ISO and SAE specifications including specifications for physical layer, network layer, message structure, and message content. The testing must also verify that the onboard computer(s) can properly respond to a SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool request to clear emissions-related DTCs and reset the ready status in accordance with paragraph (k)(4)(ix) of this section. The testing must further verify that the following information can be properly communicated to a SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool:
(A) The current ready status from all onboard computers required to support ready status in accordance with SAE J1978 or SAE J1939-73 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) and paragraph (k)(4)(i) of this section in the key-on, engine-off position and while the engine is running.
(B) The MIL command status while a deactivated MIL is commanded and while an activated MIL is commanded in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) and paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section in the key-on, engine-off position and while the engine is running, and in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) and paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) of this section during the MIL functional check, if applicable, and, if applicable, (k)(4)(i)(C) of this section during the MIL ready status check while the engine is off.
(C) All data stream parameters required in paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) including, if applicable, the proper identification of each data stream parameter as supported in SAE J1979 (e.g., Mode/Service $01, PID $00).
(D) The CAL ID, CVN, and VIN as required by paragraphs (k)(4)(vi), (k)(4)(vii), and (k)(4)(viii) of this section and in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section).
(E) An emissions-related DTC (permanent, pending, MIL-on, previous-MIL-on) in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939-73 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) including the correct indication of the number of stored DTCs (e.g., Mode/Service $01, PID $01, Data A for SAE J1979 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section)) and paragraph (k)(4)(iv) of this section.
(v) Reporting of results. The manufacturer must submit to the Administrator the following, based on the results of the testing required by paragraph (j)(1)(iv) of this section:
(A) If a variant meets all the requirements of paragraph (j)(1)(iv) of this section, a statement specifying that the variant passed all the tests. Upon request from the Administrator, the detailed results of any such testing may have to be submitted.
(B) If any variant does not meet the requirements paragraph (j)(1)(iv) of this section, a written report detailing the problem(s) identified and the manufacturer’s proposed corrective action (if any) to remedy the problem(s). This report must be submitted within one month of testing the specific variant. The Administrator will consider the proposed remedy and, if in disagreement, will work with the manufacturer to propose an alternative remedy. Factors to be considered by the Administrator in considering the proposed remedy will include the severity of the problem(s), the ability of service technicians to access the required diagnostic information, the impact on equipment and tool manufacturers, and the amount of time prior to implementation of the proposed corrective action.
(vi) Alternative testing protocols. Manufacturers may request approval to use other testing protocols. To do so, the manufacturer must demonstrate that the alternative testing methods and equipment will provide an equivalent level of verification of compliance with the standardization requirements as is required by paragraph (j)(1) of this section.
(2) Verification of monitoring requirements. (i) Within either the first six months of the start of engine production or the first three months of the start of vehicle production, whichever is later, the manufacturer must conduct a complete evaluation of the OBD system of one or more production vehicles (test vehicles) and submit the results of the evaluation to the Administrator.
(ii) Selection of test vehicles. (A) For each engine selected for monitoring system demonstration in paragraph (l) of this section, the manufacturer must evaluate one production vehicle equipped with an engine from the same engine family and rating as the demonstration engine. The vehicle selection must be approved by the Administrator.
(B) If the manufacturer is required to test more than one test vehicle, the manufacturer may test an engine in lieu of a vehicle for all but one of the required test vehicles.
(C) The requirement for submittal of data from one or more of the test vehicles may be waived if data have been submitted previously for all of the engine ratings and variants.
(iii) Evaluation requirements. (A) The evaluation must demonstrate the ability of the OBD system on the selected test vehicle to detect a malfunction, activate the MIL, and, where applicable, store an appropriate DTC readable by a scan tool when a malfunction is present and the monitoring conditions have been satisfied for each individual monitor required by this section. For model years 2013 and later, the evaluation must demonstrate the ability of the OBD system on the selected test vehicle to detect a malfunction, activate the MIL, and, where applicable, store an appropriate DTC readable by a SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool when a malfunction is present and the monitoring conditions have been satisfied for each individual monitor required by this section.
(B) The evaluation must verify that the malfunction of any component used to enable another OBD monitor but that does not itself result in MIL activation (e.g., fuel level sensor) will not inhibit the ability of other OBD monitors to detect malfunctions properly.
(C) The evaluation must verify that the software used to track the numerator and denominator for the purpose of determining in-use monitoring frequency increments as required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(D) Malfunctions may be implanted mechanically or simulated electronically, but internal onboard computer hardware or software changes shall not be used to simulate malfunctions. For monitors that are required to indicate a malfunction before emissions exceed an emission threshold, manufacturers are not required to use malfunctioning components/systems set exactly at their malfunction criteria limits. Emission testing is not required to confirm that the malfunction is detected before the appropriate emission thresholds are exceeded.
(E) The manufacturer must submit a proposed test plan for approval prior to performing evaluation testing. The test plan must identify the method used to induce a malfunction for each monitor.
(F) If the demonstration of a specific monitor cannot be reasonably performed without causing physical damage to the test vehicle (e.g., onboard computer internal circuit malfunctions), the manufacturer may omit the specific demonstration.
(G) For evaluation of test vehicles selected in accordance with paragraph (j)(2)(ii) of this section, the manufacturer is not required to demonstrate monitors that were demonstrated prior to certification as required in paragraph (l) of this section.
(iv) The manufacturer must submit a report of the results of all testing conducted as required by paragraph (j)(2) of this section. The report must identify the method used to induce a malfunction in each monitor, the MIL activation status, and the DTC(s) stored.
(3) Verification of in-use monitoring performance ratios. (i) The manufacturer must collect and report in-use monitoring performance data representative of production vehicles (i.e., engine rating and chassis application combination). The manufacturer must collect and report the data to the Administrator within 12 months after the first production vehicle was first introduced into commerce.
(ii) The manufacturer must separate production vehicles into the monitoring performance groups and submit data that represents each of these groups. The groups shall be based on the following criteria:
(A) Emission control system architecture. All engines that use the same or similar emissions control system architecture (e.g., EGR with DPF and SCR; EGR with DPF and NO
(B) Vehicle application type. Within an emission architecture category, engines shall be separated into one of three vehicle application types: Engines intended primarily for line-haul chassis applications, engines intended primarily for urban delivery chassis applications, and all other engines.
(iii) The manufacturer may use an alternative grouping method to collect representative data. To do so, the manufacturer must show that the alternative groups include production vehicles using similar emission controls, OBD strategies, monitoring condition calibrations, and vehicle application driving/usage patterns such that they are expected to have similar in-use monitoring performance. The manufacturer will still be required to submit one set of data for each of the alternative groups.
(iv) For each monitoring performance group, the data must include all of the in-use performance tracking data (i.e., all numerators, denominators, the general denominator, and the ignition cycle counter), the date the data were collected, the odometer reading, the VIN, and the calibration ID. For model years 2013 and later, for each monitoring performance group, the data must include all of the in-use performance tracking data reported through SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section; i.e., all numerators, denominators, the general denominator, and the ignition cycle counter), the date the data were collected, the odometer reading, the VIN, and the calibration ID.
(v) The manufacturer must submit a plan to the Administrator that details the types of production vehicles in each monitoring performance group, the number of vehicles per group to be sampled, the sampling method, the timeline to collect the data, and the reporting format. The plan must provide for effective collection of data from, at least, 15 vehicles per monitoring performance group and provide for data that represent a broad range of temperature conditions. The plan shall not, by design, exclude or include specific vehicles in an attempt to collect data only from vehicles expected to have the highest in-use performance ratios.
(vi) The 12 month deadline for reporting may be extended to 18 months if the manufacturer can show that the delay is justified. In such a case, an interim report of progress to date must be submitted within the 12 month deadline.
(k) Standardization requirements—(1) Reference materials. The following documents are incorporated by reference, see § 86.1. Anyone may inspect copies at the U.S. EPA or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at U.S. EPA, NARA, or the standard making bodies directly, refer to § 86.1.
(i) SAE J1930, Revised April 2002.
(ii) SAE J1939, Revised October 2007.
(iii) SAE J1939-13, Revised March 2004, for model years 2013 and later.
(iv) SAE J1939-73, Revised September 2006.
(v) SAE J1962, Revised April 2002, for model years 2013 and later.
(vi) SAE J1978, Revised April 2002.
(vii) SAE J1979, Revised May 2007.
(viii) SAE J2012, Revised April 2002.
(ix) SAE J2403, Revised August 2007.
(x) ISO 15765-4:2005(E), January 15, 2005.
(2) Diagnostic connector. For model years 2010 through 2012, the manufacturer defined data link connector must be accessible to a trained service technician. For model years 2013 and later, a standard data link connector conforming to SAE J1962 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) or SAE J1939-13 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications (except as provided for in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) if this section) must be included in each vehicle.
(i) For model years 2013 and later, the connector must be located in the driver’s side foot-well region of the vehicle interior in the area bound by the driver’s side of the vehicle and the driver’s side edge of the center console (or the vehicle centerline if the vehicle does not have a center console) and at a location no higher than the bottom of the steering wheel when in the lowest adjustable position. The connector shall not be located on or in the center console (i.e., neither on the horizontal faces near the floor-mounted gear selector, parking brake lever, or cup-holders nor on the vertical faces near the car stereo, climate system, or navigation system controls). The location of the connector shall be capable of being easily identified and accessed (e.g., to connect an off-board tool). For vehicles equipped with a driver’s side door, the connector must be identified and accessed easily by someone standing (or “crouched”) on the ground outside the driver’s side of the vehicle with the driver’s side door open. The Administrator may approve an alternative location upon request from the manufacturer. In all cases, the installation position of the connector must be both identified and accessed easily by someone standing outside the vehicle and protected from accidental damage during normal vehicle use.
(ii) For model years 2013 and later, if the connector is covered, the cover must be removable by hand without the use of any tools and be labeled “OBD” to aid technicians in identifying the location of the connector. Access to the diagnostic connector shall not require opening or the removal of any storage accessory (e.g., ashtray, coinbox). The label must clearly identify that the connector is located behind the cover and is consistent with language and/or symbols commonly used in the automobile and/or heavy truck industry.
(iii) For model years 2013 and later, if the ISO 15765-4:2005(E) (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) communication protocol is used for the required OBD standardized functions, the connector must meet the “Type A” specifications of SAE J1962 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section). Any pins in the connector that provide electrical power must be properly fused to protect the integrity and usefulness of the connector for diagnostic purposes and shall not exceed 20.0 Volts DC regardless of the nominal vehicle system or battery voltage (e.g., 12V, 24V, 42V).
(iv) For model years 2013 and later, if the SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) protocol is used for the required OBD standardized functions, the connector must meet the specifications of SAE J1939-13 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section). Any pins in the connector that provide electrical power must be properly fused to protect the integrity and usefulness of the connector for diagnostic purposes.
(v) For model years 2013 and later, the manufacturer may equip engines/vehicles with additional diagnostic connectors for manufacturer-specific purposes (i.e., purposes other than the required OBD functions). However, if the additional connector conforms to the “Type A” specifications of SAE J1962 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) or the specifications of SAE J1939-13 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) and is located in the vehicle interior near the required connector as described in this paragraph (k)(2), the connector(s) must be labeled clearly to identify which connector is used to access the standardized OBD information required by paragraph (k) of this section.
(3) Communications to a scan tool. For model years 2013 and later, all OBD control modules (e.g., engine, auxiliary emission control module) on a single vehicle must use the same protocol for communication of required emission-related messages from on-board to off-board network communications to a scan tool meeting SAE J1978 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications or designed to communicate with an SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) network. Engine manufacturers shall not alter normal operation of the engine emission control system due to the presence of off-board test equipment accessing information required by this paragraph (k). The OBD system must use one of the following standardized protocols:
(i) ISO 15765-4:2005(E) (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section). All required emission-related messages using this protocol must use a 500 kbps baud rate.
(ii) SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section). This protocol may only be used on vehicles with diesel engines.
(4) Required emission related functions. The following functions must be implemented and must be accessible by, at a minimum, a manufacturer scan tool. For model years 2013 and later, the following standardized functions must be implemented in accordance with the specifications in SAE J1979 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) or SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) to allow for access to the required information by a scan tool meeting SAE J1978 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications or designed to communicate with an SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) network:
(i) Ready status. The OBD system must indicate, in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939-73 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications for model years 2013 and later, “complete” or “not complete” for each of the installed monitored components and systems identified in paragraphs (g), (h) with the exception of (h)(4), and (i)(3) of this section. All components or systems identified in paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(2), or (i)(3) of this section that are monitored continuously must always indicate “complete.” Components or systems that are not subject to being monitored continuously must immediately indicate “complete” upon the respective monitor(s) being executed fully and determining that the component or system is not malfunctioning. A component or system must also indicate “complete” if, after the requisite number of decisions necessary for determining MIL status has been executed fully, the monitor indicates a malfunction of the component or system. The status for each of the monitored components or systems must indicate “not complete” whenever diagnostic memory has been cleared or erased by a means other than that allowed in paragraph (b) of this section. Normal vehicle shut down (i.e., key-off/engine-off) shall not cause the status to indicate “not complete.”
(A) The manufacturer may request that the ready status for a monitor be set to indicate “complete” without the monitor having completed if monitoring is disabled for a multiple number of drive cycles due to the continued presence of extreme operating conditions (e.g., cold ambient temperatures, high altitudes). Any such request must specify the conditions for monitoring system disablement and the number of drive cycles that would pass without monitor completion before ready status would be indicated as “complete.”
(B) For the evaporative system monitor, the ready status must be set in accordance with this paragraph (k)(4)(i) when both the functional check of the purge valve and, if applicable, the leak detection monitor of the hole size specified in paragraph (h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section indicate that they are complete.
(C) If the manufacturer elects to indicate ready status through the MIL in the key-on/engine-off position as provided for in paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, the ready status must be indicated in the following manner: If the ready status for all monitored components or systems is “complete,” the MIL shall remain continuously activated in the key-on/engine-off position for at least 10-20 seconds. If the ready status for one or more of the monitored components or systems is “not complete,” after at least 5 seconds of operation in the key-on/engine-off position with the MIL activated continuously, the MIL shall blink once per second for 5-10 seconds. The data stream value for MIL status as required in paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section must indicate “commanded off” during this sequence unless the MIL has also been “commanded on” for a detected malfunction.
(ii) Data stream. For model years 2010 through 2012, the following signals must be made available on demand through the data link connector. For model years 2013 and later, the following signals must be made available on demand through the standardized data link connector in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications. The actual signal value must always be used instead of a limp home value. Data link signals may report an error state or other predefined status indicator if they are defined for those signals in the SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications.
(A) For gasoline engines. (1) Calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, engine speed, vehicle speed, and time elapsed since engine start.
(2) Absolute load, fuel level (if used to enable or disable any other monitors), barometric pressure (directly measured or estimated), engine control module system voltage, and commanded equivalence ratio.
(3) Number of stored MIL-on DTCs, catalyst temperature (if directly measured or estimated for purposes of enabling the catalyst monitor(s)), monitor status (i.e., disabled for the rest of this drive cycle, complete this drive cycle, or not complete this drive cycle) since last engine shut-off for each monitor used for ready status, distance traveled (or engine run time for engines not using vehicle speed information) while MIL activated, distance traveled (or engine run time for engines not using vehicle speed information) since DTC memory last erased, and number of warm-up cycles since DTC memory last erased, OBD requirements to which the engine is certified (e.g., California OBD, EPA OBD, European OBD, non-OBD) and MIL status (i.e., commanded-on or commanded-off).
(B) For diesel engines. (1) Calculated load (engine torque as a percentage of maximum torque available at the current engine speed), driver’s demand engine torque (as a percentage of maximum engine torque), actual engine torque (as a percentage of maximum engine torque), reference engine maximum torque, reference maximum engine torque as a function of engine speed (suspect parameter numbers (SPN) 539 through 543 defined by SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) within parameter group number (PGN) 65251 for engine configuration), engine coolant temperature, engine oil temperature (if used for emission control or any OBD monitors), engine speed, and time elapsed since engine start.
(2) Fuel level (if used to enable or disable any other monitors), vehicle speed (if used for emission control or any OBD monitors), barometric pressure (directly measured or estimated), and engine control module system voltage.
(3) Number of stored MIL-on DTCs, monitor status (i.e., disabled for the rest of this drive cycle, complete this drive cycle, or not complete this drive cycle) since last engine shut-off for each monitor used for ready status, distance traveled (or engine run time for engines not using vehicle speed information) while MIL activated, distance traveled (or engine run time for engines not using vehicle speed information) since DTC memory last erased, number of warm-up cycles since DTC memory last erased, OBD requirements to which the engine is certified (e.g., California OBD, EPA OBD, European OBD, non-OBD), and MIL status (i.e., commanded-on or commanded-off).
(4) NO
(5) For purposes of the calculated load and torque parameters in paragraph (k)(4)(ii)(B)(1) of this section, manufacturers must report the most accurate values that are calculated within the applicable electronic control unit (e.g., the engine control module). Most accurate, in this context, must be of sufficient accuracy, resolution, and filtering to be used for the purposes of in-use emission testing with the engine still in a vehicle (e.g., using portable emission measurement equipment).
(C) For all engines so equipped. (1) Absolute throttle position, relative throttle position, fuel control system status (e.g., open loop, closed loop), fuel trim, fuel pressure, ignition timing advance, fuel injection timing, intake air/manifold temperature, engine intercooler temperature, manifold absolute pressure, air flow rate from mass air flow sensor, secondary air status (upstream, downstream, or atmosphere), ambient air temperature, commanded purge valve duty cycle/position, commanded EGR valve duty cycle/position, actual EGR valve duty cycle/position, EGR error between actual and commanded, PTO status (active or not active), redundant absolute throttle position (for electronic throttle or other systems that utilize two or more sensors), absolute pedal position, redundant absolute pedal position, commanded throttle motor position, fuel rate, boost pressure, commanded/target boost pressure, turbo inlet air temperature, fuel rail pressure, commanded fuel rail pressure, DPF inlet pressure, DPF inlet temperature, DPF outlet pressure, DPF outlet temperature, DPF delta pressure, exhaust pressure sensor output, exhaust gas temperature sensor output, injection control pressure, commanded injection control pressure, turbocharger/turbine speed, variable geometry turbo position, commanded variable geometry turbo position, turbocharger compressor inlet temperature, turbocharger compressor inlet pressure, turbocharger turbine inlet temperature, turbocharger turbine outlet temperature, waste gate valve position, and glow plug lamp status.
(2) Oxygen sensor output, air/fuel ratio sensor output, NO
(iii) Freeze frame. (A) For model years 2010 through 2012, “Freeze frame” information required to be stored pursuant to paragraphs (b)(2)(iv), (h)(1)(iv)(D), and (h)(2)(vi) of this section must be made available on demand through the data link connector. For model years 2013 and later, “Freeze frame” information required to be stored pursuant to paragraphs (b)(2)(iv), (h)(1)(iv)(D), and (h)(2)(vi) of this section must be made available on demand through the standardized data link connector in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939-73 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications.
(B) “Freeze frame” conditions must include the DTC that caused the data to be stored along with all of the signals required in paragraphs (k)(4)(ii)(A)(1) and (k)(4)(ii)(B)(1) of this section. Freeze frame conditions must also include all of the signals required on the engine in paragraphs (k)(4)(ii)(A)(2) and (k)(4)(ii)(B)(2) of this section, and paragraph (k)(4)(ii)(C)(1) of this section that are used for diagnostic or control purposes in the specific monitor or emission-critical powertrain control unit that stored the DTC.
(C) Only one frame of data is required to be recorded. For model years 2010 through 2012, the manufacturer may choose to store additional frames provided that at least the required frame can be read by, at a minimum, a manufacturer scan tool. For model years 2013 and later, the manufacturer may choose to store additional frames provided that at least the required frame can be read by a scan tool meeting SAE J1978 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications or designed to communicate with an SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) network.
(iv) Diagnostic trouble codes. (A) For model years 2010 through 2012, For all monitored components and systems, any stored pending, MIL-on, and previous-MIL-on DTCs must be made available through the diagnostic connector. For model years 2013 and later, all monitored components and systems, any stored pending, MIL-on, and previous-MIL-on DTCs must be made available through the diagnostic connector in a standardized format in accordance with SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) or ISO 15765-4:2005(E) (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications; standardized DTCs conforming to the applicable standardized specifications must be employed.
(B) The stored DTC must, to the extent possible, pinpoint the probable cause of the malfunction or potential malfunction. To the extent feasible, the manufacturer must use separate DTCs for every monitor where the monitor and repair procedure or probable cause of the malfunction is different. In general, rationality and functional checks must use different DTCs than the respective circuit integrity checks. Additionally, to the extent possible, input component circuit integrity checks must use different DTCs for distinct malfunctions (e.g., out-of-range low, out-of-range high, open circuit).
(C) The manufacturer must use appropriate standard-defined DTCs whenever possible. With Administrator approval, the manufacturer may use manufacturer-defined DTCs in accordance with the applicable standard’s specifications. To do so, the manufacturer must be able to show a lack of available standard-defined DTCs, uniqueness of the monitor or monitored component, expected future usage of the monitor or component, and estimated usefulness in providing additional diagnostic and repair information to service technicians. Manufacturer-defined DTCs must be used in a consistent manner (i.e., the same DTC shall not be used to represent two different failure modes) across a manufacturer’s entire product line.
(D) For model years 2010 through 2012, a pending or MIL-on DTC (as required in paragraphs (g) through (i) of this section) must be stored and available to, at a minimum, a manufacturer scan tool within 10 seconds after a monitor has determined that a malfunction or potential malfunction has occurred. A permanent DTC must be stored and available to, at a minimum, a manufacturer scan tool no later than the end of an ignition cycle in which the corresponding MIL-on DTC that caused MIL activation has been stored. For model years 2013 and later, a pending or MIL-on DTC (as required in paragraphs (g) through (i) of this section) must be stored and available to an SAE J1978 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) or SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool within 10 seconds after a monitor has determined that a malfunction or potential malfunction has occurred. A permanent DTC must be stored and available to an SAE J1978 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) or SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool no later than the end of an ignition cycle in which the corresponding MIL-on DTC that caused MIL activation has been stored.
(E) For model years 2010 through 2012, pending DTCs for all components and systems (including those monitored continuously and non-continuously) must be made available through the diagnostic connector. For model years 2013 and later, pending DTCs for all components and systems (including those monitored continuously and non-continuously) must be made available through the diagnostic connector in accordance with the applicable standard’s specifications. For all model years, a manufacturer using alternative statistical protocols for MIL activation as allowed in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section must submit the details of their protocol for setting pending DTCs. The protocol must be, overall, equivalent to the requirements of this paragraph (k)(4)(iv)(E) and provide service technicians with a quick and accurate indication of a potential malfunction.
(F) For model years 2010 through 2012, permanent DTC for all components and systems must be made available through the diagnostic connector in a format that distinguishes permanent DTCs from pending DTCs, MIL-on DTCs, and previous-MIL-on DTCs. A MIL-on DTC must be stored as a permanent DTC no later than the end of the ignition cycle and subsequently at all times that the MIL-on DTC is commanding the MIL on. For model years 2013 and later, permanent DTC for all components and systems must be made available through the diagnostic connector in a standardized format that distinguishes permanent DTCs from pending DTCs, MIL-on DTCs, and previous-MIL-on DTCs. A MIL-on DTC must be stored as a permanent DTC no later than the end of the ignition cycle and subsequently at all times that the MIL-on DTC is commanding the MIL on. For all model years, permanent DTCs must be stored in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) and shall not be erasable by any scan tool command or by disconnecting power to the on-board computer. Permanent DTCs must be erasable if the engine control module is reprogrammed and the ready status described in paragraph (k)(4)(i) of this section for all monitored components and systems are set to “not complete.” The OBD system must have the ability to store a minimum of four current MIL-on DTCs as permanent DTCs in NVRAM. If the number of MIL-on DTCs currently commanding activation of the MIL exceeds the maximum number of permanent DTCs that can be stored, the OBD system must store the earliest detected MIL-on DTC as permanent DTC. If additional MIL-on DTCs are stored when the maximum number of permanent DTCs is already stored in NVRAM, the OBD system shall not replace any existing permanent DTC with the additional MIL-on DTCs.
(v) Test results. (A) For model years 2010 through 2012 and except as provided for in paragraph (k)(4)(v)(G) of this section, for all monitored components and systems identified in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section, results of the most recent monitoring of the components and systems and the test limits established for monitoring the respective components and systems must be stored and available through the data link. For model years 2013 and later and except as provided for in paragraph (k)(4)(v)(G) of this section, for all monitored components and systems identified in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section, results of the most recent monitoring of the components and systems and the test limits established for monitoring the respective components and systems must be stored and available through the data link in accordance with the standardized format specified in SAE J1979 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) for engines using the ISO 15765-4:2005(E) (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) protocol or SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section).
(B) The test results must be reported such that properly functioning components and systems (e.g., “passing” systems) do not store test values outside of the established test limits. Test limits must include both minimum and maximum acceptable values and must be defined so that a test result equal to either test limit is a “passing” value, not a “failing” value.
(C) For model years 2013 and later, the test results must be standardized such that the name of the monitored component (e.g., catalyst bank 1) can be identified by a generic scan tool and the test results and limits can be scaled and reported by a generic scan tool with the appropriate engineering units.
(D) The test results must be stored until updated by a more recent valid test result or the DTC memory of the OBD system computer is cleared. Upon DTC memory being cleared, test results reported for monitors that have not yet completed with valid test results since the last time the fault memory was cleared must report values of zero for the test result and test limits.
(E) All test results and test limits must always be reported and the test results must be stored until updated by a more recent valid test result or the DTC memory of the OBD system computer is cleared.
(F) The OBD system must store and report unique test results for each separate monitor.
(G) The requirements of this paragraph (k)(4)(v) do not apply to continuous fuel system monitoring, cold start emission reduction strategy monitoring, and continuous circuit monitoring.
(vi) Software calibration identification (CAL ID). On all engines, a single software calibration identification number (CAL ID) for each monitor or emission critical control unit(s) must be made available through, for model years 2010 through 2012, the data link connector or, for model years 2013 and later, the standardized data link connector in accordance with the SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications. A unique CAL ID must be used for every emission-related calibration and/or software set having at least one bit of different data from any other emission-related calibration and/or software set. Control units coded with multiple emission or diagnostic calibrations and/or software sets must indicate a unique CAL ID for each variant in a manner that enables an off-board device to determine which variant is being used by the engine. Control units that use a strategy that will result in MIL activation if the incorrect variant is used (e.g., control units that contain variants for manual and automatic transmissions but will activate the MIL if the selected variant does not match the type of transmission mated to the engine) are not required to use unique CAL IDs. Manufacturers may request Administrator approval to respond with more than one CAL ID per diagnostic or emission critical control unit. Administrator approval of the request shall be based on the method used by the manufacturer to ensure each control unit will respond to a scan tool with the CAL IDs in order of highest to lowest priority with regards to areas of the software most critical to emission and OBD system performance.
(vii) Software calibration verification number (CVN). (A) All engines must use an algorithm to calculate a single calibration verification number (CVN) that verifies the on-board computer software integrity for each monitor or emission critical control unit that is electronically reprogrammable. The CVN must be made available through, for model years 2010 through 2012, the data link connector or, for model years 2013 and later, the standardized data link connector in accordance with the SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications. The CVN must indicate whether the emission-related software and/or calibration data are valid and applicable for the given vehicle and CAL ID. For systems having more than one CAL ID as allowed under paragraph (k)(4)(vi) of this section, one CVN must be made available for each CAL ID and must be output to a scan tool in the same order as the corresponding CAL IDs. For 2010 through 2012, manufacturers may use a default value for the CVN if their emissions critical powertrain control modules are not programmable in the field. For all years, manufacturers may use a default value for the CVN if their emissions critical powertrain control modules are one-time programmable or masked read-only memory. Any default CVN shall be 00000000 for systems designed in accordance with the SAE J1979 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications, and FFFFFFFFh for systems designed in accordance with the SAE J1939 (as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications.
(B) The CVN algorithm used to calculate the CVN must be of sufficient complexity that the same CVN is difficult to achieve with modified calibration values.
(C) The CVN must be calculated at least once per ignition cycle and stored until the CVN is subsequently updated. Except for immediately after a reprogramming event or a non-volatile memory clear or for the first 30 seconds of engine operation after a volatile memory clear or battery disconnect, the stored value must be made available through, for model years 2010 through 2012, the data link connector to, at a minimum, a manufacturer scan tool or, for model years 2013 and later, the data link connector to a generic scan tool in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications. For model years 2010 through 2012, the stored CVN value shall not be erased when DTC memory is erased or during normal vehicle shut down (i.e., key-off/engine-off). For model years 2013 and later, the stored CVN value shall not be erased when DTC memory is erased by a generic scan tool in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications or during normal vehicle shut down (i.e., key-off/engine-off).
(D) For model years 2013 and later, the CVN and CAL ID combination information must be available for all engines/vehicles in a standardized electronic format that allows for off-board verification that the CVN is valid and appropriate for a specific vehicle and CAL ID.
(viii) Vehicle identification number (VIN). (A) For model years 2010 through 2012, all vehicles must have the vehicle identification number (VIN) available through the data link connector to, at a minimum, a manufacturer scan tool Only one electronic control unit per vehicle may report the VIN to a scan tool. For model years 2013 and later, all vehicles must have the vehicle identification number (VIN) available in a standardized format through the standardized data link connector in accordance with SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications. Only one electronic control unit per vehicle may report the VIN to an SAE J1978 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) scan tool.
(B) If the VIN is reprogrammable, all emission-related diagnostic information identified in paragraph (k)(4)(ix)(A) of this section must be erased in conjunction with reprogramming of the VIN.
(ix) Erasure of diagnostic information. (A) For purposes of this paragraph (k)(4)(ix), “emission-related diagnostic information” includes all of the following: ready status as required by paragraph (k)(4)(i) of this section; data stream information as required by paragraph (k)(4)(ii) of this section including the number of stored MIL-on DTCs, distance traveled while MIL activated, number of warm-up cycles since DTC memory last erased, and distance traveled since DTC memory last erased; freeze frame information as required by paragraph (k)(4)(iii) of this section; pending, MIL-on, and previous-MIL-on DTCs as required by paragraph (k)(4)(iv) of this section; and, test results as required by paragraph (k)(4)(v) of this section.
(B) For all engines, the emission-related diagnostic information must be erased if commanded by any scan tool and may be erased if the power to the on-board computer is disconnected. If any of the emission-related diagnostic information is commanded to be erased by any scan tool, all emission-related diagnostic information must be erased from all diagnostic or emission critical control units. The OBD system shall not allow a scan tool to erase a subset of the emission-related diagnostic information (e.g., the OBD system shall not allow a scan tool to erase only one of three stored DTCs or only information from one control unit without erasing information from the other control unit(s)).
(5) In-use performance ratio tracking requirements. (i) For each monitor required in paragraphs (g) through (i) of this section to separately report an in-use performance ratio, manufacturers must implement software algorithms to, for model years 2010 through 2012, report a numerator and denominator or, for model years 2013 and later, report a numerator and denominator in the standardized format specified in this paragraph (k)(5) in accordance with the SAE J1979 or SAE J1939 (both as specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section) specifications.
(ii) For the numerator, denominator, general denominator, and ignition cycle counters required by paragraph (e) of this section, the following numerical value specifications apply:
(A) Each number shall have a minimum value of zero and a maximum value of 65,535 with a resolution of one.
(B) Each number shall be reset to zero only when a non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) reset occurs (e.g., reprogramming event) or, if the numbers are stored in keep-alive memory (KAM), when KAM is lost due to an interruption in electrical power to the control unit (e.g., battery disconnect). Numbers shall not be reset to zero under any other circumstances including when a scan tool command to clear DTCs or reset KAM is received.
(C) To avoid overflow problems, if either the numerator or denominator for a specific component reaches the maximum value of 65,535 ±2, both numbers shall be divided by two before either is incremented again.
(D) To avoid overflow problems, if the ignition cycle counter reaches the maximum value of 65,535 ±2, the ignition cycle counter shall rollover and increment to zero on the next ignition cycle.
(E) To avoid overflow problems, if the general denominator reaches the maximum value of 65,535 ±2, the general denominator shall rollover and increment to zero on the next drive cycle that meets the general denominator definition.
(F) If a vehicle is not equipped with a component (e.g., oxygen sensor bank 2, secondary air system), the corresponding numerator and denominator for that specific component shall always be reported as zero.
(iii) For the ratio required by paragraph (e) of this section, the following numerical value specifications apply:
(A) The ratio shall have a minimum value of zero and a maximum value of 7.